Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Darkness.

Peace.

There is nothing but the desire to finally rest. There is no pain, no fear, just the sort of exhaustion that can be felt all the way into your soul. Sleep at last.

Then.

Blinding light. The feeling of everything all at once. Sight. Sound. Smell. Touch. Taste. The painful pounding of a heart when it’s supposed to be still. The overwhelming urge to claw back to the peacefulness of the darkness, but something is forcing the soul back into the body. The need to breathe at odds with the desire not to.

After a few minutes, everything settles.

Gold eyes fully open and take in the room around them. A shaky hand runs over their face, touching an all to familiar scar. Confusion fills his mind for a brief moment before clarity hits.

Ah.

I died.

Again.

I hate this part. Well, I hate a lot of parts, but this is definitely towards the top of the list of things I hate about coming back.

With a sigh, Zuko got out of bed to start the day. Again.

Well, I can confidently say that we are NOT docking in the nearest port. Being crushed with rocks doesn’t get more enjoyable the more times you experience it, though it is better than being eaten alive.

With a scowl and a few choice words, Zuko leaves his room making sure he has his special vial of liquid with him just in case.

Another day, another death. I need to find the Avatar.

I need him to help me finally die.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age six)

Zuko sat in the palace garden feeding the turtleducks. Normally his mother would be with him, but she was busy elsewhere. He could have waited until later to feed them so that he and his mother could do it together, but he didn’t want the turtleducklings to be hungry.

It was a relatively nice day by Fire Nation standards; it wasn’t too hot or too humid and there was a nice breeze that made the midday sun bearable. The tree next to the pond kept him shaded from most of the sun’s heat. He could hear the sounds of the turtleducks quacking. He could smell the fire lilies that had started to bloom. He could feel the breeze ruffling his hair. Everything was so peaceful.

Just when the peacefulness was about to lull him to sleep, he heard the sound of small running feet towards him.

“Zuzu!”

From across the garden Zuko could see Azula running towards him with a massive smile. With a groan he replied, “What?” He hated that nickname, but he knew if he complained then she would just use it more. Azula came to a stop in front of him practically vibrating with excitement. “Guess what!”

“What?”

“I can start learning more advanced firebending sets!”

Zuko could feel a small pit grow in his stomach. Even though Azula was two years younger than him, she was significantly more advanced at firebending. In fact, he can barely make a small flame even with all of his training. His mother reassured him that people learn and develop at different speeds and not to worry. Their father, on the other hand, was not pleased. The more Azula advanced, the more their father would criticize Zuko. It’s getting to the point where Ozai barely acknowledges him outside of necessity. Apart of Zuko wanted to tell Azula to go away, but he was really curious about what the more advanced bending sets looked like.

“Can you show me?”

Azula beamed and got into the starting bending stance.

At first, she seemed to go through the basics. Gradually working her way up to the more advanced forms. Zuko sat by the pond watching her every move entranced. It almost looked like Azula was dancing with the flames rather than just summoning them to her will. Every small kick would summon a small, controlled arch of fire. Every punch would send a ball of flames away from her that would fade a few feet away. When Azula was finished with her demonstration, Zuko was stunned.

“That was amazing! Can you do any more moves?”

Azula seemed to think it over for a moment and, had Zuko paid closer attention, he would have seen her hesitate.

“There’s this one set my trainer is teaching me that’s pretty hard.”

“Can you show me?”

For a brief moment, a look of uncertainty crossed Azula’s face. Before Zuko could question her, Azula started to go through the set. Her movements were just as fluid as she was with the previous forms. Until…

Until she did a running jump while summoning flames.

She landed wrong and didn’t extinguish the flames in time.

When she landed, instead of shooting her flames harmlessly into the air…

It went straight for Zuko.

It all happened so fast.

He didn’t have time to move.

One moment he was watching his sister show off, the next…

Burning agony.

Everywhere.

He could hear screaming.

He couldn’t think past the white-hot agony that covered his stomach.

The smell of burnt flesh filled his nose.

He couldn’t breathe.

His stomach hurt.

He looked down.

His shirt over his stomach was still on fire.

He could hear crying.

Azula was using her hands to try to put the fire out.

Her hands are burning.

His stomach looked wrong.

It was charred black.

The smell burn flesh got stronger.

He could see strange yellowish-green fluid and blood oozing from the wound.

Azula was screaming.

Footsteps were getting closer.

He kept staring at the burn.

I can see stuff moving inside of me.

Move voices filled his ears.

Frantic hands grabbed at him.

His head fell to the side.

Azula was next to him.

Her hands were red.

She’s crying.

“Don…cry…”

It was hard to talk.

Everything felt so cold now.

He was shaking.

Azula was looking at him, “I’m sorry! I’m sorry!”

Someone else was talking to him.

His head felt foggy.

He was so tired.

“Izz…okay…don…cry…”

Darkness.

Then.

He woke up.

He was in his bed.

Everything felt so hazy. Nothing felt real.

What happened? I was in the garden then…

Shakily, he got out of bed and wobbled all the way to his bedroom door. Everything felt so off balance.

Maybe I was asleep for a long time…

I remember I was in the garden when…Azula showed up…

When he opened the door, his mother was already standing there. With a look of surprise she said, “Glad to see you’re up so early. I was about to tell the guards to give you a message that I’m going to be a bit busy today, so we’re going to have to feed the turtleducks later.”

Huh? She’s busy today too?

I was in the garden when Azula showed up and…she showed me her new firebending sets.

His mother must have noticed his confusion. With a soft smile and a chuckle, “You must still be waking up. Come. Let’s have breakfast together.”

I remember.

I died.

Zuko didn’t move. His mother’s face became concerned, “Zuko, what’s wrong?”

He couldn’t speak. Everything felt so overwhelming and muted at the same time.

“Zuko?”

Confused and scared, Zuko burst into tears.  Ursa immediately pulled him into her arms, “Zuko! What’s wrong? What happened?” Nothing felt real. Even his mother’s embrace felt distant.

He tried to hold on tighter, but it felt like his body wasn’t working.

Then everything seemed to come back into focus.

His mother pulled away from him to look him and eyes asked him again, “Zuko, sweetheart, what happened?”

Honestly, Zuko didn’t know. Nothing about what happened made any sense. There was only one thing that kept repeating in his mind, “I died.” His mother looked at him even more confused, “Zuko what are you talking about?” He didn’t know how to explain it, the whole event seemed so vivid yet so distant at the same time.

“I died in the garden, and I woke up in my bed.”

His mother still looked confused for a moment, then something seemed to click in her head. “Oh sweetheart, it was just a bad dream. We were in the garden together yesterday and nothing bad happened I promise. Maybe you’ve been reading too many scary stories before bed.”

She took out a handkerchief out of her sleeve and wiped the remaining tears away from his face. “There we go, no need to fret. Everything’s okay sweetheart.” She placed a kiss on his forehead, then looked conflicted. “I still have to attend to somethings today, but when I’m done we can go feed the turtleducks. Do you think you’ll be okay until then?”

Maybe it was just a bad dream. There’s no way I died and mom lie to me.

“I’ll be okay.”

She looked him over once more before giving him another kiss on the head. “Maybe you can tell me more about this bad dream later. It might help you feel better.” With a final hug, she walked away.

Zuko hesitated for a moment before going back into his room.

It was just a bad dream.

It wasn’t real.

As he took off his night clothes, he looked down.

There on his stomach is a burn scar.

This doesn’t make sense.

Mom said nothing bad happened yesterday.

Zuko could hear his heart hammering in his ears.

He could feel the world tilting underneath his feet.

There has to be some reason for this. Maybe I got this scar some other way and I don’t remember it.

With shaking hands, Zuko got dressed.

With a rolling stomach, he ate breakfast.

With a foggy mind, Zuko went to the garden.

He sat underneath the tree next to the turtleduck pond.

He felt the breeze gently ruffle his hair, the grass under his fingers, the tree bark against his back.

He could smell the blooming fire lilies, the moss in the pond, the musk of burning incense.

He could see the turtleducks swimming in lazy circles, the branch of the tree swaying in the breeze, the palace guards making their rounds.

He could hear the wooden wind chimes clacking against each other, the quacking of the turtleducks, and…

The sound of small running feet heading towards him.

It felt like moving a mountain just to turn to face to source of the noise.

Azula.

“Zuzu!”

She was smiling.

She looked perfectly fine.

She ran up to him, “Guess what!”

Her hands aren’t burned.

This doesn’t make sense.

He just stared at her.

She began to pout, “Dumb dumb! Wake up!”

He continued to look at her.

It took a moment for his mind to work through the fog and panic.

With a voice just above a whisper he asked, “What?”

She looked at him with a pinched expression before asking, “What is wrong with you?”

“Nothing. I didn’t sleep well.”

Azula continued to stare at him before sighing dramatically. She plopped on the ground next to him. “I learned more advanced firebending sets today. I was going to show you, but you’re being weird.”

“Didn’t you move on to more advanced firebending sets yesterday?”

She looked at him confused. “I just started the new sets today. Did you hit your head or something?”

What’s going on?

He shook his head and said, “I had a weird dream.”

She studied him a little longer before declaring, “Well, it wasn’t real dummy. Do you want to see what I learned or not?”

 He stared at her for a little bit. He remembered his dream.

The burning.

The screaming.

He mentally shook off the images.

“Sure.”

She smiled and got up. She started going through the basic forms.

Just like before…

He tried to ignore the memory.

She looked just as graceful as always while bending.

Once Azula finished going through the basics, she moved on to the most recent forms.

Just like before.

He watched her intently.

Once she finished, she turned to look at him. “Well?”

He stared at her and forced a smile.

I complimented her last time.

“That was amazing.”

She smiled brightly.

I asked if she could do any more moves.

“Can you do any more moves?”

Azula hesitated for a brief moment, “There’s this one move my trainer is teaching me that’s pretty hard.”

She hesitated. She knows she can’t do it yet.

There’s only one way to prove that what happened yesterday(?) wasn’t a dream.

“Can you show me?”

Azula smiled brightly and got into the starting position. As she went through the stances, Zuko watched her closely. He could see now how hard she was concentrating on each move. He could see how each move wasn’t as fluid as she was with the previous sets. Her movements became more uncertain as she built up to the finale pose. Then she took a running leap, flames lit in both hands.

There.

Zuko spots the moment everything went wrong last time. Azula was about to land on a rock, and she’s so stiff with uncertainty that it will throw her off balance. As soon as Azula started to fall over, Zuko rolled out of the way.

Where he was sitting is now charred black.

Azula raised her head from the ground and looked at Zuko then at the charred ground. Before she could say anything, a voice called out, “What is going on here?”

Both children turned to see their mother rushing to them. She looked at Azula, the charred ground, and then at Zuko. “Azula, what happened here?” Azula’s face got red and looked at the ground, but she didn’t say anything. Zuko watched her for a moment before saying, “It was an accident. I asked Azula to show me what she’s been learning from her trainer. She tripped and accidentally burnt the ground where I was sitting. Nothing bad happened.”

Ursa gave Zuko a look that he couldn’t identify. It almost looked scared and guilty. Before he could say anything, his mother sighed before turning to Azula, “Azula, you need to be more careful. How would you feel if Zuko got hurt?”

Azula didn’t say anything.

Zuko could hear the distant screams and pleas of his sister.

Ursa looked over her children one more time, “Come along, it’s time for lunch. I think there’s been enough excitement here for now.”

Later that day, Zuko and his mother sat at the pond feeding the turtleducks. If he kept his eyes on the turtleducks, then he can pretend that the char mark next to him doesn’t exist. Ursa sat quietly next to him. She would glance at him from time to time but stayed quiet just long enough for him to relax.

“Zuko, why don’t you tell me about that bad dream you had last night.”

He freezes for a moment. Uncertainty filled his features and voice as he kept staring at the pond, “I don’t really remember it.”

“You said you died in the garden.”

He flinched at the reminder, but then shrugged, “I think I dreamed of an Earth Kingdom soldier breaking into the garden and burying me under rubble.” She studied him closely, but he was still focusing on the turtleducks. After a tense moment, she sighed before pulling him into a hug.

“Zuko, you are safe here. I love you so much, and I will always protect you. Do you understand?” She moved his face to make him look her in the eyes. She still looked worried, but she also seemed to be hoping he believed her.

“I know mom. I love you too.”

Her face was still drawn with worry, but she managed to put on a sad smile, “If anything is bothering you, please talk to me. I will always listen.” With that, she gave one final squeeze before releasing him. He didn’t know what to say, nothing made sense anymore. They continued to feed and watch the turtleducks in silence until it was time for dinner.

That night as he got ready for bed, he stood in front of his mirror inspecting the burn scar on his abdomen. It was light pink in color around the edges and a darker pink towards the center, like it had happened years ago instead of yesterday (today?). The scar itself was about three inches in diameter right above his belly button. The skin was slightly raised and felt almost like silk to the touch. Feeling it was odd, he knew he was touching it, but the sensation was muted. Almost like that area of skin was numb. He stared at it for what seemed like hours, trying to understand what he was seeing.

It wasn’t a dream.

But if it wasn’t a dream, what happened?

What am I?

(Present day)

Zuko stood on the deck of his ship staring out into the horizon. His uncle was playing some sort of game while drinking tea next to him. Zuko could feel it in the air that something important was about to happen.

“Nephew, why don’t you join me for a nice cup of tea?”

Before Zuko could respond, a beam of light shot into the sky disturbing the clouds. In the distance, seals could be heard howling. He had never seen anything like it before.

Finally.

Zuko turned to his uncle, “Did you see that uncle?” Without even looking up from his game his uncle responded, “It was probably the southern lights. They’re usually visible this time of year.” Scowling, Zuko responded, “That wasn’t the southern lights. It has to be the Avatar.” His uncle sighed, “Prince Zuko we have been through this before. I don’t want you to get your hopes up again and end up being disappointed.” Turning back into the direction of the light that had faded by now, Zuko snarled, “I know it’s the Avatar. Helm’s man, take us to the light!”

With a lurch, the ship turned in the direction the light came from. In the background, Zuko could hear his uncle sigh again, but the old man kept whatever he was thinking to himself. As the ship slowly moved through the ice, Zuko began to plan how he was going to approach the Avatar.

It shouldn’t be too hard to convince the old airbender to kill me. I’m the prince of the nation that destroyed his people after all. Well, banished prince, but that’s a minor detail. Whatever is going on with me, the Avatar will notice and see that it needs to be fixed.

As he planned for this encounter, he felt oddly happy. He knew that most people don’t happily look forward death, but most people haven’t experienced half the things he has. Besides, as far as he was concerned, he was already dead. He just didn’t seem to stay dead.

The sky began to darken, but Zuko still stood on the deck of his ship looking in the direction the light had come from. His uncle came outside behind him. With an exaggerated yawn and stretching his arms out wide, his uncle said, “It’s getting late, time to go to bed.” Zuko didn’t move. His uncle sighed, “Prince Zuko, a man needs his rest.”

Trust me uncle, all I want to do is find rest.

“I need to find the Avatar.” With one last sigh, Iroh went back below deck.

Uncle won’t understand. The less he knows about my true intentions, the better. He will only try to stop me.

The next day, Zuko was scanning the horizon with his spyglass. In the background he could hear the crew muttering about the cold and his uncle offering them tea to warm them up. The cold was biting at Zuko’s fingertips, but he didn’t dare tear his eyes away from the horizon.

There.

In the distance, he saw a flare light up the sky. Beneath it was an old, wrecked Fire Nation ship that’s been sitting there for spirits knows how long. As Zuko inspected the ship through his spyglass, he saw two figures exit through the top of the ship. He watched intently as one figure clearly in yellow picked up the other figure wearing blue before making a series of large jumps to ice below.

“Where are you staying…?” Zuko panned the spyglass around until…

There.

A small village came into view.

“Time to meet my destiny.”

It’s a good day to die.

Zuko quirked his lips briefly into a small smile before heading below deck to prepare to enter the Water Tribe village. A couple of crew members fastened his armor but, just before they handed him his helmet, Zuko waved them off.

I doubt I’ll need it, and I’m trying to make this as easy as possible.

The crew members exchanged a look, but didn’t say anything. Zuko made his way to the gangplank and waited for the ship to come to a stop. He could feel and hear the impact of ice against the hull, but the ship continued forward with no issues. Soon the ship came to a stop. Zuko listened to the crew members confirming that it was safe to lower the gangplank and get into position. The gears of the ship grinded and groaned as the plank lowered onto the snow.

Zuko took one last deep breath to steel himself before disembarking. As he came down, a teenage boy charged at him with a club. The teen’s form was awful, the way he moved made it clear that he had never really seen or participated in combat before. Zuko really had no desire to hurt him, so he just knocked the him off the walkway. With a shout, the boy landed headfirst into a pile of snow.

Once Zuko reached the ground, he inspected the villagers.

Women and children. Where are all the men?

Is the Avatar a woman? It doesn’t matter either way.

Well, here goes nothing.

“I know the Avatar is here. I saw someone airbending off that old Fire Navy ship, and last time I checked airbenders don’t live in the poles.” Silence. Before he could say anything else, he heard a yell behind him. The boy he knocked over earlier was charging at him again with a spear this time.

You’ve got to be kidding me.

With little effort, Zuko broke the spear into pieces and knocked the boy over again. The boy looked at Zuko with hate filled eyes, a refusal to backdown could easily be seen in how he held himself. Before Zuko could say anything, the boy threw something at him. It was easy enough to dodge.

Someone really left this guy to protect the village?

Just as Zuko was about to say something, he heard a loud THAWK, and his head was knocked forward violently.

Confusion.

Did something hit me?

Yelling seemed to surround him.

What’s going on?

Everything went dark for a second.

He’s on his knees now.

The snow was melting into the creases of his armor.

Everything was hazy around the edges of his vision.

He could feel something wet and warm on the back of his neck.

With shaky hands, he reached around and felt the back of his head. He brought his hand back in front of him.

Blood.

A lot of blood.

Why is my head bleeding?

He could feel himself swaying even as he knelt.

The yelling around him seemed distant.

Someone was calling out for him.

He reached around to the back of his head again and tried to find the source of the bleeding.

There was something lodged in the back of his head.

Oh.

I’m dying.

Someone was grabbing him.

They were pressing on his wound to try to stop the bleeding.

Pain spiked as whoever was touching him pressed on the wound, but it felt far away.

He couldn’t talk.

Darkness was creeping into his vision.

He couldn’t feel his limbs.

At some point he had fallen onto his side.

Someone was holding him.

He couldn’t feel the snow.

Sound faded away.

Darkness.

With a sudden jolt, Zuko woke up in his bed.

Well, that could’ve been worse I guess.

 At least they aren’t cannibals.

It’s a low bar, but it’s something.

He grabbed a small mirror and went into his private washroom. Once inside, he faced away from the large mirror and looked into the smaller one to inspect the back of his head. He could see a thin scar about 5 inches long on the crown of his skull.

At least my phoenix tail covers part of it, and my uncle is too short to see the rest of it. The crew won’t notice or at least won’t say anything.

With a grumble, Zuko started the day. Again. He grabbed his spyglass and went up to the deck. Since he already knew where the Avatar was going to be, he decided to plan a new approach.

I’m wearing my helmet this time.

Once Zuko saw the airbender exit the abandoned Fire Navy ship with their Water Tribe companion, he went below deck to start preparing to enter the village. Again. Just as the crew members finished assisting with his armor, he reached out for his helmet.

Just like before, Zuko waited for the gangplank to lower, knocked the Water Tribe teen over, and stood before the villagers. Just like before, the teen charged at him with a spear that Zuko broke. This time Zuko was prepared for the teen to throw the weapon and dodged when he knew the weapon was returning. However, instead of the weapon sailing harmlessly past him when it returned…

Agony.

His neck.

The pain and panic was instantaneous.

Blood gushed everywhere.

The snow his feet was now deep crimson.

He grabbed his neck instinctively to try to stop the bleeding.

It won’t change anything.

He fell to his knees.

The Water Tribe teen was looking at him.

Victorious.

Then fear.

Zuko’s guards started to retaliate.

Zuko had fallen onto his side.

Cold numbness creeped up his limbs.

He lost his grip on the wound.

Shouting.

Screaming.

Then darkness.

With a violent jolt Zuko woke up in his bedroom aboard his ship.

Ok, so don’t dodge the weapon that’s trying to cleave your head open like a melon. Got it. Uncle always says that everyday is a learning experience.

Zuko stumbled out of bed into his washroom. In the mirror he could see a scar on the left side of his neck. It was thicker than the one on his head, but it was smaller at about four inches.

At least my uniform has a high neckline.

Instead of heading up to the deck, Zuko stayed in his room thinking.

Maybe I need to wait a little longer before going into the village.

With a new plan, Zuko took his time going up to the deck. By the time he was looking through his spyglass, he knew the Avatar had already left the shipwreck. Still, Zuko made a show of knowing where the Avatar was hiding out and got ready like he did before. He did the same motions when confronted by the teen boy, only this time he didn’t dodge the weapon.

I guess a headache is better than having it embedded into my skull.

Once the teen had finally run out of weapons, Zuko asked again, “Where is the airbender? Where is the Avatar?” After a brief silence a teenage girl about Azula’s age said, “You think he’s the Avatar?” She looked shocked and a little confused, and Zuko wasn’t much better.

Do these people really not know that the airbender is the Avatar?

The teen boy piped in, “There’s no way he’s the Avatar. The Avatar is just a myth!”

They can’t be serious.

With a groan Zuko asked, “Where is he?”

The girl got a look of defiance, but the teen boy casually said, “He’s gone. We sent him away.”

What.

“You…you sent the Avatar away…?”

The boy huffed again, “Geez are all firebenders this dumb? There’s no such thing as the Avatar.”

I…what?

The girl looked ready to fight him, but before she could say anything Zuko asked, “Where did you send him? Which way did he go?”

The boy continued his faux look of casualness and said, “Don’t know, don’t care as long as he isn’t here.” Zuko, for probably the first time in his life, was at a complete loss for words. He looked around the frozen environment and a pit started to form in his stomach.

There’s no way an elderly person could survive out there very long exposed to this weather without resources. If I scour the area, it could take days, and the Avatar could die before I find him.

On the other hand, I could reset the stage and know exactly where he is…

With a deep annoyed sigh, Zuko pulled out a small vial from his tunic. Everyone watched him curiously as he removed the cork and drank the liquid with a grimace on his face. The two Water Tribe teens shared a look of confusion before looking back at Zuko. The Fire Nation guards looked to each other and then at him in equal amounts of confusion.

Zuko took a deep breath and looked at the Water Tribe teens, “What are your names?” They looked even more confused. The boy asked, “Why?” With a slightly put upon sigh Zuko said, “I have a sinking suspicion that I’m going to see a lot of you two, so I might as well know what your names are.” They still looked confused, but the girl said, “My name is Katara and that’s my brother Sokka.”

Zuko nodded his head in acknowledgement but swayed forward with the movement.

It’s starting.

Everyone looked at him in startled confusion.

He fell to his knees.

His arms and legs were numb.

The teen, Sokka, was the closest person to him.

“What did you do?”

With effort, Zuko replied, “I’m resetting the stage of course.”

Before Sokka could question him further, everything faded to black.

Zuko sat up violently as he woke up.

I hate dying multiple times in the same day. It makes me feel like I’m losing what’s left of my mind.

With effort, Zuko sat on the side of his bed. He took several deep breaths to calm down and to give him time to think.

Well, now I know I can’t wait too long, or the Avatar will be gone.

Great.

With one final deep breath, Zuko got off his bed and headed to the deck.

At least poison doesn’t leave a scar.

Just before he reached the deck, Zuko had another idea.

What if I get there sooner? Maybe if I time it right, I’ll get there before the Avatar is sent away.

With a (hopefully) good plan, Zuko went to the helm. There, he saw his uncle playing Pai Sho with a crew member. The helm’s man was dutifully navigating through the ice towards the direction Zuko indicated yesterday.

“Helm’s man, head to that village as fast as possible.” Zuko pointed in the general direction of where he knew the village was. His uncle looked up at him in mild confusion, “Nephew, if you believe the Avatar is there, he will still be there regardless of our speed. Besides, these waters are dangerous. The ice around here is notorious for sinking ships.” Zuko scowled, “The Avatar has been on the run for one hundred years, the only way they could’ve avoided capture for so long is to keep moving. If we take too long the Avatar might move on to the next safe haven (or be kicked out) before we land.” He gave the helm’s man a pointed look. The man reluctantly bowed to him before urging the ship to go faster. With a satisfied nod, Zuko went to the deck.

As soon as he stepped out, he felt the ship violently lurched to one side accompanied by the sound of shrieking metal. The sound of yelling came from below deck. Before Zuko could question what was going on, Jee could be heard yelling, “We’re taking on water! Seal the doors!” Zuko could hear crew members closing and locking the doors leading to the engine room. Faintly, Zuko could hear the banging and yelling of the unfortunate crew members trapped behind the doors. The ship was sinking.

There were life rafts of course, but Fire Nation ships rarely came into these waters. In all likelihood, even if they survived the ship sinking, they’d probably die of dehydration or exposure.

That’d take too long.

Time to reset the stage. Again.

With an annoyed groan, Zuko pulled out the vial of poison and downed it. His uncle saw him just as he finished the vial.

“Zuko, what was that?” His uncle sounded curious, but Zuko could also hear the dread in his voice. Iroh wasn’t stupid, he knew that their chances of survival were slim to none. Zuko just smiled, “Don’t worry uncle, everything will be fine in a few moments.” Iroh did not look comforted. He grabbed him and Zuko started to collapse.

Zuko could see tears in his uncle’s eyes.

He hated it when his uncle cried.

He hated dying in front of his uncle.

Everything went dark as he was held by his uncle.

With a strangled scream, Zuko woke up.

Ok, I’ll admit that was partially my fault but only partially. I’ll accept no more than 60% of the blame. It’s not like I was actually steering the ship.

Zuko could feel himself shaking with all the adrenaline coursing through his body. Everything felt too slow and too fast at the same time. He couldn’t stand it and got up to pace.

“Okay, what have we learned so far? Well number one, wear a helmet to keep your head from being split open. Number two, don’t dodge said head splitting weapon when it comes back. Number three, don’t take your time because apparently no one knows that the airbender is the Avatar. Number four, don’t go full speed through the ice flow.”

He drummed his fingers against his arms as he paced back and forth like a caged animal. His face scrunched in frustration, “I need a new plan that hopefully gets me what I want.” Thinking through the events that are about to unfold, he got an idea.

“What if I actually just try to capture the Avatar? Maybe the Avatar didn’t get far and will come back if he sees me at the village. I mean, what’s the worst that can happen? If it gets bad, I’ll just reset and if it works…that will be a future me problem to solve.” With a new plan, Zuko redid all the things he did before that got him into the village. Putting on his armor (and helmet), going down the gangplank, knocking Sokka off the gangplank, breaking Sokka’s spear, dodging then not dodging the head splitter, and now he waited.

In the distance he could hear something moving quickly toward him. Before he could turn around to see what it was, Zuko found himself flung into the air and landing face first in the snow.

I’m not grievously injured, so we’re already doing better.

Zuko got up, preparing himself to face one of the most, if not the most, powerful person alive.

What.

The Avatar is…a kid?

“All these years meditating, training, mentally preparing myself for this and you’re just a child!” Bitterness filled his voice. The airbender looked at him, confused, and said, “And you’re just a teenager.” Zuko shot a blast of fire at him.

I need to buy time. It’s one thing to ask a one-hundred-year-old powerful being to kill you, it’s another to ask a child to do it.

As he was thinking, he was shooting what he considered pretty weak fire blasts at the Avatar. Something to keep him busy but wouldn’t really hurt anyone. At least not seriously. It would be an understatement to say that Zuko was surprised when the Avatar said, “If I go with you, will you leave these people alone?” He was so caught off guard that all he could do was nod.

The Avatar was led onto his ship as he called out some words of comfort to Katara.

Okay, now what?

Zuko didn’t really know. Ozai banished him with the mission of bringing back the Avatar as a prerequisite for returning home, but Zuko didn’t really have any desire to capture the Avatar. Let alone return to the Fire Nation. Dead people can’t sit on the throne and figured that probably disqualified him. All of Zuko’s plans were centered around finding the Avatar so that he could finally stay dead, but that whole plan revolved around the Avatar being an adult.

I need time.

They were now on the deck of his ship. The Avatar was glaring at him as Zuko held onto the Avatar’s staff. Zuko sighed and said, “Take him below. We’re going home.” Without another word, Zuko turned to go to his room. A hand landed on his shoulder just before he left, “Nephew, are you feeling well?”

“Never better, we’re going home. Father will be proud, and the Fire Nation’s victory is assured.” The words felt like ash on his tongue. If his uncle noticed, he didn’t say anything. Zuko continued to his room.

Now to figure out what I’m going to do.

As soon as he finished that thought, the call went out that the Avatar had escaped and was running loose.

Great.

Perfect.

Fantastic.

Zuko glanced over and saw the Avatar’s staff.

I’m willing to bet uncle’s entire tea pot collection that he’s going to come here for his staff.

Zuko hid against the wall in a way that when the door opened, you wouldn’t be able to see him. After a few moments, the door flung open and the cry, “My staff!” greeted him. As the Avatar picked up his staff, Zuko closed the door.

Now what? I still don’t know what to do about the whole “Avatar being a kid” thing.

So Zuko stalled the best way he knew how, by throwing some fire. The Avatar sped around his room, and Zuko was willing to admit that the kid was good at dodging. Annoyingly good at dodging even. Zuko is many things but levelheaded wasn’t one of them, and he quickly found himself losing his temper. Fire was lighting up his room as he tried to trip up the kid, but the Avatar always managed to get away. The kid even tied him up with a tapestry! Just as Zuko was about to reengage with the kid, the Avatar used airbending to lift Zuko’s mattress and smash Zuko against the wall and then the ceiling. With Zuko down, the Avatar raced out of the room.

That little…

If I was actually trying to hurt him, I’d be murderous right now.

Zuko got to his feet and raced up to the helm. Just as he reached the top, he saw the Avatar taking off into the air on his glider. Without a second thought, Zuko launched himself onto the Avatar’s back. Not used to carrying the extra weight, they both crashed onto the deck. Just as Zuko was about to face the Avatar, a giant animal roared from the sky.

“What is that???”

“Appa!” The airbender looked at the beast excitedly. Zuko took this opportunity to grab the Avatar by the scruff of his shirt. Snarling, Zuko said, “Look, I don’t have time for this!” Someone else took the opportunity to sneak up behind Zuko. One moment he’s holding the Avatar, trying to come to terms with the fact that his only hope is a child, the next…

He’s on the ground.

Panicked voices surround him.

He’s wet and cold.

So very cold.

He can’t breathe.

Someone is touching his chest.

He looked down.

If he could laugh he would have.

An icicle was protruding from the right side of his chest.

 Katara is a waterbender.

She’s upset.

She’s never killed before.

His vision was fading.

More voices filled the air.

Calls of his name barely reached him.

Darkness.

With a barely muffled shout and gasping breaths, Zuko woke up.

This sucks. I mean, this is getting to the levels of our last family vacation together bad.

Well now I can say that I’ve been stabbed with ice. That’s a new experience at least.

The world was hazy around him, and it felt like it was moving more than it should. He decided to stay lying down for a little longer. “Okay, let’s try to make sense of…everything. The Avatar is a child. I can’t act like this doesn’t change anything. Now the real question is, now what? I still want the Avatar to help me, but it’s clear that that won’t happen for at least a few years. However, there’s the whole issue with the war and the fact that Ozai will absolutely try to destroy the kid. Every Fire Nation soldier and bounty hunter will be after him.” As Zuko laid in bed, he conjured a small flame that he twirled between his fingers. He looked at the ceiling trying to puzzle out what to do.

“If I manage to capture him, then what? There’s no way he’ll be willing or able to help me from a heavily guarded cell in the Fire Nation, assuming Ozai doesn’t outright kill him. The same is true if anyone else captures him. Then again, if I capture him but never turn him in then I’ll have easy access to him, but then I’ll constantly be on the run and there’s no guarantee that the Avatar won’t escape. I could try to join them, but I’m not too certain that will even work right now. I doubt my crew and uncle will casually commit treason. This is stupid, if I hadn’t shown up then the Avatar would probably be either rotting in the frozen tundra or traveling alone. It’s like the universe wants me to be the bad guy.”

Then the perfect idea hit him. It all made sense now, he figured out what his destiny is. He knew the best use of his curse.

“I’ll help the Avatar from backstage; I’ll be the stage manager for this play. The Avatar and his friends will save the world, and I’ll make sure everything follows the correct narrative. If something goes wrong, I’ll just reset the stage however many times it takes to get it right. It’s perfect.”

Now I just have to get past today, and I’m sure nothing this bad will ever happen again.

With a derisive huff, he tried to clear his head. His brain felt like it was being pulled apart and his skin felt too tight. His shoulder ached with the echoes of a stab wound that did and did not happen.

From the top! Let’s create the best production this world has ever seen.

An almost manic smile stretched across Zuko’s face. With numb shaking limbs, he made his way to the deck of his ship. His mind still felt shredded, but that didn’t really matter to him. All that mattered was getting the timing of his entrance just right.

The Avatar is the hero of this story, and every hero needs a villain to add some tragedy.

With that in mind, Zuko went through all the motions that led him to that village in the Southern Water Tribe. He put on his armor (with his helmet), knocked Sokka off the gangplank, broke Sokka’s spear, dodged and then not dodged the head splitter (I really need to figure out what that’s called), captured the Avatar, and now Zuko waited in his room for news that the Avatar has escaped.

Zuko, more or less, knew what he was supposed to be doing. He just needs to make sure that everything is done perfectly.

Don’t grab the Avatar when Appa shows up.

Everything was going according to plan, the Avatar came into Zuko’s room. They fought for a bit, the Avatar fled to the deck of his ship, Zuko stopped him from flying off, and now they were standing facing each other as Appa came into view.

“What is that?”

“Appa!” The Avatar cried out excitedly. With the Avatar distracted, Zuko shot flames at him. The Avatar quickly recovered and dispersed them. It became pretty clear that the Avatar didn’t really know how to fight head on. Sure, he was dispersing or dodging all the flames, but he was barely fighting back.

As their fight progressed, Sokka and Katara jumped off of Appa onto his ship. Zuko’s crew must have finally decided to investigate what was going on and now were fighting the Water Tribe teens. As the fighting intensified, Zuko ended up closer to Sokka and Katara. While hectic, everything seemed to be going well. That is, until Zuko was propelled across his ship and landed against the tower.

At first he was confused. He didn’t think he saw the Avatar do any airbending.

The fighting had stopped.

Everyone was looking at him.

His clothes felt oddly warm and wet.

Confused, he looked down.

Oh.

There were multiple small icicles impaled into his torso. Most were probably nonlethal, but one was clearly a different story.

There was an icicle sticking out of the right side of his chest (Again?). It was pinning him to the tower.

 He realized he wasn’t breathing.

Katara was looking at him, horrified.

The Avatar looked like he was going to be sick.

Sokka looked grim but not distressed.

The urge to cough came over Zuko, so he did.

The taste of copper filled his mouth.

The nauseating feeling of his wounds dragged across the icicles as he breathed.

He could feel his broken ribs grating together with each breath.

Katara was pale.

She looked like she was about to cry.

Why?

Zuko tried to smile.

He could feel blood running down his chin.

The only thing keeping him vertical was the icicle pinning him.

He could hear his uncle frantically calling his name.

“Izz…okay…” He could barely speak above a whisper.

He’s not sure anyone could hear him.

Blood filled his mouth.

Katara and the Avatar looked more distressed.

Sokka looked at him confused.

His uncle was crying.

“Izz…okay…’m not…” Before he could finish, everything went dark.

With a pained whine, Zuko sat up in bed. He was covered in a cold sweat. His hands were shaking. He couldn’t breathe.

Focus. In for five. Out for ten. Repeat.

Zuko scrunched his face as he tried to concentrate on breathing and tried to ignore the phantom pains of stab wounds that both did and did not happen. He laid there breathing for what felt like an eternity. Eventually, he forced himself to get up.

How many times have I died today?

He could feel his brain being torn apart. His joints felt stiff. His skin felt too tight. The taste of blood lingered in his mouth.

Focus.

“Okay, don’t stand too close to Katara.”

From the top.

Zuko barely paid attention as he went through the repetitive motions of getting ready. Put on his armor (with helmet), knocked Sokka off the gangplank, broke Sokka’s spear, got a headache from the head splitting weapon, captured the Avatar, waited in his room for the Avatar to show up, fought him, and now Zuko was battling the Avatar on the deck of his ship. Appa showed up with Sokka and Katara, and now Zuko was back to where everything went wrong previously.

Maybe I need to fight the Avatar faster before my crew shows up.

With a deep breath, Zuko shot quick blasts of fire at the Avatar. The kid was trying to disperse the flames as quickly as possible, but he was getting quickly overwhelmed. One blast had the kid precariously balanced on the railing of his ship; another blast sent the kid overboard into the icy waters.

Uh-oh.

Do I need to reset?

Zuko listened as Katara screamed out, “Aang! Aang!”

Suddenly, a tower of water rose up with the kid (Aang?) in the center of it. His eyes and tattoos were glowing white as he bent the large stream of water around him. With quick motions, Aang sent Zuko and any crew members unfortunate enough to be on deck overboard. Luckily, Zuko was able to grab onto a chain.

Zuko could hear some fighting above him, but there wasn’t really anything he could do from his position. All he could hope for was that everything was going well. As he looked around for a way to climb up, he noticed Aang’s staff hanging over the ledge and it was beginning to move like someone was picking it up. Without further thought, he grabbed onto it. Unfortunately for Zuko, it was Sokka on the other end. They looked at each other briefly before Sokka smacked him in the temple with the edge of the staff a few times until Zuko let go. Luck seemed to be on his side because he was able to grab onto the chain again before landing in the frigid waters below.

“That’s for the Water Tribe!” Sokka shouted down to him with a smug victorious look.

Not long after, his uncle came into view and helped him back onto the deck. Without delay Zuko commanded, “Get the ship as close as possible to them! Don’t let them get away!” Dutifully, the remaining crew members who weren’t frozen scrambled to get the ship to go full speed. As the they caught up, Zuko barked another order, “Shoot them down!”

I’m 80% sure they can dodge this, but this needs to look real. If they can’t handle this, how will they stand a chance against my father?

Zuko and his uncle in unison created a large blast of fire the hurtled toward Aang and his friends. Without missing a beat, Aang redirected the fire blast into the wall of ice next to them. Immediately the ice shattered, and large chunks pummeled the ship. Zuko felt a moment of fear as large pieces of ice came crashing down around him. There was nowhere to hide. He only got to watch for a second as some of his crew were crushed before everything went dark.

Agony coursed through his body as he woke up.

His mouth wide open in a silent scream.

Everything was so cold and hot at the same time.

All he could do was curl up shaking as he waited out the pain.

At least this won’t leave a scar. One of the upsides of suddenly being crushed to death.

Zuko started to laugh wetly. He quickly smothered it, he knew if he started laughing that it would draw unwanted attention. Every breath took almost all of his concentration. Slowly, Zuko pushed himself up and out of bed.

I think I have all the information on what I need to do to get through today.

With a single-minded focus, Zuko went through the motions of the day. He didn’t allow himself to think about anything else except the next step he needed to take. Nothing registered outside of his narrowed view. His time in the village passed by in a blur, fighting Aang did take a little effort to make sure he didn’t win. Finally, as he watched Aang and co fly off, he and his uncle shot a massive jet of flames that the Avatar countered easily. Now the front of his ship is buried in ice and snow, but no one is dead. Some crew members may have hypothermia and or frostbite, but he’s pretty sure that they’ll live. Even the frozen ones.

That’s not fair, why did I get impaled with icicles twice, but they only get frozen in a relatively light layer of ice? Reality really does hate me.

His uncle looked unusually bitter as he said, “Good news for the Fire Lord. The Avatar is a just child.” Zuko huffed and gestured around him, “That child did all of this. We can’t underestimate him again.”

Hopefully they won’t do anything too stupid before I catch up with them.

“Sir, what are your orders?”

Zuko looked over at Lieutenant Jee and said, “We need to dig out of here and head to the nearest safe port. This much ice falling on us has bound to have caused serious damage.” Jee nodded, “We can reach the nearest port in a couple days depending on the extent of the damages.” Zuko frowned, “Once the frozen crew members are thawed out, get everyone to start digging and patching any major holes. We don’t have time to spare.” Without another word, Zuko headed to his room. He could feel the world start to tilt dangerously beneath his feet.

I’m so tired.

As he was just about to enter his chambers, his uncle called out, “Prince Zuko, I’m surprised to see you retiring so early. I thought you would want to aid in digging us out of here to resume your search as soon as possible, and I’m sure it will help with the overall morale of the crew.” Zuko gripped the door handle tightly to try to hide how unbalanced he was. His vision was starting to blur. He snapped through gritted teeth, “Serving the Fire Lord and their prince by capturing the greatest threat to the Fire Nation’s success should be enough of a motivation.” His uncle looked disappointed, but before he could say anything Zuko sighed, “Two hours. Just. Let me rest for two hours then I’ll come up.” Now his uncle looked at him with barely disguised concern, but nodded, “Very well Prince Zuko. I’ll come fetch you in two hours if I don’t see you.” Zuko nodded and then went into his room and closed his door.

He stumbled to his bed as his vision began to fade. Without bothering to change, he collapsed into the mattress gracelessly. He mustered just enough energy to roll onto his side.

Well, I can safely say that this was worse than that family vacation. I have never died so many times in a single day.

He could feel himself starting to drift off.

At least the Avatar has started his journey. The play has officially started, and the characters are in position. I just need to keep everything on track now.

As darkness claimed him, Zuko couldn’t help but think:

If I die now and have to start over again, I’m going to set something on fire.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age ten)

The Fire Nation royal family were on their way to their biannual family vacation to Ember Island. Almost everyone was there; Iroh, Lu Ten, Ursa, Azula, and Zuko. Fire Lord Azulon had duties to attend to that he couldn’t postpone, and Ozai used his father as an excuse to stay behind to assist. Regardless, the rest of the family was happy to get out of the palace for the weekend.

As they made their way to the royal family beach house, everyone was making plans for what to do during their short stay. Iroh wanted to check out the local hot springs and tea shops, Ursa wanted to go to see some plays and concerts, Lu Ten and Azula wanted to explore the volcanic valley, but Zuko wasn’t really certain what he wanted to do. There was so much to do that it was impossible to decide. He knew they were only going to be here for the weekend, so he had to choose carefully.

“Zuzu’s probably going to start acting weird again.”

“I’m not weird!”

I am absolutely weird, but she doesn’t need to know that.

“Azula, be nice to your brother.” Their mother admonished. Azula rolled her eyes and walked ahead of them. Zuko knew he sometimes acted weird, but how was he supposed to act after dying and repeating the same day again? It doesn’t happen often, but it always manages to through him off balance for the rest of the repeated day.

Since they arrived at the island early in the evening, all of their plans would have to wait until tomorrow. As the sun began to set, the family gathered for dinner. The servants presented all sorts of colorful local dishes. The smell of cooked rice and various spices filled the air. In fact, the air was so thick with the smell of freshly cooked foods, that Zuko could taste them before even taking a bite. The sound of oil still sizzling could be heard as the fish and other meats were served. In short, this was an absolute feast to behold.

Quickly and quietly, the staff filled each family member’s plates with whatever dishes they desired. Cups were filled with juice for Zuko and Azula, tea for Iroh, and local rice wine for Ursa and Lu Ten. Once they were sufficiently served for the moment, the servants retreated to the far corners of the room and waited for additional instructions.

As they ate Ursa turned to Iroh, “So I hear you and Lu Ten will be leaving soon?” Iroh paused as he was about to take a bite before answering, “Yes, I think something truly amazing will occur.” Lu Ten was smiling at his father when he chimed in, “I think this will be the attack that will bring Ba Sing Se to its knees.” Iroh nodded sagely, “Yes, I believe that my destiny is upon me. I can feel it.” Azula rolled her eyes, “Uncle is this about that stupid dream?” Ursa gave a chastising, “Azula!” Before Ursa could continue, Iroh laughed, “It’s all right. It’s good to question people’s claims of greatness, it keeps us from being led astray. As for your question, my dear niece, yes. I do believe that what I saw was a vision from Agni showing me concurring Ba Sing Se.” Lu Ten looked to his father and declared, “Even if it’s not a vision, my father is an amazing general and I have faith that he will lead us to victory.” Iroh looked at his son with eyes filled with pride and love.

Zuko, however, felt a wave of unease. It was like something important was going to happen, but he wasn’t so sure that it was good. A nervous pit was forming in his stomach. Slowly he pushed the food around on his plate with his chopsticks..

“What will happen if you fail?” The words left his mouth before he could stop himself. Everyone turned to look at him in surprise. An embarrassed flush warmed his cheeks, Zuko looked back down at his plate. The silence stretched on for awhile before his uncle calmly stated, “Even if this attempt fails, I will try again and again until I succeed. Destiny is a powerful thing nephew. No matter how much one fights it, you cannot escape it. Ba Sing Se will fall one way or another.”

The anxious pit in Zuko’s stomach squirmed uncomfortably. He continued to push his food around, appetite gone.

What’s my destiny?

Soon everyone retired to their rooms. The night was filled with the sounds of chirping sparrow-crickets, and the haunting calls of howler-owls. The sky glowed with the light of the moon and millions of stars. The air was cool with a gentle breeze. Everyone was peacefully sleeping. Except for Zuko.

He laid in his bed staring up at the ceiling. The anxious feeling in his stomach still nagged at him. He couldn’t help but think about what his uncle said about destiny.

Uncle said he discovered his destiny through a dream, but all my dreams are usually of me dying. Is that my destiny?

Zuko turned his head to look out the window and gazed at the night sky. He stared at the stars and tried to lull himself to sleep. Nothing seemed to work, that anxious ball in his stomach continued to squirm and kept him awake. Counting stars didn’t seem to help, he mostly got frustrated when he couldn’t remember if he already counted a specific star or he lost count. Trying to make out constellations made him feel cross-eyed. By the time he settled on trying to give specific stars backstories and character arches, the stars started to fade, and the sky began to brighten.

To Zuko’s dismay, he didn’t sleep at all. The sun’s rays were turning the sky into an array of bright beautiful colors that he would have appreciated on any other day, but he was just so tired that all he could do was stare blankly.

Great.

Hopelessly, Zuko still tried to sleep even just a little bit before someone came to fetch him. He groaned and whined as he turned away from the window. The sun was lighting up his room and chasing away the blissful darkness. The air around him started to heat up.

No…go away…

Zuko glanced sullenly at his window. He could get up to close the curtains, but that would require getting up. There’s also the risk of someone opening his door and seeing him vertical. Depending on who it is, they might even try to start small talk. Mind made up, Zuko threw his blanket over his head and curled up away from the window.

Compromise.

Just as he started to maybe feel the pull of sleep, someone opened his door. Zuko pretended not to hear them and hoped they would leave him alone. He could hear the person huff in annoyance, “Zuzu are you dead or something?”

Yes, now leave me alone.

The sound of footsteps came closer to his bed before coming to a stop next to him. He could feel her glaring at him, “If you don’t get up, I’m going to tell uncle that you want to learn the history of tea making. Again.”

That’s just cruel.

With a groan fitting of someone ten times older than him, Zuko poked his head out from the safety of his blanket. Light assaulted his eyes as he blearily glared at Azula. She raised an eyebrow at him, “You look terrible.” Zuko flopped his head back onto his pillow and let out a muffled, “Thanks.” Azula growled in annoyance and started to shake him, “Come on dumb dumb, get up! I refuse to stay inside the beach house all day just because you refuse to sleep like a normal person!” He clumsily reached out his arm and tried to swat her away.

“Okay, okay I’m getting up.” She didn’t leave, instead she crossed her arms and stared at him. They had a battle of wills for a moment before Zuko grumbled and reluctantly stood up. As soon as he was up, Azula was pulling him down the hallway into the dining room. Everyone else was already seated and looked up when they heard them enter.

“Ah, nephew glad to see you finally decided to join us!” His uncle’s boisterous voice greeted him. Zuko muttered something that might have passed as a greeting. His mother looked at him concerned, “Zuko are you feeling alright? You seem pale and your eyes are bloodshot.” Before he could answer Azula huffed, “He probably stayed up all night reading his dumb plays again.” That got him to wake up a little bit.

“I did not, and they aren’t dumb!” Before things could escalate into a full-fledged argument, Lu Ten chimed in, “It’s no big deal, we’re on vacation! Staying up late reading isn’t the worst thing he could be doing.”

“But I wasn’t…”

His uncle laughed and reassured Zuko, “Don’t worry nephew, there will be plenty of time for rest.” With that, the servants started to bring out breakfast. Colorful fruits, fragrant rice, fried eggs, and pumpkin stir-fry were served to them. His uncle and cousin sipped their morning tea while he, his mother, and Azula had fruit juice. Everyone was sharing their plans for the weekend while they ate. Zuko quietly sipped his juice and picked at his food. Even though he barely ate his dinner last night, he still wasn’t very hungry. He knew he needed to eat, but the thought just made that pit in his stomach roll.

He was barely paying attention to the conversation happening around him until his uncle said something that made him perk up.

“I’m sorry uncle, what was that?” His uncle paused mid-sentence to give Zuko a surprised look before smiling and repeating himself, “I was just saying how that there is something mystical about Ember Island. This island has the power to reveal truths about yourself and can help you find inner peace.” Zuko pondered his uncle’s words for a moment before asking, “Could one of those truths be your destiny?” His uncle looked thoughtful for a moment, “Possibly.”

“Where exactly on the island would you have to be for this to happen?” Zuko felt wide awake now and directed his full attention onto his uncle. He was leaning so far forward that he was coming off his seat. His uncle looked a bit taken aback but dutifully answered, “According to the stories I’ve heard, you must be close to important natural monuments. Though I’m not…” At this point Zuko had stopped listening, his eyes were sparkling as he started to come up with a plan.

If I need to be close to these natural monuments to figure out my destiny, then I’m going to get as close as possible.

With the beginning a plan forming in his mind, Zuko decided to visit the most obvious place first. The beach. The black volcanic sand is iconic to the island and draws in people from all over the Fire Nation and the colonies. People come to the beach just for the sand alone, claiming that rubbing it onto their skin helps it look younger. As soon as he was able to escape breakfast, he put on his swim clothes with a simple robe over them. On his way to the door, he grabbed a towel. Just as he was racing out the door his mother stopped him.

“Where are you going in such a rush?”

“The beach.”

Ursa stared at her son for a long moment, “Zuko you didn’t eat this morning and don’t think I didn’t notice that you barely ate last night. Are you sure you’re feeling okay?” He nodded frantically with a wide smile, “I’m fine, really! I just didn’t sleep well because I’m just so excited to be here!” He shifted his weight between his feet as he kept glancing at the ocean.

Partially true.

She looked at him disapprovingly, “Zuko you need to eat and sleep. How about we stay here, and you get some rest. The beach can wait until tomorrow.” He was almost tempted to do just that, but he needed to get to the beach today. There were so many natural monuments on the island that he could afford to waste time resting.

He tried to look as healthy and alive as possible, “I’m fine! I don’t want to waste a day of our vacation cooped up inside while everyone else gets to have fun.” Ursa frowned as she looked him over before declaring, “You can’t go to the beach by yourself.” He groaned dramatically, “Mom…I’m ten! I’m practically a teenager now which is basically an adult! Besides, what’s the worst that can happen?” She threw her head back with a laugh, “That was some impressive mental gymnastics, but you are still a long way off still from being an adult.” She looked to the ocean then back at him, a pensive look crossed her face before she reluctantly said, “Alright you can go, but don’t go past your waist in the water. I know you can swim, but it would make me feel better and be back here in an hour.”

“Two hours?”

“Thirty minutes.”

“…an hour and a half?” She looked at him bemused, “Fine, but you promise to do as I said?”

“Yes mother. Don’t go out past my waste and be back in an hour and a half.” She reluctantly nodded. Before she could change her mind, Zuko took off to the beach as fast as he could. Luckily for him, being at the royal beach house meant that he had private access to the ocean without having to fight other people for prime space.

After laying the towel on the ground, he removed the robe over his swim clothes and walked aimlessly for a while waiting for something to happen. The black sand sank under his feet and the sound of the push and pull of the waves against the beach made everything feel peaceful.

Now what? Am I supposed to sleep or something?

It was almost midday now, and the heat was starting to get unbearable. After confirming how much time he had left, he removed his shoes and sprinted across the hot sand to the ocean. “Hot! Hot! Hot!” Once he made it to the water he let out a sigh of relief. It felt amazing against his burning feet, but it did little to relieve the rest of him that was baking under the sun. Gradually, Zuko waded in deeper until the water was up to his waist. He ducked down into the water and almost sighed in relief as he finally got relief from the heat.

He continued to alternate between wading through the water and ducking beneath it for a while, but he didn’t feel like he had any answers about his destiny. Zuko scowled as he surveyed his surroundings.

My time is almost up and nothing has happened. Maybe I need to go to a different beach?

He was about to give up and go back to the beach house when something caught his eye. There was a small rock formation not too far away that looked interesting. The black volcanic stone almost resembled an arch. Curious, Zuko almost started to swim towards it when he remembered that he wasn’t supposed to go out that far, and that arch was probably about 30 yards away.

He stood there staring at the arch for a bit before making his way to it.

I’ll be fine and mom will never know.

As Zuko swam, he glanced behind him periodically to make sure no one was watching him. If his mom came out to check on him, he’d be in so much trouble. It felt like an eternity as he drew closer to the formation. The black rocks seemed to glisten in the sunlight. Everything seemed to be fine so far.

When he was just a couple yards away, swimming suddenly got a lot easier. Zuko was confused at first but then became terrified. At the base of the formation, he could see what appeared to be an opening to a tunnel and he was being sucked into it. He immediately turned around and tried to swim away, but the current was too strong. With one last terrified shout, Zuko was sucked under.

The burn of salt water stung his eyes and his nostrils.

The current slammed him against the walls.

Each impact forced some air out of his lungs.

He was thrust into a chamber.

Chaos.

There was light and air, but the current was still tossing him around.

He clawed frantically at the rocks.

Fingernails chipped and cracked with each attempt.

The water slammed him from wall to wall.

His nails started to be ripped out with each desperate scramble.

His fingers burned from the salt.

He tried to scream.

Water filled his mouth.

He surfaced again.

He tried to cough up the water but kept being pulling under.

The sound of crashing water was deafening.

His limbs ached.

Everything hurt.

It was getting harder to stay above water.

He was pulled under again.

The current was too strong.

The burn of salt water filled his nose.

It burned his throat.

He tried to cough.

His chest felt heavy.

He couldn’t move.

I’m sorry.

He slammed one last time into the rocks.

Darkness.

Zuko was already awake. He could feel his consciousness be split in two and forced back together as the version him that died crashed into the version him that was lying in bed awake.

The burning of salt water strangled his lungs, the torn fingernails and broken bones from slamming into the rocks ached. The feeling of his bed beneath him and the warmth of the sun’s rays surrounded him.

He could still see the glistening black rocks at the same time as he watched the early morning light fill his room.

Two experiences crashing together.

I’m dead, but I’m not. I’m dead, but I’m not. I’m dead, but I’m not.

He curled up defensively while he gripped his head and tightly closed his eyes. He gasped for breath; the feeling of drowning still haunted him. He coughed trying to get rid of water that wasn’t there.

Eventually, the feeling of drowning faded into a faint sensation. Zuko stayed curled up on his bed.

I guess I now know what happens if I come back while past me is still awake.

Just like before, Azula came into his room to make him get up. Zuko, while not fully used to his curse, knew he needed to try to do the same things he did the first time around. Too much change can draw suspicion to him, and it can make it harder to stop whatever it was that originally killed him or someone else. So, Zuko made a show of getting out of bed and asking his uncle about the mystical nature of Ember Island.

This time, Zuko decided not to go to the beach or go somewhere alone.

He looked around at his family members and tried to figure out which ones were going somewhere that would give him the best chance of figuring out his destiny. His mother was going to see a play, so it wouldn’t be her. That left his uncle who was going to the hot springs, and Lu Ten and Azula who were going to the volcanic valley. Zuko blanched at the idea of going to a hot spring with his uncle, so he approached his cousin and sister, “Can I come with you guys?”

It was clear that they were just about to leave when Zuko asked. Lu Ten opened his mouth, probably to approve, when Azula objected, “You aren’t even ready! Do you seriously think you can hike to a volcano in that?” Zuko was taken aback as he looked down at himself. He was still wearing his night clothes and no shoes.

Right, I might have spent too much time thinking while everyone else was getting ready.

Embarrassed, Zuko tried to recover, “It won’t take me long, I promise! You can even start walking there and I’ll catch up.” Lu Ten hesitated and tried to keep the peace, “The volcanoes will still be there even if we show up a few minutes later than planned. Besides, I need to grab more water. The heat there can dry you out quickly.” Azula pouted and glared at the nearest wall.

As Lu Ten went to get some more water skins, Zuko rushed to get dressed. By the time he was ready, Lu Ten and Azula had already started their journey. Zuko rushed out the door. His mother tried to stop him, but he called out over his shoulder, “Sorry! Gotta catch up to Lu Ten and Azula!”

After a brief sprint, he caught up to them. Lu Ten laughed and patted him on the back, “I don’t think I’ve ever seen you get ready that fast!” Azula huffed a laugh and said, “He will if it’s to see a play.” They shared a laugh at Zuko’s expense, but he was more focused on getting to the volcano.

The trio made their way down a dirt path through the forest leading to the volcanic valley. Lu Ten proclaimed, “A friend of mine in the army said that this area isn’t well known to tourists, so we should have the place mostly to ourselves.”

As they came into the clearing it became obvious that this was clearly a well-visited tourist area, raised walking paths were installed so visitors could safely watch the lava field. There looked like there were even tour guides. Zuko and Azula gave Lu Ten a look. He raised his hands in mock surrender, “Relax. This is just the entrance! We’re going deeper into the valley than these tourists.” Zuko and Azula shared a dubious look but decided to follow their cousin.

   They made their way through the crowd of people and even some food and souvenir vendors to get to the beginning of the path. By this point, Azula looked ready to set something on fire. She muttered to Zuko, “If I set Lu Ten’s shirt on fire, do you think mother will believe me if I say the volcano did it?” Zuko snorted and whispered back, “You’d have better luck if you set his shoe on fire.” She seemed to consider it.

“I can hear you!” Lu Ten turned to them scowling with his hands on his hips. Zuko and Azula just looked at him with matching faux innocent expressions. Lu Ten sighed, “Look, I know how this looks. But trust me. My friend gave me a map that will give us a good view inside the volcano without having to fight tourists.”

As their cousin led them across the raised trails, the crowd did seem to thin out. Eventually, they came to a blocked off path with a sign saying, “Do Not Enter!” Both Zuko and Azula watched as Lu Ten climbed over the railing and landed safely on the ground. He called out, “Come on! I’ll help you guys down.” Azula hesitated for a second before climbing over the railing and Lu Ten helped her down.

Is this what they did when I was at the beach?

Cautiously, Zuko approached the railing. “Come on Zuzu, we don’t have all day!” With one last deep breath, Zuko climbed over the railing and Lu Ten helped him onto the ground. Lu Ten got a serious look on his face as he addressed them, “Okay, we are now in a dangerous area, but I do have a detailed map that has a safe path marked on it. You two need to follow my exact footsteps. Do you understand?” Both of them nodded. Satisfied, Lu Ten began to carefully walk across the valley.

The ground looked deceptively safe. It appeared to be solid, but the heat rising from the various cracks in the ground made it clear that this was a dangerous area. In some places, Zuko could see the faint glow of lava. The were even areas where black mud was bubbling.

The smell of sulfur filled the air. The heat from the ground was almost unbearable. It was so hot that their sweat was evaporating almost immediately. Lu Ten would periodically hand them the water skin with a reminder to stay hydrated. The black rocks surrounded them as they descended further into the valley.

This has to work. What’s a more awe-inspiring natural monument than an active volcano?

After about 30 minutes of careful hiking, they came to the edge of a pit with a large relatively flat area in the center. The heat and the smell of sulfur was stronger than ever. All three of them were exhausted and when Zuko turned to look back, he couldn’t see the safety of the raised platforms.

This is bad.

Lu Ten was squinting at his map, it looked like some of the ink got smudged.

I’m going to die.

Lu Ten nodded to himself and said, “Okay, we need to walk carefully around the edge of this area. After that, we need to climb up that pile of rocks and then we’ll be at the perfect viewing spot.”

Zuko felt a wave of numbness come over him. He knew. Nothing good was about to happen, all he could do was prepare himself and accept it. Maybe he could try to convince them to turn around, but he doubted they would listen. Azula was determined to see the inside of the volcano and Lu Ten seemed confident in his ability to get there. All Zuko could do was follow along and fix everything when it inevitably goes wrong.

As they made their trek around the edge, they noticed that the rocks were brittle and crumbled easily under too much pressure. Each step had to be taken slowly and carefully. In a flash, everything went wrong.

The ground beneath Azula crumbled.

She was about to fall into the pit.

Zuko grabbed her arm and pulled her to safety.

The sudden motion caused the ground to now crumble under his feet.

He fell.

He heard Lu Ten and Azula shout.

He hit the ground shoulder first before rolling onto his back.

It took a second for it to register.

Burning, searing pain.

Smoke clogged his nose.

His screams echoed around him.

Flames ignited his clothes.

His body was curling up.

His skin was burning away.

Flames ate at his body.

He could hear the popping of his flesh as it cooked.

His body curled into a ball.

His flesh was charred black.

He couldn’t breathe.

Couldn’t see.

Darkness.

Screaming.

Zuko was thrust back into the version of him that was safe in bed.

He was burning, but his blankets were cool.

The smell of charred flesh and sulfur filled his nose, but the salt of the ocean and perfume was all that was there.

He could hear the sound of his flesh cooking, and the sound of birds singing.

He screamed and screamed.

He couldn’t breathe through the pain of what did and did not happen.

He clawed at his chest and face.

I can’t breathe!

Footsteps rushed into his room.

Hands were grabbing at him.

Someone was calling his name.

He thrashed around trying to get away from the burning ground that was and was not there.

He was picked up and held tightly.

Someone was rocking him.

The smell of fire lilies filled his nose.

Mom?

Everything slowly started to come back into focus.

His mother was rocking him side to side while murmuring, “That’s it sweetheart. Breath in 1…2…3…4…5, now breath out 1…2…3…4…5…6…7…8…9…10. You’re doing so good. I’m so proud of you.”

His vision cleared and saw that he was in his room, not in the volcanic valley.

His uncle was in the doorway trying to keep Azula out. She looked worried but was trying to appear disinterested.

I hate dying.

“I’m okay.” He tried to sound convincing, but even he could admit that the delivery was awful. His mother held him tighter, “It’s okay to not be okay sometimes sweetheart.” Zuko didn’t say anything. She kissed the top of his head, “What happened?” A part of Zuko wanted to tell her the truth.

That he keeps dying and coming back.

That every time he does die, it feels like a piece of him is lost.

How it feels to have his mind shredded then put back together.

No one will ever believe me.

Instead, he murmured hoarsely, “It was just a bad dream.” He saw that same guilty look go across his mother’s face that he sees whenever he mentions having a bad dream. She said nothing but held onto him tighter. From the doorway, Iroh cleared his throat, “Perhaps a cup of tea will help calm your mind nephew.” Zuko simply nodded while looking at the floor.

His limbs shook and he swayed dangerously as he stood up. Ursa gave him a tightlipped look, but didn’t say anything. Zuko slowly but surely made his way into the dining room as he leaned against his uncle for support. Azula and Lu Ten were already there. They gave him poorly disguised looks of concern. Zuko stared intently at Lu Ten.

I need to stop them from going to the volcanic valley.

The room was thick with silence.

Uncle calmly poured tea for everyone. Even Azula accepted her cup quietly. They all sat there occasionally shooting Zuko worried looks, but Zuko was still focusing on getting his limbs to stop shaking. He was so tired.

Once the tea was finished, Azula seemed to get impatient, “Now that that’s over. Cousin Lu Ten and I are going to the volcanic valley.”

“No!”

Everyone turned to Zuko in surprise. His hands had started to shake again. The echoes of Azula calling out to him as he fell filled his head. He clenched his fists to try to hide it, “I mean, why don’t we all go to the hot springs? Hot springs are practically volcanoes. Well…technically they’re the byproduct of volcanic activity, but that’s basically the same thing and…” He was rambling now. Panic was fogging his brain.

If I don’t stop them, then Azula will die. Lu Ten will get my sister killed.

Someone squeezed his shoulder, and he stopped talking. Embarrassment colored his cheeks as he looked down at his still clenched shaking hands. His mother calmly stated, “I think that sounds like a good idea Zuko. Perhaps we all need to spend some time relaxing together.” His uncle nodded along, “It would be good to melt the stress of travels away and perhaps get some real rest.” Uncle seemed to give the dark circles under Zuko’s eyes a pointed look. Azula groaned in aggravation, “He just had a nightmare! Why do I need to sacrifice all of my plans?”

Before Ursa could admonish her, Zuko said, “Please Azula. I’ll owe you. Just…please come with me.” Azula studied him with a scowl before rolling her eyes, “Fine! But you better pay me back.” Zuko smiled weakly and nodded, “I promise.” With that, everyone went to get ready to go to the hot springs. By this point, Zuko felt almost back to normal. At least the phantom pains were gone, and he had stopped shaking.

As he got ready, he inspected his body.

Where’s the scar? There’s bound to be one somewhere.

On his temple, he spotted a small scar that he didn’t recognize but chalked it up to when he drowned earlier. He went to the mirror that sat next to his wardrobe and tried to twist his neck to inspect his back.

There.

On his shoulder blade was a burn scar about the size of a moon peach. Just like the scar on his abdomen, it was pink around the edges and an almost maroon color towards the center. The skin was more raised than the one on his abdomen, and the whole scar had more bumps and ridge all over. It still had that odd silky feeling, and the area was a bit numb.

This will be a nightmare to hide.

He shrugged on his clothes and met his family on the porch.

“About time Zuzu, I was beginning to think I was going to have to come get you.” Zuko smiled sheepishly, “Sorry.” Azula rolled her eyes, “Whatever.” With that, the family made their way to the hot springs.

On the way to the hot springs, Lu Ten tried to cheer Zuko up by telling stories of his adventures in the military. Normally Zuko would hang onto every word, but now he just wanted his cousin to stop talking. At some point he must have noticed Zuko’s discomfort and went silent. His uncle and mother were whispering to each other while glancing at him. Zuko just focused on walking and breathing.

At the hot springs, Ursa convinced Azula to join her for a bit of a spa day. Azula made a small fuss but eventually followed her mother. That left Zuko alone with his uncle and cousin. In the changing room, Zuko carefully made sure that no one saw his back. When they made their way to their hot spring, Zuko covered his back and abdomen with a towel. At the spring, he got in last and sat at the far side. Once inside the water, he sank low enough to hide his shoulder. It was an odd position, sure; but it was better than trying to come up with a believable lie.

His uncle was not so subtly looking at him. Lu Ten was pretending to sleep.

Lu Ten is a terrible actor, good thing he’s going to be Fire Lord someday.

The memory of Lu Ten leading them through the volcanic valley and Azula nearly dying played in the back of his mind. He could see her face filled with fear just before Zuko pulled her to safety. Zuko wanted so badly to be angry at Lu Ten, to tell Iroh what his son had planned to do and is still probably planning on doing. How he nearly killed all the royal children just to get a better view.

Instead, Zuko just looked up at the sky. He couldn’t find the energy to be angry, a part of him just wanted to cry. As he watched the clouds go by, he heard his uncle order some tea. When the staff member returned with a teapot and cups, his uncle waved them off and poured the tea himself.

“You know nephew, I have had my fair share of bad dreams. They always seem to have a way of catching you off guard and show you strange, even terrifying imagery.” He sipped his tea and gave Zuko a thoughtful look, “Our bad dreams can tell us a lot about ourselves. Our fears, regrets, bad memories. In our head they all get mashed together. One bad image crashes into another, creating something more terrifying.”

Zuko didn’t say anything. His uncle hummed, “I have found that meditating before bed helps calm my mind. A calm mind is less likely to be subjected to the frights of our subconscious.” Zuko continued to stay quiet. He listened to the sounds of wind chimes and laughter in the distance. He focused on the feeling of the stone beneath him and the warm water. He tried not to think about how the springs smelt of sulfur, or how the smooth stones beneath him felt like the stones in the cave he drowned in.

It only sort of worked.

Once it was time to get out, Zuko quickly and carefully dressed while hiding his back. After getting dressed, they reunited with his mother and Azula. For the rest of the day, Zuko kept Azula and Lu Ten from wondering off. First by insisting that they all get lunch together. He still wasn’t hungry, but he forced himself to eat a little bit just to keep them from getting suspicious. Then he saw a game booth that they all just had to play. Zuko got a stuffed dragon that he traded with Azula’s stuffed otter-pinguin. By the time he was starting to run out of ideas for things they’d all reasonably enjoy, it was time to return to the beach house.

His head throbbed and his eyes burned. The heaviness of his limbs made each step a massive undertaking. All he wanted to do was sleep, but he knew he had to wait. There was one last thing he needed to do. After everyone fell asleep, Zuko snuck into Lu Ten’s room. Quietly, he dug through his cousin’s belongings until he found that stupid map. Just as quietly as he came in, he left. He placed it strategically where he knew his uncle would find it in the morning.

I didn’t get to light his shoe on fire but potentially getting him in trouble with uncle will have to do.

With a smile, Zuko was finally able to sleep.

The next morning saw Lu Ten being summoned outside by Iroh who had what could only be called a stormy look. Zuko didn’t hear their conversation, but he felt no small amount of satisfaction when Lu Ten came back inside looking thoroughly chastised. Zuko hid his smile in his cup.

Uncle chaperoned Lu Ten’s and Azula’s trip to the volcanic valley, and they all came back unscathed. Though Azula looked like she wanted to set someone, probably Lu Ten, on fire.

The rest of the day went by uneventfully. As the day came to a close, his mother invited him to accompany her to see a play. He agreed happily.

At the theater, they were ushered to a private box. Zuko inspected the stage to see what he could of the set pieces. Then something caught his eye. On one of the pillars, Zuko noticed a pair of strange masks. “Mother, what are those?” Ursa turned to look at what Zuko was pointing at. Once she spotted what he was asking about she said, “Those are the masks that represent theater at its core. Comedy and tragedy.”

Zuko gave her a confused look. She explained further, “Tragedy provides obstacles for the characters so that they hopefully grow into better people, and it challenges the audience to think about how they would handle a similar situation. Comedy makes the characters more likeable and gives the audience a chance to really get to know the characters. Any good play will have a balance of both.”

Zuko took all of this in.

Tragedy and comedy.

Am I tragedy?

Is that my destiny?

(Now)

With a great deal of effort, Zuko and his crew were able to dig themselves out of the ice and haphazardly patch the worst of the holes. He kept a sharp eye out for signs of catastrophic failure as the ship limped to the nearest port. Miraculously, the ship made it all the way to port without a single casualty.

Well besides me, but I don’t count.

Now the real challenge will be to try to keep the Avatar’s return a secret for as long as possible.

 Just as they got off the ship, his uncle brought up the Avatar. “Keep your voice down! If any of these people hear you, they will get in our way.” Zuko hissed through clenched teeth. Soon after finishing his sentence, a voice called out, “General Iroh and Prince Zuko, what do I owe the honor of having you docked in my port.”

Gross.

Zuko frown, “Captain Zhao.”

“Commander now. What brings you to my harbor?”

“We need some repairs.” Zhao looked at his ship and seemed surprised, “That’s quite a lot of damage. Did you hit something?”

“Yes! Uncle, tell commander Zhao what happened.” His uncle jolted in surprise before jumping in, “Yes, it was incredible!” He turned and muttered to Zuko, “Did we crash or something…?”

Why is it that his uncle can come up with all sorts of life specific analogies on the cuff, but he can’t act to save his life.

“Yes! We crashed into a…pirate ship.”

Must run in the family.

Zhao smirked, “That sounds fascinating.” He leaned in closer to Zuko, “Why don’t you regale me with all the details over tea.”

You are absolutely not my type.

“Sorry, we have to go.” His uncle placed his hand on his nephew’s shoulder, “Prince Zuko, we need to show gratitude to Commander Zhao for his hospitality. We would love to join you for some tea. Do you have ginseng by any chance? It’s my favorite.” The two men walked off together. Zuko let out a growl of frustration.

I don’t care what my uncle says, I am not accepting any drinks from that old creep.

Zhao led them to a military tent where he served tea to both Zuko and Iroh. Iroh happily drank his, Zuko pointedly ignored his cup. Zhao didn’t stop smirking. He started to monologue his plans on how to get the Earth Kingdom to surrender then how the whole world will be ruled by Ozai. Naturally, Zhao placed himself as a key character for this hypothetical victory.

Part of me wants to antagonize him to the point that he kills me. Uncle would kill him in retaliation obviously. It would be worth it up until I woke up and had to sit through this all over again.

At some point Zhao stopped talking. Zuko huffed, “My father is a fool if he truly thinks this is all it would take to get the Earth Kingdom to surrender.”

“It would seem your time at sea has done little to tame your tongue.”

I will set you on fire.

Undeterred by Zuko’s lack of response, Zhao faux casually asked, “So how is your search for the Avatar?” Iroh knocked over a display of weapons, “My fault entirely.” Zhao glared at his uncle then looked back at Zuko, “No luck yet.” Zhao glared at him, “If you know something, if you have any ounce of loyalty, you’ll tell me the truth.” Zuko put on a carefully blank face, “I am telling the truth, I haven’t found him. Maybe he doesn’t exist anymore. I need to go make sure my ship gets the repairs it needs.” As Zuko tried to leave, the guards at the entrance crossed their spears, stopping him. A soldier came in and bowed to Zhao.

“Sir! We interrogated the crew like you ordered. They say that the prince had the Avatar but that he escaped.” Zhao smirked and leaned in close behind Zuko, “So tell me again what happened to your ship?”

That’s it. Everyone is taking acting lessons. This is never happening again.

After reluctantly sitting back in his chair, he told Zhao the absolute bare minimum amount of information he could get away with. Zhao paced the length of the tent growling and grumbling.  Zuko finished his story with, “I underestimated him. It won’t happen again.”

“It won’t. You’re no longer tasked with capturing the Avatar.”

“What!?” Zuko rose from his chair, the guards tensed ready to stop him.

“This mission is too important to leave in the hands of a teenager.”

“I’d like to see you stop me.” Zuko got into Zhao’s face.

“Is that a challenge?”

“Yes, Agni Kai at sunset.”

“Fine. If only your father were here to watch you be humiliated again. I guess your uncle will do.” Zhao left the tent with a smug smirk.

I will burn your stupid sideburns off your face.

“Nephew, do you remember the last time you challenged a master to a dual?”

“How could I forget?” The scar on his face felt tight. His uncle was giving him concerned looks, but Zuko chose to ignore them. He knew he would win, had to win. Even if it might take a few rematches. He doesn’t have time for this.

I need to catch up with the Avatar.

As the day neared sunset, Zuko prepared for the dual. He had suspicious scars that he needed to cover up. The port guards allowed him to leave the tent and get back on his ship. Without sparing a look at his crew, Zuko shut himself in his room. He opened a chest that sat on the far side of the room and dug until he found a jar of cream. Once he found his prize, he removed his shirt and started to apply it.

To be fair, it was more of a skin-colored paste than a cream. The thick texture was perfect for covering up old-looking scars. It wouldn’t perfectly hide them, but it would make it harder to spot them unless you looked really closely. He smoothed the paste over each scar that his uncle would more than likely see. The burn on his abdomen and shoulder blade from Azula and Lu Ten respectively, the slice on his throat from Sokka, the multiple stab wounds from Katara, and so many more. He considered the other scar on his head that he also got from Sokka and the one he got from drowning but decided against it.

I don’t have time to wash it out if it gets into my hair. Besides, they’re small enough to not draw too much attention.

Once he felt sufficiently covered, he meditated while it dried. He let his mind wander freely as he waited to be summoned. He thought of the Avatar (Aang) and what he and his friends might be up to. He made a mental road map of where the Aang needs to go. The North Pole was obvious; it is the last Water Tribe stronghold with master waterbenders. After that, however, it’s a little trickier to figure out the best strategy. At some point, he must have dozed off. He startled minutely when there was knocking on his door, “Enter.” The door swung open to reveal his uncle. “It’s time nephew.” His face was grim.

On with the show.

Zuko’s lips quirked slightly before returning to a neutral expression. He nodded at his uncle before standing. Silence hung over them as they walked to the Agni Kai arena. The sky was painted red by the setting sun. He could see a few fire mages standing around the arena to be official witnesses to the outcome. With his head held high, he got into position. His uncle gave him some last words of encouragement, “Remember your basics Prince Zuko, they are your greatest weapon.” Zuko steeled himself, “I won’t fail.”

The gong was rung.

Without delay, Zuko went on the offensive. He sent streams of red-orange flames at Zhao who was on the defensive. He batted each volley of flames away with a grunt. Zuko sent one last large stream of flames at Zhao. The man smirked as he knelt down and used his hands to split the flames around him. In the background, Zuko could hear his uncle calling out to him, “Break his root!”

Zhao looked at Zuko who was panting with exertion, and now Zhao was on the offensive. Zuko could barely keep up with each powerful blast of flames directed at him. With one last blast, Zuko found himself knocked on the ground with Zhao above him about to give the final blow.

No.

Not again.

With a sudden burst of energy, Zuko rolled out the way and knocked Zhao on his back with a well-aimed kick. Zhao quickly got him, but Zuko sent flames from his feet across the ground. The older man had to back up to keep his feet from getting burned. Zuko used this distraction to send balls of flames from his hands. Zhao couldn’t dodge the flames at his feet and disperse the flames aimed at his torse. Soon, it was Zhao on the ground with Zuko standing over him. They stared at each other.

“Do it!”

Zuko sent out a burst of flame that struck just to the left of Zhao’s face.

“That’s it? Your father raised a coward.”

“Get in my way again, and I won’t hold back.” Zuko turned to walk away.

From behind him, he heard Zhao let out a roar of rage. As Zuko turned around, he saw his uncle holding Zhao’s foot with flames still lingering in the air. Zuko went to lunge at Zhao, but his uncle held him back, “No Prince Zuko, do not taint your victory.” Iroh turned to Zhao, “So, this is how the great Commander Zhao acts in defeat? Disgraceful. Even in exile, my nephew has more honor than you. Thanks for the tea. It was delicious.”

As the pair walked out of the arena and back to the ship, Zuko couldn’t help but to ask, “Did you really mean that uncle?” His uncle smiled while glancing at Zuko, “Of course. I said that ginseng tea is my favorite.” Zuko smiled.

Once they were back on the ship, Zuko went to his room.

I actually didn’t die.

Maybe things are looking up now. Maybe most of my problems are behind me.

Their ship was repaired without any more delays, and the crew seemed to have stopped outright avoiding him. As an added bonus, Zhao hasn’t tried to talk to him again. In fact, Zuko hasn’t even seen the man again. Things actually seemed to be going well for him for once.

After their ship was repaired, they set off in search of the Avatar. Everything was going according to plan. As the ship sailed across the ocean, Zuko meditated and planned his future moves. Candles were lit in front of him. With each inhale and exhale, the flames grew and shrank. For act one, all Zuko had to do was herd the Aang to the North Pole so that he and Katara can master waterbending. Act two will be a bit trickier, but Zuko was sure that Aang will find the perfect earthbending teacher on his own. He will worry about act three later.

 That is a future me problem.

As Zuko went further into his meditative state, there was a knock on his door. “Enter.” His uncle came in and tried to appear calming, “I’m afraid I have news about the Avatar, and you are not going to like it. Try not to get too upset.” Zuko took a deep breath and exhaled, the flames of the candles continued to move with each breath, “I am perfectly calm uncle, I’m sure I can handle whatever news you have for me with a clear, level head.” He could feel his uncle’s disbelieving look as he said, “Very well, we have no idea where the Avatar is.”

“What!?” Flames from the candles shot to the ceiling, smoked briefly filled the room. His uncle produced a fan from his sleeve, “You really need to open a window in here.” Zuko noticed the map in his uncle’s other hand. “Give me that!” He opened it up and studied Aang’s chaotic movements and muttered, “Clearly the Avatar is a master at evasive maneuvers.”  

I take back what I said, I just straight up have problems.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age seven)

The Caldera was alive tonight with the sounds of music and laughter. People were crowding the streets, wandering between stalls that were selling various trinkets and food. The paper lanterns were strung overhead, giving everything a warm red and orange glow. Kids were weaving between adults to watch the colorful street performers.

It was all so exciting for Zuko and Azula. Up until this point, they had never been allowed to go to the Fire Lily Festival. Their father didn’t want Zuko to go until he proved he could firebend consistently, and their mother wouldn’t let Azula go unless Zuko got to go too. The stalemate ended a few months ago when Zuko’s trainer reported that he could produce a decent sized flame and could actually start learning the basics. With his standard met, Ozai begrudgingly allowed Ursa to take them to the festival.

The siblings watched from their carriage as children ran with sparklers, teens shared tasty looking treats, and adults enjoyed various drinks. They were so enraptured by what was going on around them that they didn’t realize that the carriage had come to a stop. Ursa chuckled, “Come on you two, why don’t we join the festivities instead of just watching from the carriage?” Both children lit up, their faces rosy from excitement.

As soon as they left the carriage, both children wanted to do different things. Azula pointed to a game both, “I want to do that!” It looked like a target game for firebenders, the whole thing seemed to be geared toward benders with decent levels of control and accuracy. Zuko scowled at that, “I want to go there!” He pointed at a tent that looked like it was about to show a play of some sort. Ursa looked at her two children and could see that an argument was brewing. In order to hopefully stop it before it started, she proposed a compromise, “Azula, how about you choose a game that both of you can enjoy? Afterwards, we can see a play. We may miss the first showing, but it looks like they’ll perform it again later tonight.”

Zuko and Azula exchanged a look before nodding. Azula grabbed Zuko’s hand and raced to a different game booth. This one seemed to be another target one, but this one used throwing knives instead of firebending. The children inspected the potential prizes, and that’s when something caught Zuko’s eye. A small stuffed dragon, small enough to fit in the palm of his hand. It honestly wasn’t something unusual to see in these types of booths from what he’s seen, but this is the only blue one he’s seen so far. The dragon looked so soft; and it had a short, fat body. If it weren’t for it’s small size, it would make a great pillow. He glanced down and saw that Azula was looking at it too.

The booth owner noticed them eyeing the dragon and said, “You have to get 50 points if you want that dragon.” Determination filled Zuko, he could absolutely do this. Azula seemed to be thinking the same thing. Their mother paid for a round for each of them and stepped back to watch. The man quickly gave a rundown of how to win, “Alright kids, you get three knives. You see that target? Each of those four rings will give you a different number of points. The outermost ring will give you 5 points, the next ring 10 points, then 15 points, and the center one 20 points. You only get points if the knife sticks to the target. If the knife hits but falls off you don’t get anything. You two understand?” They nodded eagerly. With that, the booth operator placed six knives in front of them and stepped out of the way.

Azula went first, she carefully arranged her three knives in front of her before sizing up the target. Her first knife landed at the edge of the target. “Five points,” declared the owner. Azula frowned and picked up the second knife. She adjusted her stance and threw it. It landed in the next ring of the target. “10 points. You now have 15 points. One last chance to hit the center.” Scowling, Azula picked up her third and final knife. This time she drastically altered her stance then threw the knife. It landed close to the center, but not close enough. “15 points. You got 30 points in total. Congratulations, here’s your prize.” With a flourish, the man handed Azula a small stuffed turtleduck. She glared down at it but seemed to hold back from setting it on fire.

Now it was Zuko’s turn. He picked up his first knife and inspected the target. With a deep breath, he threw it. It landed in the ring of the target closest to the center. “15 points,” the owner drawled. Zuko picked up his second knife and threw it. “15 points. You now have 30 points. Let’s see if you can hit the center.” If he wanted to win that dragon plushie, he had to hit the center. Azula was watching him with wide eyes.

I can’t let her down.

With strengthened resolve, Zuko picked up his last knife. He lined up his shot and threw it. The knife sailed through the air before embedding into the target. “15 points. You got a total of 45 points. Congratulations, here’s your prize.” The owner handed him a stuffed kamado-rhino. Numbly, Zuko took it.

I don’t understand, I aimed directly at the center of the target. There’s no way I missed.

Azula was still glaring at her prize. Zuko glanced at his before offering it to Azula, “Wanna trade?” She seemed to consider it for a moment before nodding. Ursa watched her children exchange the toys before approaching them, “Do you two want to get some sweets? We still have some time before the play starts.” Any lingering disappointment about not getting the dragon faded, and the children were off pointing out which desserts they wanted to eat first. Ursa smiled softly as both children who seemed to want one of everything, “I think you two will have to settle for one dessert. Maybe we’ll get another after the play.” She was met with matching pouts, but Zuko and Azula ended up choosing what they considered the superior sweets.

“Really Zuzu? Mochi? That’s not even something themed for the festival.”

He stuck his tongue out at her. She returned the gesture while eating her tub tim grob.

As they walked around the stalls, they ate their sweets while watching people play and dance. When they finished, Ursa ushered them to the tent for the play. Azula grumbled about being forced to watch a “dumb play” but didn’t put up too much of a fuss. Zuko, on the other hand, was practically vibrating with excitement. He loved watching plays. The feeling of being transported to another world, getting sucked into the story, being on the edge of his seat of his favorite character tried to overcome some obstacle; he loved it all.

At the theater tent, they were seated in their own private area. Zuko relaxed in his seat as the play started. The play itself was a bit unusual. It seemed to mostly revolve around two characters. One character wanted to try to give the play a bad ending, while the other was fighting to give it a good one. Whichever of these characters was winning at the moment was reflected by how the other characters behaved. In the end, the character focused on making a good ending won, and everyone lived happily ever after. However, the character who made the good ending possible didn’t get recognized at all.

As much as Zuko loved plays, he had a soft spot for bittersweet endings. Happy endings felt forced to him, he said as much to his mother. She laughed, “Zuko, sometimes people need to see something with a happy ending.”

“But why? They’re so lame.”

“They can be sometimes. However, sometimes people need to see the heroes win to remember that they can win too.”

“You make it sound like life is a play.”

“It is in a way. The world is our stage.”

If the world is a stage, what character am I supposed to be?

Even though it was getting late, there was going to be a firework show that was going to start soon. Unfortunately, Zuko and Azula were going to miss it. They whined as their mother tried to usher them onto the carriage. Zuko tried pleading first, “Mother please! Just a few minutes, so we can watch the fireworks as we leave.”

“I’m sorry sweetheart, but we need to go now.”

Azula tried bargaining, “I’ll help Zuko with his firebending if we can wait just a few more minutes!”

“That’s very sweet of you, but we really do need to go.”

The sibling exchanged a look, and a silent conversation passed between them.

Time for a different tactic.

Zuko tried to appeal to his mother’s love of collecting memorabilia, “Don’t you want to get a souvenir too? This was our first time coming to the Fire Lily Festival, don’t you want to get something memorable?” His mother stared at him with a bemused look and a raised eyebrow.

Well, I tried.

Azula piped in, “Yeah, what if father doesn’t let us come next year? Zuko and I have something; you should get something too.” Ursa still had a bemused look, but she was fighting a smile now too. With a sigh, she looked at the nearest stall and said, “Alright, but we are leaving as soon as I get back.” Both children looked at her with wide innocent eyes as they nodded in agreement. As soon as their mother disappeared, Azula grabbed Zuko’s hand and ran down the row of stalls.

“Where are we going?”

“Somewhere to get a better look at the fireworks silly!”

“But mom said…”

“Don’t worry so much Zuzu. We’ll be back before she even knows we’re gone!” They weaved through the crowd and passed several colorful stalls. Both of them raced in and out of alleyways, up and down streets, and squeezed through gaps in buildings. They went further and further into the city looking wide-eyed at everything around them. When they noticed that everyone was standing still, the siblings stopped and looked up.

A hush fell over the crowd, and then the sky lit up with a variety of amazing shapes and colors. The siblings stood in silent awe as they watched the night sky. Explosions in the shapes of dragons, the Fire Nation emblem, phoenixes, and fire lilies covered the sky. Balls of bright colors bathed the city in their light. It felt like Zuko and Azula could stay there forever.

Before they knew it, the show was over, and the crowd cheered before starting to disperse. Parents were carrying their tired children, young adults were making their way to wine vendors, and teens were trying to blend in with the adults in the hopes of getting a drink too. Zuko and Azula stood still in the quickly emptying street.

It quickly dawned on Zuko that he had no idea where he was. Nothing about this part of town looked familiar. Fear was starting to set in now that the excitement was over. He couldn’t see any town guards to ask for help.

“Zuko?” He looked at his sister and could see that she was getting scared too. Zuko plastered on a smile, “Don’t worry. I bet if we retrace our steps, we’ll run into mom or one of the city guards.” Azula huffed and held up her chin, “I’m not scared! I’m just making sure you know what you’re doing.” Zuko rolled his eyes as they started to try to find their way back to their mother.

The streets looked so different now that the crowds were gone and the streets were dark. The once bright colorful boulevards now looked bigger and more dangerous. Zuko held onto Azula’s hand as they cautiously went from one dark road to the next. Azula was squeezing his hand tightly.

At one point it felt like they were walking in circles. Everything looked the same at night. Zuko could feel tears prickle in his eyes. His feet hurt, he’s tired, and he’s scared. One look at Azula told him that she wasn’t much better. He scrubbed his eyes with a fist and continued on.

As they passed an alleyway, they saw three guards talking to each other. Relief washed over Zuko and Azula seemed to relax too. Together they approached the group. As they got closer, Zuko realized that the guards were acting strangely. They were huddled together instead of patrolling and one of them seemed to be holding something close to his chest. Also, they seemed to be having some sort of argument while motioning at whatever the other one is holding. A strange feeling was growing in Zuko’s stomach. Before he could turn around, Azula called out, “Guards! As members of the royal family, we demand you return us to the palace!” The guards’ heads snapped in their direction.

Zuko took in their appearance the best he could in the dark alley, but the shadows and their face plates made it difficult. One guard who was the tallest spoke up, “Excuse me?” Azula raised her nose at them and said, “I am Princess Azula, granddaughter of Fire Lord Azulon, and I demand that you assist us in returning to the palace.” The guards looked at each other then back at them. Another guard who was the shortest tried to appear casual as he asked, “How did you two end up here?” Zuko stared at the third guard who was holding what he realized was a decent sized bag. Before Azula could answer the short guard, Zuko asked, “What’s in the bag?”

The guards fell silent, and the air became tense. Azula seemed to be catching on that something was wrong, she tried to order, “Your prince asked you a question, you better answer!” The guards shared another look before the one holding the bag said, “It’s just some snack from the festival, nothing to worry about. Why don’t you two follow us, and we can get you back home.”

That feeling of danger seemed to be screaming in Zuko’s mind, and Azula was starting to slowly retreat. The tall guard started to walk towards them. Zuko tightly gripped Azula’s hand as he retreated backwards.

I need to protect Azula.

The tall guard took a few quick long strides forward as he reached out to grab them; but Zuko dodged the hand and started to run, dragging Azula behind him. The guards let out a shout as they started to chase them. Zuko could feel his heart racing as he ran as fast as he could. He sped through street after street, hoping to find help. Everything was deserted and quiet now. Almost weirdly quiet.

His heart pounded in his ears as he rounded a corner and ducked behind a trash pile with Azula. She scrunched her face at the smell but stayed quiet. They huddled together as small as possible in the darkness. Zuko listened intently for the sound of the guards, but he heard nothing except the distant sound of night birds and insects. Zuko held his breath as he waited.

After a while, he turned to Azula and whispered, “Stay here, I’m going to check to see if they’re gone.” Azula gripped his shirt and shook her head, “Don’t go!” Zuko pried her fingers loose, “I’ll be right back. Don’t come out unless I tell you to.” With that, Zuko carefully crawled out from behind the pile. Inch by inch, he made his way to the entrance of the alley. He held his breath as he peaked around the corner. A hand snatched him and pulled him out into the open.

He thrashed violently and spat small flames as he was hoisted up. The guard who held him cursed but didn’t drop Zuko. Before Zuko could scream, the guard covered his mouth. The other two guards came around the corner out of breath. The guard with the bag hissed, “Where’s the other one?” The one holding Zuko said, “Check the alley, I saw him poke his head out from there.”

Panicking, Zuko began to struggle. The guard holding him cursed under his breath. “Stop struggling! If you do what we say, we’ll let you go. We promise.” Zuko had a sinking feeling that he was lying and continued to try to call out for help. His cries were muffled, and the guard pinning him became increasingly frustrated. “Shut up! Do you hear me?”

Zuko began to cry as the guard began to violently shake him. He could hear the other two guards digging through the alley looking for Azula. With another violent shake, Zuko’s head cracked against the stone wall he was pinned to. He could feel something wet running down the back of his head, and he started to feel funny. Almost like he was spinning even though he wasn’t moving. His mind became hazy.

He heard a scuffle from the alley. Small flames lit up the area. They found Azula. She came out into the open and looked at him. She looked so scared, but also so angry. With a battle cry, she lunged at the guard pinning Zuko. Flames danced in her hands as she grabbed onto one of the guard’s arms. He let out a howl of pain and dropped Zuko. Dizzy, Zuko touched the back of his head then inspected his hand.

Blood.

Azula was yelling and throwing flames all over the place. The guard who had pinned Zuko batted her flames away and grabbed her. The commotion had to have woken up some of the nearby residents, but no one had come out yet. The buildings were all dark. Zuko forced himself up and stumbled to Azula’s aid. The guard started to shake and scream at Azula. Zuko didn’t pay attention to what he was saying, all that mattered was getting to his sister.

Just as he reached them, the guard pulled a knife. Zuko watched as everything seemed to slow down.

He watched as the guard plunged the knife straight into Azula’s stomach.

The guard dropped her onto the ground and turned to him.

People were now coming to their aid.

Someone tackled the guard who stabbed Azula.

Another person knocked out the guard with the bag.

The other guard had run off.

Azula wasn’t moving.

Zuko collapsed and crawled to her.

Her eyes were open, but she wasn’t blinking.

Blood was everywhere.

She’s dead.

He felt numb.

This can’t be the end.

On the ground was the bag.

He opened it.

Vials of strange liquid and gold coins.

Is this why they killed her?

Zuko picked up one of the vials.

It had a symbol for poison on it.

I died before and came back. Maybe if I die now, Azula will come back too.

Taking a deep breath, Zuko uncorked the vial and drank the contents.

It tasted sweet at first, then became bitter.

He laid down next to Azula and waited.

Someone was grabbing him, but he held on tight to his sister.

People were shouting.

His limbs felt numb.

Everything went silent.

Darkness.

He woke up in his bed. Everything felt hazy as his mind started to piece back together the memories of what happened yesterday.

Or is it today?

He stayed in his bed, afraid to confront the possibility that he failed. Zuko could still feel the warmth of his sister’s blood on his hands, the feeling of her cooling body in his arms. The sun rose higher into the sky. His door flung open. Blearily he glanced over.

It worked.

Standing in his doorway was Azula. Her arms were crossed, and she was glaring at him.

 Does she remember anything?

She marched up to his bed and demanded, “Are you seriously going to stay in bed all day after father gave us permission to go to the Fire Lily Festival?” He blinked at her. She rolled her eyes, “Did you already forget? You are such a dumb dumb.” Tears started to prick his eyes.

She doesn’t remember.

Before Azula could react, Zuko grabbed her and pulled her into his bed. He hugged her the best he could, but she immediately started squirming and howling outraged. “Let me go!” She started pounding her small fists against him. He just squeezed her tighter as he started to shake. After a few more seconds of struggling, Azula seemed to realize that she wasn’t going anywhere. With an annoyed huff, she glared at Zuko, “What is wrong with you?” He really didn’t know how to explain it. How do you tell someone that you watched them be killed then killed yourself to bring them back?

She won’t understand.

He murmured, “I had a bad dream.” She glared and frowned at him, “So? What does that have to do with you holding me hostage?” He huffed a wet laugh, “It’s called a hug, and it was about you.” Azula wrinkled her nose, “Gross.” He let out another laugh, “The hug part or the dream being about you part?” Without missing a beat, “The hug of course. What was the dream about?”

Zuko rolled his eyes and hugged her tighter out of spite, and she elbowed his side in retaliation. He tried to pick his words carefully, “I watched someone hurt you and there was nothing I could do.” Azula pulled away the best she could and studied his face for a moment, her eyes squinting like she was trying to find something. After a minute she elbowed him hard, and Zuko let out a pained groan that gave Azula the opportunity to escape his clutches. Now free of her brother, she sat up and crossed her arms, “You are such a dummy. I don’t need you to protect me. I’m already a better firebender than you, and if you ever try to fight for me I’ll set your script collection on fire.”

That’s just mean.

Zuko pouted as he rubbed his side. With a satisfied nod, Azula got off his bed and started walking to the door. She turned just before leaving, “You better get up soon or father will change his mind.” With that, she left and closed his door.

He rolled out of bed and walked to his mirror.

Is there going to be a new scar? Where would it even be?

He tried to look at the back of his head where he knew he was bleeding but couldn’t find anything there. He even checked the inside of his mouth, but that looked normal too. The scar on his abdomen was still there, but he couldn’t find a trace of any new scars.

Maybe only what kills me leaves a scar and poison doesn’t leave a mark?

Zuko gave up searching and started to get ready for the day. He ate breakfast with his mother and tried to act like nothing had happened. Later he spent time with his tutors and tried to pay attention to their lessons. Lunch went by without an issue, and so did his firebending training. Everything seemed to follow the same path as it did before.

When the sun began to set, his mother summoned him and Azula. It was time to leave for the festival. Zuko could feel anxiety rolling in his stomach, but he got into the carriage with his mother and sister. He sat quietly as they made their way into the city and tried to figure out how to save his sister.

Azula was staring out the window in excitement and awe as the decorations came into view, and Zuko tried to mimic her expressions. He clearly wasn’t doing a good job because his mother was giving him worried looks. Zuko tried to give her a bright smile to reassure her, but she only gave him a tightlipped look.

Soon the carriage came to a stop, and their mother ushered them out. Azula was excitedly looking around at all the stalls. Zuko was looking at all the faceless guards. Just like before, they ended up at the throwing knife game booth. As Azula started to throw her knives, Zuko inspected the target. He still couldn’t accept that his last knife didn’t hit the center.

He tried to look at it from every angle he could, but the walls of the booth kept him from giving the target a thorough inspection. Frowning, Zuko got in best angle he could find as Azula threw her last knife.

There.

The knife hit something that prevented it from imbedding into the center and made it hit the ring next to it. Zuko knew that most of these games at the festival were rigged against the player, but he really wanted to get that blue dragon this time. He had to out cheat a cheater.

Mind made up, Zuko stepped up to the booth for his turn. His first knife sailed through the air before landing in the 15-point zone. The second knife had the same fate. Now it was time to be a little sneaky. He pretended to drop his last knife on the ground and bent down to grab it. While out of the operator’s sight, Zuko heated the blade. He hoped that this would either break whatever was blocking the center of the target or the knife would embed into it. Either way, Zuko will get that dragon.

He quickly stood back up, took aim, and let the blade fly. With a loud ‘clank!’, the blade just barely embedded itself into the center of the target.

50 points to me.

Azula cheered, Ursa clapped, and Zuko gave a not-so-subtle smug smirk to the operator. The operator stood there in shock before his face started to turn multiple shades of red in barely concealed rage. There was nothing the man could say or do without admitting the game was rigged. Through clenched teeth he said, “Congratulations kid, here’s your prize.” He practically shoved the blue dragon into Zuko’s outstretched hands.

Now that Zuko had a closer look, the dragon looked a bit weird. Its eyes were a little lopsided, one wing was slightly bigger than the other, and it looked like two different shades of blue fabric were haphazardly stitched together; but it was so soft and squishy liked he hoped it would be. He looked over at Azula who was enviously eyeballing his prize. The echoes of her cries bounced around in his head. Mind made up, he decided to trade. Besides, Azula will probably sneak into his room and take the dragon anyway; so, he might as well trade now to guarantee that he gets a plushie.

With a small smile he turned to Azula, “Do you want to trade?” She gave him a shocked look, “Why?” He shrugged and said, “I like the way the turtleduck looks.” Azula gave him a calculated look but decided not to question him further. She quickly snatched the dragon out of his offered hand and shoved the turtleduck into its place. Her eyes sparkled and her smile was huge as she looked down at the dragon. The image of her crying and burning the guard restraining him jumped into his mind.

She may not remember trying to save me, but I think this still counts as a ‘thank you’.

Just as Ursa was herding her children back to the carriage, Zuko froze. He heard a set of familiar voices. Turning toward them, he saw those three guards standing at a food stall. They were lurking awkwardly like they were waiting for someone or something. Zuko looked at his mother who was busy ushering a resisting Azula, then he looked back at the guards.

While Ursa wasn’t looking, Zuko snuck away to figure out what they were up to. He got as close as he dared and tried to listen to their conversation. It was hard to make out what all they were saying over the noises of the festival, but he was determined to figure out what was so important that they had killed Azula to keep it a secret.

He hid against the side of the nearest stall and listened intently. The first voice he made out he believed belonged to the guard who held the bag, “Just relax, act natural, pretend like you’re enjoying the festival. As long as we don’t draw attention to ourselves, no one will suspect us.”

Suspect you of what?

The guard that sounded like the short one replied, “Easier said than done. There are too many potential witnesses here. If even one of them catches us or even becomes suspicious…” There was some hushed whispering between the three that Zuko couldn’t make out, but he could tell that the short one was nervous. He said, “Look, it’s no secret that we don’t like that guy. All I’m saying is that there’s a real possibility that we’re going to be questioned. We need to get our stories straight.”

Contrary to whatever Azula may claim, Zuko wasn’t stupid. It didn’t take a genius to figure out that these guards were either planning on killing someone or they already did. He was about to flag down a royal guard when he heard the tall one say, “If it will make you feel better, once the fireworks start, we can pour whatever we have left into random wine barrels. There’ll be so many victims that it’ll be impossible for anything to lead back to us.”

Zuko remembered the weirdly empty and quiet streets.

How many people died?

The short guard spoke again, breaking Zuko out of his train of thought, “Okay…okay that’ll probably work, but I still think we should keep a few vials just in case.” They grumbled amongst themselves before seeming to come to an agreement. Zuko had heard more than enough.

He quietly backed away from the trio before he felt he got far away enough to start sprinting to the royal guards. His mother was looking around franticly as she searched the crowd for him.

I am in so much trouble.

As he came into her line of sight, she exclaimed, “Zuko! Where were you? What are you doing?” He rushed past her and straight to the highest-ranking guard. His mother called out to him again, gearing up to give him a lecture about something safety related that Zuko didn’t have time for. Just as she opened her mouth to start the lecture, Zuko interrupted her, “Mom we don’t have time for this. Guard, those three over there in city guard uniforms are planning to poison a bunch of wine barrels as soon as the firework show starts. The poison is a liquid in vials that the one in the middle has in a bag. I think they already killed someone and are hoping to cover it up.”

Everyone stared at him silently. None of the guards were moving, but they were giving each other looks. His mother sighed, “Zuko…” Indignant rage filled Zuko, “I know what I heard! Just ask them to show you what’s in the bag. If I’m wrong then I’ll get the lecture of a lifetime; but if I’m right and you don’t look, a bunch of people are going to die.”

Zuko held his head high as he stared as confidently as he could into the eyes of the officer. The man pursed his lips before letting out a sigh, “Very well your highness, if it will bring you peace, I’ll question them.” The trio were still hanging around that food stall, unaware of the trouble Zuko was bringing to them.

He watched as the officer and a couple of other guards approached the trio. His mother was trying to pull him into the carriage, “No mom, I want to watch.” His eyes were wide open, taking in all that was happening in front of him. He didn’t want to miss a single second. In fact, he wanted to hear what was going on as well. Without a word, Zuko bolted as close as he could and ignored his mother’s calls.

If I survive this, I’m going to be grounded for an eternity.

He came to a stop and crouched behind a makeshift table and chairs. This time he was a lot closer and could hear everything. The officer from the royal guard spoke, “Good afternoon soldiers. How has your evening been so far? Any unruly drunks?” The trio startled but the tall guard replied, “No sir, everything been relatively peaceful so far.” The officer hummed and casually stated, “These festivals always seem to attract some sort of trouble. I remember a few years ago some drunk had the bright idea of sabotaging some of the fireworks. They ended up killing themselves and setting a few buildings on fire. You never know what people are willing to do when they have a little too much wine.”

The short guard was fidgeting and was obviously looking for a way out, “Of course sir. We’ll make sure to stay vigilant.” The guard holding the bag was trying his best to not draw attention to it, but he seemed to be having trouble looking at the officer while also trying to stuff the bag under his armor. The officer stared at them for a while until one of the guards he brought with him whispered something into his ear. The officer frowned and made eye contact with the guard holding the bag, “I was informed that you three may have something suspicious in that bag, why don’t you show me what’s in there.”

All three men tensed. The short one looked ready to run, the tall one looked ready to fight, and the one with the bag tried to deflect, “Sir, it’s just my coin purse. There’s nothing in here besides what it’s meant to carry and a few odd trinkets.” The officer crossed his arms, “I’m not asking you to show me, I’m telling you.” At some point more guards had started to surround the trio. All the civilians had left the area except for Zuko who was still in his hiding spot.

The tension in the air was almost unbearable. Zuko held his breath as he watched the royal guards plus the additional guards size up the trio who realized that they were effectively cornered. Chaos erupted. The tall one attacked where there appeared to be a gap in formation and was trying to fight his way through them. The short one bolted through an opening created by the fighting but found himself cornered by the reinforcements that were responding to the commotion. The one that held the bag also tried to run but was tackled by the officer Zuko sent.

They fought over the bag, yanking it back and forth until it ripped open. Vials and coins rolled across the ground. By this point, the tall and short guards were captured and completely restrained. The officer bent down and picked up one of the vials. His face darkened. He started barking out orders to the other guards in rapid succession. There was a flurry of action as the trio were carted off and other guards began to swarm the area. Zuko couldn’t keep up, but all he needed to know was that everyone was safe. Just as he was about to return to his mother, his foot kicked something. He looked down. It was one of the vials. Without thinking, he grabbed it and stuffed it into his pocket.

As he made his way back to his mother and sister he felt relieved that nothing bad would happen tonight. Again at least. His feelings of relief dried up when he saw the look on his mother’s face.

I am so dead.

She frowned at him and Zuko gave her a meek, apologetic smile. Ursa said nothing and got into the carriage. Azula and Zuko looked at each other before following their mother. As the carriage began its journey back to the palace, their mother had a grim look on her face as she looked out the window. Zuko hoped that if he kept his head down and stayed quiet, then his mother will be less angry when they get back to the palace. Azula appeared to be thinking hard about something before giving up and asking, “Zuzu how did you know that those guards were bad?”

Zuko panicked for a moment before replying, “Oh. Well…I overheard them talking about their plan.” Azula rolled her eyes, “I know that dummy. I meant, what made you go to those guards to listen in the first place?”

“Oh…um…they were acting weird? I didn’t really know what they were up to, but there was something about them that gave me a bad feeling.”

That’s kind of true.

 I just left out the part where they killed her.

Azula studied him for a second before huffing, “You’re so weird.” He squawked and was about to argue when he glanced at his mother. She looked worried, her hands were clenched in her lap. Instead of rising to Azula’s insult, he decided to ask, “What are you going to name your dragon?” She sniffed and lifted her nose, “It doesn’t need one. Only babies name their toys!”

She absolutely already named it.

He not-so-innocently smiled and questioned, “But babies can’t talk, so how would they name their toys?” Azula’s face turned red as she spluttered, “I don’t mean literal babies, dumb dumb!” They bickered back and forth about what age a kid stopped being a baby and whether or not it was okay to name toys after that cut off.

They didn’t reach an agreement, but they did move on to which plushie was the best. They pointedly ignored the snickering from some of the royal guards that were close enough to listen. This was an important conversation after all. The whole time their mother said nothing. In fact, it looked like she wasn’t even paying attention.

Finally, the carriage pulled up to the entrance of the palace. Zuko tried to sneak off, but his mother stopped him with one look. They all made their way into the family wing of the palace when Ursa dismissed her daughter. Azula hesitated for a moment before leaving and sending Zuko one last pitying look. Ursa stared at her son for what felt like an eternity to Zuko. She sighed before motioning him to follow her.

Later that night, Zuko sat on his bed looking down at the vial of poison in his hand.

Well, I was right. I am grounded an eternity.

Two weeks is practically forever!

There was a knock at his door, and he lifted his head in confusion. It was way too late for visitors, and he was positive his family were all asleep. He quickly shoved the vial into his pocket before making his way to his door. Zuko opened it and didn’t see anyone, but then he looked down. There was a small package. Intrigued, he picked it up and took it into his room then sat it on his desk.

He inspected the box, but there wasn’t anything remarkable about it. It was just a plain, brown box. Zuko then carefully opened it and peered inside. Surprise and delight took over his face. Inside was a container with a variety of mochi and what appeared to be some play scripts. He was about to tear into both when he noticed a note. Now more than a little curious, he opened the note and began to read aloud, “Your highness, your actions today saved so many lives. It takes a lot of courage to hold firmly to what you know is right when everyone else tries to dismiss you. That said, your actions were also incredibly dangerous. As a father myself, I’d probably ground my children for the rest of their lives; however, if you were one of my subordinates, I’d put in a recommendation for a medal. Since you aren’t one of my subordinates, I managed to put together a package of contraband for you to enjoy. Sincerely, Sato.”

Zuko couldn’t help but smile and beam with pride as he started to eat his mochi. As he started to read the scripts Sato gave him, he began to think of the play he saw at the festival.

That character who was trying to help the heroes get a good ending never got any medals either.

Maybe I can help people get a good ending too.

(Present)

Zuko and his uncle sat in the dining room on his ship as their lunch was being served to them. Iroh was sipping his tea and thanked the cook for the delicious feast. Zuko, on the other hand, was lost in thought. There hasn’t been a sighting of Aang since he and his group left the South Pole. Part of him worried that something had happened to them, but he was mostly certain that the Avatar was simply doing strategic maneuvering or laying low.

As Zuko stewed, the cook cleared his throat, “Sir, while I was at in the market I heard some gossip that may interest you.” Zuko looked up at the cook and waited for the man to continue. He cleared his throat before resuming, “Supposedly the Avatar is on Kyoshi Island.” As soon as the words left the man’s mouth, Zuko leapt to his feet and exclaimed, “The Avatar’s on Kyoshi Island?! We need to adjust of course.” He started to march out of the room when he heard his uncle ask, “Are you going to finish that?” He immediately turned around and grabbed his plate of food, “I’m saving it for later!” His uncle pouted, but Zuko ignored him.

He marched his way up to the helm and gave his orders to change course to Kyoshi Island. The helm’s man bowed and steered the ship. With that done, Zuko turned to the nearest crew member, “Tell the rest of the crew that we will be landing on Kyoshi Island tomorrow.” The man bowed before turning to leave. Zuko knew that they could technically get there later today, but he really wanted the inevitable fighting to be as early in the day as possible.

The less things I have to keep track of the better. I don’t want something to get messed up just because I said the wrong thing to the wrong person at the wrong time.

Zuko spent the rest of the day ensuring that his crew were properly prepared. Everything had to be perfect or at least appear to be perfect. He was beginning to realize that it was a lot harder than he thought it would be to act like a convincing villain while also not actually trying to hurt anyone and try to pull the strings from the background. His crew’s spears needed to be strong enough to protect their wielder, but weak enough to not cause serious damage. His crew needed to stay safe, but he cannot allow them to seriously hurt anyone. Most importantly no one, including his uncle, could ever find out what he was doing.

By the time night fell, Zuko had gone over everything that he would bring onto the island multiple times to the point that his uncle took it upon himself to reassure him. “Nephew, I am sure the armor has not gotten any weaker since you checked it an hour ago.” With a huff, Zuko decided it was time to retire to his room or else be forced to drink tea and listen to his uncle’s proverbs.

Once safely shut away, Zuko got ready for sleep. He knew he needed to be prepared to die at least once. If his previous experience with them taught him anything, it was that the Water Tribe siblings were great at killing him accidently.

The first thing he did was put on warm sleep clothes. Sure, it was uncomfortable for him now, but it did help chase away the cold of death. Second, he lit some strong-smelling incense. It didn’t really matter what scent, and it didn’t always work, but it did help if his death included some sort of strong smell. Third, he pulled the blanket off his bed. He wasn’t entirely certain there weren’t any earthbenders on Kyoshi Island, so he wanted to get rid of anything that could make him feel buried just in case. Fourth, he made sure to light candles that made his room reasonably well illuminated. The less darkness, the better. Fifth, he grabbed a piece of thick, smooth leather and put it in his mouth. There was a strong possibility that he would die multiple times, and he knew that certain types of deaths could cause him to make a variety of sounds when he woke up that could draw unwanted attention. Finally, he made sure that his clock faced the bed. Sufficiently prepared, Zuko laid down and went to sleep.

The next morning, Zuko carefully took note of everything he did as he got ready to land on Kyoshi Island. He greeted his uncle, ate breakfast, brushed off an invitation to tea, put on his armor (with helmet just in case), and waited on deck for the perfect moment. It was early afternoon when everything was in place. Zuko gave the order for the ship to approach the island.

They landed and dismounted their ship on kamado-rhinos. Zuko was almost surprised by the lack of resistance as they made their way into the village. Suddenly, green clad warriors descended upon them. They quickly and efficiently knocked his crew off their steeds and relieved them of their spears. Zuko looked around for Aang and his friends.

I know they’re here somewhere.

That’s when he spotted a Kyoshi Warrior that seemed a bit…different from the other ones. He squinted his eyes at them.

Is that…Sokka?

 His mind blanked for a second.

Huh.

Zuko shook his head and refocused on the fighting around him. In the distance, he could see Katara making her way toward him.

Absolutely not.

I have no desire to get impaled again thank you very much.

He quickly turned to face Sokka and started fighting. With careful movements, he pushed them away from Katara in a way that Zuko will adamantly claim was not running away. He was so focused on pushing his fight with Sokka away from Katara that he didn’t notice a Kyoshi Warrior sneak up behind him.

It was quick.

The feeling of a blade tearing through the skin of his neck.

Copper filled his mouth.

Surprise colored his face.

Sokka looked surprised too.

Zuko turned to see a Kyoshi Warrior with an ornate head dress holding a fan.

His blood was on it.

He fell over.

Blood quickly pooled around him.

Cold numbness raced up his limbs.

The echoes of fighting faded.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up with a strangled groan. The strong taste of leather covered up the distant taste of blood. His warmth of his nightclothes chased away the coldness of death and blood-loss. The dying light of the candles chased away the lingering darkness. He looked at the clock, took note of the time, and then started to try to feel alive again.

Well of all the ways I could have died today, I wasn’t expecting that. Okay, don’t fight Sokka or at least don’t fight him that long. Got it.

After somewhat recovering, he went to his mirror to inspect his reflection. The scar was on the front of his neck and slightly higher than the one Sokka gave him at the South Pole. It was relatively thin and white. If Zuko looked straight ahead, you wouldn’t even be able to tell that there’s a scar. However, as soon as he moved his head, the scar tissue bunched up and became obvious. Unfortunately, some of the scar went above the neckline of his uniform. He would need to apply the coverup paste every day.

Why couldn’t she have cut lower on my neck like Sokka? How inconsiderate.

 If you’re going to give me a scar, at least make it easy to hide.

Zuko finally left his room and restarted the day. He went through all the motions that he did before. Now he wasn’t caught off-guard when the Kyoshi Warriors ambushed them though he still played the part. Now this is where he knew he needed to change things up.

He refused to look at Sokka and he actively moved toward where Katara was.

If I have learned anything from the last few deaths, it’s that I should not move away from whatever can kill me.

Katara spotted him and immediately geared up to attack. Zuko prepared to take whatever blast of ice or water she sent but realized that Katara was aiming at stopping his kamado-rhino. However, her attacks didn’t seem to stop the animal. In fact, Zuko would argue that they seemed to enrage it. It got so angry that it bucked Zuko off and started to charge. He landed hard on his back, and it took him a moment to sit up.

When he did, the sight that greeted him made him feel both manic and numb.

Oh.

It appeared that after the kamado-rhino bucked him off, it had charged at Katara. She had probably never fought one before, so she had no idea how to properly dodge.

That’s not good.

He stared at the gaping hole in her abdomen.

Blood was pooling on the ground.

Her eyes were empty.

She wasn’t moving.

He heard Sokka scream.

Zuko watched him run to her side.

Sokka was pleading with her to wake up.

Begged her to be okay.

Zuko stood up with a sigh.

Time to reset the stage.

He was about to do just that when he saw Sokka make an aborted motion like he was trying to grab something off his back. It took a second for Zuko to remember a very specific item that Sokka had. The numb acceptance in his mind made him feel detached from the events around him. He knew he really shouldn’t do this, that this was not a good time, but he just had to know, “What’s the name of the weapon you threw at me that hit me in the head at the South Pole?”

Sokka gaped at him, tears were making their way down his face. He was still holding his sister’s cooling body. Rage overcame his features as he charged Zuko and slammed him against a wall. “What is wrong with you? You killed my sister and that’s all you have to say?!”

Technically a kamado-rhino killed her, but I have a feeling he won’t appreciate me pointing that out.

“Yes, very sad. Anyway, what’s it called?” If Zuko was judging the look Sokka was giving him correctly, he might not even need to use the poison. With a shout Sokka exclaimed, “It’s a boomerang! Are you happy now?!” Zuko quickly twisted out of Sokka’s grip before stating, “Actually yes, it was bothering me.” He looked at Katara’s body then looked back at Sokka and attempted to sound comforting, “Don’t worry, this all temporary. She’ll be all better soon and you won’t remember any of this.”

Sokka went from looking murderous to confused. Zuko took out his poison and quickly downed it. The expression on Sokka’s face was best described as uneasy, “What was that? What did you just drink?” With a smile Zuko replied, “Poison of course. I’m resetting the stage.”

Mortified.

That’s what could best describe Sokka’s expression.

Numbness climbed up his limbs.

He fell onto the ground.

Sokka was shaking him.

He was yelling questions that Zuko couldn’t understand.

Zuko smiled.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up with a choked off noise. Once again the taste, the smell, the light, and the warmth helped ground him. His mind felt torn at the seams. Angry blue eyes haunted his vision.

Okay don’t try to fight Sokka too long or approach Katara on a kamado-rhino. Got it.

Maybe I need to actively hunt Aang this time.

His legs shook as he stood up and started the day once again.

Zuko traced all his previous steps back to Kyoshi Island. This time, he did his best to avoid both Katara and Sokka with mixed results. He ended up engaging with Sokka for a bit but was able to quickly get away. In the scuffle, he lost his helmet, but he didn’t think too much of it. Sokka didn’t have his boomerang, so Zuko felt that his skull was safe for now. The sounds of conflict surrounded him as he made his way to the center of town. As if waiting for him, Aang stood there. Zuko went into attack, but he quickly found himself flying through a wooden wall of a nearby house.  

Groaning, Zuko got up and immediately started to chase Aang down. His crew noticed and followed him. He could see Aang heading to the water and watched as he took off in the air on his glider. Zuko tried to catch him, but he was just out of reach.

Zuko watched him land on his bison and fly away from the island. That’s when Zuko noticed something moving in the water. Something enormous. He looked down and realized that in his pursuit, he had entered the water. Not very far, just past his knees, but his armor and underclothes were quickly becoming waterlogged. The massive creature was making a beeline for him and the crew members that had followed him into the water. With a shout, “Get out! Get out of the water!” Zuko started to move as fast as he could to shore. Some of the crew made it to the beach and watched helplessly as the creature closed in on everyone else. A dorsal fin rose from the water, casting an ominous shadow over all of them. Zuko was almost at the shore, each step felt heavier than the last. Water weighed down every step. His heart was hammering in his ears.

With an ear-piercing roar, the creature breached the surface.

Zuko realized he wouldn’t make it.

He reached for his poison.

A sudden wave hit him as the creature lunged.

He dropped it.

No.

An open mouth scooped him and some of the crew that were unfortunate enough to be nearby into its mouth.

Zuko slipped past its teeth.

Whatever crew members it caught did not.

Screams.

Crunching bones.

Gurgled last breathes.

The smell of blood and fish.

Zuko tried shooting fire.

Water filled the creature’s mouth in response.

It swallowed.

Darkness.

Tight, slimy walls forcing him down.

He couldn’t move.

He couldn’t see.

His skin was burning.

The noxious smell of stomach acid made him gag.

He was pushed through an opening.

The smell was stronger.

He went in feet first and went under.

Burning.

Boiling.

He screamed.

It was dark.

Things were bumping into him.

He continued to scream.

He couldn’t breathe.

His armor melted off.

The pain was overwhelming.

The creature’s movement tossed him around.

Stomach acid covered him.

He kept going under.

His skin began to fall off.

He could barely move.

He vomited.

His nails fell out.

He couldn’t think.

He screamed and screamed.

It never ended.

Agony.

Darkness.

He woke up screaming.

The taste of leather just barely registered. He bit down hard. His flesh was burning, he could still feel it melting. Zuko’s muffled screams filled his room. When he inhaled the smell of incense filling his nose made him pause. Then the light in his eyes let him see his surroundings. A clock sat next to him, ticking off the seconds.

I’m in my room.

He panted on his bed, body completely limp. His throat was raw, and his body stung in ways it shouldn’t be anymore. That didn’t matter, all he could focus on was breathing and the feeling of his heart pounding in his chest. Laughter forced its way up his throat. He bit down harder on the leather. Still, laughter shook his body until tears formed in his eyes. He laughed until he started to sob.

In the silence of his room, Zuko sobbed. Eventually, he felt the broken pieces of his mind attempt to slot themselves back together. He knew he needed to get up, needed to go to Kyoshi Island, needed to chase Aang. Zuko knew all of this, but he also needed to collect himself or he’ll end up right back here.

That was…an experience.

Do I taste good or something? This is like the third time I’ve been eaten by something, and one of those is at the top of my list of worst deaths ever.

A crazed smile stretched across his face as he snorted at his own thoughts.

Okay, let’s go over what we learned for today’s portion of the play: don’t fight Sokka for too long or approach Katara, and don’t go into the water because a giant water monster will eat you.

With wheezing breathes, Zuko spat out the leather and forced himself out of bed. He looked down at his feet and inspected the bottom of them. Burn scars on the balls of his feet, but these looked different from his other burns. The scars looked like they were melting, like the skin didn’t get enough time to heal before he woke up. Zuko couldn’t think of any other way to describe them. He prodded at them to test if he could feel anything, it tickled. With a sigh he put his shoes on.

On the way out of his room he couldn’t fight the smile that he knew looked a little crazy, so he tried to make it look like a grimace. Judging by the look on his uncle’s face, it might only be fifty percent effective. Once again, he made his way to the island though he did keep a sharp eye on the water as they landed.

Okay people, from the top. Let’s get it right this time.

Zuko fought but didn’t pursue Sokka, ignored Katara, fought Aang, and this time decided to ride his kamado-rhino with his crew back to his ship instead of chasing Aang. On their way back to the ship, slimy water rained from the sky. Familiar smelling slimy water. Bile rose up his throat. He swallowed and gritted his teeth. His face twitched as he did everything in his power to not freak out. Luckily, they made it back to his ship without any further incidents. He glared at the water as he boarded when he thought he heard something splashing below.

I am not fish food, so stay down there where you belong.

His uncle greeted him, “Zuko, glad to see you have returned safely. Am I to assume the Avatar got away?”

Safe. Right. It only took four tries, but sure.

Instead, Zuko said, “I’m going to take a bath. Make sure the helm’s man goes in the direction of the Avatar and don’t disturb me unless something catastrophic happens.” He brushed past his uncle and stiffly walked to his room. As quickly as he could, he stripped out of his slimy armor and underclothes. He forced his breathing to be as slow and deep as possible even as he felt panic clawing at his throat. Instead of hot water, he kept the water cool. The idea of sitting in hot liquid did not appeal to him at the moment.

He scrubbed his body until his skin turned dark pink. Anything to make that slimy feeling go away. Eventually, he found himself leaning back and relaxing. Sure, his mind still felt like it was in shambles; but he could feel the pieces slowly coming back together. The seams of his psyche were slowly mending, though he could feel where things weren’t lining up quite right.

Zuko started to think of the Avatar. It was pretty obvious to him that Aang had to have been on that island for at least a few days, if not longer, before word got back to his ship. He only left because Zuko forced him to. Zuko hummed as he began to smile.

Apparently the characters will idle unless they are given direction and motivation. Well, tragedy does tend to move the plot along.

As long as it doesn't involve me being eaten again, I think I can work with this.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age twelve)

Zuko sat on his bed with hands folded in front of his face. It was nearly midnight, and he really should be sleeping right now, but he also knew that this was the perfect time to do this. He stared down at the vial of poison. There was a very real possibility that it’s too old to be effective, and it’ll just make him sick.

This is either the smartest or stupidest thing I have ever done.

He picked up the bottle and downed its bitter-sweet liquid. Afterwards, he laid back on his bed and stared at his clock. He had to know.

His limbs became numb.

Coldness spread throughout his body.

He couldn’t breathe.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up groaning and blearily looked around. The coldness that still haunted him made his limbs feel stiff. Fog clouded his mind. It took him a moment to reorient himself. Once he felt somewhat normal, he took note of everything and looked at his clock.

It’s 6 o’clock.

Okay so test number one was a success. Apparently, I don’t need to be or feel like I’m in any danger for this to work.

He sat up on his bed and watched the hands on his clock gradually tick off the passage of time. After an hour had passed, he picked up the vial and downed the contents again. Once again, he lay back and waited.

Numbness spread over his limbs.

Coldness creeped into his fingers and toes.

He couldn’t move.

He couldn’t breathe.

Darkness.

This time he woke up whining in discomfort. His mind felt split open and raw. Darkness swirled across his vision. His limbs felt numb from the cold. It took what he felt like forever for his mind to clear. He looked at the clock. It was 6 o’clock.

Okay, this could mean that this is the time I’ll always come back to. I need to make sure.

Immediately, Zuko rolled over onto his stomach and clumsily grabbed his poison from inside his nightstand. It took him a moment to uncork it, but he immediately swallowed it as soon as he could. He didn’t have the energy or coordination to roll back over, so he stayed sprawled on his stomach.

Icy numbness squeezed his heart.

His lungs froze.

The feeling of pin pricks traveled across his limbs.

A brief period of discomfort.

Darkness.

He came too with a strangled shout. It felt like his heart was frozen. Each breath took his full concentration. He could barely feel his limbs. The world felt so far away. After a few minutes, the sensations of death faded to something somewhat manageable. He looked at his clock, it was 6 o’clock.

Well, technically a few minutes past 6, but I can chalk that up to me recovering.

So, what have we learned today class?

Well, I learned that I can die whenever I want without a reason, each revival in a row is absolutely worse than the last one, and that I will always come back at 6 o’clock in the morning.

Zuko knew that what he was doing would look absolutely crazy to a normal person. However, he was not normal and needed to know how this curse worked. Up until now, he’s only either been killed by someone, died in accidents, or killed himself in stressful situations. While he did learn some things about how his curse worked each time, he felt like he needed to get a better understanding of the limits and today was the perfect day to do it.

It was what most people would consider a boring day. The weather wasn’t supposed to be too hot or cold and there weren’t any storms that had happened the first time around. He only had to meet his tutor today, and the lessons were relatively easy enough to not require him to give his full attention. Azula was busy with their father who was personally teaching her important political stuff. Iroh was spending the day with some friends and won’t be back for a few days. Outside of his tutor, no one was expecting to see him all day. Therefore, he could stay in his room and experiment without worrying about being interrupted. Not that it would matter, of course.

His hands were shaking as he got ready for the day and his mind felt empty. By the time he left his room, he felt mostly alive again. His tutor was waiting for him in the Royal Study. The walls were lined with shelves filled with books and scrolls. Large windows in between the shelves let in natural light and illuminated the portraits of the past ten Fire Lords and Ladies that seemed to stare at the desks in the center. Zuko hated those portraits. There were times he would swear that their eyes were following him, like they knew something was wrong with him. His tutor stood near the desks with his hands clasped behind his back, “Good morning, Prince Zuko. Take a seat. Today we are covering history and biology.”

“Good morning, Furui.” Zuko took his seat and pretended to listen. He had already heard this lecture and really had no desire to pay more attention than was absolutely necessary. All he had to do was nod and make the appropriate noises at the right time. By this point, Zuko was an expert at pretending like he was hearing something for the first time. A part of him was always tempted to finish people’s sentences just to freak them out.

Good thing Furui likes to hear himself talk. It would be a nightmare if he actually tried to get me to engage with whatever he was/is saying.

Furui was one of those people who had worked at the palace so long that both Zuko and Azula swore that the man was older than the Caldera. In fact, he’s pretty sure Furui tutored his father and maybe even his uncle. The old man droned on and on for what felt like hours, and Zuko was battling sleep with all of his might. Eventually, the spirits took pity on him; and he was dismissed. He quickly made his way back to his room and avoided any possible encounters with people. Once back in the safety of his room, Zuko began to plan his next and final test. For now, at least.

What will happen if I die close to 5 in the morning the next day?

With a new test to preform, Zuko prepared for an all-nighter. Truthfully, this wouldn’t be that hard for him as long as he had something interesting to read. The hard part would be to make sure that he didn’t lose track of time. He decided to sneak some snacks into his room just as a failsafe to help him stay awake. Anything crunchy would do the trick.

With careful footsteps, Zuko silently made his way to the kitchens. If he got caught, he knew that he’d be chased out by the head cook or her staff. That woman had impeccable aim and was not to be trifled with. As he drew closer to his destination, he peaked around a pillar when a voice spoke up from be hind him, “Looking to stop another mass murder attempt your highness?”

Zuko will vehemently deny any sound that may or may not have come out of his mouth that may or may not have been a squeak with a voice crack. He turned quickly to see Sato standing behind him who both amused and bemused.

Why is this my life?

Sato crossed his arms and continued to star at Zuko. The man had gotten older; his hair was graying and his hairline receding. His armor now had new decorations that showed off his rise in the ranks. The wrinkles on his face became more pronounced as he waited for Zuko to answer. With faux innocent look, Zuko replied, “I don’t know what you’re talking about Captain Sato. I’m just…going to the library?” The man did not look impressed.

“Was that a question or a statement?”

“A statement?”

Sato rolled his eyes to the ceiling and muttered for the spirits to give him strength.

Rude.

“Your highness, what are you up to?”

“I already told you. I’m going to the library.”

“Really now? Last time I checked, the library was the other way.” Zuko could feel his face heat up. He knew he was caught, but he couldn’t let Sato win. “I was heading to the other library.” He didn’t think it was possible, but Sato looked even more unimpressed. “You’re heading to the Royal Records Library?”

Why can’t Sato be like every other adult and accept whatever I say at face value?

“Yes, I have to write a paper.” A smile started to grow on Sato’s face, and Zuko got the feeling he just walked straight into a trap. With a bow that only appeared respectful on the surface, Sato stepped aside, “Lead the way your highness.” Zuko gave him a blank look. The man’s smile only grew, “I have spent no small amount of time patrolling that library throughout the years, so I’m sure that I can help you find whatever resources you need for your…paper.”

Unwilling to admit defeat, Zuko marched to the library with Sato not too far behind. Ever since the Fire Lily Festive all those years ago, Sato made a point to keep an eye on Zuko. Wherever Zuko went in the palace during his free time, Sato was bound to show up. He still didn’t believe that Zuko just happened to overhear those guards.

When they reached their destination Sato asked, “So what exactly is this paper about?” Zuko’s mind raced as he tried to come up with a plausible topic. Before he could question himself, he blurted out, “The spirits.”

 “Why come to the Royal Records Library for information about the spirits? Wouldn’t the temple be more appropriate?”

“I’m writing about…people who have been cursed? There’s bound to be some documentation here.”

I guess that would actually be interesting. Maybe even helpful.

Sato still didn’t appear to believe him but led him around regardless. They walked through row after row of bookshelves filled with massive tomes and scrolls. Some were probably older than the war if not older. Torches lined the walls and iron chandeliers hung overhead, both providing just enough light to navigate while also casting harsh shadows. Sato held a flame in his hand to provide a little extra light. Tapestries with the Fire Nation emblem hung from every pillar. At one point, Zuko saw a giant tapestry of what he assumed was a previous Fire Lord or high ranking noble that he couldn’t name.

Sato finally stopped at a tall narrow wooden bookshelf filled with scrolls of various thicknesses. He gestured, “Everything on these three shelves has something to do with negative encounters with spirits. Is there some sort of specific negative encounter you’re looking for?” Zuko narrowed his eyes at Sato, “How do you know all of this? Weren’t you supposed to be patrolling or something?” The man huffed a laugh, “You aren’t the only one in this palace who likes to read.”

Fair enough.

“I’m looking for stories of people who were cursed that didn’t do anything wrong.” With a nod, Sato pointed, “Then you’ll want to look at this shelf.” The shelf in question had probably dozens of scrolls on it. Zuko frowned, “Do you know what most of them are about?”

“Well, that one is about a spirit who supposedly cursed some people to dance until they died.”

That sounds like an interesting experience.

“The one next to it is about some spirits who cursed someone to speak only in rhymes.”

At least they’d have a good career opportunity in theater or as a poet.

“That one over there is about a spirit who cursed someone to repeat the same day.”

Wait.

“Hand that to me.” He got a raised eyebrow. “Please.” Sato shook his head as he handed Zuko the scroll. He unrolled the aged scroll and began to skim through it. The story revolved around a young man who became the focus of a spirit’s boredom. Said spirit decided to curse the man to repeat the day just to see what would happen. At first the man was confused, then he quickly devolved into madness, and finally he repeated everyday with grim acceptance. The man had lived the same day for hundreds of years. Zuko skipped to the end to see how the man broke the curse. He read the last paragraph. Then he read it again.

Unbelievable.

The man was able to get the curse lifted with the help of the Avatar who battled the spirit. Zuko numbly stared at the scroll. Sato immediately noticed his change in mood, “Everything alright your highness?”

Zuko took a deep breath, “Yeah. Everything is fine. I found what I needed.” Before Sato could question him further, Zuko turned and sprinted off with the scroll. He wondered back to his room in silence. Once he closed the door, he looked down at the scroll again.

The man relived the same day for hundreds of years.

He shook his head and prepared to stay up all night. No matter what he tried, his mind drifted back to the scroll and its implication. Not even his favorite play could hold his attention. The night wore on until the clock struck 5. Exhausted, Zuko climbed into bed and drank his poison.

The familiar numbness.

The cold.

The fading senses.

Darkness.

He awakened with a broken sob. His body felt so cold and stiff. Everything felt so far away, yet all encompassing. The sounds of life crashed into the silence of death in his soul. The swirling chaos soon calmed down enough for Zuko to look at his clock.

6 o’clock.

He rolled out of bed and landed gracelessly on the floor. The impact barely registered. He pulled himself across the room until he reached his desk. With great effort, he hoisted himself onto the chair and looked at his daily planner.

It’s the same day again.

Zuko let out a sound that could’ve been a sob as he dropped his head onto his desk. That terrible implication from the scroll that he had tried to ignore he finally acknowledged.

When I get old, how am I going to die and stay dead?

Am I going to repeat my final moments forever?

(Present Day)

Zuko paced in his quarters. Once again, he had no idea where Aang was. After leaving Kyoshi Island, he sold the kamado-rhinos. He didn’t want to chance having to repeat another day just because they gored someone again. He bought a strong leather cord with the money he made. Now his poison was tied to the inside of his clothing.

With those things corrected, all he needed to do now was find Aang and make sure he stuck to the script. He had a feeling that they were nearing the middle of act one, so Zuko had to make sure that everything was perfect. A knock on his door broke him from his stewing, “Enter.” His uncle opened the door and observed him. He hummed then said, “Nephew, maybe some fresh air will help clear your mind. Why don’t you join me for some tea?” Zuko weighed his options. If he said no, he’d continue to spiral further into madness pacing his room and his uncle will continue to pester him. On the other hand, if he said yes then he’d have to listen to his uncle wax poetry about tea and give some situation appropriate proverbs about life.

This is a lose-lose situation.

With a groan, he decided to accept his uncle’s invitation. Iroh smiled as Zuko followed him to the deck. Once there, his uncle motioned him to sit down at a table that was already set up for them. Zuko sent a frown at the table, then glared at his uncle who just smiled innocently back. With an aggrieved sigh, Zuko sat down. His uncle hummed as he poured his and his nephew’s tea. They sat there quietly for a few minutes.

Zuko would never admit it out loud, but he did feel slightly better not being cooped up in his room. Though he still sent his uncle glares just for appearances sake. The silence was eventually broken when his uncle spoke, “I have a feeling that there is more on your mind than just the Avatar. While I may be old now, I once was a young man who desired independence and had a need to find myself.”

Where is this going?

His uncle continued, “It took a long string of struggles and failures for me to realize that things were easier when I asked for guidance and support from those who cared about me.” He gave Zuko a meaningful look, “I will not pry into your private life, Nephew. However, I do ask that you be safe and don’t hesitate to ask me for help.” Zuko’s face changed from scowling to confused, “Why are you telling me this?” His uncle had a sad smile, “I have a feeling that there has been something troubling you for a while now. Whatever it is, nephew, I am willing to listen when you are ready to tell me.”

I’m sorry uncle, but there are some things you will never know. It’s for the best.

He looked down at his tea in silence. Once the tea was gone, Zuko was about to start running through his firebending sets to clear his head when a call came from the helm, “Men in the water!” Immediately, the desk became a hive of activity. Ladders and lifeboats were lowered, and the crew began the task of rescuing the survivors. They were Fire Nation soldiers. Zuko singled out an officer and pulled him aside, “What happened?” The man was shaking from the cold water but managed to get out, “We’re from the offshore earthbender prison. The prisoners revolted and threw us overboard. The warden drowned.” Frowning, Zuko knew he needed to get these people to shore before continuing his search. The delay will cost him precious hours and the Avatar’s trail could go cold. Then the officer said something that caught his attention, “Those Water Tribe kids and the Avatar cost us a lot of good soldiers.”

“Did you say the Avatar attacked your prison?” Zuko looked at the man intently now. He nodded, “Yes, they helped the prisoners stage a rebellion.” Eyes gleaming, Zuko asked, “Which way is the prison?” After getting directions, he sent the officer off to recover with the other survivors and then made his way to the helm. Realistically, he knew that Aang wouldn’t be at the prison anymore. However, there was a possibility that he could find one of the escaped prisoners or another guard and question them.

Once all of the survivors were picked up, Zuko ordered the ship to quickly head to the nearest safe harbor and then head to the prison. The crew grumbled at not being able to relax at the port, but they followed his orders. At the prison, Zuko walked around the courtyard. Coal and broken spears were scattered everywhere. It was obvious that a major fight had occurred here. After searching the area, he almost gave up on finding anything when something unusual caught his attention. He knelt done near a pile of coal and picked up something interesting.

Katara’s necklace.

A smile stretched across his face. Zuko had a feeling that this was important and shoved it into his pocket. He looked around the prison once more before leaving. They weren’t too far from shore, so he was willing to bet that Aang immediately went back the way they came. Once on his ship again, Zuko studied his map. There were a few possible locations they may head to.

You would think that they would have to resupply frequently just to feed their bison and themselves.

Zuko crossed out Fire Nation colonies and occupied villages and narrowed the possible area down to a stretch of forest. It was still a large area, but it was something. He gave the order to dock at a harbor in that general area and then went to his quarters. After closing his door, he sat on his bed and inspected the necklace. The blue stone was beautifully carved. It was an image of a wave breaking. There was some wear on it that made it clear that it was old but not worn enough to distort the image. The dark blue ribbon was obviously relatively new. This looked like an item that was loved and passed down in the family.

I bet this is important to Katara’s character arc.

That night, Zuko prepared for bed. He wasn’t too certain he’d come across Aang, so he didn’t do his pre-death preparations. In all likelihood, he would probably reach whatever town Aang’s staying at after they already left. With that, Zuko fell into a dreamless sleep.

With the rise of the sun, Zuko began his search. The port town wasn’t anything noteworthy. There were the usual food stalls, blacksmiths, traders, and bars. Then there were also the usual pirates, pickpockets, and other unsavory folk. He kept a sharp eye out and a hand on his coin purse, just in case. Suspicion is always his ally in places like this. Unsurprisingly, he didn’t find anything; but he continued to keep an eye and ear out just in case. After questioning every semi-trustworthy looking person he could find, he headed back to his ship.

When he got back, he quickly realized that his uncle had gone to explore the market. Zuko let out an aggravated groan.

Kangaroo-pack rats don’t collect as much junk as uncle does.

He left the ship again and now began his search for his uncle. At least for this search, he actually got some leads. An older woman running a fruit stall claimed she saw his uncle head into the woods. She said he was talking about finding a “nice, relaxing hot spring”. Zuko huffed, he was relatively certain that there were no natural hot springs in the area, but there were streams and other small bodies of water. Entering the forest, he called out for his uncle.

Eventually, Zuko heard the sound of running water and saw steam. He moved closer and saw familiar Fire Nation clothing hanging from a tree branch. Cautiously, Zuko moved the clothing aside. Casually lounging in a pool of steaming water, was his uncle.

“Uncle?”

“Ah, Prince Zuko. How was your search?” Zuko frowned, “What are you doing? It’s time to go!” Iroh didn’t look particularly bothered, “Nephew, you look stressed. Why don’t you join me and relax. Let the stresses of life melt away. I heated the water to the perfect temperature.” He folded his hands, and a large plume of steam filled the air. Zuko waved the steam away, “Enough! We don’t have time for this. The Avatar is nearby, and we need to catch up. Get out of the water!”

“Very well.” His uncle stood up, and Zuko suddenly remembered the clothes hanging next to him that his uncle was very obviously not wearing.

I wish dying erased my memory.

“On second thought, stay here a little longer; but be back at the ship in 30 minutes or I will leave without you!” Zuko stormed off as he heard his uncle relaxing into the water. Back at his ship, Zuko waited semi-patiently for his uncle to show up. The minutes ticked away until an hour had passed. Then two hours. Then three. Groaning in annoyance, he gathered a couple of his men and went to collect his wayward uncle.

Night was falling now as they made their way to where he last saw him. When he stepped into the familiar clearing, his uncle was gone. One guard suggested, “Sir, maybe he thought you left without him?”

Ridiculous.

Zuko look a closer look at the water formation his uncle was bathing in. Something was wrong, “Look, the earth has clearly moved.” Another guard offered, “Maybe there was a landslide?”

Idiot.

“Landslides don’t go up hill. The ground wasn’t moved naturally; my uncle’s been captured by earthbenders.” Zuko was tempted to reset the stage, there was a very real possibility that his uncle could be seriously injured or worse. However, Zuko had a gut feeling that his uncle was too crafty to be killed by some nobody earthbenders.

It was getting later, and he knew that he needed to make a decision soon. If he reset the stage, then he’d either have to force his uncle to follow him around the port or he’d have to suffer through being in his uncle’s makeshift hot spring. Either of these options would make his uncle incredibly suspicious, and Zuko wouldn’t be able to avoid his interrogation. On the other hand, if he let things continue as they were he won’t be able to backtrack to today and whatever has already happened will be permanent. He decided to listen to his gut.

After sending his crew back to the ship, Zuko began searching for his uncle. The trail was pretty easy to follow, ostrich-horses leave pretty distinct footprints. As he continued his rescue mission, he realized that he needed to make another choice. It was night, but it won’t be long before the sun rises again. There’s a very real chance that he could die while trying to save his uncle. If he slept now, it would make the revival process faster and less traumatic, but it could mean that he won’t save his uncle in time.

His mind flashed back to Ember Island. The feeling of his flesh charring, of his nails being ripped off as he clawed at smooth rock. How it felt to come back while still awake. His hands began to shake. Zuko shook his head and forced the memories back down.

That won’t happen again. I’ll be careful.

He tried to believe that as he continued onward. The sun rose gradually into the sky, chasing away the darkness. As he walked along the dirt path, he spotted something in the center of the road. A sandal. He carefully picked it up then sniffed it. The noxious smell instantly made him recoil, “Definitely Uncle Iroh.” He continued down the path.

As the midday sun glared down on him, he came to a fork in the road. Just as he was about to continue following his uncle’s trail, a familiar bison flew overhead.

Of course you show up now.

He stared at the direction it flew off to, memorizing its path. The sound of his uncle humming a mournful tune echoed in his head. Growling, Zuko continued to go after his uncle. The sun began to set again as he followed the trail to a cliff face. Something seemed wrong here.

Alert, Zuko noticed that the ostrich-horse prints had become chaotic like there was a struggle, and it looked like there was a rockslide down the edge. Narrowing his eyes, Zuko carefully slid down the cliff. As he got closer, he could hear voices in the gorge below. Now on high alert, he slowed his descent and tried to get a better look at whoever was down here. He came to a stop behind a rock and peered around it.

Five Earth Kingdom soldiers were surrounding his uncle who was in a loincloth and in chains. His restraints seemed to be pinned down by a large rock.

At least he’s not naked anymore.

The soldiers seemed to be discussing what to do with him. Eventually, it seemed like they came to an agreement. A soldier who appeared to be the highest-ranking officer used his earthbending to raise a large rock and held it above his uncle’s hands. It didn’t take a genius to figure out what they were planning to do. Zuko immediately leapt out from his hiding place and knocked the boulder away.

The soldiers seemed surprised at first before the officer declared, “You’re outnumbered five to one. Surrender now or we will use force.” Zuko braced himself, “I won’t let you hurt him.” With that, the battle began. Rocks were being chucked at him, and he retaliated with flames. In the background, he could hear the rattle of chains as his uncle tried to get free.

I probably could have broken the chains.

Just as soon as he knocked out one soldier, he heard his uncle shout, “Look out!” He tried to roll out of the way of the pillars of stone that were looming over him, but he wasn’t fast enough.

He was on the ground.

His legs were buried.

Something was wrong.

It should hurt.

He couldn’t feel his feet.

Coldness crept all over his body.

He was shaking.

What’s happening?

Iroh was shouting.

He was begging the soldiers.

The soldiers removed the stones.

Zuko vomited.

Blood.

So much blood.

His legs were wrong.

Bones were protruding everywhere.

The flesh trembled and wept.

The ground was wet beneath him.

He was shaking.

Screaming.

The pain finally hit.

Tears clouded his vision.

People were shouting.

Someone was trying to apply a tourniquet.

Agony burned through him.

His hands shook as he numbly grabbed the vial.

He couldn’t open it.

The soldier trying to give him first aid looked at the vial then at him.

“Please.”

The soldier gave him a grim look.

Nodded.

The cork was pulled.

He helped pour the poison into Zuko’s mouth.

His uncle’s cries grew louder.

The numbness spread.

The pain faded.

Silence.

Darkness.

Zuko was mid-step when he collapsed.

Screams tore through him.

The feeling of crushed bones and being whole smashed together.

His uncle’s cries begging the soldiers to save him and the deafening silence.

The taste of poison and the taste of copper.

I’m biting my tongue.

The cold of death clashing with the stifling heat of his armor.

Breathe.

His legs throbbed and burned in agony.

He clawed at the armor around them.

I need to breathe.

A nail broke off.

Then another.

Pain.

I need to…

The vision of blood pouring from his legs mixed with his bloody fingers smearing blood on his armor.

I need…

The sounds of Azula crying, burning flesh, choking on blood, and crashing waves screamed in his head.

I…

Zuko’s hands ached in ways they didn’t when he died. The sensation brought some clarity back. Silently, he rolled onto his back and tried to exist. He could see the sunlight filtering through the tree canopy. He could hear birds singing in the distance. He could smell grass. He could feel his armor. He could taste blood.

In for 5.

Out for 10.

Zuko gradually came back to himself. He shakily got up and stumbled down the path. Each step was a battle; each steady breath was a war. All he could think about was saving his uncle. He ignored the pain in his hands and the stinging of his tongue. His mind was numb. He couldn’t think. All that mattered was giving his uncle a good ending.

He continued down the path until that familiar cliff side came into view. Zuko, on some level, knew his meltdown cost him precious time. He knew that he needed to focus. Zuko slid down the incline into the gorge. Apparently, he had great timing because the Earth Kingdom officer was just about to smash his uncle’s hands as soon as he reached the rock he originally hid behind.

Zuko immediately jumped out and kicked the boulder away. He then turned and broke the chains restraining his uncle with his heel.

Ow.

His uncle smiled at him, “Perfect form.” Zuko paused for a moment, his mind sluggish, “I have a great teacher.” Iroh seemed to notice something was wrong with him but focused on his opponents for now. The officer made a similar demand to what he said before, “Surrender. You’re outnumbered five to two.” His uncle got into a fighting stance and declared, “We may be outnumbered, but you are outmatched!”

Ugh.

Zuko fought the best he could in his current state, and his uncle used the chains that were still attached to his cuffs as whips to grab at rocks and trip the soldiers. Zuko managed to knock a couple of the soldiers down when he saw the same soldier from last time raise a column of rocks from the ground. Zuko froze.

Not again.

Just as the soldier was about to direct the rocks at Zuko, Iroh whipped his chains and wrapped them around the soldier’s ankles. With a firm yank, the soldier fell and quickly got buried under his own rocks but appeared to be relatively fine.

Naturally.

By now, Zuko felt almost human again. He approached his uncle, “Will you please put on some clothes?” With a laugh, his uncle began rummaging through the soldiers’ bags and put on a spar tunic he found. It didn’t fit him, but it at least covered him up. Once mostly decent, Zuko and his uncle climbed on an ostrich-horse that didn’t get scared off in all the conflict and made the long journey back to port.

They rode in silence. Not long into their journey, his uncle spoke, “Nephew, what happened to your hands?” Zuko tensed and his hands began to tremble, “I must have hurt them when I slid down the cliff face.” His tongue burned as he spoke. Iroh frowned in concern, “We should get them looked at when we return.” His uncle studied him closely, “Maybe I should be in front. You look tired and I’m sure holding the reins is painful.” Zuko’s hands did hurt, but the pain felt distant. When he didn’t respond, his uncle sighed, “Prince Zuko, nothing good comes from pushing yourself while you are hurt. The best thing you can do is rest and allow yourself to heal.”

Only the Avatar can give me rest.

When they got to the familiar fork in the road, Zuko turned down the direction that the bison had flown from earlier. His uncle asked, “Where are we going?”

“I saw the Avatar’s bison come from this direction earlier. I need to know where he’s going.”

“Prince Zuko, you are injured and clearly exhausted. It would be best to get back to the ship and recuperate.”

“I don’t have time. I need to find the Avatar.” His uncle looked unhappy, but didn’t protest further. At some point, his fingers started to bleed from clenching them so hard. The reins bit into his hands. He could taste blood in his mouth.

It was night when they reached a village. There was a thick bamboo forest growing at the entrance and there was damage to the buildings that hinted at some sort of conflict.

Did Aang fight someone here?

Zuko looked around and spotted a house that looked slightly nicer than the others. Figuring that must be whoever was in charge, he walked to the door. He banged on it and pushed his way into the man’s house as soon as he opened the door, “Where is the Avatar going?” The man stuttered out a few broken words, clearly not expecting to see Zuko. Eventually the man begged, “Please don’t hurt us! We don’t pose a threat to the Fire Nation. There aren’t any fighters here!” Zuko internally sighed, “Tell me where the Avatar is going, and I will leave.” The man looked at him and his uncle terrified but looked like he wasn’t too certain. Zuko attempted to put on a reassuring smile. Judging from the man’s whimper and his uncle’s concerned looks, he didn’t succeed.

“Where is the Avatar going?” The villager looked at Zuko, then at Iroh, and then at his village. He looked defeated, “He…he said something about going to Avatar Roku’s temple.” Zuko studied the man closely before turning to leave. “Thank you.” As he walked off, he could hear the man trying to justify his actions to himself.

A part of me should feel bad, but I need to keep the script from wandering too much. I don’t have time to comfort background characters.

With that, he returned to the stolen ostrich-horse. His uncle was sitting up front and gave Zuko a look that dared him to argue. Rolling his eyes, he got on without a word. By the time they made it back to their ship, the sun was peaking over the horizon again. The fog had returned to Zuko’s mind as his uncle led him to the ship’s infirmary. He said nothing as his uncle tended to his hands. The sting of the balm felt like a distant sensation. With careful hands, his uncle wrapped the wounds.

Iroh held Zuko’s arm as he led him to his room. He gently helped Zuko remove all the armor and murmured words of comfort that didn’t reach him. If his uncle noticed the obvious nail marks and smeared blood on the shin guards, he didn’t say anything. Once Zuko was ready for bed, his uncle gently but firmly pushed Zuko to lay down. The fog in his head was so thick now, but he didn’t feel the need to fight it. His uncle sat next to his bed, “Rest nephew. I will be here when you wake up.”

Part of Zuko wanted to protest that his uncle needed to rest, but the pull of sleep was strong. He allowed himself to sink into oblivion and hope for a better tomorrow.

The play marches on, the heroes are progressing in their journey and tragedy continues to rewrite their endings.

I wonder if someone will ever rewrite my ending.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age eleven)

Grandfather is dead.

Lu Ten is dead.

His mother is gone.

Ozai is now Fire Lord.

Zuko tried his best not to think about all of this. Everything changed so quickly and so suddenly that he’s having trouble keeping up. Overnight he went from being forth in line for the throne, to suddenly being the heir apparent. Now his days are filled with tutors cramming information in front of him that they claim every future Fire Lord must know. His firebending instructors now demand that he train harder and longer to the point of nearly collapsing when he’s done because the future Fire Lord must be the strongest firebender. He’s been so busy and exhausted lately that he hasn’t had a chance to process anything.

Even Azula’s life had changed dramatically. Ozai had taken over most of her lessons and had her following him to almost all of his meetings. Zuko rarely even sees his sister anymore. They don’t even get to eat meals together like they used to. The few times he has seen her, she looked tired and angry.

Though some things had not changed. Ozai still barely acknowledged Zuko outside of when he absolutely had to. However, now he was more openly critical of Zuko. Nothing he did appeared was good enough. His marks from his tutors weren’t high enough, his firebending progress was too slow, his behavior was too odd, etc.

His uncle had finally returned from his journey across the Earth Kingdom after Lu Ten died a couple months ago. After he got back, he had been busy reassuring various members of the nobility and the Fire Sages that he wasn’t going to try to contest Ozai’s claim to the throne. Ozai didn’t seem to trust Iroh’s promise to respect their father’s final wishes and placed him under house arrest. Up until recently, Iroh wasn’t allowed to leave his rooms without an escort. Now he’s been given permission to roam the palace grounds freely, but he is constantly being watched.

Case in point, Iroh had invited Zuko to have tea with him in the garden, and Captain Sato stood at attention not too far from the prince. It was a beautiful spring day. The wind was cool with the last traces of winter, and it breezed through the wooden wind chimes. Flowers were starting to sprout but none had bloomed yet. The smell of jasmine tea wafted through the air.

Zuko studied his uncle closely. Ever since his uncle had returned, he had been behaving strangely. He avoided talking about his time in the military and will answer any of those questions with weird proverbs that Zuko didn’t understand. Also, he seemed to be a lot more interested in Pai Sho than he used to be. What really threw him off was how interested in Zuko’s everyday life his uncle was. He always asked detailed questions about his day. Nothing his uncle did made sense.

Sato always watched their interactions closely. He never engaged with their conversations and kept professional. Even Iroh’s invitation to join them for tea were always politely declined. Though there were times that he clearly wanted to say something, especially when Zuko would leave out key information from his stories that would get him into trouble.

They drank their tea as his uncle questioned him about his schooling. At some point, they ran out of tea and his uncle waved over a servant to give them more water for him to boil. “Nephew, I know you are not a fan of history, but you really should try to pay attention. There are many important lessons we can gain from our ancestors that can make our lives easier today.” Zuko rolled his eyes, “I don’t see how Fire Lord Kita’s declaration on the layout of the Royal Garden or Fire Lord Yuta’s guidelines around tapestries will help me be a good fire lord.” His uncle threw his head back and laughed, “True, there are somethings that may not have a huge impact on us anymore. However, at the time those things were implemented, they had impacted a lot of people.” At this point, Zuko was tempted to tune his uncle out.

As he started to zone out, he felt a foot nudge his leg. He glared up at Sato who was still looking straight ahead like he hadn’t just put his foot on the Crown Prince of the Fire Nation.

I will remember this and when I become fire lord, I will get my revenge.

Grumbling, he focused back on his uncle who was smiling. His uncle added the tea leaves to the now boiling water and waited for it to steep. His uncle changed the topic, “How is your firebending training?” Zuko shrugged, “I’m making progress, but I could be doing better.” His uncle hummed, “Do not worry yourself, nephew. Learning how to bend is not a race, but a journey of self-discovery.”

What does that even mean?

His uncle must have correctly interpreted his blank stare and elaborated, “Self-discovery is one of the most important things we can do. We need to take time to figure out who we are, what we want, and where we want to see ourselves in the future.”

What does this have to do with bending?

Iroh continued, “Another part of that journey is understanding our strengths and learning how to use them. Remember nephew, every day is a learning experience.” Zuko huffed but didn’t say anything. Smiling, his uncle poured their tea. Zuko didn’t particularly like tea, but he would tolerate it for his uncle’s sake. It was better than listening to his tutors drone on about topics he didn’t care about. He finished his cup and half listened to his uncle. Suddenly, he felt dizzy.

His uncle looked like he felt unwell too.

The ground was tilting underneath him.

His vision began to blur.

Sato called out to them.

Zuko fell over.

Hands caught him.

Darkness.

With a sudden jolt, Zuko woke up. His body felt heavy, and his mind filled with confusion.

What happened? Did I just die?

The familiar sensation of coldness in his limbs began to fade along with the mental numbness. Still confused, Zuko got up and started his day. He quickly realized that he did, in fact, die. His tutor went over the same lessons that he already heard, the same servant informed him that his uncle summoned him to the garden, and Sato was waiting in the same area to escort him. “I hear General Iroh will be serving jasmine tea today. Rumor has it, he’s trying to find a blend that you enjoy.”

Not likely. It’s just hot leaf juice.

They made their way to the garden where his uncle was already seated at a low table. There was already a steaming pot of tea, and it appeared that his uncle had already started snacking on the tea cakes.

If he eats any of my mochi again, I’ll scorch his tea.

Just as his uncle was reaching for the mochi, Zuko sped walked over and snatched it away. “Prince Zuko!” Two voices admonished him. The two men looked at each other in surprise. While Iroh knew that Captain Sato was keeping an eye on Zuko, he didn’t expect the man to be so comfortable that he would scold his nephew. Sato, on the other hand, was doing his best to appear professional while giving Zuko looks. Zuko was hoping that the two men would be too distracted to notice him sneaking the treats into his pockets.

His hopes were dashed when a gruff voice asked, “What do you think you’re doing?” Zuko innocently looked up to see Sato now scowling at him. From the corner of his eye, he could see his uncle curiously watching the exchange. “I’m just sitting here having tea with my uncle Captain Sato.” With an unimpressed look, the captain ordered, “Empty your pockets.”

Zuko was about to start trying to play dumb when his uncle laughed, “Stand down captain. I had the mochi made specifically for my nephew.” It wasn’t lost on Zuko how his uncle emphasized their relation. Sato bowed and took a few steps back. Zuko could see the tension in his body. From there, things seemed to follow what happened before. They drank their tea, his uncle asked about his schooling and firebending lessons, and he told Zuko the same speech that he still didn’t really understand. Only this time, Sato was further away and looked unhappy. Zuko also noticed that when he looked at Sato his uncle’s demeanor would change slightly. He couldn’t make out what exactly changed, but he could feel the new tension between the men.

Just like before, a servant brought water for Iroh to heat up for more tea and his uncle added the leaves to steep when the water was at the right temperature. The smell of jasmine filled the air. With practiced ease, his uncle served the tea.

This time, Zuko tried to pay close attention to himself and the world around him as he drank the tea. Just like before, he felt dizzy.

The world started to spin violently around him.

Colors blended together.

He fell onto the cool grass.

A voice called out to him.

Darkness.

Groaning, Zuko regained consciousness. The world was still spinning. His mind felt like it was starting to tear apart. With effort, he sat up and tried to catch his bearings.

Okay, I’m reasonably positive that something is poisoned. I only have to figure out which of the items we’re consuming is the killer.

Easy enough.

Gradually, he stood up and got ready for the day. He went through the same motions as last time. He went to his tutor, got summoned, met Sato in the hall, and then walked to the garden. This time, he didn’t snatch the mochi from his uncle.

I don’t know what was going on between them, but I don’t want to repeat it.

Zuko carefully studied everything on the table to see if anything was obviously poisoned. Nothing really stood out, but he also wasn’t too sure what he was looking for. Everything was following the original path. When the servant brought out the water, Zuko got an idea. Before his uncle could grab the jug, Zuko snatched it. Everyone looked at him surprised. He shrugged, “I want to drink some water.” The young woman didn’t look nervous, but she did look confused. Trying to be casual, he poured some of the water into his cup.

Well, uncle did say that everyday is a learning experience so I might as well try to learn something.

With that bit of reassurance, Zuko picked up his cup and drank all the water in it. When his uncle went to grab the pitcher, Zuko refilled his glass again. At his uncle’s confused look, he tried to give a casual answer, “The mochi made me thirsty.” He emptied the glass again.

It didn’t take long.

He started to feel the ground move beneath his feet.

His uncle went from looking confused to concerned.

Sato asked him something.

Everything sounded muffled.

Shapes blurred and swirled together.

He collapsed.

Hands were grabbing him.

Someone was shouting.

Darkness.

With a whine, Zuko rejoined the living. The bed felt like it was gradually tipping to one side, and he was about to roll off. His mind felt like it was filled with cotton. Coldness tingled and lingered in his limbs. He couldn’t move. The sun shined onto his face. He forced himself up.

Okay, the water is poisoned.

All I have to do is dump the water and figure out who did it.

It’ll be like the Fire Lily Festival all over again, only this time I won’t get a plushie.

And no one will get stabbed.

Probably.

Zuko sluggishly went through the motions of getting ready. He barely paid attention to anything around him and only made a half-hearted attempt to appear like he was paying attention. Almost no one seemed to notice. “Are you alright your highness?” Zuko blinked at Sato for a moment before responding, “I didn’t sleep well.” The man frowned and looked Zuko over. “I can send word to General Iroh that you aren’t well.”

“I’ll be fine. We’re just having tea.” With that, they made their way to the garden. Sato stood a little closer than strictly necessary which didn’t go unnoticed by Iroh. “Is everything alright Captain Sato?” Zuko huffed, “He’s being ridiculous.” Now it was Sato’s turn to huff, but he said nothing. His uncle raised an eyebrow, “Oh?”

“I didn’t sleep well and he’s acting like I’m just going to fall apart.” The man in question was ignoring Zuko’s complaints. His uncle chuckled, “You are the Crown Prince. It is his duty as an officer of the Royal Guard to ensure your safety.”

More like an armored mother pig-hen.

After that, the conversation followed the previous iterations. Zuko kept a close eye out for that servant. Once she came into view, Zuko got up. His uncle and Sato gave him questioning looks as he made his way to the woman. When he reached her, Zuko said, “Let me take that. I’m sure you have other duties to attend to.” The woman looked surprised but ultimately gave him the pitcher. As Zuko made his way back to the table, he made a show of tripping over his feet and spilling the water.

I wonder if my audience will believe my performance.

The servant immediately ran to his side, “Are you alright your highness? Do you need anything?” The poor woman was starting to ramble, but Zuko waved her off, “I’m fine. It’s just some water. Go return to your other duties.” As the servant left, Zuko watched her intently, looking for signs of guilt. When he turned back to the table, he noticed his uncle and Sato watching him.

His uncle sighed sadly, “Well I believe teatime is over. Prince Zuko, would you care to join me on a walk through the garden?” Zuko nodded and looked at Sato. He was giving Zuko a suspicious look, the same look he gives Zuko when the Fire Lily Festival gets brought up. Zuko quickly caught up to his uncle.

As they walked, Zuko allowed the peacefulness of the garden to wash over him.

I still need to find whoever poisoned the water, but that can wait a little longer.

The peaceful atmosphere was broken when they heard a commotion from the palace. Guards were rushing all over the place. Servants were being rounded up. Sato immediately stopped a guard rushing past them, “Halt! Status report!” The guard immediately bowed, “Sir, there is an assassin loose in the palace.” Sato stood up straighter, “Any casualties?” The guard hesitated as he glanced at Zuko, “Yes sir. Fire Lord Ozai and Princess Azula are deceased.”

The roar of blood filled Zuko’s ears.

I can fix this.

Before anyone could stop him, he ran inside the palace as fast as he could. The shouts of his uncle and Sato echoed behind him. He ran down halls, past guards rounding up staff, past his sister’s room. He ran until he stopped outside his room. Quickly, he rushed inside and locked the door behind him. His heart was pounding in his chest. His vision was narrowing.

I have to fix this.

Zuko rummaged through his bedside table until he found what he was looking for. A small vial. He stared at it for a second before steeling himself and uncorking it. With one last deep breath, he drank the liquid. Now all he had to do was wait. Shakily he curled up on his bed.

I can bring them back.

His limbs started to become numb.

Pounding shook his door.

Voices were yelling.

Coldness creeped its way to his heart.

The doorknob was rattling.

His vision was fading.

He heard the door being forced open.

Everything faded.

Darkness.

A choked off wail ripped through his throat as he woke up.

Swirling colors and pulsing darkness filled his vision.

The room and himself were spinning in different directions violently.

Nausea clawed at his throat.

His mind was a scrambled puzzle.

Every breath had to be forced into his lungs.

Focus.

In for 5. Out for 10.

His mother’s guidance echoed in his head. Eventually, he felt himself start to be put back together.

Someone is trying to assassinate the whole royal family.

Zuko painstakingly forced himself out of bed. His legs were wobbling so much that he had to lean against his bed frame. Getting ready took longer than it normally did, but that didn’t matter to him. He decided to try something totally different this time. Instead of going to his lessons, he decided to investigate the kitchens.

If I was going to poison the food and drinks of multiple people, that’s where I would start.

He waited outside the kitchen doors until a distracted servant rushed out. Quickly, he slipped into the room before the door closed. Zuko crept around the room trying to find the perfect hiding spot to watch the staff. Everyone was so busy making breakfast for the Royal Family and the various nobles who were staying in the palace that they didn’t notice him.

The perfect hiding place appeared to be a stack of barrels in the corner of the room. This corner of the kitchen was poorly lit and, judging by the dust, barely utilized. Carefully, he climbed up the barrels and looked down at the staff. Everything was a flurry of activity. The head chef was barking orders, the cooks were scrambling at their various stations, servants were taking out trays of food and bringing back empty plates, and personal attendants were relaying special demands from their employers. Steam and the smell of various spices made the air feel thick. The heat from the stoves had sweat rolling down his forehead even from his perch.

Zuko barely blinked as he watched the chaos around him. He knew that there had to be something suspicious that would catch his attention. A familiar pitcher instantly caught his eye, only this time a different servant had it. It was a middle-aged man wearing a servant’s uniform but wasn’t wearing any sort of marking denoting his rank or tenure. This was immediately suspicious to Zuko. No new servants were allowed in the kitchen, the risk of a new hire being an assassin was too high. However, the staff were so preoccupied with their respective duties to inspect him.

 Zuko watched as the man filled the pitcher with water, which was also odd. Every seasoned servant of the palace knew that there were better and easier places to get water just for a pitcher. Nothing about this guy was making any sense. As the man was leaving, Zuko slid off his perch and followed him. He watched as the man went around the corner, just as Zuko was about to follow him an all too familiar voice came from behind him, “What are you doing?”

“Sato, just the person I need.” The man looked a bit taken aback but again asked, “What are you doing?” Zuko pointed at the direction the probably fake servant had gone and said, “I’m following an assassin.”

“Your what.” Zuko huffed, “Your hearing isn’t that bad. That servant is missing all indicators of rank and tenure. I’m positive he’s an assassin.” Sato frowned at him before sighing in defeat, “Who is he planning to assassinate and how?” A smile stretched across Zuko’s face, “The entire royal family with poison of course! I’m positive he added poison to the water jug he is or was holding, or the jug itself might be poisoned.” He gave Zuko an unreadable look before going after the servant.

It didn’t take long for them to catch up. The would-be assassin was in the process of handing the pitcher to the same woman who originally brought it to Zuko and his uncle. Upon seeing them approach, the man froze for just a second. It was just long enough to be telling.

With a casual air, Sato approached, “Good afternoon. Anything interesting to report?” The woman looked a bit confused as she looked between Sato and Zuko, “No sir. Nothing unusual.” The man nodded along but didn’t say anything. The captain looked between the two of them before turning to the man, “I don’t think I’ve seen you around here before. Are you new?” This was a trap question. Anyone who worked at the palace either started here young, and all new staff were questioned by Sato or one of his officers. There’s no way that he wouldn’t know who this man was.

Either the fake servant didn’t realize the trouble he was in, or he was hoping that his acting could get him out of this. On the other hand, the woman quickly realized that something was going on and gradually backed away from him. The fake servant replied, “I am employed by a visiting noble family.”

“Who?”

“The Nisemono Family.”

“I can’t say I’ve heard of them before, where in the Fire Nation are they from?” By this point, the man seemed to catch on that Sato was not buying his story; but he kept trying like he hoped that eventually the Captain of the Royal Guard would just stop questioning him. Zuko decided to chime in, “What’s in the pitcher?” Both men turned to him, one looked uncomfortable and the other looked at him suspiciously. The man levelly responded, “Water, your highness.” A smile was starting to split his face in two, “Why don’t you have a drink?”

The air suddenly became thick with tension. Both men looked at Zuko then looked at each other. Sato raised an eyebrow at the man, “You heard your prince, why don’t you have a drink.” The tension was almost unbearable. With a burst of sudden movement, the man threw the jug at them then bolted down the hall. Just as quickly, Sato shouted after him and pursued. Zuko followed not too far behind.

They ran through hallways, weaved through pillars, pushed through servants, and slid around corners. Eventually, they came to a dead end. Other guards noticed the commotion and had joined in the pursuit. Now the would-be assassin was surrounded. The man looked around wildly muttering, “This was supposed to work…everything was perfect…what went wrong…?”

To be fair, it did work.

Thrice even.

I just didn’t have the curtesy to stay dead.

The assassin was restrained and hauled off without any further incidents, and Zuko allowed himself to relax up until he noticed Sato staring at him intently. Before he could start his interrogation, a messenger approached. “Your Highness, Captain Sato. Fire Lord Ozai has summoned both of you to the Throne Room.”

Ice filled Zuko’s veins. He knew he was only summoned when his father was unhappy about something. Quietly, they made their way to the Throne Room. Once inside, Zuko took the time to look around. Shadows danced against the walls as the flames around the throne rose and fell. Ozai sat on his throne with Azula next to him. His uncle was already kneeling before the throne. Sato took his place off to the side as Zuko knelt next to his uncle.

Ozai’s voice echoed out, “Prince Zuko, as my son you should be kneeling closer to me.” Hesitantly, Zuko got up and came closer to the throne. He watched his father, waiting for any indication that he was close enough. When he was inches from the flames, his father raised a hand to stop him. Zuko knelt.

He could feel the heat turning the exposed skin on his hands and face red. His hair and eyebrows were starting to singe, and the smell tickled his nose. Sweat was starting to saturate his clothes. He didn’t move.

The Throne Room was silent as they waited for Ozai to begin to speak. After a few tense minutes, the Fire Lord began, “Captain Sato, how long have you held your current rank?”

“Two years, Your Majesty.” Zuko could hear the tension in his voice. It almost sounded like he was scared of something.

What is Father doing?

“What is your duty?”

“My duty is to protect the Fire Nation Royal Family, Your Majesty.”

“Correct. So, explain to me how this assassin got past you and your subordinates.”

“I was following my initial orders to supervise all visits between General Iroh and Prince Zuko. As for how the assassin got past my guards, I’m not sure. I will question and investigate anyone who should have spotted him.” The room became silent again for a moment. Zuko took that time to look at his father and Azula. Ozai looked impassive, looking down at all of them without giving a hint at what he was planning. Azula was watching the exchange curiously.

Suddenly, the flames in front of Zuko swelled. The increased heat made his hands turn a darker red. The skin on his face felt dry and too tight. The smell of burnt hair was stronger. He let out a yelp as the knees of his pants caught on fire. Quickly, he extinguished the flames; but his knees stung. From the corner of his eye, he saw that Sato made an aborted motion like he had to force himself to not run in Zuko’s direction. Iroh exclaimed in surprise, but did not say anything.

Just as quickly as the flames rose, they retreated. Fire Lord Ozai appeared to still be as calm as ever when he asked, “Captain Sato, do you think I would harm my heir?”

“No, Your Majesty.”

Ozai was studying Sato and then he seemed to come to a conclusion. With a voice full of authority he stated, “It has come to my attention that you have been overstepping in regards to Prince Zuko. Do your duties as Captain of the Royal Guard include chastising the prince?”

“No, Your Majesty.”

“Do they include sneaking the prince items he is not supposed to have?”

“No, Your Majesty.”

“Do they include willfully putting him in danger?”

“No, Your Majesty.” Zuko immediately interjected, “Father, Sato didn’t do anything wrong! I’m the one who discovered the assassin and decided to follow.” The flames swelled again, bigger this time. His knees and hands were on fire.

He was screaming.

Tears were running down his face.

Pain filled his mind.

Someone grabbed him.

People were shouting.

The pain faded gradually. His uncle was holding him. He looked around and saw that Sato was being restrained by a small group of guards. Zuko had never seen Sato that angry or that scared before.

“Stop! He is just a child. It was my responsibility to ensure the safety of the palace and its occupants. Punish me as you deem fit, but please stop hurting him.”

The flames died down again. The sounds of Zuko’s pained whines were the only thing that could be heard. Ozai broke the silence, “You are hereby stripped of your title and banished from the Fire Nation. By sunset tomorrow, if you are still in Fire Nation waters; you will be imprisoned.” Zuko tried to protest, but his uncle managed to stop him. With a final bow Sato said, “As you wish, Your Majesty. I apologize for dishonoring you, the royal family, and my country. I accept my punishment with grace.”

The guards escorted Sato out of the room. He didn’t look back at Zuko.

Ozai now turned to Zuko, “Failure has consequences. I could have overlooked your…attachment to the captain if you proved that you could fulfill your duties.” With that, Ozai turned and left the Throne Room with Azula trailing behind him.

No.

This is unacceptable.

I can fix this.

Numbly, Zuko felt himself being led to the healers.

His knees and hands were starting to blister.

With each step he could feel the skin pull taunt.

The skin on his hands and knees was shivering uncontrollably.

I can fix all of this.

Just as they were about to enter the infirmary, Zuko bolted. He ignored his uncle’s shouts. He ignored the agony coursing up his legs. All that mattered was getting to his room.

Everyday is a learning experience and failure has consequences.

He closed and locked his door. His hands shook as he grabbed the vial from its hiding spot. Pain throbbed in his hands as he gripped it. Some of the blisters on his knees had ruptured. His hands were bleeding. He drank its contents then fell back onto his bed.

I won’t fail again.

Numbness spread from his mind to his limbs.

His heart stuttered and pounded.

He stopped breathing.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up laughing.

He couldn’t stop.

Each breath he managed to take was squeezed out of his lungs.

Tears were running down his face.

Breathe!

He lay there gasping.

Sobbing.

The cold was squeezing his heart.

His knees and hands burned from wounds that don’t exist.

In for 5. Out for 10.

Silence surrounded him.

His limps felt too heavy to move. The fractured pieces of his mind floated out of reach. He whined as he forced his arms to push him up. Zuko almost fell onto the floor when he managed to get upright.

I have to save my family.

I have to protect Sato from Father.

Failure has consequences.

His hands trembled as he tried to get dressed. His feet dragged as he forced each step to carry him down the hall. By the time he sat down for lessons, the numbness finally began to fade from his limbs. When he got to his firebending instructor, his mind started to clear.

I’ve already gone to my lessons, so that’s one less thing for Father to get disappointed about.

Now I just need to handle the assassin in a way that won’t get Sato banished. I just need to find the would-be assassin first.

As he walked down the hall that he knew would lead him to Sato, an idea hit him. Zuko was willing to admit that it was crazy, and it might not work, but it was at least a plan. A manic grin split his face as he walked straight to Sato, “I need you to follow me.” He then turned away from the garden and sped walked to where he believed the assassin would be at. After a brief pause, Sato caught up to him. “Good afternoon to you too, your highness.”

When Zuko believed he was close enough to where the previous encounter was, he came to a sudden stop and turned to Sato, “Okay, down that hall and to the right is a man that looks like he’s about 40 years old in servant attire. His clothes don’t have any markings of rank or tenure on them, and he’s carrying a pitcher of water. It’s poisoned. He’s planning to kill the entire royal family. Why? I don’t know. He’ll be trying to hand it to another servant, who I’m pretty sure is innocent, when you confront him. If he continues to deny or evade your questions, tell him to drink the water. Good luck.” With that, he turned on his heel and tried to leave the area.

“Hold on just a second, your highness.” Sato reached out and grabbed him by the collar. He reeled Zuko back in and looked him in the eyes. “What is going on?” The manic grin on Zuko’s face grew, “Remember the Fire Lily Festival? I need you to trust me again. Now I am going to the library, and when you get done, we’ll join my uncle.”

“When I get done, you will have some explaining to do.”

Nope.

Zuko waved him off and watched as Sato rounded the corner. He was tempted to watch, but he knew that he needed to get as far away as possible before the conflict started. With brisk steps, he made his way to the library. On the way, he stopped a servant and asked them to inform his uncle about him being delayed. Now all he had to do was wait.

Minutes turned into an hour. An hour turned into two. Zuko was getting restless and was about to go check on everything when Sato marched in scowling. While waiting, Zuko had picked out an easy read and found a comfortable place on the floor. Now Sato had his arms crossed and was giving him a massively disapproving look. Before the interrogation could start, Zuko jumped up, “Great! Your back and I’m assuming that everything worked out wonderfully. Now let’s go meet my uncle before the sun sets.”

He just barely managed to duck Sato’s hand as he tried to grab the collar of his shirt again.

Victory!

Zuko managed to get to the garden before the captain could stop him. Sitting at a table with a steaming cup of tea, was his uncle. He quickly sat down and did his best to appear innocent. Judging by the look his uncle was giving him, his “innocent” look could use some work. Heavy footsteps behind Zuko alerted him to Sato towering over him.

If I don’t look at him, then maybe he’ll drop it.

“General Iroh, would you like to hear what your nephew got up to today?” His uncle gave Zuko a questioning look before turning to the captain, “I am certain it must be quite the adventure. Captain Sato, why don’t you sit and relax. I would love to hear what caused my nephew to be delayed.” Before Zuko could protest, Sato took a seat and started to regale his uncle with everything that Zuko had done. Judging by the pointed looks his uncle was giving him, Zuko won’t be allowed to roam the palace by himself for the foreseeable future.

This is how I die.

Again.

The rest of the day went by relatively peacefully. His uncle seemed torn between scolding Zuko and laughing at all that had transpired. Sato seemed more than happy to have someone to tell all of Zuko’s latest adventures. Zuko objected profusely at how he was portrayed and fought to defend his honor. He also tried to keep the two men from becoming allies, but he had a sinking feeling that he wasn’t successful.

As the cool night air breezed into his room, Zuko felt like he could finally process everything that happened. The fact he was intentionally murdered. Sato getting banished. His father burning him. Everything that his father and uncle had said.

If life can be a learning experience, then why not death too?

I can erase consequences.

(Present day)

The feeling of heavy fog gradually lifted from his mind as he woke up. For a brief moment, Zuko thought he had died again. However, the memories of the previous days came trickling back in.

I absolutely hate reviving while I’m still awake.

It always makes me feel off for the rest of the day.

Well, more than a normal revival does.

He turned his head and saw his uncle sitting next to him, slouched asleep. Carefully, Zuko got out of bed. He almost made it to his door when, “How are your hands, Prince Zuko?” Zuko nodded, “They’re fine.” Once again, Zuko went to leave. “Nephew, I have been thinking. Perhaps we should head to port. All this time at sea can be stressful. I am sure we all could benefit from some relaxation.” He could feel his uncle’s pointed look.

“I don’t need to relax uncle. The Avatar is heading to Roku’s Temple, and so are we.” Before his uncle could utter another protest, Zuko made his way up to the helm. Once there he gave the helm’s man directions. The rest of the day was spent avoiding his uncle.

I know I can’t avoid him forever, but he cannot know what I’m doing. Eventually he’ll drop it, and things will return to normal.

Well, normal for us.

By nightfall, Zuko had managed to conveniently not be anywhere near his uncle. Relieved that he got to avoid any unwanted conversations, he opened his door and froze. Sitting on a mat with a pot of tea, was the very man he was avoiding.

If I leave now, would it be possible for me to get away?

“Ah. Nephew, I was beginning to wonder when I would see you again.”

Why do the spirits hate me?

Zuko weighed his options. If he retreated now, he would be able to put off the conversation a little while longer; but this conversation couldn’t be avoided forever. On the other hand, if he stayed and got it out of the way; then he might be able to convince his uncle to drop it. With a sigh, Zuko sat down.

Iroh took another sip of his tea before putting the cup down, “Nephew, I know you are struggling with something. You have been for many years, even before your quest for the Avatar started. I wish you would tell me what was going on, but I cannot force you.” Zuko was doing his best to study the tea pot instead of looking at his uncle. Iroh sighed, “Prince Zuko, such strong negative feelings cannot be buried forever. The more you try to bury them, the more they will fight to the surface. All I ask is that you talk to someone soon, even if it is not me.”

With his piece said, Iroh left Zuko’s room. Zuko continued to sit in the same spot for a while longer.

I don’t need to talk to anyone.

I’m going to die soon anyways.

Permanently.

Hopefully.

Even though he spent most of his energy avoiding his uncle, he still dedicated enough time to plan for tomorrow. They were going to run into the Fire Nation blockade that they would need to pass in order to get to Avatar Roku’s temple. There was no doubt in his mind that he was absolutely going to die. It’s just a matter of how rather than when.

Zuko started his pre-death preparations. He lit the incense and candles, made sure his clock was properly wound up, removed the blanket, and grabbed the thick piece of leather. This time, he decided not to wear warm clothes.

I have a distinct feeling that I am going to have some fire related deaths in the Fire Nation.

Just a wild guess of course.

He was with Azula. The scenery kept changing. One minute they’re walking through the Caldera and the next they’re in the palace garden. Everything seemed so happy, they were laughing. Then something changed. The ground turned black and became boiling hot, icicles rained from the sky. He grabbed Azula’s hand and ran as fast as they could, but they didn’t seem to be moving. A giant sea serpent broke through the cracked ground and swallowed them whole. He was burning. He couldn’t breathe!

He woke up covered in sweat.

Just a nightmare.

Zuko got up and prepared for the day. He walked onto the deck of his ship and observed the surroundings. The sky was pale blue; and in the distance, he could just barely make out the blockade. He knew Aang would come this way. It was the fastest possible route to the temple and that bison couldn’t fly forever. All he had to do was wait.

His crew was tense as they waited for his orders. Iroh kept not-so-subtly hinting that they should stay on this side of the blockade rather than whatever it was that Zuko was planning. Soon, Zuko noticed a suspiciously moving cloud. It was moving significantly faster than the others and in the wrong direction.

How have they not been captured or killed yet?

I guess if someone wasn’t paying attention it might’ve worked.

Zuko wasn’t the only one who noticed the strange cloud. The blockade raised the alarm. Before long, they began to catapult flaming projectiles at them. He had to think quickly, if the Avatar gets killed then everything falls apart and he would have to reset. “Charge the blockade!” His uncle looked at him, mortified, “They will not stop for us, nephew!”

“They are busy with the Avatar. We can sneak through while they’re distracted. Full speed ahead!”

“You have done many foolish things in your life, but in all your sixteen years this is the most foolish!”

I am so glad you don’t know half the things I’ve done.

“I know what I’m doing!”

Their ship lurched ahead, fire and black smoke were billowing from the stack. The gap between the ships in the blockade was narrowing. Just before the gap closed, the ships stopped. Curiously, Zuko looked up and saw Zhao.

Of course you’re here.

Their ship limped its way into Fire Nation waters. “What are the damages?” His engineer stumbled out of the engine room, black smoke and soot followed him, “The engine block is cracked.”

“How long will it take to fix?” The engineer coughed and waved away some smoke, “It’s going to take at least a few hours, but it’ll only be a patch job. We need to get a proper fix as soon as possible.” Zuko looked at the temple in the distance and watched Aang land. Mind made up, he started to head below deck, “I’ll take the paddle boat. Use the smoke from the engine to give me a smoke screen before I enter the water. It will buy me some time.” His uncle looked unhappy but nodded.

As soon as his ship entered the water, thick smoke blocked his vision. For the few precious minutes his line of sight was obscured, he relied on a compass to navigate to the island. Soon the smoke cleared, and the island came into view. Like every other Fire Nation island, it was volcanic. The black rocks along the shore gleamed in the sunlight.

If I have to swim into a cave I am going to scream.

Zuko steered the ship to the safest looking beach and began the journey up the steps to the temple. The temple itself was unguarded. An oversight in Zuko’s opinion.

Did Father really think that the newest Avatar wouldn’t go to the temple dedicated to the previous one? Was he just expecting some old sages to successfully fight him off?

Eventually he reached the temple itself and began to climb the stairs inside it. As he ascended, he could hear voices. He came to a massive room lined with columns and an equally massive door against the far wall. In the center of the room he spotted Aang, his friends, and a fire sage. They seemed to be trying to figure out how to open the door.

They need more firebenders.

Zuko was about to intervene when he heard Sokka speak up, “Why don’t we put explosives in the key holes? It could be just enough fire power to open the door.” The others seemed to agree and started to set everything up.

Sokka’s not wearing a dress and makeup this time.

Well, Uncle did say that when people leave home, they do like to experiment.

He shook his head and watched the group light the fuse. A few seconds passed, and then a series of explosions went off. Smoke filled the room before gradually dissipating. The doors were still closed.

The group seemed to panic, but Sokka had another idea, “It looked like we succeeded. The other Fire Sages are going to think Aang got in and you, “he pointed at the Fire Sage with them, “can convince them to open the door. Once the door is open, Aang can slip in.” It seemed like they agreed that it was the best plan.

I guess Sokka is the strategist of the group.

Drawn in by the sound, the other Fire Sages came charging into the room. The one Fire Sage that was with Aang repeated what Sokka told him to say. Together, the Fire Sages opened the door. During all of this, Zuko kept watching. He watched as the Avatar ran for the door and managed to get inside. A bright light filled the room, and the doors slammed closed. Fighting had broken out between Aang’s friends, their Fire Sage ally and the other Fire Sages. From a distance, a jet of flames separated the warring groups.

Zuko whipped his head to the side the fire came from and nearly groaned out loud.

Zhao.

Don’t you have anything else better to do?

The commander marched into the room with a group of his men. In quick succession, all of the Avatar’s allies were captured and chained to a column. Zuko was still in his hiding spot when he felt hands yank him out. He snarled and cursed as he was hauled in front of Zhao.

“Ah, Prince Zuko. I was wondering where you were. That little smoke screen of yours didn’t work.” Zuko opted to just glare at the man. When Zuko didn’t say anything, Zhao continued, “I’m sure the Fire Lord will be delighted to have you brought before him. Maybe he will find a more…permanent solution for you.”

He’s baiting me. If I attack and I get killed, I’ll have to see his stupid face again. It’s almost not worth it.

Almost.

Zuko clenched his jaw tightly and managed not to say anything. Zhao looked a bit disappointed, “No matter, chain the prince with the others. The Avatar will come out soon enough. The Fire Lord will be pleased when I bring him his son and the Avatar.” With that, the guards holding Zuko dragged him to the pillar the others were chained to. Katara and Sokka were glaring at him. Sokka complained, “Why does that guy have to be chained next to me?”

Rude.

Though I guess I wouldn’t be too happy being chained up next to a villain.

“It’s not like I asked to be chained next to you.” Zuko watched as Sokka’s eyes flitted between him, Zhao, and the door Aang was behind. He could see the gears turning in his head as some sort of plan was forming.

I don’t like that look.

That look spells nothing but problems for me.

Sokka stood up straighter and spoke loudly, “So what’s the deal with you two? Don’t you outrank him?” Before Zuko could tell Sokka to shut up, Zhao chimed in, “A banished prince doesn’t outrank a loyal, high-ranking officer of the Fire Nation Navy.”

“Oh, you’re banished? Is that why you have such a tiny ship?”

You leave my ship out of this.

Zuko gritted out, “It’s functional.” Zhao barked out a laugh, “A generous parting gift from the Fire Lord.” Sokka looked thoughtful for second before addressing Zhao, “But you still aren’t royalty, right? If Zuko here gets un-banished, he’s going to outrank you again.” Now Zhao started to look annoyed, “Judging by how things are going, I don’t find that likely.”

What is Sokka trying to do?

Sokka casually shrugged, “I mean, no one thought the Avatar would come back, but here we are. I’m just saying, the whole chaining-up-the-prince thing might come back to haunt you.” Zhao was doing his best to ignore the Water Tribe warrior, but it was clear that he was starting to get under his skin. Katara hissed at Sokka, “Are you trying to get yourself killed?”

It’s my job to get killed and I can do it better.

Sokka snickered, “I mean, what is your endgame? You will always be beneath someone.” Zhao now rounded on Sokka and marched toward him.

I guess that’s my cue.

Zuko tried to sound as smug as possible, “Glad you have just as much honor now as you did during our Agni Kai.” Zhao now turned to him. “Silence!” He noticed that the commander was further away from the door, but that won’t do them any good if Zhao kills them. Sokka opened his mouth to talk, but Zuko managed to elbow him in the side, “Will you stop that!” He spluttered indignantly and wiggled as far away as the chains would allow. He opened his mouth again, “You lost a fight to him? Commander Zhao lost a fight to Zuko? I thought you were supposed to be powerful or something.”

Murderous would be an understatement when describing the look of Zhao’s face. It was clear that Sokka didn’t really understand the danger he was putting all of them in. He didn’t seem to catch the fact that Zhao only mentioned bringing Aang and Zuko to the Fire Lord.

Well, I did know that the first go around would fail, but I hate the fact that it’s Zhao who’s going to kill me.

With an internal sigh, Zuko chimed in, “Of course he lost the fight to me, and he will lose the fight with the Avatar as well.” Zhao turned to face him, “If I didn’t know any better, I’d say you were hoping that the Avatar escapes.” He let a manic smile crawl across his face as he said, “Of course I am.” His smile grew as he watched everyone around him grow more confused.

“You realize you just branded yourself a traitor? Not even your uncle can save you.”

“I don’t need him to. Do you want to know something Zhao?” The commander was looking at Zuko like he was giving him the most entertaining show, “Go on, I’m sure you can’t incriminate yourself anymore than you already have.”

It looks like the play is taking a bit of a temporary detour, but I’ll get it back on track soon enough.

Uncle did say he wanted me to talk to someone.

“I have absolutely no intention of capturing the Avatar, and I never did.”

The shocked silence was deeply amusing to Zuko who started to chuckle. The Water Tribe siblings were verbally stumbling over each other trying to understand what he just said. Zhao, on the other hand, looked at him disgusted. Before he could express his disdain, Zuko continued, “The Avatar will master all the elements and defeat Ozai. I’ll make sure of it, even if that means I have to be a minor villain in the play.”

There were confused mutterings about what he meant by ‘play’, but Katara and Sokka mostly stayed silent and listened. Zhao was sneering, “I’m sure the Fire Lord will love to hear how his disgraced son is helping the enemy.” The chuckling had turned into a full-on laugh from Zuko.

“Ozai isn’t going to find out for a while longer. The stage is still being set up and the characters aren’t ready for the final confrontation. There’s still so much growth the heroes need to do first. We haven’t even reached the climax of act one!”

“It seems all your time at sea has made you go mad.” Zuko’s laughter got louder.

“I am absolutely crazy, you have no idea the things I’ve seen and been through; but you, Zhao, are pathetic. No one will know who you are fifty years from now. All of your accomplishments will either be forgotten or undone. Nothing you have done or will do will be remembered. You are just a side character at best. The Avatar’s friends will be remembered for centuries. They are more important to the story than you will ever be. You. Are. Nothing.”

Now Zhao went from writing Zuko off as a lunatic to becoming increasingly enraged. Smoke started to rise from his clenched fists the more Zuko talked. He was no longer watching the door Aang was locked behind, but neither was Zuko. Zhao seemed like he was just barely containing his rage. All he needed was one more well-placed insult to drive him over the edge, an edge Zuko was more than happy to race towards.

“No matter how hard you try Zhao, you will always be a failure!” That seemed to be what broke Zhao’s composure. He wrapped his hands around Zuko’s neck and squeezed.

Zuko laughed.

“Silence!”

Zhao squeezed harder.

Sokka and Katara were shouting.

Zhao’s hands were heating up.

Burning.

Laughter turned to choked screams.

Flesh bubbled and sizzled at his neck.

The smell of burning flesh filled his nose.

He couldn’t breathe.

Each exhale was gurgled.

With a snap, his esophagus collapsed.

Sounds faded.

Blinding light.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up gasping. His throat burned. The feeling of chains restraining him kept him still. The smell of burning flesh filled his nose. The feeling of fingers squeezing his neck kept him from swallowing. He inhaled.

Each breath brought in the musk of incense. He moved his hands and touched his throat; new scar tissue greeted him. The ticking of the clock focused his mind. He was in his room.

Well, I will admit that uncle was right.

Talking was pretty therapeutic.

No one will remember what I said, but that’s for the best.

I mean, if I was able to get out of there alive with Aang and his friends in that version of the script then I’d be forced to be a main character. A hero even. I can’t be a main character and pull all the necessary string from the background!

I am, at best, a background character when needed.

With practiced ease, Zuko got up and inspected himself in the mirror. There, on his neck, he saw two burned on handprints. It would be obvious to anyone who saw it how he died.

That’s just great.

I already have a handprint burned onto my face.

The scars nearly covered his entire neck, the outline of where the thumbs had crossed over each other was easy to see over his esophagus. At the center of the “palms” on the sides of his neck was where the scarring looked the most brutal. The scar tissue was a dark red, and it almost looked like it was full of craters. As for the rest of the scars, the “fingers” ranged from light pink to almost white. Some of the tips of the scars were barely noticeable.  The whole thing crossed over the scars that Sokka and that Kyoshi warrior gave him. Only faint traces of them could be seen if he really looked. With a sigh, Zuko began applying the scar paste.

I already had to use it, now I have to use more of it.

Once he deemed himself decent, he retraced all of his steps leading up to the temple. He watched Aang and his friends get spotted, forced his way through the barricade, and listened as his engineer told him that his ship was broken. Now Zuko believed it was time to try something slightly different.

“I’m going to take the paddle boat to the temple. Try to get the ship to go in the opposite direction while also giving me a smoke screen. Once I’ve got the Avatar, I’ll meet you five miles north from here.”

His uncle still didn’t look happy but kept his peace. With that, Zuko made his way to the temple. He gradually climbed up the steps and stairs to the room where the massive doors were. As Zuko hid behind a pillar watching the group, he realized that he might need to make another change to the script. There was a very real possibility that Zhao saw through the smoke screen again and will come marching in here any minute now. If Zuko doesn’t change anything, then everything will fall apart again.

Well, time to play villain again.

He watched as Aang, Katara, and Sokka hid when the other Fire Sages came to investigate the explosion that failed to open the door. Zuko observed where Aang went to hide and quickly grabbed him. When he heard Katara call out, “Aang now’s your chance!” Zuko decided it was time to do a dramatic reveal.

“The Avatar’s coming with me. Close the doors, quickly!” He began to march Aang to the steps leading down the temple with Aang when the airbender twisted out of his grip and sent a gust of air at him that sent him flying down the stairs. By the time Zuko returned to the room, Aang had managed to get into the doors before they closed. His friends and ally were still chained to a pillar, but Zuko wasn’t too worried yet.

As long as Sokka doesn’t antagonize Zhao again, I think they’ll be fine.

Probably.

Zuko made a show of trying to open the doors with the sages, but he knew that they were sealed. It didn’t surprise him when Zhao stepped into view with an entourage of soldiers. Zhao still looked as smug as ever when he said, “A traitor, a banished prince, and the Avatar. It must be my lucky day.” A few soldiers approached and restrained Zuko as he declared, “You’re too late Zhao. The doors are sealed closed.” Zhao waved off his statement and drawled, “He’ll have to come out eventually.” With that, Zuko was dragged to a pillar and chained to it. A different pillar this time.

With sharp eyes, Zuko watched everyone. He made sure that Sokka didn’t look like he was about to get himself killed, watched the doors to see if they were opening, and looked to see where every soldier was located.

Suddenly, the doors opened, and a blinding white light filled the room. Zuko had to look away. He could hear Zhao giving the order for his men to shoot at the door. When Zuko looked back instead of seeing Aang, he saw what he believed to be Avatar Roku.

He looks pretty lively for a dead guy.

Roku took control of the flames the soldiers were firing at him easily and bent them around himself. A strange fog was billowing at his feet, and his eyes glowed with an eerie white light as he seemed to scan the room. For a brief moment, he paused at Zuko. It was like Roku was trying to make sense of what he was seeing, like Zuko was confusing him. The moment passed as quickly as it started. Silently, Roku condensed the flames and then sent out a massive wave of fire with enough heat to melt the chains.

Zuko took a moment to take in what was going on around him. Aang’s friends and ally were free and unharmed. Avatar Roku seemed determined to destroy the temple, but Zuko was relatively certain that he wouldn’t hurt Katara and Sokka. With his mind made up, Zuko sprinted for the exit.

Just as he boarded his paddle boat, he watched as lava began to erupt from the once dormant volcano.

At least I didn’t die to that.

It probably would’ve been quick, but I don’t want to experience every possible death. It’s not like I’ll get some sort of prize if I do.

He watched the sky as he slowly made his way to the meet up point. As the temple collapsed, a familiar bison took to the sky with all three passengers on board. Relieved, Zuko focused on getting himself to safety. Zhao more than likely got out of the temple before it collapsed and will try to capture Zuko if he doesn’t hurry up and leave.

Luckily, Zuko made it back to his ship without any issues. His engineer informed him that his patch work would hold long enough to get to a safe harbor, but they cannot afford to postpone it for anything. The blockade ships seemed to be distracted with the volcano erupting and Zhao being missing, so Zuko’s ship and crew were able to slip back through without issue.

As Zuko watched the sunset and the moon rise, he allowed himself to smile triumphantly. Everything was starting to fall into place, just like he told Zhao it would. While he didn’t know what exactly Roku told Aang, he was willing to make a guess.

In these types of plays, this is when the hero officially knows what their mission is. Now the heroes have to train and go on adventures to prepare themselves for the climatic showdown.

He snickered to himself until he heard someone walk up behind him, “Nephew, I am surprised to see you here. I thought you would be staring at a map in order to figure out where the Avatar will be heading next.”

“They won’t get far, that bison can’t fly forever. We are heading in the best possible direction to run into them again.” A long pause followed. His uncle looked like he was trying to choose his next words carefully, “Nephew, perhaps while we are docked, you and I can go to a healer.”

“Why? Are you getting sick? Did you get hurt?”

“No nephew, I am well. However, I am concerned that you are not.” It took a minute for him to understand what his uncle was saying. Indignantly Zuko protested, “I’m not crazy!”

I am absolutely crazy, but no one needs to know that.

“I did not say that you were. I only say this because I care about you, Prince Zuko. Look at your hands, I know you did not get those injuries from sliding down the cliff face. You are suffering. Perhaps a healer can give you something to help.”

“I don’t need to see a healer. Believe whatever you want about my hands.” With that, Zuko stormed off to his room. Once inside, he closed and locked the door. A part of him was angry at his uncle for even insinuating that Zuko needed professional help. Another part was worried about how this will affect his plans.

What if Uncle gets me institutionalized?

If he starts to truly think I’m a danger to myself, he may actually do that.

I highly doubt Ozai would stop him.

It won’t be the first time a member of the royal family was locked away in an institution.

I can’t let that happen.

The play needs me to keep the main characters on track.

I guess I need to figure out how to act “normal”.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age fifteen)

Zuko and his crew had just docked at a small port town in the northern part of the Earth Kingdom. The town itself didn’t look remarkable from what he could see from his ship. It seemed to have the usual bars, brothels, goods, and services that he had come to expect. As soon as their ship docked, various people swarmed them. Apparently, a ship of their size hadn’t stopped there in a while and the town was getting desperate for money. His crew was happy to spend money at the town’s bars, and his uncle seemed excited to go on a shopping spree. Zuko, on the other hand, was on his own special mission.

At the previous port town not too far from where they currently were, Zuko received a tip from a fisherman. Supposedly, there’s a canyon not too far from the town that has a ton of spirits. If his research is correct, the Avatar will be drawn to places like this. There’s also supposed to be several caves dotting the canyon that could be where the Avatar is hiding. Before he began his search, however, he needed to know how to get there.

He looked around the town to find where he knew he could get the best information. Then he saw what he was looking for, or rather who he was looking for. Sitting at a booth selling animal pelts was a trapper. These people will spend months if not years out in the wilderness collecting various items to bring into town to sell. If anyone knew how to get to this canyon, it would be him. The trapper appeared to be middle-aged, but it’s impossible to get a good idea of how old he was. The harshness of the wilderness can easily make someone look older than they actually are. The man’s hair was in a sloppy bun and scars littered the visible parts of his body. In short, this man has seen just about everything in the area.

Confidently, Zuko approached the grizzly looking man and asked, “How do you get to Kubi Nashi Canyon?” The man seemed to startle briefly at Zuko’s question but quickly recovered, “If yer lookin’ to die, there are easier ways to go about it.”

I know, trust me.

Zuko scowled and huffed, “I’m trying to find someone.” The man studied him closely the sighed, “Whoever yer lookin’ for is already dead. Ain’t no one ever entered that canyon alone and come back.”

“I don’t think the person I’m looking for is easily killed. I believe they are hiding in the canyon in one of the caves.” Once Zuko mentioned the caves, the man’s face became grave. He looked Zuko directly in the eyes and said, “I don’t know how well yer ears or eyes work son, so you listen and you listen good. Don’t ever, and I mean ever, go near those caves. Ain’t nothin’ good in ‘em.” Curiosity now peaked, he asked, “What’s in the caves?”

“Monsters.”

“Like angry spirits?”

“No, I ain’t got any problems with the spirits. I don’t bother them, and they don’t bother me. What I’m talking about is monsters that can take on the shape of men, but they ain’t people. They mimic human speech to lure in their prey. If you value yer life, you’ll stay as far away from there as possible.” Zuko wanted to roll his eyes. He knew that trappers, like sailors, were prone to being superstitious; so, he wasn’t taking the man’s claims of monsters seriously.

Sure, I can buy curses and spirits, but monsters? Absolutely not.

Zuko looked around and spotted another similarly grizzled trapper then said, “Look, either you tell me how to get to Kubi Nashi Canyon, or I’ll ask a different trapper. Either way, I am going to that canyon.” The trapper scowled at Zuko, clearly uncomfortable. After a moment, the man sighed before he said, “All right son, but you best get all yer affairs in order before goin’ there. Now, if ya want any chance of makin’ it out of there alive, you best listen closely. Don’t go near the caves, them monsters live there; don’t take any gold ya see, ain’t nothin’ good come from takin’ that gold; an’ if you hear voices, run.” It took Zuko a bit to parse together what the man was saying, his accent did take a little while to get used to, but him mentioning gold did catch his attention. Zuko questioned, “What’s wrong with the gold?”

The trapper paused again before explaining, “Rumor has it that the river through the canyon is full o’ gold. Every year some poor soul goes in that canyon lookin’ to get rich, and ain’t anybody ever see them again. Legend has it that the gold’s cursed and will draw the monsters to ya. The few bodies that ever get found have the same thing in common. They’re all missing their heads.”

I guess that explains the name.

Once the trapper realized that Zuko wasn’t dissuaded by his warnings he reluctantly said, “If yer dead set on gettin’ into the Kubi Nashi Canyon, you’ll need to get a canoe. Only way in or out of there is through the river. Once inside the canyon, the place yer tryin’ to get to is past the third big bend in the river. It’ll take ya about six hours to get there from here.”

With a nod, Zuko left the trapper and began to prepare for his journey. He told his uncle that he was going to search the woods tomorrow and not to expect him back until the following morning. His uncle and his crew seemed happy to finally be staying on land for more than one night.

Before Zuko went to bed, he packed a bag with whatever supplies he will probably need and some things his uncle insisted he took. Once he felt sufficiently prepared, he went to sleep. That morning, he ate breakfast with his uncle and tried to convince the man not to spend too much money on unnecessary things.

If he keeps shopping at the rate he is, there won’t be any room left for anyone to sleep.

As Zuko left his ship, he grabbed his bag of supplies and then made his way into the town. With relative ease, he found a business that allowed him to rent a small canoe. Now that he felt he had everything that he would need, he began his hike through the forest to the river.

The forest was densely packed with large trees, and Zuko had to regularly step over giant roots to keep from tripping. The canopy overhead was so thick that it almost looked like it was nighttime even though it was midmorning. Humidity clinged to the air and the cool northern breeze made his skin prickle. Birds and other animals could be heard all around him.

After about thirty minutes of hiking, Zuko reached the river. He decided to take a short break to eat some of the food he packed and rest.

If I were someone who enjoyed being out in nature, I think I would appreciate this more.

Once he finished, he dragged his canoe to the water and began making his way down the river. At first, the water seemed relatively calm but fast moving. However, as he got closer to Kubi Nashi Canyon, the water started to get more violent. Zuko had to constantly maneuver himself and the little canoe to keep from tipping over. The rapids flung him all over the place before finally spitting him out down a small waterfall.

Zuko was absolutely soaking wet. The cold water made his clothes feel five times heavier than they normally would be. He closed his eyes and took a deep breath. When he exhaled, a small plume of fire appeared, and his clothes began to steam. He was happily dry again.

That trapper was more than happy to give me warnings about the “monsters” that live here, but he couldn’t be bothered to tell me about the rapids.

Grumbling, Zuko paddled his way down the river. The canyon walls towered above him so high that the sun’s rays didn’t reach him. Along the canyon walls, Zuko could see the entrances to several caves dotted all around him. It would be impossible for him to get to them, so he had to float past them. The back of his neck prickled, he couldn’t shake the feeling that something or someone was watching him from the caves.

I’ve been around too many sailors for too long.

I’m getting paranoid.

With that, he tried to brush the feeling out of his head. However, the feeling of dozens of eyes boring into him from the caves never left him.

As he rounded the first big bend in the canyon, the rapids started to return. Now, mostly expecting them, he was able to navigate the water with ease. At the second bend, there was a series of small drops that were definitely more treacherous. He was plunged under the cold water and had to struggle his way back up multiple times. After feeling like he was being juggled by the rapids, he finally rounded the third bend.

As soon as he turned the corner, he saw a beach that seemed accessible enough to land and start his search. Zuko dragged the canoe onto land and began to survey the area. The ground was covered in rocks and dark moss. Massive trees dotted the landscape and large roots split the stones around them. Wanting to set up camp, he hiked further into the forest.

The further he went in, the less rocky the ground became. Eventually he came across a small clearing. Exhausted, Zuko propped up a tarp on some branches and decided that it was good enough for tonight. It didn’t look like it was going to rain, and the wind wasn’t too strong, so he wasn’t worried about exposure. With the last of his energy, he gathered some sticks for a fire. Once he got a fire started, the sun had set; and he decided to go to sleep.

Something woke him up. Zuko blearily looked around his campsite, but nothing stood out. His campfire was mostly embers by now, and he couldn’t hear anything strange that would’ve woken him up. Then something did catch his attention.

I don’t hear anything at all.

There should be night birds, insects, or other animal sounds.

Something.

Anything.

Cautiously, Zuko crawled out of his tent and added more sticks to his fire. The more he tried to listen for the normal night sounds, the more unnerved he became. The only thing he could hear was the crackling of his fire. He remembered overhearing that Lieutenant Jee liked to go camping, and one of the things that Zuko recalled him saying was that the forest only gets this quiet when a massive predator is hunting.

The silence stretched on. Zuko barely moved, barely breathed. Then, he heard a sound in the distance. He couldn’t quite make out what it was, so he listened closer.

Whispering.

His heart started to pound as soon as he realized what he was hearing.

Nope.

Nope.

Nope.

Absolutely not.

Zuko stood up and shouted, “Who’s there? Show yourselves!” The silence returned for a brief period, just long enough to make Zuko question if what he heard was really there. Then the whispering came back, only louder this time. He couldn’t make out what they were saying, but he could tell that the voices were surrounding him.

Not wanting to appear scared, Zuko started whipping flames around him and shooting random jets of fire into the direction the voices were coming from. The flames lit up the forest and casted strange shadows through the trees. He looked around, hoping to spot whoever was out there.

Nothing.

The whispering drew closer and closer. It almost sounded like it was on top of him.

Wait.

Just as Zuko was about to look up, something slammed into his head.

Darkness.

Awareness came back to him gradually. A deep cold made his limbs numb. He couldn’t move. The sound of dripping water echoed around him. Pain pulsed from his head and hands.

Did I die?

Is this some sort of afterlife run by dark spirits?

I don’t think I did anything that bad.

He realized that he was in some sort of cave. When he turned his head, he could see the entrance. It appeared to be relatively small and would require a fully grown person to stoop to get inside. He could hear the sound of the river just outside the cave. From the corner of his eye, he saw movement. He squinted into the darkness and started to see multiple moving figures. The pitch black made it hard to make anything out, but he was certain that there were multiple things here. The whispering returned, only now he could understand what they were saying. Multiple voices were echoing the same phrases over and over.

“A feast…a feast just for us.”

“We are one and many…”

“Give us fire through the flesh…”

“We will be the new Avatar…”

Again, and again the voices echoed the same phrases. Fear pounded in Zuko’s veins. He tried to move but stabbing pain from his hands stopped him. The sound of rocks striking against each other got his attention, and he watched as sparks ignited what appeared to be a pile of sticks. The cave lit up, and Zuko could now see everything.

Bones.

Human bones of all sizes were strewn everywhere.

Skulls were placed on the ground as if to make various strange symbols.

Small skulls were piled along the walls.

Zuko looked at the figures huddled around the fire. Ten adults were staring back at him. They were all naked. Their bodies were caked in mud, and their hair was a matted mess. The area around their mouths was stained a rusty brown. They all looked like they hadn’t eaten for a while, and they looked at him like he was their favorite dish. One of the men was holding a sharpened rock. In his beard, Zuko could see small bones knotted in it.

Zuko looked at his hands now that he could see and saw that a spike was driven through his palms into the ground above his head. A cold terror filled his heart.

These people are going to kill me.

They are going to eat me.

The man with the sharp rock crawled on all fours to Zuko’s side. He looked at him hungrily, Zuko shouted, “Stay back! Get away from me!” His warnings went ignored as the others started to surround him. As a last-ditch effort to save himself, Zuko breathed as much fire as he could and pulled at his hands. Agony ripped through him as his hands tore against the spike. He could feel the bones in his hands shift and snap as he yanked them. Rivets of blood ran down his palms and pooled on the ground. His fire came in spirts as he screamed in pain.

In his panicked thrashing, the man with the stone was able to get close enough to plunge his blade into Zuko’s abdomen. The wound wasn’t deep enough to be lethal, but the dull stone blade still sent waves of agony pulsing through his body. It was just enough to make him stop firebending.

The other people took the opportunity to pounce.

Hands started clawing at him.

The stone blade was slowly jerked back and forth, sawing through his skin.

Teeth sunk into his arm.

Zuko screamed.

The blade was removed.

Fingers plunged into the weeping wound of his abdomen and ripped it open.

It sounded like tearing paper.

Zuko shrieked.

Tears of pain rolled down his face.

Hands, so many hands reached inside him.

The smell of blood filled the air.

A loud crunch barely registered to him.

A person came into view with a finger in their mouth.

Is that mine…?

Agony.

Screaming.

He watched as intestines started to be pulled out.

Teeth and hands started to pull them apart.

The acidic smell of bile joined the smell of copper.

Teeth and nails dug into his legs.

Pain started to become distant.

His voice was hoarse.

He couldn’t scream anymore.

Voices chanted, “Feast on the fire flesh. Gain its power.”

The wet sounds of chewing echoed distantly.

Blood, his blood was running down their chin.

More sounds of crunching bones.

Blood filled his mouth.

He couldn’t breathe.

Please kill me.

Laughter surrounded him.

The chanting continued.

Dark spots danced across his vision.

Hands, so many hands were inside of him.

Something inside of him was grabbed.

He heard a cry of celebration.

A brief sensation of white-hot agony in his chest.

Darkness.

Screaming.

Zuko woke up screaming.

He could feel the hands inside of him, pulling him apart.

Teeth tore into his flesh.

A spike kept him pinned in place.

He couldn’t see.

The feeling of nails clawing at him, teeth ripping into him was all he could focus on.

He could taste blood in his mouth.

Someone was grabbing him.

Kill me!

Please!

Just kill me already!

He continued to scream, he might even be begging.

The person attached to the hands tried to hold him down.

Please!

No more!

The person immediately stopped but then started to rock him side to side.

They were humming.

I can’t breathe!

Please just kill me!

The person humming sounded like they were crying. That caught Zuko’s attention. It was just enough to start to draw him back to reality. The person was his uncle. He was saying, “You are safe, nephew. Whatever you are seeing is not real. Breathe, Prince Zuko. Everything is all right.”

In for 5. Out for 10.

His uncle noticed that Zuko had started to calm down and asked, “Nephew, can you name something that you can see?” His mind felt like it was shattered into millions of pieces, but he managed to say, “My room.” His voice was hoarse and full of cracks.

“Very good, nephew. What is something that you feel?”

Hands.

So many hands inside of him.

Zuko let out a whine. His uncle continued to rock him and said, “Focus, Prince Zuko.” He took a moment then answered, “My blanket.” His uncle hummed then asked, “What is something that you smell?” Zuko took a breath then answered, “Tea. I smell tea.” He could feel his uncle nod, “Good. What do you hear?” The distant cries of sea birds could be heard outside. Zuko listened to them for a moment before answering, “The sea birds.”

“One last question, nephew. What do you taste?”

“Blood.”

“Hm. I am not surprised. I believe you bit your tongue. Stay here, nephew. I will bring us some tea. It will help calm your nerves.” With one final squeeze, his uncle let go and left with one final glance to make sure he was alright. Zuko slumped back onto his bed. His head now felt somewhat clearer.

Cannibals.

Why not.

I could have gone my entire life without that death.

Here’s to hoping I never get eaten again.

His uncle returned to his room with a steaming pot of tea and two cups. Zuko shakily got up and sat on the edge of his bed. Even though he wasn’t a big fan of tea, he did feel slightly better holding something hot. It helped chase away the cold that still lingered in his joints. They both sat in silence drinking the tea.

Once the pot was empty his uncle spoke, “Nephew, that was quite the nightmare you had. From my experience, talking about our nightmares gives them less power over us.” Zuko could tell that this was an invitation to talk, but he honestly didn’t want to relive the experience. He wasn’t even sure how to explain it without making his uncle suspicious. Instead, Zuko asked, “Why did you ask me all of those questions?” His uncle seemed to notice Zuko was trying to avoid the subject, but he didn’t comment on it. Instead, he replied, “That was a calming exercise. Those questions are meant to help ground you in reality.” Zuko nodded and filed away this information for later.

If deaths like this keep happening, then I’m going to need all the help I can get to stay somewhat sane.

Zuko almost wanted to start laughing. Everything that had happened felt ridiculous. If someone had come to him with his story, he would’ve labeled them insane and dismissed them.

A cave full of cannibals in a supposedly cursed canyon.

Nobody would ever believe me.

He remembered all the bones that were scattered everywhere. The small skulls against the walls. It was a sobering realization.

They were eating children.

Were they their own children or did they take them?

Zuko tried not to think about it with little success. The image of small skulls staring at him haunted his every blink. The feeling of hands inside of him made nausea a constant companion. He couldn’t take it. It took a bit of convincing, but he was finally able to get his uncle to stop hovering. With him out of the way, Zuko made his way into the town. Anxious energy started to race through his body as he made his way to the local guards.

With a deep breath Zuko asked, “Are you all responsible for the surrounding area?” The guards looked at each other then at him and answered, “Yes, sir. We protect this town and patrol most of the surrounding forest.” He nodded and said, “Good. I have some information for you about all the missing people.”

With that many cannibals, there’s bound to be a large number of people going missing.

Then again, they looked half-starved so maybe not.

The guards looked at each other again before asking, “Does this have anything to do with Kubi Nashi Canyon?”

“As a matter of fact, yes.” The guards groaned and rolled their eyes. One of them responded, “Look, we’ve all heard the rumors but there aren’t any monsters in the caves.”

“Did you search all of them?”

“What?”

“Did you search all of the caves?” The silence was telling. Eventually a different guard said, “It’s impossible to get to all of them.” At this point, Zuko decided to tell a half-truth. He didn’t know exactly which cave he was in, but he could at least tell these guards the general area of where to search.

“I went into one of the caves and it was filled with human bones. Skulls lined the walls. It isn’t monsters or dark spirits hunting people. It’s cannibals. Go to the caves along the river after the third big bend. The entrance will be too small to walk upright in. You’ll need to stoop or crouch. Don’t go alone. Be careful, they hunt at night.” With his report done, he turned around and fled back to his ship.

He could see the guards talking to each other about whether or not to believe him. As much as Zuko wanted to gather his crew and uncle and flee this place, he felt like he had to make sure that no one else gets killed the same way he was. He watched the town guards from the deck of his ship as they seemed to fluctuate between going out to search and dismissing his report. As night fell, it appeared that they didn’t come to an agreement.

I guess I need to provide a little extra…motivation.

It didn’t take too much effort. All he needed to do was ask a few of the locals about missing people, specifically missing children. As he suspected, children have been going missing in the area for years. Many people seemed to believe that most of them had simply wandered into the woods and had gotten lost. There were plenty of ways to die in the woods without ever being found, so it was a plausible explanation.

Too bad the reality of their fate is significantly worse.

He went around and mentioned hearing about a cave full of bones. Zuko made sure to include just enough details to entice people, but not enough to make them question how he got that information. By the next day, the whole town was filled with tension. Everyone was talking about the cave of bones.

Within a few hours, a mob had formed, and they started demanding that the town guards go to search for this cave. It seemed that the guards were trying to reason with the people but gave up as the crowd became more insistent. Zuko watched from his ship as the guards plus a group of townspeople headed into the forest.

I am not leaving this ship.

I am not on today’s menu, thank you very much.

Not again.

As soon as I know the cannibals are delt with, we are leaving and never coming back.

Zuko stood looking out at the forest as darkness fell. He dismissed his uncle’s concerned questions and recommendations of tea for sleep. Normally, Zuko would be going to bed around this time. He didn’t like taking the chance of reviving while still awake, but he had a feeling that he was probably safe. At least as long as he stayed on his ship.

As the morning sun began to rise, Zuko saw someone run into the town in a panic. They were rapidly gesturing at the forest. More people came out to investigate, and soon the town was filled with shouting.

I guess they found the cannibals.

Sure enough, the town guards and the townspeople that accompanied them came into view with four of the cannibals in chains. The cannibals were covered in blood. Some even looked injured. They were looking around the town wildly, hungrily. A few even lunged at people that got too close.

Where are the rest of them?

I know there’s more.

He sent a crew member to investigate the commotion. When he finally returned, Zuko got his answer. Apparently, the cannibals were so hungry and desperate that they attacked the search party during the night. They were spotted and a massive fight broke out. Some of the cannibals were killed in the conflict. Once the remaining cannibals realized they were going to lose, they retreated back to their cave. However, the search party was able to follow them. At the cave, another fight broke out before the remaining surviving cannibals could be subdued.

After they had all the surviving cannibals restrained, they explored the cave. They found their missing children. That’s what the initial messenger was screaming about. That’s why the entire town is about to lynch the cannibals. Zuko watched as the crowd switched between screaming, crying, and trying to carry out their own version of justice. Some were screaming at the local politicians demanding answers and wanting the remains to be returned.

He had seen enough. Discreetly, Zuko gathered his crew and uncle then sailed out of the port. As land faded into the distance, Zuko went back to his room and now decided to try to find the scar. It didn’t take long.

On his stomach there was a vertical scar. Part of it was a straight line, but it quickly got jagged at both ends. Like the skin was torn open and didn’t heal properly. It was just above his navel and contrasted with the scar Azula gave him all those years ago. He didn’t want to look at it anymore.

Zuko went to bed and tried to go to sleep. Just before sleep claimed him, he had a horrible thought.

If the cannibals took a little longer to kill me, I could have been stuck in a loop of constantly dying.

There would’ve been no escape, and no one would’ve been able to help me.

I need to find the Avatar as soon as possible.

He’s the only one who can help me.

At least I know the Avatar wasn’t there.

The world would have significantly bigger problems if the Avatar was a homicidal cannibal.

(Present day)

After Zuko escaped Roku’s Temple, he had his ship start heading in the direction he believed Aang would be heading. He had narrowed it down to a few possible areas, but the port they’re heading to is the most likely in his opinion. Now he just had to wait to get there.

Normally, he would be pouring over maps, meditating, or working his way through his firebending sets while he waited. However, his uncle was still hinting at seeing a healer, so Zuko was trying to appear like a somewhat sane normal person.

Whatever that means.

He figured the most normal, sane thing he could do was to spar with his lieutenant. While he and Jee aren’t particularly close, they are able to be civil. Though Zuko could tell that there were times when Jee wanted to snap at him. Regardless, it was a nice, sunny day and they were having a friendly spar. Then the ship made a sudden turn that had both of them stumbling over themselves.

Confused and irritated, Zuko marched up to the helm to see what was going on.

I will drink tea everyday for a month if Uncle doesn’t have anything to do with this.

Sure enough, when Zuko got up to the helm, his uncle was playing Pai Sho with the crew. Still annoyed, Zuko asked, “What is going on? Why have we changed course?” His uncle answered while trying to figure out his next move, “I have misplaced my white lotus tile and now my set is incomplete. I am hoping that this port will have it.” Now flabbergasted, Zuko asked, “You altered our trajectory for a Pai Sho tile?!”

“The white lotus is a lesser used tile, but it can be the deciding factor that changes the tide of battle. Please nephew, it will not take long to search the market.”

Stay calm.

Deep breaths.

It’s not like Uncle completely derailed our course and potentially increased the distance between me and Aang.

With a frustrated yell, smoke filled the room. His uncle whipped out a fan and said, “I am so glad to have such an understanding nephew.”

I am going to switch the labels on all of your tea.

Zuko decided to meditate in his room until they reached the port. Within a couple of hours, the call rang out signaling land. With a grunt, Zuko went up to the deck. His uncle was already there and seemed excited to go on a shopping adventure. Grumbling, Zuko followed his uncle off the ship and into town.

Together, they walked from stall to stall. His uncle inspected almost every item and seemed to buy almost every other thing he picked up. Zuko almost felt sorry for his crew as they carried his uncle’s haul back to the ship. Soon they had visited every stall and storefront. His uncle lamented, “I have searched this entire port, and I could not find the white lotus tile!”

“So, this entire detour was a complete waste of time!”

I am switching the labels of his tea and rotating the jars just to be certain.

“Not at all! I have found many treasures to add to my collection.” Zuko watched as crew member after crew member boarded the ship with arm loads of stuff. One passed carrying a familiar musical instrument. Incredulously, Zuko asked, “You got a Tsungi horn?”

“Yes! For music night. Now all we need is some wood winds.” Not too far away was a ship that was advertising various goods from all over the world. His uncle’s face lit up, “This place looks promising!” With a sigh, Zuko followed his uncle aboard what was clearly a pirate ship. He only half-listened to his uncle who was admiring a strange looking black statue with ruby eyes.

That thing looks cursed.

Not that I can sense that sort of thing but knowing my luck it probably is.

As his uncle admired the statue, Zuko overheard the pirates talk about a Water Tribe girl and a bald monk escaping them. Zuko approached them, “Did this bald monk have an arrow tattooed on his head?” The pirates looked at each other then asked, “What’s it to you?”

“I’m looking for him. If you help me capture him, I can offer you a reward.” The pirates looked at each other, but then the person who appeared to be the captain spoke up, “That Water Tribe girl stole a valuable scroll from us. You help us get it back, and we’ll help you get the monk.”

“Deal.”

Did Katara seriously steal from pirates?

What was she thinking?

Was she thinking?

Knowing their luck, the pirates would’ve found and attacked them anyways, so in a way I’m still helping.

I just have to not actually capture the Avatar.

Easy enough.

Zuko knew that his deal with the pirates was probably going to fall through. He was willing to bet that the scroll that Katara stole contained some sort of waterbending forms, and that could be useful for them in the future. They will probably fight to keep it instead of handing it over peacefully. He just needs to keep the pirates from killing Aang or his friends.

He spent the rest of the day narrowing down where they had probably set up camp. They were more than likely to be near a body of water that is relatively secluded. There’s a river not too far from the port that’s a likely candidate, but there’s also a number of streams and creeks they could also be hiding at.  Zuko didn’t think they would camp near a lake or pond.

As stupid as they can be sometimes, I think they’re smart enough to not drink or cook with stagnant water.

After weighing all of the options, Zuko decided the best place to at least start searching was the river. As he was about to leave his room, he looked down at his desk. He still had Katara’s necklace.

That might be useful.

He snatched the necklace and shoved it into his pocket. With his men behind him, they met up with the pirates. Together Zuko and the pirate captain came up with a plan.

“If you want your scroll back, we will need to search the river. I’ve been chasing these people for a month now, and I know how they think.”

Usually at least.

The captain studied him for a moment then nodded, “You help get our scroll back, and you’ll get your monk.” With that, they boarded their respective boats and started down the river. By nightfall, Zuko was beginning to wonder if Aang had already moved on.

It would be the smart thing to do after stealing from pirates, but I have a sinking suspicion that they are still in the area.

As they continued down the river they heard something that caught their attention. More accurately, they heard someone exclaim in frustration about a “stupid scroll”. They beached their ships and split up to search the area. Not long after that, Zuko heard the sounds of conflict. He ran towards the sound and came to a small clearing. The pirates were surrounding someone. It took a moment for Zuko to process what he was seeing, and he almost started laughing.

Why is this my life?

On the ground, lying in a pool of blood, was Katara. One of the pirates had a sword that was dark with blood. They were celebrating as they triumphantly held up the scroll. Zuko sighed.

Someone could make the argument that this is my fault.

I should have specified that we needed her alive.

Oh well, time to reset the stage.

He made his way into the woods and told them, “I’m going to continue searching the area. Her friends can’t be too far away.” None of the pirates acknowledged him, but he wasn’t surprised. Once he felt far away enough, he sat under a tree. With practiced ease, he pulled out his vial and drank its bittersweet contents.

Numbness spread across his body.

Coldness tinged his fingers.

The sounds of night faded.

Darkness.

With a start, Zuko woke up. He was in his room.

Okay, don’t let the pirates go after Katara alone.

Got it.

Grumbling, Zuko got up and restarted the day. Just like every other time he restarted, he followed all his previous steps up to a certain point where he believed a change needed to be made. As he was negotiating with the pirates, this seemed like a perfect opportunity to make sure everything went right this time.

“You help me get the monk, and I’ll help you get the scroll back. However, the Water Tribe girl needs to stay alive. She’s the perfect bait for the monk.” The captain frowned at him, “You’re expecting me to not punish someone who stole from us?”

“I’m telling you to wait until after I have the monk. Once I have him, she’ll be all yours.” The pirate considered him for a moment before agreeing to Zuko’s terms. With that out of the way, Zuko pretended to study a map to narrow down where to search.

After enough time had passed, Zuko and his crew met up with the pirates. He reiterated, “Remember, don’t kill the Water Tribe girl. We need her alive.” The pirates rolled their eyes and grumbled but nodded in acceptance. They gradually made their way down the river until they heard the same frustrated voice and beached their ships. This time, Zuko followed the pirates as they searched the area.

Call me paranoid, but I have a sinking suspicion that they may still try to kill her.

Soon enough, the pirates ran into Katara, and a fight broke out. She tried to flee but the pirates were pursuing her. Zuko stepped out of his hiding place and grabbed her, “I’ll save you from the pirates.” She didn’t look comforted.

Time for the villain to enter the stage.

Zuko’s men secured her to a tree, and he began to question her, “Where is the Avatar?”

“Go jump in the river!”

“Tell me where he is, and I’ll let you and your brother go.” Katara just glared at him. He remembered the necklace in his pocket and pulled it out while saying, “Help me get what I want, and I’ll give you something that you want in return.” Her eyes widened when she saw the necklace, “How did you get that?”

“I didn’t steal it, if that’s what you’re asking.”

The captain interjected, fed up with Zuko’s questioning and demanded the scroll. However, all it took was the threat of burning the scroll to get the pirates to go search the woods. The moon was high in the sky now. Zuko pursed his lips as he studied the night sky. He knew he needed to sleep soon. The probability of him not dying was practically zero.

I mean, every encounter with this group has always resulted in at least one death.

However, the pirates would absolutely use the opportunity to attack. If they kill Katara before 6 o’clock and he doesn’t wake up in time, then she will be dead forever. On the other hand, when he inevitably dies, he will revive while still awake. There’s absolutely no way that wouldn’t draw unwanted attention. Not to mention that it would leave everyone vulnerable while he recovers.

The play can’t afford to lose her, but I can’t afford to be found out either.

With no other options, Zuko approached his uncle and said, “Uncle, I’m going to search the area, and I need you to watch her. I don’t trust that the pirates won’t try anything while I’m gone.” His uncle gave him a quizzical look but agreed. As an added layer of precaution, Zuko made sure to grab the waterbending scroll. Without sparing a look at Katara, he made his way into the forest.

After some searching, Zuko found what he considered a safe place to sleep. It was a gap between a large rock and a tree. Just barely big enough for him to squeeze into. However, the opening was easy to overlook and wouldn’t be hard to cover from the inside. With some wiggling and choice words, Zuko managed to get inside and curl up. Once he got somewhat comfortable, he forced himself to fall asleep.

Body aching, Zuko woke up and wriggled his way out. His armor was full of dry leaves and his hair had small sticks tangled in it. Grumbling, Zuko made his way back while trying to make himself look presentable. Once he returned, he was relieved to see that everyone appeared to be in just as good of condition as he left them. Most of the pirates were gone, probably out to catch Aang. His uncle was looking him over and greeted him, “Good morning, Prince Zuko. I was wondering when you would return. Is everything alright?”

“I’m fine.”

His uncle clearly didn’t believe him but sighed instead of pressing him further. Shouting from the forest immediately put him on edge, then the pirates returned with Aang and Sokka in tow. They were tied up, but they seemed relatively unharmed. Katara called out, “I’m sorry Aang, this is all my fault!” Aang tried to comfort her, “No Katara, it isn’t.” Iroh, on the other hand, stated, “Yeah, it kind of is.”

Okay, show time.

Let’s see how I die now.

As Zuko and the pirate captain began their negotiations, Sokka spoke up, “You’re trading the Avatar for a dumb scroll?”

Why?!

Why do you feel the need to antagonize people while being restrained?!

The pirate captain turned to Sokka and asked, “Your friend here’s the Avatar?” Sokka got this big smile on his face as he looked between all of the pirates, “Sure is, and I bet the Fire Lord would pay a huge bounty for him.” Zuko tried to salvage the situation, “Don’t listen to him! He’s trying to turn us against each other!” Unfortunately, he could see the exact moment the pirates were no longer interested in trading.

The pirate captain called out, “Keep the scroll, we can buy ten more with the money will get from the Avatar!” Immediately fighting between the two groups broke out; the pirates threw smoke bombs to obscure their vision, and the clang of steel filled the air. Zuko turned and noticed Katara was still tied up.

The pirates might still try to kill her, and I can use the distraction to “accidently” cut her loose.

However, something else happened. As he got closer, he noticed the Avatar’s lemur chewing threw the ropes tying Katara’s hands. Before Zuko could say anything, Katara managed to snap the remaining restraints. Then, in a panic, she quickly bended water up and flung it at him.

The force of the water slammed him into a tree.

He felt a familiar piercing cold pinning him in place.

He looked down.

An icicle was lodged in his side.

He looked back up at Katara and shouted, “Why?!”

She looked horrified.

His uncle ran to him.

Numbness spread throughout his body.

The warmth of blood seeped down his side.

Black spots danced across his vision.

His uncle was crying.

He begged him to hold on.

Zuko tried to smile.

Darkness.

Zuko woke trying to clutch at his side. The sharp stab of ice puncturing him still remained. His breathing sounded louder than normal in his little cave. He focused on the feeling of dry leaves and dirt under his hands. With a grunt, Zuko forced his way out of the opening.

She stabbed me!

Again!

I thought we were past that!

If this becomes a recurring thing with her, I’m going to develop a phobia of icicles.

Okay, Katara doesn’t need my help.

My previous observations still hold true, stay away from her.

Once again, he brushed the leaves and sticks out of his armor and hair, returned to the river, reassured his uncle that he was fine, the pirates dragged Aang and Sokka to them, and now Zuko was battling the pirates with his crew. This time, he didn’t approach Katara. Instead, he stayed close to the water’s edge.

He saw Aang and Sokka approach the pirate’s ship and try to push it back into the river. Zuko started to approach them when he felt water around his ankles. He looked down just in time to see the edge of the river rising rapidly. Before he could retreat, he was pulled into the water.

The current pulled him under.

His armor became heavy.

He hit the bottom and tried to swim up.

Silt clouded his vision and burned his eyes.

His foot was tangled in something.

Instinctively, he thrashed violently.

He couldn’t break free.

Water rushed up his nose.

His lungs burned.

The roar of rushing water filled his ears.

Reflexively, he took a breath.

Water burned its way into his lungs.

He tried to cough but only inhaled more water.

His vision faded.

Darkness.

Gasping for breath, Zuko woke up. He coughed violently as he tried to get rid of water that wasn’t there. His mind felt like it was straining under some unseen pressure. He tried to focus.

The feeling of the cool rocks.

The sound of morning birds.

The smell of wet leaves.

The sight of tree bark.

The taste of dirt.

He took a breath. His mind gradually returned to the present.

Okay, that’s it.

I go near Katara, I die.

I stay away from her, I die.

I die.

I die.

I DIE.

I’m just going to ignore her and focus on Aang.

He fumbled his way out of his tiny enclosure and made his way back to the beach. Once again, he did everything the same up until the fighting broke out. This time, he chose to focus his attention on Aang. They quickly started to exchange attacks when Aang sent Zuko flying due to a well-placed gust of air. By the time Zuko regained his footing, Aang and his friends had managed to commandeer the pirate ship. The pirate crew had stolen Zuko’s paddle boat to go after Aang.

Zuko ran along the river in the hope of reclaiming his ship, but as he made his way through where they were all fighting, something caught his eye. He got closer to inspect the item, he felt like it might be important. Curiously, Zuko picked it up and studied it. It looked like a whistle in the shape of a bison, Aang’s bison to be more specific. He pocketed it and continued his chase down the river.

Am I on a mission to collect Aang’s and his friend’s belongings?

I just need something from Sokka, and my collection will be complete!

As he and his uncle rounded the river bend, he watched as the ship the pirates stole from him crash into the ship Aang, Sokka, and Katara were on. He saw the wrecked remains tumble down the side of the waterfall. Zuko ran up to the edge and scanned the water below. A minute turned into five. Then ten. There was no sign of any of them. As he went to run down to the base of the waterfall he told his uncle, “Stay here and tell the crew to search the woods. It’s possible that the Avatar managed to escape the fall.” It didn’t look like his uncle was listening. He was staring at the water with an unreadable expression.

Zuko didn’t wait to figure out what his uncle was thinking. He quickly climbed down the wet rocks to the river below. The rapids at the base of the waterfall turned violently and crashed against the rocks. The sound echoed all around him. A few of the pirates seemed to have survived the fall and were crawling onto shore, but they didn’t seem too interested in him. That’s when he saw it. A small hand just beneath the surface with an arrow tattoo. It wasn’t moving.

I don’t understand, why didn’t he go into the Avatar State?

I guess it doesn’t really matter.

I have to reset the stage anyways.

He reached into his pocket for his vial when his hand touched the whistle. Zuko pulled it out and inspected it more closely this time. It just looked like a regular whistle. He decided to blow on it just to see what would happen. Within seconds, Aang’s bison came soaring in. Zuko looked down at the whistle, then at the bison who was now looking around frantically, and finally at Aang’s submerged hand.

Are you kidding me?

This entire portion of the script hangs on Aang having this whistle?

That’s just stupid!

Who’s in charge of the script?!

I am going to have words with them!

Grumbling, Zuko put the whistle back into his pocket and grabbed his poison. The bison was looking at him now. He casually downed the liquid and said to it, “Look, I’m not happy about this either. I was so close to getting this portion of the play done, but then Aang had to fumble this apparently important prop. Now I have to reset the stage and make sure he does it right this time.” The bison (I think its name is Appa?) growled at him, but didn’t make any moves to attack.

The poison started to take hold.

He fell on the ground.

Numbness invaded his limbs.

Appa approached him and pushed him with his nose.

Coldness gripped his heart.

His vision faded.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up laughing. He couldn’t help it. Everything up to this point just felt ridiculous. He laughed until his voice gave out. Tears streamed down his face.

Calm down.

Breathe.

In for 5. Out for 10.

Focus.

The rough texture of the rocks under his hands.

The smell of damp leaves.

The sound of the wind through the trees.

The sight of bugs crawling around him.

The taste of dirt in his mouth.

Breathe.

It took a while, but Zuko eventually felt his mind start to stitch itself back together. He dragged himself out of his hiding place and stumbled back to the river. With clumsy fingers, he brushed the foliage off of him.

Ignore Katara.

Don’t fight Aang.

When he returned, his uncle was giving him odd looks. Before he could confront Zuko, the pirates returned with Aang and Sokka. This time, he focused on just fighting the pirates, more specifically the pirate captain. Zuko would shoot fire at the man, and he would retaliate with deadly sword swipes. They danced around each other trying to get the upper hand when Zuko felt someone grab his phoenix tail. He turned ready to retaliate when he noticed that it was his uncle. His uncle exclaimed, “Are you so busy fighting that you cannot see that your own ship has set sail?” Zuko snapped, “Uncle, we don’t have time for your proverbs!”

“It’s no proverb, look!” His uncle pointed to the water as Aang, Katara, and Sokka were floating down the river on the pirate ship. The pirate captain shouted, “Bleeding hog-monkeys!” then ran after them. Zuko couldn’t help but to point and laugh. Then he saw that some of the pirates had stolen his ship. He shouted after them, “Hey, that’s my boat!” Behind him, he could hear his uncle mutter, “Maybe it should be a proverb…”

“Come on Uncle!”

The last thing you need is more proverbs to pester me with.

They ran all the way to the edge of the waterfall; and, in the distance, Zuko could see Appa flying off with all three passengers on board. Still, Zuko couldn’t help but shout, “My boat!” when he noticed its wrecked remains at the bottom of the waterfall.

Do you know how hard it was to find one that fits on my ship?!

Now Uncle is going to use that empty space to store more useless junk!

His uncle was panting behind him when he finally caught up. Then he started to chuckle, “Prince Zuko, you are going to get a kick out of this. Do you remember that white lotus tile I was looking for? It was in my sleeve the whole time!” A giant grin was plastered on his uncle’s face as he pulled the piece out to show Zuko.

Stay calm.

Breathe.

It’s not like I just got out of a small death loop.

It’s not like the only reason we stopped here was because of Uncle.

Zuko snatched the lotus tile out of his uncle’s hand and threw it. He watched it sail through the air and then bounce off the head of a pirate.

That made me feel slightly better.

Iroh started pouting, but Zuko consciously ignored him. He gathered his crew, and they all made the long journey back to his ship. The crew wanted to stay docked a little longer, but Zuko ordered the ship to set sail. He needed to catch up to Aang. They grumbled but complied. An undercurrent of tension was starting to grow, but he chose to ignore it. He had more important things to focus on.

That night, Zuko snuck down the halls of his ship. He had a mission to complete, a promise to fulfill. Quietly, Zuko opened the door to his uncle’s room. The sound of his uncle’s snoring echoed around the room. With a manic smile, he carefully peeled off the labels of the tea containers and switched them around. Once all the labels were scrambled, he rearranged the containers. When he felt that he had caused enough chaos, he quietly snuck back out of his uncle’s room and made his way to his own.

It won’t solve anything, but it did make me feel better.

And really, that’s all that matters.

Uncle will absolutely know that it was me.

That’s a problem for future me.

I think this counts as “normal” behavior, right?

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age thirteen)

Zuko was in his special spot in the library. It was technically a small closet used to store repair materials for books and scrolls, but it was so rarely used that he could stay in there for hours without being disturbed. There was a shelf against the wall filled with various glues, brushes, and paints. Next to it was a cabinet that held blank parchment and ink. Opposite it was a workstation stacked with old books and scrolls that probably needed some minor repairs, but they aren’t considered enough of a priority to do immediately. The smell of old books and dust filled the air. The only sources of light were a single torch next to the door and a candle Zuko had brought with him. Since this room was regularly unoccupied, Zuko stored some things here to make it more comfortable. He kept a blanket in the cabinet and some large pillows stuffed under the workstation.

When he decided to retreat to this room, he always grabbed an armful of interesting scripts. If any of the library staff knew what he was doing, they didn’t say anything. Though where he kept his stuff was always oddly clear and the library always seemed to get new scripts that fit exactly what he liked.

It had been a long week for Zuko, so he decided to take a small vacation to the library. His tutor was getting frustrated with him, the man clearly wanted to be teaching more advanced math, science, and history. However, Zuko was struggling to grasp the intermediate lessons. His father was all too happy to compare Zuko’s marks to Azula’s who seemed to be perfect at everything. Then there was his firebending training. Even after all these years, he was still struggling with the basics. His instructor would keep trying to push him to try the harder sets, but he always ended up failing. Ozai didn’t even ask about his firebending progress anymore which was telling enough to Zuko.

Azula was becoming more and more difficult to be around. She was all too happy to point out his failures and weaknesses, and seemed to take great delight in watching Zuko get scolded for not meeting expectations. There were still days that they could be around each other like they used to, but they were becoming less frequent. It’s almost better to just avoid her than take the chance that she’ll be pleasant to be around.

Zuko shook his head and focused back on the script in front of him, it’s been years since he was able to go to a theater. This was going to be as close as he gets until his father either becomes pleased with his progress or dies. At the rate things were going, Zuko wasn’t expecting to see a play for the next few decades. A voice from the doorway interrupted his thoughts, “I was wondering where you were, Your Highness.” Standing in the doorway was Captain Sato.

How did he find me?

I guess I have one less hiding spot now.

The man had a small smile and was raising an eyebrow at him. Zuko asked, “How did you find me?”

“I heard the Fire Lord was…unhappy. I figured you would go somewhere that you knew none of your family would go willingly.”

Unhappy is a bit of an understatement.

Zuko could practically feel the verbal barbs from his father’s words as he questioned and subtly insulted his intelligence. Just another day getting lectured for his lackluster marks. When Zuko didn’t respond, Sato asked, “May I join you, Your Highness?”

“If you want.” Sato entered the closet and groaned as he lowered himself to the floor next to Zuko. They sat in silence for a while; he could tell that Sato seemed nervous about something but didn’t ask. Finally, Sato cleared his throat and said, “After I leave today, my family and I are going on a trip. We’ll be spending a week at Ember Island.” Zuko felt a twinge in his heart, but he shook it off, “Why the last-minute trip?” Sato seemed uncomfortable but tried to look calm as he said, “My wife and I decided we could use a break from the Caldera.” He turned and gave Zuko an oddly serious look, “I will be back, Your Highness. I promise.” A coil of tension that he didn’t even realize was forming, relaxed a bit. The man studied Zuko closely before casually saying, “I’ll see about getting you more scripts to read. I’m pretty sure you’ve read everything ever written in the Caldera by this point.”

Zuko huffed a laugh and Sato seemed to relax a bit. Then something about the way he held himself changed, like he was trying to appear nonchalant while also trying to convey something important, “When I get back, maybe you can join my family on a small outing. I bet the theaters will have some interesting plays to watch.”

“Father won’t let me go anywhere until he’s satisfied with my marks and training.”

“Your Highness, I have known you for years; and I can confidently say that you will do whatever you want with or without permission.” Zuko tried to hide a smirk while looking innocent, “I have no idea what you’re talking about.” Sato shook his head. After that, they sat in a more comfortable silence.

Sato put a hand on his shoulder and said, “I hope you won’t get into too much trouble while I’m gone. Don’t even think about trying to hide anything from me, I’ll do a thorough investigation when I get back.”

Rude.

What have I done to earn such a level of distrust?

Scowling, Zuko said, “I don’t appreciate your attacks against my character, and I demand compensation.” Sato laughed and rolled his eyes, “Your Highness, I don’t think that counts as an attack as much as a conclusion based on past behaviors. However, if I don’t find any evidence of you scheming, then I may be willing to compensate you with some of my wife’s homemade mochi.”

I suppose I can attempt to be a well-behaved teenager for a week.

How hard can it be?

Zuko gave a haughty sniff and said, “I find your offered compensation to be adequate.” Now Sato snorted, “If my wife hears that you called her mochi ‘adequate’ she’ll have your head, royalty or not.”

“What she doesn’t know won’t kill me.”

Probably.

Sato chuckled and shook his head. Zuko asked, “What are you guys planning to do at Ember Island?” The man schooled his expression into something that might resemble neutral and said, “My wife and I are thinking of getting a house there when I retire. We want to scout the area to see if it will be a good match for our future plans.” Ice formed in Zuko’s veins, he hated how small his voice sounded when he said, “You’re leaving me?” The image of another adult disappearing from his life played out in his mind. He didn’t even realize that his hands were shaking until a pair of large, calloused hands grasped them.

The captain was trying to look Zuko in the eyes as he said, “I don’t plan on leaving for a long time, Your Highness. This is all just possible plans for a distant future. Even if I do leave, I promise that I will always return if you need me.” Zuko just nodded, but that icy feeling remained. Sato hummed and said, “Someday, I would like you to meet Kai. I think you and my son would become partners in crime and cause an obscene amount of chaos.” The man huffed a laugh at whatever image his mind conjured.

He loves to talk about me and his son getting along.

It won’t happen any time soon, but maybe someday.

That icy feeling melted a bit more as Sato continued to describe what he thought his son and Zuko would get up to. Some of the hypothetical plots had Zuko objecting that he was way too smart to do something like that, others he still objected to but quietly filed them away for later.

Before Zuko realized it, hours had passed, and that uncomfortable icy feeling was completely gone. He was smiling and laughing at how Sato described his son’s antics. The more he listened, the more he wanted to meet him.

It would be nice to have a friend of my own.

Azula has two so why can’t I have just one?

Zuko’s candle was just about to go out when Sato said, “It’s getting late, Your Highness. I think it’s time for me to head out and you to go to bed.” They stood up and made their way out. If Zuko were to be accused of dragging his feet to double the time it normally took to leave the library, then he would claim that he was just inspecting the bookshelves for potential future reads. Either way, Sato didn’t comment on the slow pace. When they reached the entrance Sato placed his hand on Zuko’s shoulder and gave him a serious look, “Remember, Your Highness. I will return in one week, so please try to stay out of trouble until then.”

“I don’t know why you seem to think I actively look for trouble.” Sato gave him a bemused look before sighing, “Just promise me Your Highness that you will do your best to stay out of trouble.” Zuko grumbled about distrustful officers but ultimately said, “Fine, I promise to avoid trouble as much as possible.” He seemed to accept Zuko’s promise and, with one final squeeze of Zuko’s shoulder, turned and walked away.

Zuko watched as Sato left and that familiar uncomfortable feeling in his chest returned. A part of him wanted to rush after Sato or try to sneak out and follow him. He knew it was a bad idea, and that Sato probably would not appreciate having Zuko follow him on a family vacation. Still, that feeling haunted him through dinner and all the way to his room. In bed, he stared up at his ceiling. That feeling, instead of fading, seemed to get stronger. It was like cold fingers were gripping his heart. Zuko huffed in annoyance.

This is stupid.

Why am I feeling this?

I know he’s coming back.

He said he was.

He promised.

The rest of the night consisted of him berating himself and trying to sleep. Eventually, sleep did come but it wasn’t very restful. Images of Sato or one of his faceless family members getting hurt without him there kept playing out in his dreams. Sometimes they overlapped with a certain adult who walked away and never came back. He picked at his breakfast and headed to his lessons. As usual, the old man barely made sure that Zuko was paying attention. He was far more interested in hearing himself talk, then checking to see if his pupil was following along. That uncomfortable feeling in his chest grew into an anxious spiked ball.

I died twice at Ember Island; if he gets hurt or killed, I won’t find out in time.

Before his tutor dismissed him, the old man scolded him, “Prince Zuko, as heir to the throne you must make an effort to learn more about what is and has happened. How will the people of our great nation ever trust you as a leader if you won’t even try to understand what is going on?” As Zuko left, he pondered his tutor’s words.

I guess he is right.

Mostly at least.

I have serious doubts that my father will hand the throne to me if the way he’s treating Azula is anything to go by.

I mean, he got the throne even though Uncle is still alive so why wouldn’t he give it to Azula?

Either way, maybe trying to know what’s going on in the Fire Nation will help distract me.

Maybe it would make Father like me a little bit or see me as useful.

Probably not.

The perfect opportunity presented itself when he saw a group of generals enter the war room. He knew he technically wasn’t allowed in there. Even Azula was barely invited to sit next to Father in these meetings. However, Zuko figured that this was a perfect opportunity to show his father that he was at least invested in what was happening. All he had to do was get in.

With all the confidence he could muster, Zuko approached the entryway. Without missing a beat, the guards blocked the entrance and refused to let him in. He tried to order them to step aside, but they stood firm. A hand on his shoulder stopped his attempts, “Prince Zuko, what are you doing?” His uncle guided him away.

“I’m trying to go to the war meeting, but the guards won’t let me in!”

“You are not missing anything, trust me. These meetings are dreadfully boring.” Zuko considered his words for a moment then said, “How can they people of the Fire Nation trust me if I don’t know what’s going on? I want to see what being Fire Lord is like.” His uncle studied him for a moment before saying, “Very well, but you must not speak. These old folks are sensitive.” Zuko smiled and thanked his uncle. Together they walked into the war room.

Inside, massive pillars decorated with dragons were evenly spaced through the room. In the center was a low table with a large map of the Earth Kingdom on it. There were various pieces symbolizing both Earth Kingdom and Fire Nation troops in their current known positions. At the front of the room was the throne sitting behind a wall of flames. Zuko couldn’t see his father clearly, but he could make out his outline.

When he took a seat next to his uncle, Zuko could feel the various high ranking military officers giving him looks. It was no secret that he wasn’t Ozai’s favorite, and they knew that he wasn’t invited here by the Fire Lord. However, no one objected to his presence, and the meeting started with little fanfare.

Well, uncle was right.

This is absolutely boring.

And I thought my tutor liked to hear himself talk.

These guys put him to shame.

Various officers stood up to give status reports on what their troops were doing, what challenges they were facing, and various ideas of how to gain more victories. A few raised concerns about supply lines for troops marching into the mountains. Others proposed building more military forts closer to the frontlines. Zuko wasn’t sure how his father stayed awake through all of this. Then an old general stood up and started giving a report about a strong battalion of earthbenders that had been giving them trouble.

Then the conversation took a turn that caught Zuko’s attention. The general giving the report said, “I propose using the 41^st division.” Another old general looked confused and responded, “But the 41^st is entirely new recruits. How do you expect them to defeat a powerful Earth Kingdom battalion?” The general proposing the plan smirked, “I don’t. Instead, we can use them to draw out the Earthbenders so that our more experienced troops can attack from behind. What better bait to use than fresh meat?”

“You can’t do that!” Zuko was probably just as surprised as everyone else in the room when he spoke up, but he knew it was too late to stop now.

So much for staying out of trouble for a week.

He continued, “These are real people who are loyal to the Fire Nation. You can’t treat them like they’re disposable! How can you betray them like this?” He could feel the heat from the fire as the wall of flames flared to the ceiling. Ozai’s voice sounded deceptively calm as he said, “What do you think you’re doing Prince Zuko?”

Ice crawled its way into his throat as he tried to defend himself, “Father, this plan is abhorrent. It’s unacceptable to sacrifice that much life for something that might not even work.”

“You think you know more than a seasoned general?”

Zuko could feel himself starting to shake and clenched his fists, “I may not be a seasoned war veteran, but that doesn’t mean I don’t know that this plan is wrong.” Silence stretched between them. In fact, the whole room was silent. Finally, Ozai said, “You entered this room without my permission and disrespect a seasoned general. This dishonor cannot go unaddressed. You will fight in an Agni Kai against the person you dishonored the most.” Without hesitation, Zuko agreed.

The war meeting was dismissed and some guards escorted Zuko to his room. He briefly saw his uncle give him a concerned look. His heart was hammering in his chest; he’s never fought an Agni Kai before. Once in his room, he paced and tried to calm his nerves.

I could drink my poison and start the day over.

He stared at his nightstand and weighed his options. If he drank the poison, then there was a real possibility that no one in that room would try to stop the 41^st from being slaughtered. However, if he didn’t, he would be facing the general in an Agni Kai. Either way, there was a real possibility that he was going to die. It’s just a question of how painful the death will be. He continued to pace as he flipped flopped on what to do.

I mean, how hard could it be to fight a general?

Father won’t actually let the man seriously hurt me, right?

Sure, he doesn’t like me, but I doubt he’d let him give me a potentially lethal injury in front of a crowd.

I am, supposedly, the heir to the throne after all.

There was a knock at his door. Confused, Zuko opened it and nearly closed it just as quickly. A foot stopped it from closing all the way, “That’s not very nice Zuzu.” Azula strolled in with a smirk on her face. He scowled at her and asked, “What do you want?”

“You really messed up this time, dear brother.” She strolled around his room, trying to appear casual. Zuko rolled his eyes, “Are you here to point out the obvious or is there an actual point to your visit?” She stopped and turned to him with a frown, “You are aware that you’re going to lose? With your…skill level I’ll be surprised if you last two minutes.”

She really needs to work on her people skills.

“Thank you for your vote of confidence; and yes, I know I’m going to lose.” Azula studied him closely then declared, “You are an absolute dumb-dumb. I’ll be watching, so you better make your failure interesting.”

I think if I squint my eyes, I might see some sort of encouragement in there.

“Thank you, Azula. What would I do without you.” She smirked and waved as she left. As he waited to be summoned, he alternated between meditating and stretching. He wasn’t lying when he said he didn’t expect to win, at least not on the first attempt.

I mean what’s the worst that can happen?

I die?

So what?

Dying is old news for me by now.

Sure, I’ll have another scar; but that isn’t the worst thing in the world.

I just hope it’s not on my face.

I don’t think I have the skills to draw believable eyebrows.

With his mind made up, he spent what time he had left covering all the visible scars on his abdomen and back. As the sun started to set, there was another knock on his door. This time, he knew it wasn’t Azula. When he opened it, he saw a group of guards and a couple of Fire Sages. For an average Agni Kai, this would be overkill. One Sage or a guard would have been more than enough. However, he’s the crown prince and his opponent is a high ranking general, so everything had to be done with extreme care. He was led into a special changing room where he had to put on the traditional Agni Kai attire.

When he was ready, he was led into the arena. His opponent wasn’t there yet, but the Fire Sage directed him to kneel away from the center. Once kneeling, the Sage placed a cloth with the Fire Nation emblem across his shoulders. He could hear the murmuring of the crowd as they waited for the fight to start. Such a high-profile fight like this would draw in various high-ranking spectators. He wouldn’t be surprised if there was a betting pool taking place. Somewhere amongst the crowd, he knew Azula and his uncle were watching. He was almost glad Sato wasn’t here.

I can just imagine the lecture and the disapproving look.

Zuko was kneeling for so long that he was beginning to wonder if the general had gotten cold feet. His knee was beginning to ache from kneeling on the stone floor of the arena for so long. Some of the small loose rocks were even beginning to dig into his knee through his pants. Then a hush fell over the crowd. Tension filled the air.

I guess it’s about to begin.

Silence continued to hang in the air even after Zuko could tell that his opponent had entered the arena. It was like he was being forced to wait. Finally, a Fire Sage rang the gong to signal the start of the Agni Kai. He stood and turned to face his opponent.

No.

This isn’t right.

Standing before him was his father. Without a second thought, Zuko fell into a kneeling position before his father and begged, “Please, Father! I only had the Fire Nation’s best interests at heart. I’m sorry I spoke out of turn!” Panic coursed through his body as Ozai advanced towards Zuko, each step slowly taken as he said, “You will fight for your honor.” Zuko pressed his forehead against the ground and pleaded, “I meant you no disrespect. I am your loyal son.” It was becoming clear that Ozai was losing his patience, he snapped, “Rise and fight, Prince Zuko!” He was almost in front of Zuko now.

“I won’t fight you.”

Zuko raised his forehead from the ground to look up at his father who had stopped in front of him. Tears had started to run down his face, he knew what was about to happen.

Father’s going to burn me.

Is he going to kill me?

Ozai declared, “You will learn respect…and suffering, will be your teacher.” He put his hand on Zuko’s face. For a second, Zuko thought that maybe his father would spare him. That it was over and that things would go back to normal. Then he felt it.

Burning agony across his face.

A bright light blinding him.

The smell of burning flush clogging his nose.

He was screaming.

Flesh was sizzling under his father’s hand.

Hot liquid was oozing down his face.

The hand was removed.

Zuko could feel some of his skin leave with it.

His father’s hand had blood and blackened chunks of skin.

Zuko threw up.

Darkness swam across his vision.

He was so cold.

He couldn’t stop shaking.

Someone was grabbing him.

Darkness.

Zuko gradually woke up. Everything was hazy and he couldn’t focus. It took a moment to realize that he couldn’t see out of his left eye. Sluggishly, he turned his head to try to see the rest of his surroundings. He didn’t recognize the room, but some of the furniture seemed familiar.

Where am I?

It took a moment for his foggy brain to realize that his uncle was sitting next to him. With great effort, Zuko tried to grab his uncle’s sleeve. Unfortunately, his coordination was poor, and he ended up hitting his uncle’s arm. With a start, his uncle looked down at him. At first, he seemed overjoyed to see Zuko awake, but then his face became sad.

“Nephew, I am glad to see you awake. I am sure you have a lot of questions.” Zuko tried to speak, but all he could manage to do was croak and cough. Quickly, his uncle gave him some water that Zuko drank greedily. He didn’t realize how dry his throat was. Once done, he tried again, “Where am I?” His uncle paused then answered, “You are on a ship, Prince Zuko. I am not surprised that you do not remember boarding.”

Why am I on a ship?

What happened?

He could feel sleep starting to pull him under, but he forced himself to ask another question, “What happened?” Iroh looked at him with a tightlipped expression, it was clear that he wasn’t sure how to answer. After a moment, his uncle asked, “What is the last thing you remember nephew?”

I…

I remember going to a meeting…

Azula coming into my room…

Then…

Just like that, everything came crashing back. He remembered what happened. His father had burned half of his face off in an Agni Kai. Zuko didn’t even fight back.

I guess I can’t be too surprised.

It’s not the first time Father burned me.

His uncle was studying him, clearly waiting for him to respond or do something. Zuko cleared his throat then said, “Father burned me. I lost the Agni Kai.” Iroh nodded and his face became unreadable as he asked, “Do you remember what happened afterwards?” He tried to pull up more memories, but all he accomplished was giving himself a headache. With a sigh of defeat, he shook his head. It was clear that his uncle was debating with himself on whether or not to tell him something.

Before Zuko could question him, his uncle spoke, “Fire Lord Ozai has banished you. You may only return to the Fire Nation after you have captured the Avatar. The Fire Lord has not put a time limit on when this should be accomplished. Nephew, I know that this is a lot to take in…” Zuko had stopped listening.

Father banished me?

He burned and banished me?

I can…

I can fix this.

A panicked fog filled his mind as he interrupted his uncle, “Is this the furniture from my room?” Surprised, his uncle nodded, “Yes, nephew. I hope I grabbed what you wanted. You were oddly insistent that I bring your nightstand and that I do not go through it.” He gave Zuko a questioning look, but he was too busy trying to spot said nightstand. It was tucked against the corner of the room; its ornate nature made it stand out against the dull metal walls.

“Uncle, please leave. I want to be alone.” His uncle hesitated briefly before nodding, “Very well, nephew. I will return in a couple of hours to change your bandages.” After giving Zuko one last look, his uncle left the room. Once the door was closed, Zuko struggled to get out of bed. His body felt unusually heavy, and his limbs weren’t cooperating. The room spun around him with each shuffled step. None of that mattered to him. All that mattered was fixing this. When he finally reached the nightstand, he had to lean heavily against the wall and then ended up sliding down onto the floor.

Dark spots danced across his vision as he fumbled to open the correct drawer. With a little digging, he found what he was looking for.

I guess Uncle really didn’t go through my stuff.

Time to fix this.

The dark spots were growing, and the pain in his face was starting to grow to uncomfortable levels. He could feel wet patches form on the bandages. Zuko uncorked the vial and downed the contents.

He slumped over.

Numbness seeped through his body.

His face stopped hurting.

Coldness replaced the burning.

He fell onto his side.

He couldn’t breathe.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up with a strangled gasp. The cold and numbness from coming back mixed with the spinning of the room made him nauseous. He had to close his eyes and breathe through his nose to keep from vomiting. After a couple minutes, he opened his eyes again.

No.

This isn’t right.

Why am I still here?!

He was still on the ship. Panic started to squeeze his throat as he reached for his uncle who was still asleep sitting next to him. Like before, his uncle skirted around the subject of Zuko being banished, but then something his uncle said caught his attention this time.

“Could you repeat that Uncle?” Iroh looked at him cautiously before repeating, “You may only return to the Fire Nation if you capture the Avatar.” Zuko wanted to laugh, he could feel something in his brain pulling taunt. He dismissed his uncle who informed him that he would return in a few hours.

Father wants me to catch the Avatar.

That thing being pulled taunt felt like it was starting to fray.

Only the Avatar can remove a curse placed by a spirit.

The fraying was worsening with each thought.

Uncle said you can’t fight destiny.

A smile was starting to pull at his mouth as he felt that thing in his head become weaker and weaker.

Uncle said life is a learning experience.

The smile grew and grew.

Father said that suffering will be my teacher.

His face was starting to hurt from his smile pulling at the burned mess of his face.

Mother said that tragedy makes the characters more interesting.

A chuckle was working its way up his throat, and it felt like that thing inside him was barely hanging on.

Mother said life is a stage.

He felt that thing in his brain snap. Zuko would describe it as almost freeing.

I am tragedy and welcome to my stage!

Laughter forced its way out of his throat. It sounded jagged, broken, and a little mad. He laughed even as tears burned down his face. He could feel other threads inside his head start to unravel, but he couldn’t bring himself to care. The burning in his face grew and grew. Dark spots danced across his vision.

I am going to find the Avatar and make the best play this world has even seen.

(Present day)

It’s been almost two weeks since their last encounter with Aang, and tensions have only gotten higher on the ship. The crew’s distain with Zuko’s leadership has only gotten worse partially because they haven’t spent any significant amount of time on land to decompress, and mostly because Zuko was too focused on Aang to really care about the needs of others. Zuko has been doing his best to avoid his uncle who keeps hinting at taking him to see a healer or visiting a “special spa” that specializes in troubles of the mind. It would only be a matter of time before someone snapped.

That moment started with his uncle saying, “There is a storm coming, a big one.” Zuko rolled his eyes, “What are you talking about? The weather’s perfect and there isn’t a cloud in sight!”

And he calls me crazy.

Well, more like heavily implies but close enough.

“A storm is approaching from the north. I suggest we alter our course and head southwest.” Zuko huffed, “The Avatar has to be heading north and we will follow him.”

“Prince Zuko, consider the safety of the crew.” Zuko scowled and snapped back, “The safety of the crew is not as important as catching up to the Avatar.” At that moment, Lieutenant Jee walked onto the deck, and it was obvious that the man overheard him. Zuko walked up to him and said, “The most important thing is capturing the Avatar. Nothing else matters.” With that, Zuko stalked off to his room.

I think my portrayal of minor villain number one might get me into a little trouble.

Well, more trouble than it already has.

If there is one thing I am consistently good at, it’s getting into trouble.

A few hours later Zuko found himself back on the deck staring at the horizon. Only instead of seeing clear skies, there were now dark ominous storm clouds in the distance rolling towards them. Most of the crew were on the deck as well as his uncle, and they were all staring at the massive storm. Jee turned to him and said, “Well, it looks like your uncle was right about the storm after all.” His uncle tried to defuse the situation by saying, “Lucky guess!”, but it was clear to just about everyone there that Jee was heavily criticizing Zuko.

Time to play wannabe evil overlord.

This is starting to be a chore.

Bark orders, chase Aang, fight, lose, and repeat.

Some variety would be nice.

Zuko marched up to Jee and said, “Lieutenant, you better learn to show some respect, or I will teach you.” He had just started to walk away when Jee snapped, “What do you know about respect? The way you talk to everyone around here, from your hard-working crew to your esteemed uncle, shows that you know nothing about respect! You don’t care about anyone but yourself. But then again what should I expect from a spoiled prince.”

The word ‘respect’ echoed in Zuko’s head; the speaker shifted from Jee to Ozai. His heart hammered in his chest; his scar ached with a phantom burning sensation. The faint smell of burning flesh wafted through the air. A part of him wanted to laugh. He wanted to laugh at Uncle’s unnecessary concern, at how good he was at playing the villain, all the deaths he endured for the play, and the fact that his own officer was lecturing him about poor behavior.

It reminds me of Sato.

He internally shook his head and pushed that name, and all the feelings associated with it, out of his head. Instead of laughing, he marched up to Jee and issued a silent challenge. They clashed their arms together and rapidly heated them up. Smoke began to rise from their burning clothes. Before either of them could actually get burned, Iroh broke them apart, “Enough! We are all a bit tired from being at sea so long. I am sure that after a bowl of noodles everyone will feel much better.” After Iroh sent Jee a conspiratorial smile, the officer turned around and left.

Zuko turned to face the storm and grumbled, “I don’t need your help to keep the peace.” His uncle went to put his hand on his shoulder, but Zuko shrugged him off. He heard his uncle sigh before leaving him. Now alone, Zuko studied the storm closely.

We’ll hit it officially in probably an hour or so.

Well, I guess it’s time to take bets on how I die today.

It’s been a while so I can only imagine that it’ll be something truly horrific.

Maybe I’ll get struck by lightning.

He smirked to himself as he turned to go below deck and try to get the ship ready to weather the storm. Zuko meticulously studied every corner of the ship he could get to for signs of weakness. He hoped that if he found and address them now, it could be one less death for him to endure. Just as he made his way to the boiler room, he heard voices. He could make out the sound of his crew complaining about him, but then he heard his uncle interject.

Zuko knew that his uncle was probably going to tell some sort of story to get the crew to calm down. A part of him wanted to stay hidden and listen, but another part knew that he probably wouldn’t like what he heard. In the end, he snuck behind some machinery and eavesdropped.

This is nostalgic, only this time I’m not trying to foil some plot to poison a bunch of people.

Probably.

He listened as his uncle set the stage of a younger and, from his perspective, saner Zuko wanting to enter the war meeting. It was interesting to listen to his uncle’s point of view on what happened that day. Some things were clearly glossed over, like what happened immediately after he was burned. Others were slightly embellished, like him saying he wanted to learn how to be the best Fire Lord.

I wasn’t stupid, I knew that there was a good chance that Father would give Azula the throne.

As the rain pelted their ship, and the waves rocked them violently; his uncle continued to tell the tale of why he thought Zuko was so focused on chasing Aang, he said that the Avatar gave Zuko hope. The crew, especially Jee, seemed to be eating the story up. Sounds of sympathy were murmured at the appropriate times. When his uncle finally got to his father burning his face, he listened as the crew admitted to not actually knowing how he got his scar.

I guess that makes sense, we did leave the Fire Nation almost immediately.

They probably didn’t have time to listen to the latest gossip.

Though with how much time they spend in the taverns, you would think that someone would gossip about the Fire Lord burning and banishing his heir.

A deafening crash of thunder and an explosion violently rocked the boat. Zuko quickly slipped out of the room as the crew and his uncle raced around the hull to check for damages. They all met on the deck, still looking for where they were hit when his uncle exclaimed and pointed at the helm. The tower was smoking, and the helm’s man was hanging on to a twisted piece of handrail.

Jee and Zuko scrambled to the ladder as the deck was pitching violently. The lieutenant climbed the ladder first with Zuko not too far behind him. The ladder rungs creaked dangerously as they made their way up to save the helm’s man. A bright flash of lightning blinded them, and the almost instant explosion of thunder made Zuko’s ears ring. When he was finally able to see again, the ladder in front of him was empty. He blinked in confusion as he tried to understand what, or more accurately who, he wasn’t seeing. Jee was gone and so was one of the ladder rungs. As he was pondering the missing officer, the helm’s man fell. Luckily, Zuko was able to catch him, though just barely.

It was awkward maneuvering the man to the ladder while also trying to not fall as the ship continued to violently list side to side. Eventually, they both made it to the relative safety of the deck. Other crew members came to the helm’s man’s aid, but there was a suspicious crowd around a certain area of the deck. He made his way through the crowd and looked down.

Oh.

I’m not even surprised anymore, just disappointed.

There, in a massive, twisted heap, was Jee. It was clear that the man died from the impact or at least very soon afterwards. His eyes were still wide open, and his mouth was frozen in a silent scream. Blood was trying to pool around him, but the violent waves were washing it away. Zuko stared at what remained of the man.

I can fix this.

Jee’s an important character, I’m sure of it.

I bet he’s going to be like that dumb bison whistle and turn out to be the key element that’s needed to get the best ending.

Right.

Time to reset the stage.

With his mind made up, Zuko gave the excuse that, because he was the commanding officer, it was his duty to see to Jee’s body. His uncle tried to protest, but Zuko told him to make sure the ship was heading to safety. As carefully as he could, he threw Jee’s arm over his shoulder and half dragged and half carried the man’s mangled remains into the medical bay. He could feel Jee’s blood seep into his armor and the smell was overwhelming. Once he had Jee mostly on a cot, Zuko locked the door and took out his vial of poison. He sat on the floor next to the cot holding Jee and downed the liquid. As per usual, it didn’t take long.

The familiar numbness made him drop the vial.

He made eye contact with Jee’s corpse.

Don’t worry, this is all temporary.

Icy tendrils worked their way into his chest.

The smell of Jee’s blood clogged his nose.

His vision faded.

Darkness.

Groaning, Zuko felt himself rejoin the living. He clenched and unclenched his fists to try to chase away the lingering numbness. After he felt like he was more or less alive, he got up and restarted his day.

Call me jaded, but I am willing to bet that if I just avoid the storm entirely that something bad will happen.

I don’t know what, but I’m sure that this storm is critical to the story.

Who knows, maybe I’ll run into Aang if I get to the right spot.

With that, Zuko went to the deck to retrace his steps. Everything went as it did last time. He denied the possibility of a storm, got confronted with the storm, fought Jee, listened to his uncle give his version of Zuko’s story, and now he stood on the deck pretending to look for the damage caused by the lightning strike. When his uncle pointed out the damaged helm, Zuko and Jee raced to the ladder. This time, however, Zuko forced his way past Jee to climb the ladder first.

I don’t really know the structural integrity of all the ladder rungs, but I am lighter so maybe it won’t break under my weight.

If it does, then I’ll know that I made the wrong decision.

Death can be a learning experience.

Zuko made his way up the ladder with Jee not too far behind him. When the flash of lightning lit up the sky, Zuko closed his eyes just in time to not be blinded. He heard Jee start to curse behind him just as the deafening crash of thunder occurred. Since he wasn’t blinded, he was able to keep climbing. When the helm’s man lost his grip and fell, Zuko was able to grab his hand. Jee was just far enough behind him that he was at the perfect spot to pull the man to the ladder. Zuko made eye contact with Jee who was giving him a puzzled look. Another bright flash of lightning broke the moment.

Together, all three men were able to safely climb back down to the deck of the ship. As they looked out at the waves, a familiar bison could just barely be seen through the thick curtain of rain.

At this point, I think these people are actively searching for dangerous situations.

At least I have the excuse that I can’t stay dead.

Zuko shouted, “The Avatar!” Jee looked at him and asked, “What do you want to do sir?” He paused as he watched them fly away and then said, “Let him go, we need to get to safety.” His uncle looked a little too proud in Zuko’s opinion as he said, “Then we must head directly into the eye of the storm.”

The ship struggled as it was tossed in the waves. Everyone held on for dear life as they forced the ship to head to the eye. After what felt like a lifetime, they entered its deceptively calm waters. Zuko looked up through the spinning wall of clouds at the blue sky when his uncle came up behind him. Guilt started to gnaw at him as he thought about not only that day’s events, but all the days leading up to this point. He closed his eyes and said, “Uncle, I’m sorry.”

I’m sorry I’m keeping secrets.

I’m sorry I’ve put you through watching me die repeatedly.

I’m sorry that I will never tell you what is wrong with me.

His uncle placed his hand on Zuko’s shoulder and said, “Your apology is accepted.” He watched as his uncle turned to leave with a smile. Just as he was about to go inside as well, something massive burst out of the water.

Don’t be a water monster.

I can’t handle another water monster.

It was Appa. Zuko watched as the bison rose into the sky and Aang looked back down at him. He couldn’t help himself as his lips twitched into a small smile. Just as quickly as Aang had appeared, they vanished above the clouds. He stood there watching where they flew off to for a while longer before turning around. Jee was standing there giving him that same puzzled look but didn’t say anything.

That night, Zuko stood on the deck of his ship watching the storm that had mostly dissipated in the distance. All that was left was some faint rumblings and sparse flashes of lightning. Footsteps approached him from behind. Zuko turned and saw Jee giving him a suspicious look. The man regarded him for a brief moment before asking, “How did you know the ladder would break?” Zuko decided to play dumb, “What do you mean Lieutenant?” The man frowned at him and said, “You intentionally pushed me out of the way so that you could climb the ladder first. I went back to inspect it and noticed that one of the rungs was damaged in the storm. How did you know that it was damaged?” Zuko’s mind raced through all the possible things he could do.

I should play stupid and try to convince him that I don’t know what he’s talking about.

I should tell him that I assumed the ladder was damaged and believed that I was light enough to not be in danger.

I could tell him that, as the commanding officer, I felt it was my duty to climb the ladder first.

I could…

Suddenly, Zuko felt exhausted. He looked around the deck to make sure that they were the only ones there before slumping against the railing like someone had cut all the strings holding him up. With one hand he tiredly motioned for Jee to join him.

I can’t tell Uncle anything because I know he will try to stop me, but Jee is more practical.

He’ll understand what I’m doing and why.

Maybe he will help.

Even stage managers have an assistant.

Cautiously, Jee came up beside Zuko but stayed standing up straight. Silence hung between them with the only sound being the ocean licking at the hull and the dying storm. Finally, Zuko asked, “If I tell you something, can you swear to me that you will not tell my uncle or anyone else?” The man regarded him closely, “Will General Iroh be unhappy if I don’t tell him?”

“Oh absolutely. If he knew what I’m about to tell you, he’d do everything in his power to stop me.” Now Jee looked confused and concerned, but he seemed to steel himself and said, “Fine, I swear I won’t tell your uncle as long as you ensure that he doesn’t direct his rage at me.” Zuko barked out a laugh, “Fair enough, I guess.” He started to nervously pick at his fingers; the silence had returned only now more tense.

 “What I’m about to say will make me sound crazy. If someone told me what I’m about to tell you, I’d think that they were crazy too. Uncle already thinks I’m crazy and he doesn’t even know what’s going on.” Zuko could feel himself starting to shake as he rambled. Jee eventually interrupted him, “If you keep rambling like that, I’m absolutely going to think that you’re crazy sir.” Zuko snapped his mouth shut then took a deep breath.

Right, here goes nothing.

I don’t know why I’m so nervous.

If this goes poorly, I can just reset.

“I can’t die. More specifically, I can’t stay dead.” Jee didn’t say anything as he stared at Zuko. His expression clearly conveyed that of all the things he was expecting Zuko to say, that wasn’t on the list. Before Jee could question him, Zuko took off his breast plates and lifted his shirt. He almost laughed as Jee’s facial expressions shift violently from ‘trying to comfort someone clearly crazy’ to something akin to horror as he stared at all the scars of wounds that clearly should have been lethal. Zuko lowered his shirt and put his breast plates back on as Jee seemed to be lost in thought. Once he appeared to get his thoughts in order, he looked Zuko in the eyes and asked, “What originally happened today?”

“You died. Apparently, that damaged rung couldn’t support your weight and you fell to your death. If it makes you feel any better, I’m pretty sure it was quick.” Jee did not look comforted, instead he looked confused, “How did you die, or did you even die?”

So far so good, but here’s where things could get…complicated.

“I reset the stage.” Jee gave him a blank look, and Zuko elaborated, “When something goes catastrophically wrong, I reset the stage. All I have to do is die, then everything goes back to the morning of.”

“How did you die?” With a lopsided smile, Zuko pulled out his vial and twirled it between his fingers, “This has come in handy so many times. After you died, I just drank this. I died a few minutes later and woke up this morning. No permanent harm done, no new scars, and you’re alive. Happy endings for everyone.” Jee had pursed his lips, clearly wanting to object but seemed to decide against it. Instead, he asked, “Why haven’t you used this power to capture the Avatar?”

He took that revelation well, let’s see how he takes a little bit of treason.

Zuko laughed, he was bent over the railing with his head hung. It almost felt nice even though Jee looked a little uncomfortable. Zuko turned his head to Jee with a manic smile and said, “That’s the best part Jee, I have never planned on capturing him.”

“What?”

Zuko couldn’t help as the smile split his face at Jee’s shocked expression. He continued, “I have never wanted to capture the Avatar. Not once. No no no. My objective is to help him, but not for the reasons you think.” If Jee had at any point thought that Zuko wasn’t crazy, he certainly looked like he thought Zuko was now. He asked the still laughing prince, “Then why are you helping him?”

“I need him to kill me.”

“Why?” Zuko had stopped laughing and now just looked tired. With a deep sigh that made him sound older than he was, he said, “Jee, I have died probably nearly a hundred times in dozens of different ways. I have seen the people I care about die, then come back and not remember what happened. I remember everything. My skin is a quilt of various ways I have died. I am so tired. Only the Avatar can end my curse. Besides, as far as I’m concerned, I’m already dead.”

“Why not just ask him to kill you if that’s all you want?” Zuko huffed, “I was, but then the Avatar turned out to be a kid. As much as I want to die, I’m not about to ask a kid to do it. I think I can wait a few more years, but in order for that to work, the Avatar has to end the war. I can’t very well ask him to kill me if Ozai kills him first.”

“Why don’t you want your uncle to know?” That bone weary exhaustion made his limbs feel heavy as he said, “Because I know he will stop me. He already lost Lu Ten, and I know that he thinks of me as his son. I don’t think he could ever handle the idea of me intentionally dying, temporarily or permanently. It’s better that he doesn’t know until it’s over.” Silence hung between them as Jee processed everything Zuko had said. It was clear that the man still had more questions, but he settled for asking just one more, “Why are you so eager to die permanently?”

Zuko stared out at the ocean as he tried to piece together the best way to explain his situation. Finally, he said, “When I die, I always wake up at 6 o’clock the morning of. It doesn’t matter if I die at 5:59 in the morning or 6:01 in the morning, I will always go back to 6. It doesn’t matter how many times in a row that I die or how I die. Last year, I was torn apart by cannibals and this year I was slowly digested alive. If those cannibals took a little longer to officially kill me or it took too long for me to die, then there’s a real chance that I would have been stuck in a loop of constant suffering. No one would’ve known what was happening, so no one would have saved me. Now imagine fifty or sixty years from now. There’s a real chance that I can’t truly die from old age. I don’t want to feel my body give out over and over again infinitely. I don’t think I’ve done anything that horrible to deserve that fate. I need the Avatar to at least find away to kill me as soon as possible so I don’t go through that. I want to die on my own terms now than risk being stuck in an infinite loop. Please Jee, I need you to understand. You don’t have to help me, but please don’t try to stop me either.”

At some point Zuko had started to cry. He always tried to ignore the looming fear of a never-ending death loop. His uncle was right about one thing, the Avatar did give him hope. Jee was now slumped against the railing next to him, staring out into the ocean. He didn’t comment on Zuko’s tears or shaking hands. They stood there watching the waves in a somber silence. After a few minutes, Jee stood up straight again and looked directly at Zuko with grim determination and asked, “What do you need me to do?” Zuko hesitated before finally saying, “It would be nice to not die in front of Uncle when it can be helped. There may be times that I need you to help me get away from everyone so that I can reset the stage. It would also be nice if you could sabotage the crew so that they never actually succeed in capturing the Avatar or any of his friends.”

“Is there anything else sir?”

There’s one other thing, but I don’t know if it’s right to ask this of him.

Might as well, he knows everything so what’s one more thing?

“If possible, I would appreciate it you could come to my room at 6 in the morning on days that we’re docked. It’s impossible to know when I’m going to die or how many times. Each revival in a row is more uncomfortable than the last, and I think it would be a good idea to have someone nearby to keep away unwanted attention. Having someone there may also help me recover faster, just don’t wake me up before 6.” Jee nodded then huffed a humorless laugh, “When I was ordered to join your crew I thought I was sentenced to a never-ending quest to chase a legend. I didn’t realize I was actually helping a teenager die.” Zuko replied with his own humorless laughter, “Welcome to the stage Lieutenant Jee, it’s a tragedy so I hope you’re ready.”

The man muttered about crazy princes but didn’t otherwise object. Soon, the Lieutenant wished Zuko goodnight and headed off the bed. Not long afterwards, Zuko headed to his own chambers. As he stared up at his ceiling, the feeling of calm permeated his body. He hadn’t felt this relaxed in years.

Now that I think about it, maybe this is what Uncle meant when he said I should talk to someone.

My intuition tells me that he didn’t mean that I should talk to people who wouldn’t remember the conversation.

With Jee as an assistant stage manager I might not have to reset the stage as much.

Right.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age thirteen)

It was Fall in the Fire Nation. Zuko sat perched on a windowsill as he looked out at the garden below him. All the leaves on the trees were various shades of reds, oranges, yellows, and a few greens that clung disparately to life. From his perspective, it looked like the garden was some sort of abstract painting the way all the bright colors blended together. Each gust of wind sent some of these colorful leaves dancing circles into the distance. The leaves on the multitude of flowering bushes were brown and falling into heaps onto the ground around them. It seemed no matter how hard the gardeners tried to gather all the leaves, more seemed to appear to take their place.

Personally, I think the garden looks better with all the leaves.

It’s better than staring at dead grass.

Zuko rested his forehead against the cool windowpane, his breath fogging the glass with each exhale. Normally, at this time of day, he would been listening to his tutor lecture him about all the Fire Nation’s greatest achievements; however, the elderly man seemed to have fallen ill with the flu. Azula’s tutors weren’t subtle with their disdain at the idea of him sitting in on their lessons, so Zuko made the decision to not attend any classes today.

Father won’t be happy, but he’s never happy.

At least never happy with me.

He was in the perfect wing of the castle to be left alone. This area was mostly used to house visiting lower-ranking nobles, but it was currently unoccupied. There were no servants hustling about to shoo him out of the way, no sister lording her superiority over him, and no adults to tell him what to do. Occasionally, he would hear the heavy footfalls of palace guards as they patrolled the hallway. His hiding spot also had the benefit of thick, ornate curtains that perfectly concealed him. He couldn’t see through the dark crimson fabric, and no one else could see him. It was just him and the scenery below. Sleep started to pull at him when he heard footsteps approach his hiding spot.

Probably another patrol.

They’ll pass by, and I can continue to gaze outside.

Only, the footsteps seemed to stop right in front of the window. Zuko tried to ignore them, but before he could fully dismiss the guard, a familiar voice asked, “Are you going to sulk there all day, Your Highness?”

How?!

There’s absolutely no way he found me!

Does he just have an entire portion of his brain dedicated to finding me?!

Maybe if I don’t respond, he’ll think I’m not here.

Unfortunately for Zuko, his lack of response was met with the curtain being opened. Standing in all his bemused glory was Captain Sato. They stared at each other for a couple of beats before Zuko scowled and demanded, “How did you find me? I thought that this was the perfect hiding spot!”

Sato huffed a laugh and said, “I’m afraid, Your Highness, that you aren’t as hard to track down as you would like to think you are.” As Zuko began to splutter out protests, Sato continued, “This is one of the few areas of the palace that isn’t inhabited at the moment. From what I heard, this specific wing has a great view of the garden that I know you enjoy. It was only a matter of narrowing down which window you’d be in. Luckily, it’s easy to look in through the windows from outside.”

Zuko scowled and turned back to look out the window. He didn’t really feel like dealing with anyone right now. Sato sighed and said, “Follow me, Your Highness.”

“Is my father summoning me?”

“No, but there’s something I want to show you.”

Sato turned to walk away but gave Zuko a look over his shoulder before he walked too far. Zuko grumbled and sighed but ultimately chose to follow the officer.

This better be good, or I’ll tell the new recruits that he likes practical jokes.

The duo made their way down the palace halls until they entered the Royal Family wing. Zuko wanted to question Sato why they were here but decided to wait as they came to a stop at his room. Sato stepped aside to let Zuko open the door. When he opened it, nothing seemed to be out of place.

He sent a questioning look to Sato who smiled and closed the door after they entered. Sato continued to smile and said, “Have a seat, Your Highness.” Zuko sat at his small tea table and watched curiously as Sato moved around his room. He walked to Zuko’s desk and pulled out a package from underneath it then placed it in front of Zuko. Zuko opened the lid, and his mind went blank when he saw the contents.

Is this all for me?

Why?

Inside was a mochi tin, a couple of scripts for plays he’s never heard of, and an envelope. Sato cleared his throat and said, “Happy thirteenth birthday, Your Highness. My wife made your favorite mochi, Kai spent some time in the art district and got those scripts though I’m not sure if they’ve ever seen the stage, and we all decided to write you a letter.” Zuko could feel his eyes start to sting and his lips start to tremble against his will.

Sato seemed to notice his distress, and placed a hand on his shoulder and murmured, “There’s one more gift, but it can wait until later if you prefer.” Through his blurring vision, Zuko could see that Sato was giving him a sad look.

I need to be grateful.

His family went through all this trouble just for me.

I need to pull myself together.

Zuko cleared his throat and said, “I’d like to see what you got me, please.” Sato searched his face for something and seemed to accept whatever he saw. He reached under Zuko’s desk again and pulled out another gift. This one was bigger than his head, but it was also relatively thin. Curiously, he opened the gift and peered inside. He almost started laughing when he saw what it was.

It was a mask.

It was a simple, white mask. There weren’t any ornate carvings or touches of color. Just a seemingly plain, white mask. However, it was what the mask represented that immediately caught Zuko’s attention.

Tragedy.

How fitting.

The crying, wailing mask stared at him with its empty black eyes. Zuko traced its face with his fingers and took in the cool porcelain features. He heard Sato shift his weight as he said, “I know it’s a bit morbid, but I couldn’t afford to get the comedy mask too. Besides, I know how much you enjoy bittersweet plays.” A smile tugged at Zuko’s face as he took in all the gifts before him.

Before Zuko could stop himself, he said, “My father didn’t give me anything. He doesn’t think I should get gifts of any kind until I prove myself. Azula’s gift was to mostly leave me alone. She nodded at me in passing, so I think that was her way of acknowledging my birthday without actually saying anything. That’s probably all that Father will allow her to get away with. Uncle said he had something important he had to do, but he promised to spend a day with me after he returned. You’re the only person that gave me something, why? Why would you and your family put this much effort into me?”

With a deep sigh, Sato put his hands on Zuko’s shoulders, looked him in the eyes, and said, “We did this because we care about you. Do you understand? No one forced me, my wife, or my son to spend our time or money to get you these things. There is no ulterior motive or expectation for compensation. All that we want is for you to be happy.”

I don’t understand.

A lump was forming in Zuko’s throat as he tried to process what Sato said. The man seemed to realize his confusion and sighed with a sad smile. With a final squeeze of Zuko’s shoulders, he let go and said, “Hopefully, one day you’ll understand what I’m saying and believe me.” Sato grabbed and opened the tin holding the mochi. Zuko stared hungrily at all the colorful sweets and his mouth began to water.

My emotional crisis can wait.

There are clearly more important things to focus on.

It was clear that Sato’s wife took great care arranging the mochi. The colorful little balls were carefully arranged to create a beautiful art piece. It looked like a fire lily resting in a pond. Light and dark blue mochi balls that smelled like mild berries were supposed to be the pond. Green balls were arranged to form the lily pad and leaves; the scent of tropical fruit seemed to waft from them. However, what really caught Zuko’s attention was resting in the center.

This is the best day ever.

It was a giant mochi ball that had been carved into the shape of a fire lily bud. The thing was easily as big as the palm of his hand and was about five inches tall. He inspected it closer and stared in awe at the attention to detail each petal was carved. The various shades of red and orange made it look more realistic, almost like it was a real flower about to bloom. The smell of sweet berries and citrus gave away its true nature, and Zuko could almost taste the explosion of flavors that awaited him. At the top of the flower, he noticed a small hole. Before he could question its purpose, Sato pulled out a small candle and stuck it inside. He smiled as Zuko as he lit it and said, “Happy birthday, Your Highness. Make a wish.”

I wish I could have a birthday like this every year.

He blew out the candle.

Sato smiled at him as Zuko’s eyes wondered over all the delicious treats.

Should I start with the obviously delicious centerpiece?

Or maybe I should start on the outside and work my way to the center.

He heard Sato chuckling as he alternated on where to start. Zuko’s hand would start to reach for one of the smaller ones but then retract and head for the centerpiece. This dance was repeated several times before Sato took pity on him.

“Why don’t I slice the bud for you?” He tried to say this with a straight face, but his voice shook with laughter.

How dare you laugh at your prince!

On his birthday no less!

No respect for authority.

He gave Sato a haughty look and said, “Very well, Captain. Proceed.” The man rolled his eyes and pulled a small knife out of his pocket. With great care, he slowly sliced the mochi bud in half starting at the top. Zuko watched intently as the knife cut through the dough and revealed the sweet filling. If his mouth was watering before, now he’s fighting to not drool all over himself. It took all his self-restraint to keep his hands away as he waited for Sato to finish slicing.

He's being slow on purpose; I just know it!

The man was silently shaking with suppressed laughter as he continued to cut through the treat. Zuko was almost vibrating in his chair, his hands clenched the table, as he waited. He didn’t even realize he was holding his breath until Sato exclaimed while laughing, “Breathe, Your Highness! It’s not going anywhere!” Zuko just growled in response.

Still laughing, Sato handed Zuko the freshly cut bud half. The inside was a beautiful swirl of oranges and reds, and the fruity smell was even stronger. Unable to restrain himself any longer, he took a massive bite. The sweet filling practically melted in his mouth. The burn of citrus made his mouth fill with saliva. The tartness of the berries made his teeth tingle. The mildly sweet pastry dough helped ease the burn of citrus and the sour tingle of berries without completely masking them. With a series of swallows, Zuko finally consumed his first bite.

I wish I could have this every day.

Each bite of the treat made his tastebuds sing. He could feel some of the filling smearing on the sides of his mouth with each messy bite. Some of the filling melted and was leaving red, sticky trails down his fingers. Just as he was about to take another bite, he was met with air. He couldn’t fight the disappointed whine that left him when he realized that it was gone.

This is truly a tragedy.

The sound of Sato’s chuckling made him look up. The man’s face was crinkled in mirth which only became more pronounced when he got a full look at Zuko’s face. The chuckles turned into a deep reverberating laughter. Sato said, “My wife will be pleased when I tell her how much you enjoyed her creation. Too bad I didn’t think to grab a towel or two.” Zuko turned to look in the mirror and silently agreed with Sato.

If the red was a little darker, I might be able to trick some guards into thinking it’s blood.

It would be hilarious up until they dragged me to the healers.

Azula would probably laugh along with me.

What I really need to do is find away to make the liquid thicker to really sell it.

His thought process was interrupted by a stern, “Don’t even think about it.”

Zuko turned and gave the best innocent look he could as he said, “I don’t know what you’re talking about.” Judging by Sato’s folded arms and bemused look, Zuko hazarded a guess that Sato didn’t believe him for a second.

Why is he always so suspicious of me?

I haven’t even done anything in at least the past two hours!

Sato handed him the remaining half of the mochi bud with an indulgent smile. Zuko greedily grabbed and was about to take a bite when he hesitated. He looked down at the treat then at Sato and then back to the treat. An uncomfortable feeling started to make itself known. Zuko grumbled then gave a dramatic sigh as he carefully broke off a piece.

“Here. You should have some too.” Sato gave him a surprised look but said, “No thank you, Your Highness. It’s all for you.”

“I know, but it feels weird to eat while you’re sitting there watching me. Besides, it’s my gift and I’m choosing to share it.”

The man hesitated for a second before gingerly taking the offered piece. He took a small bite, and his face scrunched up at the sweet and sour flavors. He exclaimed, “Spirits! If you keep eating stuff like this, you aren’t going to have any teeth by the time you’re thirty!”

“I’ve built up my teeth’s resistance.”

“I don’t think that’s how it works. Finish that piece, then get cleaned up. You can have more tomorrow, Your Highness.”

Outrage filled Zuko as exclaimed, “But I haven’t even tasted the others yet!”

“And they will be just as good tomorrow and the coming days, Your Highness.”

Zuko grumbled and considered eating more of the treats anyways but decided against it.

I don’t want to deal with him telling Uncle that I gorged myself on sweets.

Uncle will pout about me not sharing with him and I really don’t want to deal with that.

With an expression that Zuko would vehemently deny was a pout, he watched as Sato closed the lid to the remaining mochi and put it on top of Zuko’s bookshelf. Conveniently just out of Zuko’s reach. Zuko scowled at Sato who responded to the look with a raised eyebrow and a smirk.

As Zuko went to wash his face and hands of the sticky remains of his treat, Sato retook his seat at the table. Once sufficiently clean, he returned to the table and began to look through the scripts. Sato had a soft smile on his face as he watched Zuko arrange the scripts in what order he wanted to read first. Clearly getting ready to stay up all night if no one stopped him.

Sato cleared his throat and asked, “So, Your Highness, why did you skip your lessons today?”

Zuko rolled his eyes and said, “I didn’t skip them, my tutor is out sick.”

“Why not sit in on Azula’s lessons?”

Zuko huffed, “Because her tutors hate me. I’m nowhere near as advanced as her in most subjects, so they would constantly have to backtrack just so I could maybe understand what they’re teaching. I figured it was better for everyone if I just didn’t bother.”

Sato frowned at him and said, “You can’t avoid people that don’t like you. What are you going to do when you become Fire Lord?”

At that, Zuko let out a humorless laugh, “As if Father would ever let me be Fire Lord.”

Sato gave him a confused look and said, “You are the crown prince, of course you’re going to be Fire Lord.” He studied Zuko closely then seemed to come to some realization and asked, “Do you want to be Fire Lord, Your Highness?”

“It doesn’t matter what I do or do not want. Father will never let me be Fire Lord. I mean, he’s personally overseeing Azula’s training and education. If a tutor or trainer isn’t able to keep up with her, then they are immediately fired, and a new one is hired. He takes her to almost all of his diplomatic meetings, and sometimes even asks for her input.” As he was talking, he got up to pace and continued, “Me? I’ve had the same tutor my whole life, and I’ve barely made any progress. Or at least not as much progress as Azula. My firebending is a joke, and Father isn’t shy about pointing that out. Everyone from my tutor, trainer, and Father has said that the Fire Lord is supposed to be the smartest and most powerful firebender. I’m clearly not that while Azula is. I’ve accepted that, honestly. She can have the throne, and I can enjoy my plays. Maybe I can manage my own play someday.”

“What do you think would happen if the Fire Sages or nobility tried to place you on the throne?”

Zuko snorted and said, “I’d probably experience some sort of ‘accident’ that would make me unfit or kill me. I wouldn’t be surprised if Father is trying to find some sort of loophole to have Azula declared his true heir. It was easier for him when people thought I couldn’t firebend.”

Sato gave him a serious look and asked, “Do you think the Fire Lord will intentionally harm you?”

Zuko shrugged and said, “I think as long as I stay out of the way and don’t act like I want the throne, then I should be fine.”

Probably.

Maybe.

I don’t want to think about it.

Sato had a grim, thoughtful look on his face. Silence hung over them, and Zuko resumed organizing his new scripts. He shuffled them around a few times when Sato slowly asked, “If you had the chance to live outside the palace…would you take it, Your Highness?”

That’s a weird question.

Puzzled, Zuko stared at the captain and waited for him to elaborate. When no further explanation was given, he said, "I mean, I guess I would like that. If this hypothetical life let me go to the theater and collect scripts, then I think I would be happy.”

Sato nodded, appearing to be lost in thought. Before Zuko could question him, he stood up and said, “It’s getting late, Your Highness. I should start heading home, and you need to go to bed. You better not stay up all night reading.” He gave Zuko a stern look.

With a roll of his eyes, Zuko waved the old captain’s order off and casually said, “Yeah, sure. I’ll get some sleep. You worry too much.”

I’ll sleep eventually.

I can’t guarantee how much sleep I’ll get, but sleep will happen at some point.

With one last unconvinced, stern look Sato left his room. Grumbling about distrustful guards, Zuko got ready for bed. Just as he was about to lay down, he remembered the letters Sato and his family wrote. He sat back down at the tea table and opened the first one.

‘Prince Zuko,

My Dad always seems to have a story to tell about your adventures and mishaps. I can’t believe you stopped a group of mass murderers, and an assassination attempt against your family! That’s so cool! I told Dad that and he said that you have a talent for finding trouble. If it makes you feel any better, Dad says I have the same talent. Maybe if I become a palace guard, you and I can combine our skills. With my brains and your power, we’ll be unstoppable! Just don’t let Dad find out. I bet we can be the best of friends.

Dad says that you like the theatre, so I went out and bought a few scripts. I hope they’re the kind you like. I’m not sure what makes a bittersweet ending, but I hope these fit that description. Happy Birthday!

Sincerely,

Kai’

He sounds like fun.

Though I can’t tell if he called me stupid or not.

He placed Kai’s letter down and picked up the next one. The handwriting was immediately recognizable.

‘Your Highness,

I hope you’re enjoying your birthday and aren’t getting into too much trouble. I’m sure that you had a busy day, so I hope I didn’t interrupt your celebration. Words cannot express how I’ve felt watching you grow up over the last few years. No matter how stressful some of those days were, I wouldn’t trade them for the world. I look forward to all your future birthdays.

Sincerely,

Captain Sato’

The lump in Zuko’s throat returned and made it hard to swallow. He quickly rubbed his eyes and picked up the last letter.

‘Dear Zuko,

I hope I’m not being too forward by addressing you by name. After all the stories I’ve heard of you, I feel like I’ve known you for years. I hope I incorporated all the flavors you love so much into your birthday treat. My husband has reassured me that you love all flavors of mochi, but I can’t help but feel anxious that I used the one you don’t like.

I know that we may never meet each other, but I want you to know that you have found your way into my heart. Every tale of your acts of selflessness to protect others and to stand up for what is right makes me that much more proud of you. I know that you will grow up to be an amazing person that anyone would be lucky enough to be close to.

Have a happy birthday and please take care of yourself.

Sincerely,

Lelani’

She’s never met me and she’s proud of me?

How?

I don’t understand.

His hands started to shake as his vision blurred. He blinked rapidly to try to clear his sight, but tears started to run down his face. Angrily, he tried to scrub them away, but more kept coming. His room felt too big and empty.

I want Mother.

I want Sato.

I want Uncle.

I want Azula.

I want someone.

Zuko continued to fruitlessly scrub at his face as thick streams of tears continued to pour. He curled up in his chair and listened to the silence around him. Exhausted, the tears finally stopped, and he glanced at the table. His eyes landed on the mask Sato gave him. He picked it up and took it to bed with him.

As he got comfortable in his bed, he held up the mask and studied it closer. The white porcelain face stared back at him with its empty black eyes. In the candlelight, its facial expression seemed even more extreme. All of the facial features were already exaggerated, but the shadows from the candle made the mask’s face seem to be representative more of fear or despair rather than tragedy.

 If I were a little kid, this would probably give me nightmares.

He held the mask above him and stared up into its eyes. A smile tugged at his face as he tried it on. It was a little too big, but he was certain that he would eventually grow into it.

I should wear this someday.

Maybe I can write a script where I play tragedy, and I have to wear this mask.

I can be like that character who pulled all the strings to keep the story moving in the right direction and gave everyone a good ending.

That sounds like it would be a lot of fun.

(Present day)

After the storm had officially passed, they headed in the direction Aang went and docked into a friendly port for repairs.

I guess I should consider us lucky that it’s just the helm that’s damaged and not the hull again.

While their ship was getting repaired, Zuko tried to glean any information about sightings of Aang from the locals. He wasn’t too surprised when most of the things he heard were rumors with various degrees of believability.

I can’t say I know everything about Aang, but I am ninety percent certain that he isn’t making some sort of spirit weapon.

That’s just stupid and I’m pretty sure that goes against Air Nomad beliefs.

Though a few leads seemed to be more credible. A traveling merchant claimed to have seen a “giant flying monster” heading to an abandoned temple in the mountains.

I’m not familiar with the local fauna, but I don’t think there’s a long list of large creatures that can fly.

After asking around about the abandoned temple, Zuko learned approximately where it was and the best route there. According to a local trapper, it would be easier to sail to the next port further north and then hike to the area. With this potentially useful bit of information and a forming plan, he made his way back to his ship. On the way back, Zuko overheard a couple of guards gossiping. They seemed to be complaining about their orders from the new admiral. Curious about a potential new character, Zuko listened for a name. It didn’t take long until one of the guards uttered an all too familiar name.

Zhao.

Of course.

I’m not even surprised, just disappointed that I didn’t guess.

As soon as he boarded, Jee approached him and asked, “Any luck?”

“Maybe, we need to relocate to the next port. Supposedly, he might be hiding out at an abandoned temple.”

“How do you know this is good intel?”

 Zuko smirked as he headed to the helm and said, “That bison is pretty recognizable.” Jee hummed behind him as they made their way up to the helm. Before they entered, Zuko stopped him and said, “Pretend I didn’t say anything about the Avatar.”

“Sir?”

With a deep sigh he said, “I heard some rumors about Zhao possibly being promoted. I don’t know how true they are; but if it is true, I have a feeling he may try to interfere. I doubt he’s moved on from losing that Agni Kai or failing at Roku’s Temple. I want to try to keep as much information from him as possible.” Jee nodded and they entered the helm.

Everything seemed to be just as he left it. His crew were playing Pai Sho with his uncle and, judging by the various looks of despair, he was winning all of their wages.

Knowing him, he’s either going to sneak the money back to the crew while they aren’t looking or he’s going to “treat” them with their own money.

Once he was certain that all the crew were on board, he turned to the helm’s man and gave the order to leave port. He and Jee stood over a map and pretended to plan out their next move. Just as they were about to voice what they knew, a large dark shadow fell over them. Zuko turned and saw that a large battleship had pulled up alongside them and was signaling that they wanted to board. Frowning, Zuko muttered, “What do they want?” He shot Jee a meaningful look and the man gave him a minute nod in acknowledgement.

Here’s to hoping Jee’s acting has improved since my Agni Kai with Zhao.

Zuko watched as the gangplank was lowered onto his ship and a group of soldiers marched down it. Jee went out to meet them and then led the way up the helm. Zuko scowled and leaned against the wall with his arms crossed as the group of men entered the room. One man, clearly an officer, first approached his uncle and said, “Sir, we need you to direct your ship back to port.”

Before his uncle could reply, Zuko snapped, “This is my ship, and I’m the one who decides if and when it docks.”

How do they not know who’s in charge?

This is because I’m a teenager, isn’t it?

If it wasn’t for the fact the I’m absolutely certain these men are under Zhao, I’d file a complaint.

I guess I’ll just have to settle with being difficult.

The officer gave him a look and appeared to size him up, clearly not taking him seriously. Zuko’s scowl deepened as he asked, “Why are you on my ship?” The officer pulled out a scroll and unrolled it to reveal a wanted poster of Aang.

The man said, “The hunt for the Avatar has been given top priority. All information regarding the Avatar must be reported directly to Admiral Zhao.” When he finished speaking, he rerolled the scroll and tucked it away.

Great, Zhao really has bee promoted.

That can only mean good things for me, I’m sure.

His uncle, still engrossed in his game said, “Zhao has been promoted? Good for him.”

Zuko growled out, “I have nothing to report to Zhao, now get off my ship and let us out.”

The officer, unfazed, replied, “Admiral Zhao is not allowing ships in or out of this area.”

Of course he’s not.

Nothing can ever be easy.

Frustrated, Zuko yelled, “Get off my ship!” Without even bowing, the soldiers turned and left. He heard his uncle exclaim in delight as he beat the crew once again and tempted them with another game. Zuko stared out the window, looking in the direction of the temple he knew Aang was probably hiding at.

Zhao knows Aang’s in the area and will try to capture him.

Unfortunately for Aang, I don’t have much faith that he’ll be able to get away.

I guess Zhao will get another opportunity to kill me.

That’s just great.

He grumbled under his breath and headed to his room. Not long after he closed his door, someone knocked on it.

“Enter.” The door opened to reveal Jee trying to look casual. Outside of catastrophic events that he didn’t reset, Jee never came to his door. It was always his uncle who relayed messages or brought important matters to his attention. Zuko motioned for the man to enter, and Jee closed the door behind him.

They stood in the center of the room in an awkward silence. Even though Jee knew about Zuko’s curse, they really haven’t had a chance to talk since the storm. Zuko cleared his throat and said, “Well, I’m probably about to die.”

To Jee’s credit, the man barely reacted to the statement and asked, “How do you know?”

“Zhao knows that Aang, the Avatar, is in the area and will use all the resources at his disposal to capture him. While Aang has fought a number of enemies, including us, he hasn’t truly fought a true threat of this magnitude before. He’s going to fail and get captured, I don’t think I can stop that. However, I can save him.”

“How do you plan to continue chasing the Avatar if the entire Fire Nation knows you’re helping him?”

“They won’t know.” At Jee’s confused look, Zuko elaborated, “I’m going to wear a disguise and break into the fortress. No one, not even Aang, will know it’s me.”

“Why hide your identity from the Avatar? Won’t you helping him make him more likely to help you?”

“Because it’s not time yet. We’re still in act one, and he needs to be focusing on mastering waterbending. Maybe in act two or three I will start to reveal myself, but right now I need to focus on the stage and making sure the actors stick to the script.”

Jee gave him a confused frown and said, “You keep referring to everything like it’s a play. Why? Do you know something about reality that no one else does?”

Zuko laughed and waved off Jee’s impending existential crisis, “Nothing like that. It’s…I don’t know how to explain it.” He started to pace the room as he tried to formulate a response. Eventually he said, “My mother said that life is a stage, and that tragedy makes characters more interesting. My life has been playing out as a tragedy, so I must be pretty interesting if I was a character. However, my curse changes everything back, like resetting a stage when something goes wrong. It makes sense that I’m not a character as much as I am tragedy. I’m supposed to help the characters fulfill their roles and give them a good ending. It…it just makes sense to me. It…helps me not completely lose my mind when I die repeatedly.” He continued to pace as Jee studied him closely. After a couple of laps, Jee sighed and pinched the bridge of his nose.

I think he’s beginning to regret all of his life choices.

Too bad.

He’s a part of the story now.

He muttered something about crazy cursed princes before asking, “What do you need me to do, sir?”

Zuko stopped pacing long enough to give Jee a thoughtful look, he then resumed his path as he thought out loud, “Well, I’m going to be breaking into a heavily guarded Fire Nation fortress so I’m probably going to die multiple times,” he stopped and gave Jee a look out of the corner of his eye, “the more times I die, the longer it takes for me to recover. To keep everything going smoothly, I have to retrace all my previous actions as closely as possible. It…could help me recover faster if someone were there to ground me. Just don’t wake me up before 6 in the morning.”

“Why?”

Zuko shrugged and said, “I’m not entirely sure why, but that’s the time I always revive at. If I wake up before then, I revive while I’m still awake. It’s one of the worst feelings I have ever felt, and I’ve been eaten alive twice. It almost feels like forcing two different people to merge together. All the physical sensations and emotions of things that did happen, crashing into what is currently happening. It’s hard to explain. Just don’t wake me up if you decide to come into my room.” Jee nodded with a serious expression, though it was clear he didn’t seem to fully understand and still had questions.

I guess I can give him points for trying.

Jee left soon afterwards and Zuko started his predeath preparations. He checked to make sure his clock was wound up and ticking. Then he lit some small candles and incense. Soon the sweet, musky smoke filled his room. He figured that while the risk of being buried alive were low, there was a good chance that he would have a fire-based death were pretty high, so he removed all his blankets. Just as he was about to lay down and place a piece of leather in his mouth, a knock came from his door. He cursed as he got up and said, “Enter.” The door opened to reveal his uncle.

Great.

Just what I needed.

If this turns into another conversation about him worrying about my sanity, I might scream.

His uncle smiled and said, “Nephew, I am sorry to disturb you so late. I was worried when you disappeared without giving your crew any orders. I am glad to see you are trying to relax.” Zuko decided that it was best to not point out that the incense was less for relaxation and more to cover up the smell of death.

That might actually get him to commit me against my will.

Zuko rolled his eyes and asked, “What do you want Uncle?” The man’s smile turned worried as he asked, “What do you plan on doing now Nephew?” Zuko scoffed and said, “There isn’t much I can do. Zhao has far more resources than I do, and the power to stop me.”

“Do not give up hope, Nephew.”

“I’m not. Zhao is an arrogant fool, and he will undoubtedly underestimate the Avatar. I don’t doubt that, even if he manages to capture the Avatar, it will be temporary.”

His uncle frowned at him and said, “It sounds like you already have something planned out.” Zuko tried to sound nonchalant as he said, “I don’t know what you mean Uncle.”

Iroh looked at Zuko closely before tiredly sighing, “Very well, Nephew. I hope you have a good night’s rest. I am sure tomorrow will be an eventful day for everyone.”

Something tells me that he didn’t believe me.

Just a hunch.

After his uncle left, Zuko got comfortable on his bed and placed the leather strap in his mouth. He forced himself to fall asleep to the sound of the seconds ticking away on the clock. It felt like only minutes later the sound of soft cursing woke him up. He blearily opened his eyes and saw Jee steadying himself after nearly tripping over the side table his clock was perched on. He looked at it and noted the time to be six o’clock.

Well, I guess he did wait to wake me up.

Zuko removed the leather from his mouth and grumpily stated, “You’re lucky it’s six o’clock. I would have been so unhappy if it was even a minute prior.” Jee at least had the decency to look mildly guilty.

He softly whispered, “Have you died yet?” It was clear the man was at least trying not to wake him up fully, but it was too late for that.

Groaning, Zuko propped himself up and said, “Not yet, but this is only the first go around.” Jee nodded and turned to leave as Zuko got up. Zuko called out, “I’m going to sneak out tonight. I’d appreciate it if you tried to keep my uncle occupied while I’m out. I don’t expect you to keep him away from my room but try to believably say that I went out on my own to find the Avatar.”

Jee pursed his lips and asked, “When do you plan on leaving?”

“After sunset. The darkness will give me enough cover to increase my odds of success.” Jee nodded stiffly, clearly still not comfortable with Zuko dying, but left without another word. Zuko proceeded to get ready for the day and tried to prepare himself for a long night.

Zuko made sure to keep his actions simple and easy to remember. He ate breakfast with his uncle, ordered the crew to search for anything else that needed to be repaired/replaced, meditated, ate lunch, took a nap, did some stretches, and then had an early dinner. As the sun started to set, he sharpened his dao blades.

At least I finally get to use these.

Zhao won’t expect a firebender to attack exclusively with blades.

Once the sun had officially set, he changed into a set of dark colored clothing. He was about to cover his face with some cloth when an idea struck him. Zuko opened his nightstand and pulled out a familiar mask.

Hello, tragedy.

I guess it’s time for you to enter the stage as a temporarily important minor character.

He slid the white mask over his face, and it fit perfectly.

I guess I was right about creating my own play while pulling the strings.

He pulled it off and tucked it into his bag along with a change of his normal clothes. Zuko fastened the dao blades to his back and slung his bag over them. With everything he needed packed, he carefully made his way down the ship’s halls to the deck. Once there, he heard the sounds of music playing on the far side of the ship. The distinct sounds of his uncle singing reached his ears.

Well, singing might be a generous descriptor.

I guess this was Jee’s idea of keeping my uncle occupied.

With ease, he made his way off the ship and into town. As soon as he was a safe distance from his ship, he donned his mask and removed any obvious Fire Nation clothing. He stuck to the dark alleyways and poorly lit streets as he made his way to the fortress. Once outside the city limits, he moved more freely amongst the shadows of the towering trees. Before long he was hiding in a bush staring at the entrance. Now he just needed to find away inside. His answer came in the form of a cart pulling supplies. Smirking, he slid across the dirt road and grabbed the underside of the cart. The wood was digging into his gloved hands as he was carried the last remaining yards to the fortress. The loud clatter of the wheels rolling over rocks was deafening when combined with the constant shifting of whatever cargo the cart was carrying. The kicked-up dust from the wheels made his eyes water and burn. Zuko closed his eyes in the hopes of protecting them from the constant onslaught of dust and tiny rocks.

Finally, he felt the cart come to a stop. The need to rub his eyes was overwhelming, but he forced himself to stay still. Through his blurred vision he saw a light shining in his face.

That can’t be good.

Before he could react, the soldiers started to yell, and an alarm was raised. Cursing Zuko attempted to roll out from underneath the cart, but his vision was still hampered by the dust and the mask prevented him from clearing his eyes. Just as he was about to start firebending to try to defend himself from the soldiers he knew were surrounding him, a familiar sharp piercing pain erupted in his side.

He felt the sharp instrument dig deeper into his abdominal cavity.

Then he felt the serrated blade violently twist.

He felt his skin and muscles ripping apart.

His stomach lurched.

A scream was forced out of his throat.

He tried to shoot flames at his attacker.

Another searing pain, only this was in his back.

Zuko turned around to retaliate.

Warm blood gushed from the wounds.

Agony clouded his mind.

His movements became sluggish.

Another stab and twist to his side set off an explosion of pain across his body.

He could hear his flesh tear.

The spear was slowly removed and it serrated blade tore through his skin as it exited.

The taste of copper filled his mouth.

His hands were getting cold.

Each blink was getting slower.

In one blink, he found himself on his knees.

Another blink found him on the ground.

Hands were grabbing at him.

He struggled weakly.

He couldn’t breathe.

He couldn’t feel his limbs.

His already blurred vision faded.

Darkness.

With a gasp, Zuko woke up. He clutched his side as the phantom pains of being stabbed echoed across his body and the distant burn of debris in his eyes made them water.

At least it wasn’t Katara that stabbed me this time.

A muffled curse caught his attention, and he looked over to see Jee nearly tripping over his side table with the clock. Jee gave him a somewhat guilty look and said, “I hope I didn’t wake you up.”

Zuko blinked dumbly for a bit before he said, “No, I just revived so you’re fine.”

Jee flinched and asked, “How did you die?”

The fog of revival was lifting from his mind and he clumsily sat up on the edge of his bed. Once upright, Zuko said, “Apparently, hitching a ride under a cart means that you get a face full of dust and debris which interferes with your ability to see.” A sudden wave of indignation overcame him as he continued, “They didn’t even ask who I was! I could’ve been an innocent person, but no. They just immediately escalated to stabbing me!”

“I don’t think many innocent people ride on the underside of carts into military bases.”

“That’s beside the point!” Zuko felt a lot more lively now and he decided to see where his new scar was. Without missing a beat, he removed his shirt and inspected himself in the mirror.

Jee, taken off guard, asked, “What are you doing?”

“I’m looking for my new scar. It’s only the killing blow that leaves a mark, so I’m trying to see which stab wound killed me.” Zuko could see Jee taking in all the scars that littered his torso with a morbidly fascinated look.

I guess I kind of look like one of those full-bodied tattooed people at the circus.

I probably raise just as many questions too.

Mostly questions of ‘How?’ and ‘Why?’.

As he inspected his sides, he finally noticed his new scar. It was about three inches long and about an inch thick. The skin was thickened and raised over most of it, but the center looked concave. Just like his other scars, the tissue was oddly smooth; and any sensation of touch felt muted. He poked at it for a bit before Jee spoke up, “Is that your new scar?”

“Yup, I was stabbed with a spear. Actually, I was stabbed with multiple spears, but this one seemed to be the winner.”

Jee frowned as he inspected it and said, “It looks like it might have punctured either your kidney or liver. Have you ever had problems with any of your organs? If your skin has scars, then why not your organs?” Zuko paused as he considered Jee’s question.

 His face became thoughtful as he said, “I never really thought about it. I’ve never really had problems, aside from the phantom pains of whatever killed me but that fades after either a few minutes or a couple hours. It’s not exactly possible for me to check without cutting myself open.”

That does raise an interesting question.

Is my brain scarring?

If so, is my insanity the result of my experiences or is it just brain damage?

Maybe it’s a little bit of both.

Oh well, nothing I can do about it now.

Zuko dismissed Jee and got ready for the day. Like usual, he repeated all his previous activities and encountered no unusual resistance. However, this time he went out and bought some black sheer material. With a little cursing, Zuko managed to cut out and attach the material in the eye and mouth openings of the mask.

Hopefully this will keep me from getting blinded by debris.

As night fell, Zuko grabbed his now altered mask and the rest of his gear. With the same ease as before, he snuck off his ship and through the town all the way to the tree line in front of the fortress. He watched the same rickety cart make its way down the dirt road to the entrance. Silently, he rolled under the cart as it passed by him and held on for dear life. This time the dust didn’t blind him.

Okay, problem number one solved.

Now to actually get inside.

Once the cart came to a stop, Zuko watched as the soldiers began to inspect it. As a soldier began to kneel down to look at the underside, Zuko quietly launched himself into the cart. He held his breath as he waited for the soldier to give the okay for the cart to enter. He breathed a sigh of relief as he felt the cart begin to move. He crouched behind the crates of goods and waited for the perfect opportunity to make his exit.

Soon enough the cart came to a stop and soldiers began approaching to unload the cargo. As stealthily as possible, Zuko slipped out the side of the cart and hid behind some crates. He looked around until he spotted an open door not too far from him.

I don’t see any other obvious options, so here’s to hoping that this will lead directly to Aang.

He kept his body low to the ground as he sprinted to the doorway and made his way up the spiral staircase that was immediately inside. Zuko stayed on high alert and paused at even the slightest sound. Once at the top of the stairs, he had three different directions he could go. Each direction looked exactly the same.

Well, here’s to hoping that I have amazing luck and nothing horrible will happen.

Zuko turned left and cautiously made his way down the hall. The torches were spaced out enough to create harsh shadows that made it easier for him to hide and bathed the hall in an eerie dim light. The stone walls and floors were bare of any decorations, but they reflected the red light of the torch fire. Soon enough, Zuko started to see metal doors equally spaced out. The doors also lacked any kind of distinguishing marks that indicated what was behind them. Cautiously, Zuko approached the nearest door and tried to open it. It was locked and he couldn’t hear any sounds on the other side, so he moved onto the next door. Before long, he had tried every door in this stretch of hallway.

Why is every door lock?

That would make sense if these are prison cells.

I guess there’s only one way to find out.

He walked up to a random door and inspected the lock. It seemed relatively simple and easy enough to break, so Zuko unsheathed his blades and swung them at the handle. With a crack the handle broke and the door creaked open. He slowly pushed the door open and peered inside.

You have got to be kidding me.

Inside the room was a series of bunkbeds filled with soldiers who woke up when he broke the lock. Zuko tried to quickly close the door, but some of the soldiers were already standing and flung it open. He turned to run as fire started to lick at his feet.

Hot, hot, hot!

Stop that!

Zuko darted around the corner, but the soldiers were not too far behind him. The commotion alerted the soldiers in the neighboring rooms, and they had joined in the pursuit. Even more joined when the alarm was raised. He rounded another corner and slid to a stop. It was a dead end.

Probably literally.

He barely got a chance to turn around as flames started to be directed at him. Zuko tried to simultaneously deflect the flames, dodge spears, and take out his poison.

This is so unproductive.

This scene has clearly gotten derailed, and the actors need to start from the top.

Just as he managed to pull out his vial, a soldier managed to get a lucky shot, and flames consumed his thigh.

The smell of charred flesh filled his nose.

It was so strong that he could taste it.

He clenched his teeth in an attempt to smother the wail of agony trying to come out.

He tried to keep fighting, but another volley of flames hit their mark.

His shoulder and calves smoked with the remnants of flames.

Agony pulsed through his body.

He tried to uncork his vial.

His hands shook and bile was traveling up his throat.

Another burst of flames consumed his chest.

Smoke filled his mouth.

The smell of scorched flesh invaded and lingered in his nose.

His ears were ringing.

I think I’m screaming too loud.

He collapsed, clawing at his chest to put out the flames.

His hands were burning and sent shock waves of agony coursing through his body.

He couldn’t breathe.

His body started to shake and tremble like it was cold.

Pain began to fade.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up clawing at his chest and whining. The phantom sensation of being on fire had him weakly trying to roll. The stench of charring flesh clogged his nose. A hand started to shake him and combined with the lingering pain, made him gasp. The smell of incense made him pause. Everything seemed to snap back into focus and Zuko saw Jee standing over him with a concerned look. Groaning, Zuko spat out the piece of leather and said, “Well that could have gone better. Could’ve been worse, but I don’t think Zhao would have a water monster or cannibals roaming the halls.”

Jee still looked concerned but also a little confused as he asked, “What happened?”

Zuko tried to sit up, but his limbs weren’t cooperating yet, so he stayed sprawled out on his bed. Nonchalantly he replied, “I made a wrong turn, and I think I ended up in the low-ranking officer barracks. Apparently, they don’t like it when you break the lock to their door while they’re asleep.”

“Was this your first death?”

Zuko tried again to sit up and managed to get his shaky limbs to push him into a somewhat upright sitting position. He huffed and said, “I wish. This was death number two. The last one I got stabbed with a spear. Now I know not to turn down that hallway. This is progress.”

“So, you plan to just die repeatedly until everything works out?”

“Pretty much.”

Jee did not look happy with his response and pinched the bridge of his nose as he asked with a tinge of exasperation, “Did you not learn anything about strategy and planning from your uncle?”

Zuko shrugged and said, “I’ve never really been a good student. I preferred hiding out in the library reading scripts than watch my tutor listen to himself talk.” Jee did not look impressed.

Zuko stood up and swayed minutely. Jee reflexively reached out to steady him, but Zuko waved him off as he stumbled to the mirror. Just like last time, Jee stared with morbid fascination at all of Zuko’s scars when he took off his shirt. Unlike the scar from being stabbed, this scar was immediately spotted.

Across his chest was a massive burn scar. It stretched across his pecs and parts of it reached his collar bone. The center was a splotchy dark red that faded into various shades of pink. Unlike some of his other burn scars, you could still see the jagged round scars where he had been stabbed. Only now those scars appeared to have become more concave and made his chest look like a crater field. The tissue was raised and silky smooth but also felt incredibly fragile around the edges. It still messed with his mind when he saw himself touching his skin but barely feeling it.

Behind him, he heard Jee hiss at the sight of the burn scar. He asked, “Is that what killed you?”

Zuko nodded and said, “At least it’s not on my face. I don’t know how I would even begin to explain that.” Jee continued to stare as Zuko put his shirt back on. With a huff, Zuko said, “I know it looks bad, but it’s not that serious. It’s not like any of these can permanently kill me.”

Unfortunately.

Jee seemed to catch what Zuko didn’t say, and his frown deepened. Zuko rolled his eyes and said exasperatedly, “You know what my end goal is, and you agreed to help; so, don’t start trying to act all disapprovingly.” Jee’s frown didn’t disappear, but it didn’t worsen either. The man simply shook his head and left. With another roll of his eyes, Zuko got ready for the day.

The rest of the day passed as usual, though Jee did seem to be sticking a little too close to him. Zuko just shrugged off the man’s behavior and continued to follow his previous actions. He had to alter his mask again, and before long it was time to retry breaking into the fortress.

Maybe the third time’s the charm and nothing horrible will happen.

Right.

One fantasy at a time.

Zuko retraced his footsteps back to the dirt road that led to the fortress’s entrance. The same cart started to pass by and Zuko effortlessly grabbed onto the underside of it. Just like last time, he was able to get inside the cart without being spotted as the soldier inspected it. When the cart came to a stop, Zuko ran through that same open door and made his way up the steps until he came to the same branching hallway.

Ok, going to the left will lead me to the officer barracks.

Maybe going straight well give me better results.

He silently creeped down the dimly lit hall until he came across another series of metal doors. Just like in the other hallway, there wasn’t anything unique about their appearance. He tried to carefully open one of them, but they were all locked.

Why is every door locked?

I get doors leading cells, high-ranking officer rooms, and rooms holding classified information.

You can’t convince me that every room here holds something highly valuable.

Zuko glared at the locked doors as he weighed his options. He didn’t think that these were also barracks, but there could still be soldiers inside of them. If he broke the lock again then he could have another fiery death. However, if he waited until someone decided to open one of these doors, then too much time might pass. With an aggrieved sigh, Zuko tried to carefully break the lock to the door.

What can possibly go wrong?

Worst case, I just get another scar and traumatize Jee more.

The lock gave out under the pressure of his blades, and he stepped inside. Zuko inspected the dimly lit room and was momentarily relieved to see that it wasn’t full of soldiers. However, it did appear to be a storage room of some kind. Curious, he inspected the boxes to see what could be so important to keep them behind locked doors. He lifted the lid of the nearest box and stared blankly at its contents.

It was empty.

No.

I refuse to believe that this room is dedicated to storing empty boxes.

He opened all the remaining crates and was somewhat relieved to see that they weren’t all empty. However, their contents didn’t make him feel much better. This room seemed to be used to store damages uniforms.

I don’t understand!

Why have a room dedicated to boxes full of junk behind a locked door?

Were they scared that someone would steal their torn tunics?

Wait, I think I understand now.

Whoever built this fortress wanted to get more money.

I mean, these fortresses are popping up all over the Earth Kingdom.

There’s no way that every single fort, fortress, and stronghold can be thoroughly audited.

It’s just easier to give the commanding officer whatever amount of money they request and be done with it.

Some officer is out there enjoying his government sponsored retirement.

Zuko exited the room and forced open a different door. Once inside, he saw more crates.

Scratch that previous thought.

That officer is probably living like a king in some Fire Nation colony.

If the other rooms are just like this, then his kids and grandkids could be set for life.

I’d continue to investigate this, but I have more pressing issues to attend to.

Like not dying.

Again.

He left this room and continued down the hallway. Doors started to become more spread out the further he went in. Zuko continued to wander down the hall until he saw a door that seemed different. It had more locks on it and appeared the be thicker than any of the other doors he saw.

Well, this could either be Zhao’s office or it’s holding some powerful individual that’s going to kill me in a way that will haunt my nightmares.

I guess there’s only one way to find out.

He carefully broke each lock and listened for any suspicious sounds. With each snap and crack of metal breaking, he would pause just long enough to listen for sounds of danger. Finally, all the locks were broken, and he swung open the door. Just as he was about to step in, a pair of large jets of flames were shot at his head.

This was stupid!

Why do I keep making stupid decisions?!

Without waiting to see who his attackers were, he turned and raced down the hallway. Heavy sets of footsteps behind him were closing in. An unfamiliar man’s voice shouted, “Halt!”

At least it’s not Zhao.

Zuko continued to weave through the hallways in hopes of losing his pursuers. Unfortunately, the pair seemed to be just as physically fit as Zuko and were having no trouble keeping up. Flames were being shot at his feet and head, the heat singed his clothes. Just as he was about to turn down another hallway when something smacked into his neck.

At first, he was confused.

Then he felt warm liquid gush down the side of his neck.

The taste of copper flooded his mouth.

He crumbled mid-step on the cold stone floor not even a second later.

His hand tried to grasp the wound.

He could feel a small blade sticking out of his neck.

Thick warm blood leaked from between his fingers.

Zuko coughed to try to clear his throat, but more blood filled his mouth.

He tried to inhale but blood filled his lungs.

Each attempt to cough made his wound gush more blood.

He couldn’t breathe.

His whole body felt cold.

Hands were grabbing him.

Sound faded.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up gagging and clutching his neck. The taste of blood coated the inside of his mouth, and his neck ached where the blade had penetrated. He struggled to breathe. He clenched his teeth, and the taste of damp leather filled his mouth.

Focus.

Breathe.

A pair of hands were grabbing him and pulling him into an upright position then started to slap his back. Zuko coughed the piece of leather out of his mouth and gasped for breath as the hands continued to support him. The smell of incense filled his nose. The feeling of rough hands grasping his shoulders. The sound of a panicked voice trying to question him. The faint taste of leather. Finally, the sight of Jee crouching in front of him came into focus.

The man looked beyond worried, borderline frantic even as he tried to get Zuko to answer him. Zuko could feel his hands shaking through the fog of his mind. Eventually, he was able to say, “I’m ok.” Jee did not look convinced. The man sat silently by his bedside as he slowly started to feel more alive. With a choked whine, Zuko forced himself to sit up on the edge of the bed. Jee looked like he was ready to catch him as Zuko swayed dangerously. He didn’t comment on Zuko’s obviously shaking hands.

After watching Zuko take a few deep breaths, Jee asked, “What happened?”

“I died. Again.” The world still felt a little fuzzy around the edges, but he felt present enough to at least have a basic conversation.

Jee frowned and asked, “How many times have you died?”

Zuko huffed a humorless laugh and said, “Three times so far.”

Jee studied him closely and then said, “Sir, you can’t keep doing this to yourself. If Zhao has the Avatar, I’m sure he’ll still have him tomorrow. Take a day to recuperate then try again with a clear head.”

“I can’t do that.”

“Why?”

With a deep sigh, Zuko flopped backwards onto his bed and stared at the ceiling. He tried to explain, “The longer Zhao has Aang, the harder it will be to save him. Then there’s the risk his two friends will try to save him and get captured or killed, then I’ll have even more work to do. It’s easier to save one person than try to juggle saving multiple people in different locations. Besides, I think I narrowed down where I need to go.”

World’s worst process of elimination.

Jee’s frown deepened as he listened to Zuko talk. He clearly wasn’t happy with his words, but he also seemed to grudgingly accept Zuko’s reasoning. Jee let out a sigh and asked, “Are all revivals like this?”

“Not usually, no. It only really starts to get bad the more times I die in a single day or if I revive while I’m awake.” Jee sighed again before seeming to accept his answer. With wobbly legs, Zuko decided to stand up. Jee rushed to assist him, but Zuko waved him off. He shuffled to his mirror and inspected his neck. Zuko scowled and said, “What is with people and aiming for my neck? Why can’t they aim for my easily coverable torso? At this rate, my entire neck will be just one big scar.”

Jee offered, “You could wear a scarf.”

Zuko huffed and said, “I would, but I can’t wear a scarf at all times. Besides, knowing my luck, I’d probably end up being strangled with it.”

Jee didn’t find that as amusing as Zuko, who had started to smile and snicker. Zuko looked at the scar and wasn’t too impressed with it. The blade must have been relatively small and thin because he could barely make it out. Mostly because of Zhao’s handprints that ensnared most of his neck. He could really only see bits of it through the gaps in the finger marks. Zuko grumbled as he applied scar paste and then sat down as he waited for it to dry. Jee had watched him silently the entire time and was now staring at his neck.

Zuko raised his eyebrow and asked, “What? Did I miss a spot or is it uneven?”

Jee shook his head and said, “No, sir.” Silence hung over them and Jee not so subtly continued to glance at Zuko’s neck.

With an aggravated groan, Zuko said, “If you have something to say, just say it.”

Jee pursed his lips and carefully asked, “Sir, who’s handprints are those?”

I guess I should’ve expected that.

It is a pretty jarring scar.

Zuko groaned in annoyance and said, “Zhao strangled me while firebending.”

“When did that happen?”

“At Roku’s Temple. Sokka, the Water Tribe boy, was about to get himself killed by Zhao so I stepped in.” 

Jee grumbled something about crazy cursed princes that don’t take care of themselves and left his room. A bit confused, Zuko shrugged off Jee’s odd behavior and got ready for the day. Everything went as it did before, even Jee seemed to be hovering just as much. Though he did seem to scowl a little more if Zhao’s name was mentioned. As night crept across the sky, Zuko gathered his things. Just as he was about to leave, someone knocked on his door.

That’s new.

“Enter.”

It really shouldn’t have surprised him when the door opened to reveal Jee. The man stared at him for a moment before clearing his throat, “Good luck, sir. Try not to die again.” Zuko only blinked dumbly at the man, who turned and went up to the deck.

That was weird.

Zuko shook his head and made his way off his ship, through the town, and hid along the tree line in front of the fortress. Everything went as it did before as he clung to the bottom of the cart and broke into the fortress. After reaching that same hallway, Zuko turned right.

The hallway looked just like the others. The dim lighting reflected off the polished floor and walls that gave everything a reddish hue. The shadows were just as easy to stick to as he crept along silently. He eventually came across a door. Before breaking it down, he decided to try to listen and figure out if someone was on the other side. The sounds of growling and cursing met his ears, and he backed away.

You know, I’m sure that this room is filled with mochi and theater paraphernalia, but I don’t want to risk it.

That growling isn’t giving me any confidence that anything good is behind that door.

Zuko gave the door one last look before continuing down the hallway. He came across a few more doors that were also locked.

I’m not even surprised anymore.

Every door is locked always.

He mentally cursed as he broke into a few rooms and found nothing of interest. He turned a corner and came face to face with a dead end. His eye began to twitch, and his body started to shake as he repressed shouts of frustration.

What is the point of this hallway?!

I’ve gone done every other passage here, this has to be the right way!

This is nonnegotiable!

Am I supposed to go into the room with the growling monster?

I don’t think so!

Just as Zuko was about to turn around and try to find a different door outside, he looked up and saw a vent opening. He stared at it for a second before deciding that this must be the right way. Zuko pried the cover off the vent and crawled through.

If this leads to a dead end, I’m going to start blowing things up.

It won’t even be about stress relief.

It’ll be a practical solution to my problem.

Zuko continued to crawl through the dark narrow passage and tried to ignore all the bugs who made the vent their home. The occasional crunch of an insect’s body under him was the only sound he heard for a while besides his own breathing. Just as he was about to give up, he heard a familiar voice talking.

Zhao.

Just my luck.

Zuko couldn’t make out what the man was saying, so he crawled as silently as he could and came across a vent grate looking down at a hallway. Judging by Zhao’s smug tone, he more than likely has Aang locked up around here somewhere. Zuko watched Zhao walk away and then continued in the direction the man came from.

Zuko’s gloves felt like they were caked in dust and dead insects by the time he reached the next grate. He appeared to be over a massive room with a single figure chained to pillars that had flames on top in the middle.

This room is absolutely overkill.

Who makes a cell this big?

Now the real question is, how am I going to get in?

A fall from this height will kill me instantly or make me wish I was dead.

More than usual, at least.

The vent was too narrow to turn around, so he continued straight until he reached a grate above a hallway. Carefully, he moved the heavy metal grate just enough for him to climb out. A door was right behind him; and, after some debate, he forced it open to reveal some Fire Nation uniforms, extra prisoner chains, and some rope. He peered around the corner and saw four soldiers standing guard in front of a door.

Time for the fun to begin.

With a smile splitting his face, Zuko went back to the closet and picked up a helmet, some rolled up chains, and a small bungle of rope. Casually, he threw the helmet down the hallway toward the guards and waited for them to take the bait.

There’s no way all four of them will come to investigate.

Sure enough, a single guard rounded the corner. Zuko quickly wrapped the chains around the man’s hands and pulled him off balance. With a well-placed strike, the man fell unconscious. Quickly, he fed the chain through the vent grate and pulled the soldier until his feet were off the ground then gagged him. As soon as he had finished, two more guards rounded the same corner. Zuko could feel his smile tug at his scar as soon as he saw them. They barely had time to react as he restrained and knocked them out.

The fourth guard picked up a horn to sound the alarm, but Zuko threw a knife that knocked it out of the soldier’s hand. Zuko danced out of the path of flames that were being shot at him until he was close enough to knock the man out. He dragged the soldier to where his friends were hanging and quickly hoisted him to hang next to them. Once he was certain that none of them were able to escape or draw attention, he made his way back to the door.

I probably could have searched them for the key, but why stop breaking locks now?

With a precise strike of his blade, the lock shattered. Standing in the center of the room was Aang. His clothes were stained with mud and damaged from whatever fight he lost. He looked scared as he stared at the disguised Zuko. As soon as Zuko started to approach him while swinging his blades, the kid started to scream. Zuko couldn’t help but snicker quietly.

I know I’m playing the part of the good guy, but I can’t resist having a little fun.

With a couple of swift strikes, the chains and manacles were broken. Aang looked at him quizzically and asked, “Who are you? What’s going on? Are you here to rescue me?” Instead of responding, Zuko turned and motioned for Aang to follow him. He heard Aang start to walk behind him as he said, “I’ll take that as a yes.” As they made their way down the hallway to the grate, he heard the kid gasp and exclaim, “My frogs! Come back and stop thawing out!”

This is what happens when you work with child actors.

They get distracted by everything.

Zuko marched up to Aang and grabbed him by the back of his tunic. With little effort, he dragged the boy down the hallway. Aang protested, “Wait! My friends need to suck on those frogs!”

Does he have a concussion or something?

I don’t see any obvious head wounds.

I’ll worry about possible head trauma later.

He ignored Aang’s protests as he dragged him to the vent grate he came from. He pointed upwards and the kid seemed to understand. With a gust of air, the grate holding the unconscious soldiers was shifted over just enough for them to fit through. Aang even used his airbending to close the grate behind him.

How considerate.

Zuko led Aang through the dark vent all the way back to where he entered. When they emerged, Aang looked down at himself and made a grossed-out expression when he saw all the dust, insect webs, and dried out corpses. He motioned for Aang to continue to follow him down the hallway to the staircase. Once they reached the bottom, Zuko looked around for a safe route and saw a drainage grate. He snuck along the stacks of crates until he got to the drainage pipe and motioned for Aang to jump down. After Aang entered the water, Zuko followed.

There better not be a water monster in here.

If I see a water monster, I am going to level this place.

They shimmied along the edge of the tunnel and tried to avoid detection from the soldiers patrolling above them. The cold water made Zuko’s feet start to cramp, and the smell of mildew was making his head spin. Up head, Zuko noticed that the tunnel had a gate over it. He got up close to inspect it and decided that the metal was too thick to cut through.

Was it too much to ask for an easy way out?

I guess we have to go over the wall.

Once again, he motioned for Aang to follow him out of the tunnel. At the base of the wall, Zuko held out the rope and pointed to the top of the wall. Aang seemed to think for a second, then nodded his head. They tied a decent sized rock to one end and Aang airbended the rock to the top of the wall. Zuko gave it a few tugs before he decided it was secure enough. He gestured for Aang to go first, and the boy quickly started to climb.

When they were almost halfway up, when the alarm was raised. Bells and horns sounded all around them. Aang paused and looked around frantically as the soldiers pointed and shouted in their direction. A couple of guards stood under them and lit the rope they were climbing on fire. Zuko and Aang dropped to the ground and ran to the still open gates. Zuko heard Zhao shout, “The Avatar has escaped! Close all the gates immediately!”

I hate you so much.

As the gates began to close, Aang shouted, “Stay close to me!” and sped ahead. With a powerful blast of air, he cleared all the Fire Nation soldiers out of their path. They almost made it through the first gate when Zuko started to be surrounded by soldiers with spears.

If I get stabbed again, I might actually turn evil.

As he broke spears and disarmed the soldiers, a strong gust of air knocked some of the soldiers off their feet. Another strong blast got rid of the rest. With a shout, Aang sent Zuko flying through the air.

What is wrong with you!?

Warn someone before you decide to juggle them!

Zuko managed to land safely on top of the wall, but he was quickly surrounded. Before he could engage, Aang grabbed him with his legs and lifted them both up into the air.

How are you even holding me?

I’m not fat or anything, but I have to weigh considerably more than you do.

Though, based on your grunting, you aren’t exactly finding this easy.

Soldiers from the ground were throwing their spears at them, and Zuko was doing his best to deflect them either with his swords or kicking them away. Aang’s strength seemed to finally give out, and they crash landed on top of the second wall. Soldiers climbed up from trap doors and they began to try to fight them off. Zuko saw one soldier was about to strike Aang, so he grabbed the man and threw him over the side of the wall. Just as he was about to engage with another group of soldiers, a strong gust of wind sent them flying.

Come on!

Let me have some fun.

As soon as he finished his thought, he noticed three groups of soldiers charging the wall with bamboo ladders. He wasted no time and immediately engaged with the soldiers trying to reach them. Next to him, he heard soldiers screaming. Before he could figure out what was happening, Aang handed him one of the bamboo ladders shouting, “Take this!” as he held another ladder. When he jumped on the third ladder, he called to Zuko, “Jump on my back!”

At this rate you are going to have severe back problems, and I refuse to be blamed for it.

Zuko jumped on Aang’s back as the ladder started to fall. Just before the ladder collapsed, Aang placed one of the ladders he took and jumped on top of it with Zuko on his back. Aang ordered, “Give me the next one!” Zuko quickly complied and held on tight as they made their transition to the next ladder.

They were almost at the outer wall when one of the soldiers below them set the ladder on fire. Aang jumped and tried the grab onto the wall but couldn’t get a grip. Zuko managed to grab it with one hand, but he couldn’t pull Aang and himself up. They quickly fell to the ground.

Soldiers immediately cornered them against the closed door. Together, they shot a powerful blast of fire at Aang and Zuko. Before Zuko could react, Aang jumped in front of him and created a massive sphere of air to protect them from the flames.

Thanks.

I really don’t want any more burn scars.

Zhao ordered, “Hold your fire! The Avatar must be captured alive!” As soon as Zhao finished uttering those words, Zuko wrapped his blades around Aang’s throat. It took everything in Zuko’s power not to laugh at the look on Zhao’s face as they stared at each other. Aang’s heart was pounding rapidly, but he didn’t try to get away.

This kid actually trusts me.

I’m going to feel horrible when I betray him.

Zhao snarled, “Open the gate.” One of his officers asked what he was doing, but Zhao snapped, “Let them out! Now!” As the gate opened, Zuko slowly walked backwards with his swords still to Aang’s neck. He never took his eyes off the fortress. Even as the distance between them grew, he still knew that they were in danger. Sure enough, he saw something rapidly heading to his face. Without a second thought, he dodged.

Agony rippled through his collar and a choked shout made it past his lips.

He fell onto the ground.

Aang immediately created a cloud of dust around them.

Zuko grunted in pain and tried to find what was hurting him.

He struggled to move his hand.

Eventually he clumsily made contact with what felt like a narrow piece of wood protruding from where his neck and shoulder met.

I was shot with an arrow!

That’s new.

The novelty was replaced with numb horror when he realized that he could barely move. Aang was hovering over him as the dust was beginning to settle. With a face full of uncertainty, he removed Zuko’s mask.

Zuko couldn’t help but smile as Aang scrambled backwards when he realized who his savior was.

Breathing was getting harder.

Zuko just smiled.

Aang looked at Zuko then at the fast-approaching soldiers. With a determined look, he picked Zuko up and quickly ran as fast as he could.

Each justle sent shocks of pain rippling through his body.

Zuko finally gasped out, “Stop. Please.”

Aang looked at him with eyes filled with concern but stopped beneath a tree. Carefully, he placed Zuko on a bed of leaves.

Each breath took too much effort.

 It was getting harder and harder to keep his eyes open.

Aang’s face was a mixture of anguish and panic. He quickly said, “I’ll go get help. You’re going to be okay!”

“No.”

Aang stopped mid-step and turned to face Zuko who was still smiling. Only now it was a bit sad. He said, “There’s nothing anyone can do, I’m already dead.” Aang looked like he was about to cry.

Why?

Doesn’t he hate me?

He should, I’m the villain.

Aang started to sniffle as he sat down next to Zuko. The sound of night animals echoed around them. In the gaps of the tree canopy, Zuko could make out stars twinkling above them. Zuko could feel that familiar numbness traveling up his body. Aang’s voice cracked as he asked, “Do you think that if things were different, we could’ve been friends?”

He looked so hopeful and so heartbroken that Zuko responded, “I don’t know, but we can be friends for now. If you want.”

I’ve never had a friend before.

Tears started to run down Aang’s face as he grasped one of Zuko’s hands. Distantly, Zuko realized that he could barely feel it. Aang tried to swallow a sob as he said, “I’m sorry.”

“Why?”

“If I didn’t run away one hundred years ago, then none of this would be happening.”

The sobs Aang was holding back broke free. Zuko tried to smile at him as he said, “It’s ok. I’m not mad at you. Everything will be okay.” Aang continued to hiccup sobs as he squeezed Zuko’s hand tightly. Almost like he believed that if he held on tight enough, Zuko would be okay.

I’ve never been this aware when someone mourned me.

I’m usually mostly gone by this point.

Dark spots were starting to dance across his vision.

I want to get to know my first friend.

“What is your favorite dessert?” The words were barely above a whisper, but they caught Aang’s attention.

“What?”

“I’ve…never had…a friend…before. I want…to know you.”

Aang hiccupped and said, “Egg custard.”

Zuko hummed and replied, “I like mochi.” The dark spots nearly covered his entire vision.

Breathing was almost impossible.

Aang was murmuring apologies and hugged him.

Zuko tried to shush him and say, “It’s okay…’m not mad…it’s okay…”

Aang’s sobs and pleads became more distant.

He stopped breathing.

Darkness.

Screaming.

Zuko woke up screaming.

He only seemed to stop to let out muffled sobs.

Hands were grabbing him.

Someone was trying to talk to him.

Zuko continued to scream until his voice gave out.

The person the hands were attached to tensed for a moment, then pulled Zuko in for a hug.

The smell of the ocean, coal, and leather filled his nose.

Focus.

Breathe.

The smell of incense and whoever was holding him.

The feeling of hard armored plates against his face.

The taste of damp leather in his mouth.

The sound of the man trying to both comfort and question him.

Zuko blinked away the tears in his eyes and looked up to see Jee.

Everything seemed to slow down.

Each blink felt like it took an eternity.

Numbness made each movement sluggish.

Jee was holding him awkwardly, clearly not really sure what he was supposed to be doing or if he was making the right decision. He cleared his throat and asked, “Sir, are you…what do you need?”

Zuko stared at him blankly for a few moments as his brain took its time to process what Jee said. He slowly opened and closed his mouth a couple of times before saying, “He said we could be friends.” Jee looked at him puzzled, but seemed to realize the Zuko wasn’t able to clearly communicate yet. He went to move away, but Zuko made a strangled sound as he let go.

Zuko murmured, “Cold. Death is so cold.” Jee pursed his lips then created a small flame in his hand. His whole body heated up in response to his firebending. Zuko melted into the additional warmth even as he started to sweat. The chill of death still clung to his bones and froze his marrow. Sweat had started to run trails down his face and made his nightclothes cling to his back. Jee was also starting to show signs of discomfort, though Zuko wasn’t sure if it was from the heat or holding his superior.

Probably both.

Zuko clenched and unclenched his still numb fists as he pulled away from Jee then scrubbed the tear tracks from his face. The man looked slightly relieved now, and he asked, “Who were you talking about?” Zuko, still a little out of it, gave Jee a confused look. Jee clarified, “You said that someone told you that you two could be friends. Who was that?”

Realization dawned on Zuko, he smiled and said, “Aang said that we could be friends.” Jee still looked like he didn’t understand, so Zuko elaborated, “As I was dying, he asked if we would’ve been friends if things were different. I said yes, so I think that means we’re friends now.” The smile on his face grew with every word. By the time he finished talking, he probably looked a little mad.

Jee now looked equally confused and concerned as he said, “But he won’t remember asking you that.”

I guess he does have a point.

“It’s a one-sided friendship for now.”

Jee did not look impressed with his statement.

Zuko whined and forced his limbs to cooperate into standing up. Jee scrambled to catch him as Zuko tilted forward and almost fell onto his face. With Jee steadying him, Zuko started to take his first few steps for the day.

Jee cautiously asked, “How many times have you died?”

“This marks my fourth death for today. I think that’s the same number of deaths I had at the South Pole. Death makes everything so hazy, so I don’t really remember.”

“How did you die this time?”

Zuko opened his mouth to respond, but then he suddenly became outraged as he remembered how he died. Now full of indignant rage, he paced clumsily and tried not to yell, “Why?! Why is it when I try to dodge obviously dangerous projectiles aimed at my head, I die? Here I thought that the smart thing to do would be to dodge. But no! This is why I make stupid decisions! When I try to be smart, everything goes wrong!”

Jee watched Zuko pace and rant, but he clearly didn’t understand what Zuko was talking about. He asked, “Something hit your head?”

Zuko turned almost too quickly to face Jee and nearly toppled over but managed to catch himself. Still seething, Zuko said, “Zhao has archers and one of them shot an arrow at me. It was going to hit my head, but instead it lodged between my collar bone and neck. All because I dodged.” Clearly getting worked up again, Zuko resumed his pacing and vented, “The scene was nearly over! We were out of the fortress and nearly at the tree line! Now I have to do everything all over again.”

Zuko, now done ranting, stewed in front of his mirror.

I guess at least this scar is easy enough to hide.

An arrow scar in the center of the forehead would be hard to explain away.

Jee watched carefully as Zuko got ready for the day, twitching to grab him if he started to sway too much. Zuko grumbled about old men worrying too much about him, but didn’t order Jee to leave when the man insisted that he stay. By the time Zuko was ready to face the world, he was mostly back to normal.

Well, normal for me at least.

I don’t think I’ll ever fit the generally accepted definition of “normal”.

Sounds boring anyways.

Together, Zuko and Jee made their way out of Zuko’s room and started their day. Everything seemed to be relatively normal. His uncle, however, did give Jee some curious looks as he watched the lieutenant rarely be out of arms reach of Zuko.

This is ridiculous.

I haven’t stumbled in minutes!

Grumbling, Zuko pointedly ignored Jee’s hovering. As soon as night fell, Zuko went through the motions of breaking into the Fire Nation fortress. He moved swiftly and got to the hallway leading to Aang’s cell sooner than he had previously.

Maybe this means we’ll get over the first wall before we’re spotted.

Probably not though.

With ease, Zuko subdued and strained the four soldiers standing guard. Aang still reacted the same way when he saw the disguised Zuko charge at him with dao blades swinging, much to his amusement.

If I learned anything from Azula, it’s normal to scare your friends.

Bonus points if it haunts them for a few days.

Once he freed Aang, they crawled through the vents and made their way outside. Just like last time, they tried to climb the wall. Unfortunately, they were spotted before they finished climbing the first wall and Zhao announced Aang’s escape not too long afterward. Like last time, they tried to fight their way out. Aang used his airbending to clear out most of the soldiers, and Zuko happily used his blades to disarm the few he got to first.

Zuko decided not to change anything, and let the events play out like they did previously. Aang took the bamboo ladders, they used them to try to escape, and some soldier set their last one on fire as they tried to reach the outer wall. They were surrounded by the faceless Fire Nation soldiers again. Zhao stopped his soldiers from killing them, and Zuko took the opportunity to take Aang hostage.

I know this looks bad, but this is just a means to an end.

The show must go on.

The masked hero will turn out to be the villain.

The gates were opened and Zuko walked backwards with his blades held to Aang’s throat. He looked behind himself occasionally to make sure he didn’t trip on any loose rocks or potholes.

I really don’t want to repeat this day again just because I tripped on a rock.

He kept glancing at the fortress and waited for the inevitable arrow that would be sent his way.

Now that I think about it, maybe I just dodged the wrong way.

Maybe if I…

Before he could finish his thought, he briefly felt something smash into his face.

Darkness.

Groaning, Zuko woke up and realized that he wasn’t in a familiar place.

What happened?

Am I dead?

The bright morning sunlight filtered to the leaves onto his face. The sound of day birds echoed all around him. Beneath him, he could feel dry leaves crunch with each shift of his body. His vision was blurred, and his head throbbed in time with his heartbeat.

He looked around as his vision started to clear. Aang sat on a giant tree root next to him and seemed to be deep in thought. He must have noticed Zuko was awake because he said, “Do you know what the worst part of being born over a hundred years ago is? I miss all the friends I used to hang out with.”

I never had friends so I can’t relate.

Aang continued, “Before the war started, I used to always visit my friend Kuzon. The two of us, we’d get in and out of so much trouble together.”

There was someone who told me about their son and how much trouble we’d cause together.

I was looking forward to it.

Aang looked away as he said, “He was one of the best friends I ever had. And he was from the Fire Nation.”

I’m sorry.

Aang was looking at him again, “Just like you. If we knew each other back then, do you think we could have been friends too?”

Not yet.

The stage isn’t ready.

I hate this.

They stared at each other as Zuko thought. With an inhale, he quickly stood up and shot flames at Aang. Aang immediately dodged and sent himself into the canopy with a gust of air. Instead of pursuing, he watched Aang jump between branches in the forest canopy until he disappeared.

A lump formed in his throat that pulsed in time with his growing headache. He started to gather his things that were laying next to him but paused as he picked up his mask. The face of tragedy stared back at him. Zuko shoved it into his bag and quickly changed into his normal clothes. With heavy steps, he made his way back to his ship.

The once sunny morning had become overcast by the time he boarded his ship. His uncle called out, “Where have you been Prince Zuko? You missed music night! Lieutenant Jee sang a stirring love song.”

Zuko continued to walk past him as he said, “I’m going to bed. Tell the crew to direct the ship northward.”

Zuko changed into his sleep clothes and collapsed into bed. He turned his head and stared at the Fire Nation banner for a long minute. He turned away, but he could feel it looming over him. Zuko was about to fall asleep when a soft knock came from his door. He grumbled in reply.

The door creaked open to reveal Jee. Zuko sent the man a tired glare, but the man seemed undeterred and entered.

Great.

Fantastic.

Just what I wanted.

Jee sat next to Zuko’s bed and at least had the decency to keep his voice low as he asked, “How did it go?”

Zuko huffed and said, “I’m covered in dust and dead bugs from the fortress’s vents, exhausted, and my head hurts from being hit on the head with an arrow…”

“You were hit on the head with an arrow?!” Before Zuko could protest, Jee immediately started to poke and prod at his head. He lectured, “Don’t you realize how dangerous head injuries are? I know you can’t die, but you don’t know if you can’t sustain permanent brain damage.” Zuko thrashed and tried to bat the man’s hands away. After a brief stare down, Zuko grumbled and allowed Jee to inspect him. Once satisfied that Zuko didn’t appear to be on the verge of death, Jee asked, “Did anything else happen?”

Zuko turned to stare up at the ceiling as he said, “I almost made a friend for the first time.” Jee didn’t say anything so Zuko continued, “My father wouldn’t allow me to have friends outside of whoever Azula was playing with. He said I had to earn them.”

“Who did you almost become friends with?”

“Aang. He asked if we would’ve been friends if things were different.”

Now confused, Jee asked, “Why didn’t you accept?”

Zuko sighed and felt the broken threads inside his head quiver. It made his skin crawl and twitch. He smiled weakly as he said, “It’s not time yet. The play just started and…”

“Forget the play! You want to be friends with him, and he wants to be friends with you. Become friends and help him help you!”

Zuko stared silently at Jee who was glaring at him. With a tired groan, Zuko sat up and rubbed his face. The already broken threads felt like they were becoming more frayed, and the weaker ones seemed on the verge of breaking as he said, “I can’t do that. He’s not ready for me to be his friend.” Jee seemed ready to interrupt him when Zuko said, “What do you think my father will do if he hears I joined the Avatar? Zhao would probably continue to chase us, but I could easily neutralize him. Then what? Someone else more powerful who will actually want to hurt Aang will take our place. Not to mention it’s easier to get information from the Fire Nation if they don’t know my intentions.”

Jee didn’t look happy with his answer but seemed to decide not to argue further. Eventually Jee said, “Sir, I know you want to die. I know that’s your goal and mission. However, promise me that if you are given the chance to find happiness, that you’ll take it.”

“I can’t promise that. If I did, I’d join the first decent theater we come across.”

Jee snorted, then said, “Fine, how about you promise to try to experience happiness. Maybe try to build a friendship with the Avatar now, so it will be easier for you later.”

Build a friendship?

I guess Aang can be my almost friend.

I can work with that.

Zuko huffed and said, “Fine, I’ll try my best. Now will you please leave so I can sleep? I’m probably not going to experience a revival today unless you let the ship sink.” Jee rolled his eyes, but left Zuko’s room.

I have my first friend.

Well, almost friend, but I think that counts.

How do you even treat friends?

Azula had two friends, maybe I should try to be like her.

I’m sure only good things will happen if I do that.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age eight)

Spring had made itself known in the Fire Nation palace. The garden was filled with stunning shades of reds, yellows, oranges, pinks, and whites. They all filled the air with their rich perfumes. The sounds of buzzing insects could easily be heard as they went after all the sweet nectar the flowers had to offer. Small colorful birds were flitting through the branches of the trees and bushes as they built their nests. The turtleducks were happily quacking as they swam lazily in the pond. The water was higher than usual; the spring rains have been dumping sheets of water almost every week.

 Zuko was laying on his back in the rain damp grass. He knew that he’d probably get scolded for ruining his clothes, but he couldn’t bring himself to care. Instead, he stared at the white clouds overhead and the darker clouds looming in the distance. It looked like it might rain again tonight. The grass was so damp that he didn’t hear someone walk up to him until they started to speak, “Mother and Father are fighting again.”

He turned his head and saw Azula standing a few feet away. Her arms were crossed over her chest, and she was giving him an unhappy look. Zuko sighed and said, “They always fight.”

“They’re fighting about you.”

That’s one of their favorite topics to fight about.

He tried to sound only mildly curious as he asked, “Why?”

Azula seemed uncertain for a second before saying, “Father hates you and Mother hates me.”

More than a little thrown off, Zuko immediately responded, “Mother doesn’t hate you.”

“But you know Father hates you?”

Zuko didn’t really know how to respond to that. It wasn’t a secret that his father favored Azula, it was almost a daily occurrence that their father would compare Zuko’s admittedly slow progress to all of Azula’s achievements. It was one of those things the siblings tried not to talk about. He countered, “How do you know that Father hates me?”

Azula glanced around the garden briefly, seemingly to make sure they weren’t being listened to before she said, “Father wants to send you away to an institution. He thinks something is wrong with you because you keep having nightmares and act weird. Plus, your marks from your tutor aren’t that great, and your bending is weak. He said that it would only bring shame to the royal family to keep you here.” The way she spoke made it clear that she was directly quoting what she heard.

He didn’t really know what to say to that. A part of him wanted to argue that his father wouldn’t say that, but Ozai had said similar things to his face when his mother wasn’t around. Sometimes he would even hint at those things when she was around, and they would start to fight. However, he didn’t think Ozai would send him away and protested, “Father wouldn’t send me away! My marks aren’t that bad and my firebending is getting better.”

Father isn’t going to send me away.

He cares about me.

Why else would he be angry when I don’t meet his expectations?

Azula inspected the ground in front of her as she said, “He said he was considering talking the Azulon about sending you to a facility up on the northern most island. Father said that’s where members of nobility and royalty go if there’s something wrong with them that can’t be fixed.”

Father thinks that something is wrong with me?

“But Mother argued that I’m normal, right?”

Azula huffed at his worried expression and said, “Of course she did. She said that she would rather leave everything in the palace behind if it meant that she could keep you safe and happy.”

He didn’t miss the fact that only he was mentioned and not Azula; and, judging by Azula’s expression, she caught that detail too. Azula hesitated for a moment before laying down next to him and they stayed silent for a while. Both stared at the oncoming storm and waited for it to hit. Eventually, Zuko said, “Father hates me because I’m not perfect enough.” It felt like something broke inside of him, but it also felt a little freeing.

If he’s going to hate me no matter what, then why try anymore?

I just need to stay out of the way and not draw attention to myself.

Azula blankly said, “Mother hates me because I’m too much like Father.” Zuko glanced at her, and he could see she was having the same emotional turmoil that he was. She turned her head to look at Zuko and asked, “How are you going to keep Father from sending you away?”

Zuko shrugged and replied, “He only gets mad when he sees me, right? If I avoid being around him as much as possible, then maybe he won’t send me away.”

He can’t be angry about me existing if he doesn’t see me.

Azula didn’t look reassured, but it didn’t look like she had any better ideas. At some point, she started to pick the grass around her and was shredding it. Softly, she asked, “What if Mother tries to send me away? She thinks something is wrong with me too.”

Silence once again hung over them as Zuko contemplated Azula’s words. An idea hit him, and a smile stretched across his face as he suddenly sat up. Startled, Azula sat up too and looked around. Zuko grabbed her shoulders and said, “I have the perfect plan!” She looked a bit confused but wait as he continued, “You keep being you and distract Father about my existence, and I’ll keep Mother’s attention off of you.”

“That’s a dumb plan, how would it even work?”

Zuko huffed and said, “You’re Father’s favorite, so if you keep his attention on you then he won’t pay as much attention to me. The same should be true for Mother. All I have to do is avoid Father as much as possible and you do the same with Mother.”

Azula rolled her eyes and said, “Father might fall for that, but Mother would be suspicious.”

Zuko’s smile grew as he said, “Not if you’re with Father.” Azula seemed to be considering his plan. He could see her try to come up with other options, but it appeared that nothing seemed viable. Her face shifted between deep concentration and a frown.

Finally, it seemed like she gave up on her internal debate and said, “This is a dumb plan, and you’re a dumb-dumb for coming up with it.” Zuko started to splutter out a retort when Azula said, “I guess we can try it out, but I’m going to hold it over you forever when it fails.”

Zuko rolled his eyes and flopped back down on the ground, and Azula rejoined him not long after. Even though he seemed like he easily accepted his father’s hatred of him, Zuko couldn’t help but try to find evidence that at some point his father cared about him.

He let me go to the Fire Lily Festival!

I mean, I had to make “adequate progress” first, but he eventually let me go.

He tried hard to remember other instances of his father loving him, but the more he tried the more that piece inside of him broke when he couldn’t find anything. They stayed there watching the clouds roll in as the wind picked up. Distant rumbles of thunder could be heard as the sky grew darker. As the rain started to sprinkle on them, Azula said, “We need to get inside. I don’t think it’s normal to lay outside in a storm.”

Nothing about us is normal.

Reluctantly, they went inside. As soon as they entered the threshold, a servant approached and bowed while saying, “Princess Azula, Prince Ozai has summoned you to his study.” Azula nodded and gave Zuko one last glance as she was led away.

Now alone, Zuko wandered the halls. As the storm started to rage outside, his mind felt like it was caught in its own storm as it tried to come to terms with reality. He was so caught up in his inner turmoil that he didn’t notice a guard approaching him until he said, “Your Highness, I’d like a word with you.” Startled, Zuko looked up and saw a familiar face.

It’s that officer from the Fire Lily Festival!

What was his name again?

Tosa?

Sako?

It’s probably not important.

For a second, he stared at the guard before quickly turning around and running down the hall. The man shouted after him as Zuko ran off. Zuko could hear the guard catching up to him as he raced down the halls. He turned to look over his shoulder when his foot met air instead of the floor. In a state of numb horror, Zuko realized that he had run towards a staircase and was now about to fall down the marble steps.

Is this how I die?

Will this even kill me?

Just as he was about to tumble down the steps, a hand grabbed the back of his tunic and brought him to a sudden stop. Zuko made a choked off noise as he was yanked back and his heart pounded in his chest as he regained his footing. He looked up and internally groaned when he saw who his savior was.

Great.

So much for not drawing Father’s attention.

The very guard he had been trying to get away from was the one currently holding him by the tunic. Before Zuko could speak, the man questioned, “Are you alright Your Highness?” Zuko nodded mutely. Once Zuko confirmed he was okay, the guard seemed relieved for a moment as he said, “Good. I can’t imagine how your parents would feel if you had gotten hurt.”

They would be sad for very different reasons.

Probably.

I don’t want to think about it.

Now reassured that Zuko was okay, the guard started to question him, “Why did you run?” Zuko just shrugged and didn’t say anything. Frowning, the guard asked, “Why didn’t you pay attention to where you were going? Do you not realize how badly you could’ve been hurt?” Still Zuko didn’t say anything. He just glared at the floor. Zuko hoped the guard would get frustrated with his silence and leave. Then the guard asked, “What would your father say if he found out you were in a serious accident?”

That crack inside of him that he was trying desperately to ignore grew as he shouted, “Father would be happy! He hates me!” Zuko’s chest heaved like he just got done training. It felt almost freeing to say those words out loud to someone, but it also created a much darker feeling that took root in his mind.

The guard let go of Zuko’s tunic in shock at his outburst but quickly recovered. The man patiently said, “Prince Zuko, your father doesn’t hate you. If he heard you had an accident, he would be distraught just like any other parent.” Zuko just snorted in disbelief as he felt his throat tighten. The officer studied him intently for a moment before nodding to himself.

He grabbed the back of Zuko’s tunic again and started marching down the hall. Zuko squawked in surprise and asked, “Where are you taking me?”

Still looking ahead, the officer said, “We are going to your father.”

Panicked, Zuko begged, “There’s no reason to do that! I’m fine and he’s probably busy.” His protests went ignored as they made their way to Ozai’s office. Once outside the door, the guard firmly placed Zuko just to the side of the entrance. He looked Zuko directly in the eye as he said, “Wait here and listen. Maybe you’ll believe your father’s words if they are said to someone else.”

I don’t think I’m going to like what I’m about to hear.

I’m not sure this guard will like it either.

Before Zuko could stop the man, the guard knocked on Ozai’s office door and entered. Curiosity kept Zuko frozen next to the doorway as he listened to his father greeting the guard. Ozai sounded mildly curious as he said, “Captain Sato, what brings you to my office?”

Captain Sato.

At least I know his name again.

Zuko heard Sato’s armor shift in what he could only assume meant that the man bowed as he said, “Prince Ozai, I was patrolling the halls when Prince Zuko nearly fell down the stairs. Luckily, I was able to stop him from falling and he has no serious injuries. However, he may have sustained some bruising from me stopping his fall.”

Silence.

Ozai seemed mildly annoyed as he said, “Why bring this to me? This is something his mother would be more interested in hearing. Don’t bring me anymore news of him unless something serious happens.” There was a brief pause that seemed to indicate that Sato was dismissed, but then Ozai continued, “Next time, let the boy fall.”

Zuko’s eyes widened at his father’s words, and Sato seemed to express a similar shock as he asked, “You would have preferred if I let Prince Zuko die, Prince Ozai?”

Even though Zuko couldn’t see Ozai, he could imagine his father’s perfect posture as he studied the captain. It was the same look he would give Zuko when he explained something he believed was obvious without being overtly condescending. Ozai’s voice snaked through Zuko’s head as he said, “Not at all Captain. The boy is weak and needs to learn that actions have consequences. Perhaps a fall down the stairs or some other accident will teach him to behave more like a respectable member of the royal family.”

With that, it seemed Sato was officially dismissed. He stepped out of Ozai’s office with a blank expression and closed the door behind him. Zuko was staring pointedly at the ground as he tried to ignore the telltale burning of his eyes. Sato placed his hand between Zuko’s shoulder blades and gently led him away silently. No matter how hard Zuko tried to ignore his father’s words, they still echoed like thunder in his head. That dark thing’s roots penetrated further into his mind as he continued to spiral.

Father wouldn’t care if I died.

He wants me to die.

Azula was right.

What did I do wrong?

His nose started to run, and he sniffed. The more he sniffed, the more his vision blurred. Then his breath started to hitch. Before long, he was silently crying and hiccupping as Sato led him down the hall. Zuko didn’t know where Sato was taking him, and he didn’t care enough to ask.

Soon enough, Sato opened a door and led Zuko inside. The captain lifted him up onto a wooden table and grabbed a cloth. Carefully, Sato dabbed at Zuko’s face with it as he softly said, “I’m sorry. You did not deserve to be talked about like that, and I should have listened to you.” Zuko didn’t respond and his tears continued to flow. He hiccupped a few louder sobs, and Sato looked heavily conflicted. The man carefully placed his hands on Zuko’s shoulders and asked, “Would you like a hug, Your Highness?”

Through his blurred vision, Zuko could see concern written all over Sato’s face. Before he could overthink, Zuko immediately latched onto Sato. The captain’s armor dug into his face, and he hit his head on the side of Sato’s helmet; but he couldn’t bring himself to care. Sato softly cursed as he took off his helmet with one hand and held onto Zuko with the other. He sat down on a chair and brought Zuko onto his lap. Each sob Zuko let out sounded like a small scream. All the confusion, hurt, and anger forced their way out. All the while Sato rubbed his back and whispered words of comfort. Soon enough, the storm inside of him calmed slightly and he went limp. Too tired to continue, but still in enough distress that tears still leaked from his eyes.

Sato gently pulled away just enough to study Zuko’s face. Zuko’s cheeks were red and blotchy, tear tracks soaked his face, and snot and drool were smeared on his chin. Sato’s face softened as he took in Zuko’s appearance. He resumed gently wiping Zuko’s face. As he worked, he said, “No parent should ever say that about their child. I know it may be hard for you to believe right now, Your Highness, but you deserve better.” When he finished cleaning Zuko’s face, he looked Zuko in the eyes with a serious expression as he said, “If you are ever in trouble, come to me and I will help you.”

Zuko continued to sniffle a bit as he said, “You’d keep secrets from my mother and father?” Without missing a beat, Sato nodded. Zuko fiddled with his fingers as he thought.

Should I tell him about me dying?

He said I could tell him when I’m in trouble, and maybe this counts.

What if he doesn’t believe me?

What if he thinks I’m crazy?

No.

I’ve only died twice; I can keep this a secret.

What are the chances of me dying more?

Zuko looked down and realized that he was still sitting on Sato’s lap. Embarrassed, he quickly scrambled off and scrubbed at his face with his sleeve. Sato smiled and hummed as he got up. Zuko looked around and took note of the room they were in. It looked like some sort of break room for officers. There were tables and chairs arranged around the room. Torches lined the walls and candles were on the tables. Dark wooden cabinets lined one wall that seemed to hold the meals of some of the officers. Sato walked up to one of the cabinets and took out a bag. He reached inside and pulled out a small tin. He returned the bag to the cabinet then walked back to Zuko.

Sato kneeled in front of Zuko and handed him the tin with a small smile. Confused, Zuko opened it to see five small mochi balls. He looked from the little desserts to Sato still not really understanding. Sato’s smile turned sad as he said, “Think of this as an apology gift.”

Zuko looked away as he said, “Mother said I can only have mochi after dinner.”

Sato gave him a conspiratorial look as he said, “Well, I won’t tell if you don’t.” Zuko gave the man a shocked looked but then remembered that this was the same person who snuck him mochi and scripts when he was grounded.

For someone who’s supposed to uphold the law, he sure is willing to sneak around it.

Zuko smiled faintly as he started to eat the mochi. The taste of sweet berries, sour tropical fruits, and citrus exploded on his tongue with each bite. It didn’t take long for the little treats to be gone. He handed the tin back to Sato with a murmured, “Thank you.” Sato smiled and put the tin back in his bag.

Sato got a conflicted look on his face and carefully asked, “Does anyone else say those things about you?”

Zuko fiddled with his sleeves and looked at the floor. His conversation with Azula earlier echoed in his head. After a few moments, he replied, “My tutor constantly complains about me not learning fast enough, and my trainer is always frustrated that I’m not a good firebender. Azula overheard Father saying that he wanted to send me away.” He paused for a moment before murmuring defeatedly, “Father hates me, and Mother hates Azula.”

Sato looked troubled for a moment and carefully said, “I believe you.” Shocked, Zuko looked at Sato and was taken aback by how serious the man was looking at him. He could feel that dark thing in his mind start to shrink a little bit, and he started to smile.

After giving Zuko one more visual inspection, Sato led Zuko back into the hallway. Just as they were about to round a corner a familiar voice called out, “Zuko! Where have you been?” It was his mother. She looked a little anxious as she approached but seemed to calm down when she saw Sato standing next to him. She looked Zuko over before turning to Sato to say, “I hope he wasn’t getting into any trouble.” Zuko held his breath as he waited for Sato to respond.

There’s no way he’s actually going to lie to a member of the royal family.

I’m not that important.

With a neutral expression, Sato said, “No, Princess Ursa. Prince Zuko was accompanying me on my patrol route.”

Ursa smiled brightly as she said, “That’s good. I hope he didn’t distract you too much.”

Still with a neutral expression and an air of bland professionalism, Sato replied, “Not at all, Princess. I apologize for the abrupt departure, but I have some important duties to attend to.” Ursa gave Sato a confused, but polite smile as the man turned to leave. Even though Sato was polite, there was something almost cold about his tone.

That was weird.

He shrugged when his mother turned to give him a questioning look. Shaking her head, Ursa led Zuko away and questioned him about his day. They passed by a window and Zuko stopped to watch the storm that still raged outside. His mother stood alongside him and said, “Hopefully, the rain will let up soon.” His mother started to tell a story revolving around a rainstorm, but Zuko couldn’t bring himself to listen. His mind was stuck elsewhere.

Father hates me.

He won’t be sad if I die.

Mother hates Azula.

Does that mean she won’t be sad if Azula dies?

A lump formed in his throat, and he felt a small crack form in the image he had of his mother. That dark thing wormed its way deeper into his mind. He couldn’t bring himself to ask her how she would feel; he was too scared of what her answer would be.

I wish Azula and I could live somewhere far away.

I wish both of our parents loved us.

(Present Day)

Now docked further north, Zuko had spent most of his time trying to get any intel he could on where Aang and his friends could be. This was all part of his normal routine as he continued his quest to chase the Avatar to the North Pole. Only now, Jee was not so subtly hinting that Zuko should take some time to relax and actually plan his next encounter instead of just throwing himself in blindly.

I don’t have time to relax.

Besides, it’s hard to plan my first encounter when I have no idea what situation I’m walking into.

Still, Zuko didn’t want to deal with two old men harassing him about taking care of himself. In order to appease both of them, Zuko decided to join his uncle for a cup of tea in his room. Iroh was overjoyed at Zuko’s grumbled acceptance and expertly made a pot of his favorite tea. Once Iroh felt the tea was brewed to perfection, he took a sip and sighed as he said, “See Prince Zuko? A moment of quiet is good for your mental wellbeing.” His uncle filled Zuko’s cup with the strong-smelling liquid. Just as Zuko was about to take a sip, something slammed into his ship with enough force that caused him to spill the tea all over himself.

That’s just great.

I’m going to smell like Uncle all day.

At least I’m not burned, but I still don’t appreciate smelling like a tea house.

Zuko ran to the deck of his ship to see his crew retreating from a woman on the back of a giant, dangerous looking animal. It looked to be about the same height as Appa, but it had less overall bulk. It didn’t appear to have any eyes, but it clearly had a powerful nose. The creature growled and roared, showing off a mouth full of razor-sharp teeth.

Please tell me I’m not about to be eaten again.

The woman shouted, “Get back! We’re after a stowaway!”

Zuko marched past his men as he said, “There are no stowaways on my ship.” His words went ignored as the beast used its claws and teeth to rip a large chunk of metal off his deck then tossed it at them. Zuko managed to duck the debris in time and watched as it slammed into the door to the helm.

At least I didn’t test to see if that would’ve killed me.

I’m really not that curious.

The beast stuck its head into the hole it created and rummaged around. Its growls and snarls echoed up. Just as Zuko was about to order the woman to get off his ship, an unknown man climbed out of the hole and tried to run away. He didn’t get more than a few feet before the creature struck him with its tongue. The man fell to the ground, clearly unable to move. Shocked, Zuko said, “He’s paralyzed…”

The woman casually walked up to her victim and said as she lifted him onto her shoulder, “Only temporarily. The toxins will wear off in about an hour; but by then he’ll be in jail, and I’ll have my money.” She casually walked back to her steed and flung the man over its back.

Still curious, Zuko asked, “But how did you find him on my ship?”

The woman smiled as she patted her animal and said, “My shirshu can smell a rat a continent away.” With ease, she climbed back into her saddle. His uncle was smiling and complimented the woman as she cracked her whip. With that, the pair with their prize left Zuko’s ship and ran down the dock.

As Zuko watched the woman disappear, he heard his uncle say in a strange tone, “Very impressed.” Zuko glared at his uncle as the man looked thoughtfully in the direction the woman had disappeared.

Gross.

The less I know about what you’re into, the better.

Not wanting to witness anymore of his uncle’s weird behavior, Zuko started to inspect the damage to his ship.

I wonder if there’s a correlation to the damage my ship receives while docked and encountering Aang.

The chunk of metal the shirshu tore off is too tattered to simply be welded back on. He would have to have that area of the deck completely redone. Cursing at the inevitable delay, he nearly missed Jee walking up to him. The man seemed to aim for sounding casual as he asked, “Should I contact the dock workers about additional repairs?” It was clearly a loaded question and, based on the disapproving look, Jee was clearly asking if Zuko was going to reset the stage.

I don’t reset for every little inconvenience!

Sure, it would save us a lot of time and money if we didn’t need to get repairs.

But I really don’t think the process of reviving makes it a worthy trade off.

Zuko rolled his eyes at Jee and said, “Yes, and find out what you can about that woman.” Jee raised an eyebrow at him but left to fulfill his orders. He knew that Aang had to be somewhere in the general area, but this unexpected delay could make Zuko fall too far behind to be of any help to him. Then he remembered what the woman said about her steed.

If I’m guessing correctly, she’s probably a bounty hunter.

I bet I can convince her to help me track down Aang.

A couple of hours after Jee left, a few dock workers boarded his ship and started to do repairs. Then about an hour after that, Jee returned. The man didn’t look happy, but Zuko wasn’t sure that he ever did. With a slight tilt of his head, he motioned Jee to follow him into his private quarters. Once inside, he turned to Jee and asked, “What did you learn?”

The man rubbed his face as he said, “Her name is June, and she’s a big-name bounty hunter. Supposedly, she’s collected hundreds of bounties all over the Earth Kingdom and never failed to complete a contract. She’s also made a name for herself at just about every tavern.”

“Does she have any issue with taking bounties from the Fire Nation?”

Jee shrugged as he said, “From what I heard, she’ll take just about any bounty that pays well. I didn’t hear any word about her refusing to work with any particular nation. Though it could be possible that she may charge more.” He narrowed his eyes in suspicion at Zuko and asked, “What are you planning sir?”

Why is everyone always so suspicious of me?

I have done nothing to deserve this treatment.

Zuko rolled his eyes and said, “If she cares about her reputation as a good bounty hunter, I might be able to convince her to help me find Aang.”

Jee gave him a considering look before saying, “I think you should bring your uncle with you.” Zuko began to object when Jee stopped him and continued, “You may have the authority, but he has the negotiation skills to help get you what you want. No offense sir, but your people skills are not…advanced enough to convince someone like her to help you.”

I have amazing people skills!

Just look at all the people that have tried to kill me!

Clearly, I’m great at attracting attention.

Zuko scowled but reluctantly agreed, “Fine, I’ll take him with me. However, if he starts acting weird, you’re going to attend all of his bonding activities for the crew.” Jee huffed what may have been a laugh, but didn’t object.

Then Jee’s face became serious as he said, “Sir, I really think you should try to strategize what you hope to accomplish today and probably tomorrow. There’s no reason to willfully throw yourself into danger.”

Zuko tried to wave the man’s concern off as he said, “I know what I want to accomplish. Find Aang and make sure he keeps moving north without getting captured or killed. I don’t ‘willfully throw myself into danger’, it just so happens that danger easily finds me.” Before Jee could try to lecture him, Zuko stated, “Jee, my method has been working for years now. You are the first person in ten years who started to connect the dots correctly. I can handle a little bit of death if it means getting the correct ending.”

Jee frowned at him, clearly still wanting to argue but seemed to decide against it. As he left Zuko’s room, he said, “Sir, just because what you’re doing right now is technically working, that doesn’t mean that there isn’t a better way of doing things.” Zuko rolled his eyes and focused on getting ready to go out. As he was about to leave, a familiar item on his desk caught his attention. Katara’s necklace.

If June’s steed tracks by scent, then maybe we can use this to track Katara.

Later that night, Zuko and his uncle approached a seedy-looking three-story tavern that was filled with the sounds of boisterous laughter and fighting. As they got closer, they saw a man being thrown from a second story window. The area smelt of alcohol and vomit. He was pretty sure he saw some rodents running off with what looked like an entire loaf of bread. As he entered through the doorway, he could see that the paint was peeling, and the wooden beams were starting to rot. Zuko pushed his way through the crowd and headed to the center of the building. A part of him wanted to make comments about the overall smell of the patrons but decided against it.

As accurate as my comments would be, I really don’t feel like dying to a drunk.

Jee would never let me live it down.

His uncle trailed behind him and tried to keep the peace as Zuko elbowed his way through the crowd until it cleared to reveal a pair of individuals at a table. It was June and some massive unknown man. It appeared that she was in the middle of an arm-wrestling match with him. Zuko marched up to the table and declared, “I need to talk to you.”

She barely glanced at them as she said, “Well if it isn’t my new friends, Angry Boy and Uncle Lazy.” The man she was dueling was making exaggerated faces of pain and appeared to be flexing all of his muscles in his body while she didn’t seem to be breaking a sweat. His uncle laughed at her remarks about them and Zuko scowled at her. With one last grunt, June forced her opponent’s hand to the table, and the crowd began to either cheer or wail as June was declared the victor. Various coins rained down on June, and she quickly gathered her winnings with a smile.

Zuko decided to ignore what was going on around him as he said, “Your beast trashed my ship. You have to pay me back.” June didn’t seem to be listening as she gathered her winnings.

She lazily looked at them as she said, “I’d love to help you out, but I’m a little short on money.” With a smile, she shouted, “Drinks on me!” The crowd cheered as various drinks started to be passed around.

Tired of not being taken seriously, Zuko grabbed her wrist as she was about to take a drink and said, “Money isn’t what I had in mind.” She scowled at him, and they glared at each other for a few moments before she led them outside. Curled up next to the tavern, was her shirshu. Zuko pulled Katara’s necklace out of his pocket and presented it to June as he said, “I need you to find someone.”

June leaned forward to inspect the necklace then sarcastically asked, “What happened? Your girlfriend run off on you?” She casually leaned against her steed as she smirked at him.

Absolutely not.

I’m sure there are people out there that enjoy being stabbed regularly, but I’m not one of them.

Zuko scowled and said, “It’s not the girl I’m after; it’s the bald monk she’s traveling with.”

June, disinterested, said, “Whatever you say.”

“If you find them, I’ll consider the damage to my ship paid for.”

June barked a laugh and said, “Forget it!” then started to climb on her steed to leave.

Before Zuko could say anything, his uncle said, “Plus we will pay your weight in gold.”

June froze, and Zuko could see the corner of her mouth tilt up into a smirk. She approached Iroh and poked his stomach as she said, “Make it your weight and we have a deal.” The smirk on her face grew. His uncle laughed and accepted her counteroffer.

Jee can never know that he was right.

He’ll be unbearably smug.

She snatched the necklace from Zuko’s hand and called out, “Get on!” June presented the necklace to her steed, and it curiously sniffed the jewelry. The beast lifted its head and sniffed the air. After a few moments, its head turned in a specific direction and started to salivate. June jumped onto the saddle in front of them. As soon as she was seated, the beast took off after the scent. Zuko scrambled to hold on and his uncle let out a delighted laugh.

They rode well into the night, and Zuko started to worry about the time.

There is absolutely no way that this encounter won’t result in at least one death.

That’s how every clash with Aang has been, and I have no reason to think that this time will be any different.

If I revive near Uncle, there’s no way I’ll be able to keep my curse a secret anymore.

His internal debate was interrupted when they came to a stop near a creek. Confused, Zuko asked, “Why have we stopped?”

June casually looked over her shoulder and said, “Nyla needs to drink, and I need to rest. Don’t worry, we’ll catch up to your girlfriend tomorrow.”

“She’s not my girlfriend!”

I’d prefer a partner that doesn’t’ regularly stab me, thank you.

Though to be fair, I don’t think romance is in my future.

That would require a happy ending, and tragedy doesn’t get that.

Zuko grumbled to himself, but he was secretly happy that he didn’t have to come up with an excuse to sleep. He watched as the shirshu drank deeply from the creek before curling up. June sat next to her animal then leaned back against it and fell asleep. Or at least tried to. His uncle was not so subtly trying to sleep next to her. Not wanting to witness his uncle flirting, Zuko declared that he would sleep somewhere else.

I don’t think she’ll kill him.

I think it goes without saying that she won’t get paid if she kills the person who holds the money.

At worst, he might get lightly stabbed.

Or maybe she’ll have her beast paralyze him.

He wandered a few yards away until he found a small clearing. Before laying down, he removed one of his gauntlets and wrapped a piece of cloth around it. He put it in his mouth and grimaced at the taste.

When was the last time my armor was washed?

Hopefully it will effectively smother whatever sounds I make when I inevitably revive.

With that, he fell into an uneasy sleep. His dreams were filled with questions of friendship and a man’s promise to return. Groggily, he woke up to the early morning sun rays shining in his face. Zuko took the piece of armor out of his mouth and put it back on. In the distance, he could hear his uncle and June moving about. More accurately, he heard June questioning where he was and his uncle waving off her inquiries.

If he starts flirting again, I’m going to let her stab him.

Not lethally, of course.

Zuko emerged into the clearing where is uncle and June stood and asked, “Is your shirshu finally rested enough?”

June rolled her eyes at him and said, “Yeah, all ready to go find your monk. What’s so special about him anyways?”

Zuko considered lying for a brief moment, but ultimately said, “He’s the Avatar.” She looked surprised for a moment before shrugging it off. Zuko and Iroh climbed into the saddle as June put the necklace in front of the shirshu’s nose. Quickly, the beast’s head locked onto the direction the scent was leading it. June mounted just before Nyla took off.

The forest blurred past them as the shirshu followed the trail. It jumped and cleared large boulders in its path. Zuko’s stomach lurched with each large leap the creature would make over boulders and logs. They started to ascend a mountain, and the trees began to thin. From what little Zuko could make out, it looked like there was some sort of ruins that might have been a temple.

Is Aang still at that abandoned temple?

That would be incredibly stupid.

They slid to a stop behind an elderly woman who looked like she was gathering plants. The old woman casually turned to face them and asked, “Out for a bit of fresh air, are we?”

Zuko called out, “We are looking for someone.”

The woman, seemed a bit confused as she said, “I hope it’s not Miyuki.” She turned to the small animal standing next to her and asked, “Miyuki, did you get in trouble with the Fire Nation again?” The small creature meowed in response before backing away.

I have so many questions.

First, how did her pet get in trouble with the Fire Nation?

Second, who let their senile grandmother climb a mountain by herself?

Before Zuko could question the woman, June said, “The Avatar has been through here. Let’s keep moving.” With a crack of her whip, the shirshu roared and continued to follow the trail.

The shirshu charged into a small town, and the residents scattered while screaming. Once again, the creature came to a stop in front of another old woman. Not seeing anything of interest, Zuko asked, “Why are we stopping?”

June casually said, “Because the girl must have spent a lot of time here.”

Growing impatient, Zuko growled out, “We have no time for this!” He snatched the necklace from June and presented it to the shirshu. The beast sniffed it, but Zuko quickly realized that the animal was not behaving like it usually did when presented something. In a split second he realized that the animal was opening its mouth and quickly ducked as its tongue shot out. Zuko shouted, “Hey, watch it!”

His uncle laughed as June said, “Oh look, he likes you.”

It better not like me in a way that ends with me in its stomach.

As Zuko grumbled and got back onto the saddle, he heard the old woman ask, “Care to hear your fortune, handsome?”

His uncle replied, “At my age, there is really only one big surprise left, and I’d just as soon leave it a mystery.”

I don’t have that luxury.

I need to schedule my appointment with the afterlife.

That, or I need to force my way inside.

I’m honestly fine with either.

With another crack of June’s whip, the creature reared back with a roar and took off once again. In the distance, Zuko could see the walls of another city quickly approaching. He braced himself as the creature broke through the doors revealing what looked like some sort of monastery. The shirshu sniffed the air and turned in circles as it let out a series of small growls. June smirked as she said, “We’re getting close.” Another crack of her whip sent them back running through the forest. It didn’t take long before they broke through the trees and jumped into a dried-up creek bed.

 Zuko immediately spotted Sokka and Katara as they tried to bolt. Before they could get away, the shirshu cornered them against the high creek wall. The creature made a series of noises that made June say, “So this is your girlfriend? No wonder she left. She’s way too pretty for you.” Zuko ignored her as he dismounted and approached the duo. He looked around and noticed that Aang wasn’t with them.

I guess it’s time to play the minor villain until Aang returns.

Zuko asked the Water Tribe siblings, “Where is he? Where’s the Avatar?”

Sokka scowled at him as he replied, “We split up. He’s long gone.”

What!?

Why!?

Do I seriously need to lurk in the shadows and babysit these characters?!

If I have to reset the stage just because these characters had some stupid argument or misunderstanding, I’m going to scream.

Zuko glared at the pair and asked, “How stupid do you think I am?”

Sokka smirked and answered, “Pretty stupid.” He then grabbed his sister’s arm and shouted, “Run!”, but they didn’t get very far. The shirshu whipped out its tongue and struck them. With a grunt, the siblings fell limp to the ground.

Frustrated, Zuko asked, “What are we supposed to do now?”

I can’t keep these two as prisoners!

That will mess up the story!

Aang has to show up and rescue them at some point.

June replied, “It’s seeking a different scent now. Maybe it can smell something that the Avatar held.” Just like with the necklace, it seemed to lock onto a scent it found on a scroll. Quickly, Zuko loaded the paralyzed siblings on the back of the animal before the shirshu sped off.

Once again, they barged through the monastery doors that were propped closed. The nuns scattered and screamed as they charged the courtyard. Zuko, nearly losing his balance, reached back and made sure that Sokka and Katara didn’t fall off. Soon, the shirshu started to pace in circles. Confused, Zuko asked, “What’s it doing? It’s just going in a circle!”

As soon as he finished speaking, he looked up and saw Aang finish a circle above them before diving down. The shirshu tried to rear back to strike Aang but missed. The creature lost its balance as it stood on its hind legs, and all of its passengers toppled off. June quickly got to her feet and cracked her whip, giving the command for her steed to get up. Zuko watched as June charged Aang, but before she could reach him, Appa rammed into it. The force sent June and her steed crashing into a wall. Zuko looked at Aang and let a tiny smirk pull at his lips.

I guess it’s time to make friends.

From a certain perspective, this could look like an extreme game of tag.

I think this counts as a friend activity.

Azula would agree.

Aang’s face looked like a combination of shock and fear as Zuko started to create flames with his hands. With a grunt, Zuko sent a ball of flames at Aang who deflected it and retaliated with a blast of air. They exchanged blows as they moved around the courtyard. At one point, Zuko was able to knock Aang’s staff out of his hands. Then Zuko created a powerful concentrated flame to attack Aang with, but Aang seemed to have the same idea only with air. Their combined attack created a massive flame-filled explosion that sent them flying in opposite directions. Zuko landed on the roof of the wall with a grunt. He felt his armor crack from the impact, and his head was throbbing.

At least my armor absorbed most of the impact.

This better not have killed Aang.

Groaning, Zuko got up and made his way to where he could see Aang sprawled on the opposite wall. As he got closer, he could see that Aang was alive. Relieved, Zuko prepared to charge with flames arching from his hands. Aang set up with a shocked expression and quickly jumped over Zuko. They continued to exchange blasts until Aang sent a strong gust of air that sent Zuko flying backwards until he hit the wall of a tower. He could feel his broken armor digging into his skin. The wind was knocked out of him, and his head continued to spin nauseatingly. Zuko looked up in time to see Aang sending a powerful arch of air at him. The blast hit him before he could even move.

His ears rang.

Spots danced across his vision.

Zuko blinked several times and saw Aang looking horrified.

It took a moment to realize that he wasn’t standing anymore.

He was slumped on the roof leaning against the tower.

Aang was staring at his chest in horror.

Zuko looked down.

That’s not right.

His chest was caved in.

He could see the shattered remains of his ribs shifting under his skin.

Small pieces of broken armor were lodged in his flesh.

He realized he wasn’t breathing.

Aang had come up next to him.

He was crying.

He begged for forgiveness.

Zuko smiled.

He felt a tickle in his throat and coughed.

The taste of copper filled his mouth.

Blood had started to run down his chin.

He couldn’t speak.

All he could do was smile.

Pain pulsed distantly from his chest.

Each blink took longer.

Aang grabbed his hand at some point.

Zuko squeezed it weakly.

He could feel what remained of his ribs creaking and rubbing against each other with each stuttered breath.

Blood continued to fill his mouth.

His vision started to fade.

Aang continued to beg for forgiveness.

Zuko’s smile became weaker.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up coughing. His chest ached in ways it shouldn’t, and breathing felt strange. He stared up at the sky as he tried to process his most recent death.

Well, I guess I lost that round of extreme tag.

Maybe I need to hold back a bit.

With this in mind, Zuko got up and inspected his chest. The sight made his mind go blank. With each breath, he could see the ridges of where his ribs had fractured. He didn’t have a mirror handy, but he could make out where the blast of air had caved in his chest. While he could still breathe relatively normally, it felt like he needed to compensate slightly for his now deformed ribcage. Though he didn’t think that it was enough to seriously hinder his ability to fight.

I can’t hide this with scar cream!

What do I do?

I can’t avoid being shirtless forever!

Anxiety gripped his throat in a vice as he started to pace shakily. He forced himself to stop and breathe.

I don’t have time for this.

I can have my meltdown once I’m back on my ship.

Still reeling from his new scar, Zuko made his way back to June and his uncle. He parroted all the same words he said before and was actually grateful to be riding an animal instead of walking everywhere.

At least this isn’t like the time I saved Uncle from the Earthbenders.

No one is in danger of dying.

Though those three did split up, and I’m guessing my arrival forced them back together.

The shirshu took them back to see the old woman at the abandoned temple, the slightly less old woman in the small town, and then the monastery. Once they reached that location, it was only a matter of minutes before they ran into Sokka and Katara. With the same level of ease as last time, the siblings were captured and carried all the way back to the monastery.

Like last time, Aang swooped in then he and Zuko started to battle. Zuko made a point to hold back until he was sure that he and Aang wouldn’t cause another explosion strong enough to damage his armor. Sure enough, they sent an attack at each other at the same time again. Only this time, it was more smoke than fire. Zuko was still sent flying, but his impact onto the roof only left him feeling bruised rather than concussed. More importantly, was the state of his armor.

I don’t see any major damage, so hopefully I won’t die anymore today.

Zuko snickered to himself at the thought as he started to charge in the direction Aang landed. Like before, they danced around each other while exchanging blasts of fire and air. With a well-placed blow, Aang sent Zuko careening into the wall of a tower. Since his armor wasn’t damaged, Zuko was able to quickly jump off the roof to dodge Aang’s next attack. Aang went to chase after him, but the shirshu lunged at Aang. Appa kept using his tail to send massive air attacks at June’s steed, but none of them seemed to hit.

As soon as Aang got June off his tail, Zuko resumed his attack. They ended up near a well as they continued to attack and evade each other. Something caught Aang’s eye as they were fighting and he said, “You’ve got something I want.” Zuko immediately knew what Aang was talking about.

If he wants the necklace, he’ll have to take it.

Zuko, the minor villain, wouldn’t easily give up such a valuable item.

I think this can qualify as friend behavior.

We’re just playing extreme keep away.

Azula used to play this all the time.

Zuko smirked as he and Aang continued to maneuver around the well. Each time Aang would reach for the necklace, Zuko would pull it just out of reach. When Aang would back off, Zuko would move the necklace closer to him. At some point, Aang seemed to realize that Zuko was just toying with him because he shouted, “Give it back!”

Sneering, Zuko replied, “Make me.” Aang growled in frustration and redoubled his efforts. Their fighting seemed to get more intense the longer it went on. Zuko was now casually evading all of Aang’s attacks while the airbender was now closely pursuing. From an outsider’s perspective, it almost looked like their roles were reversed. Zuko used the structure above the well to evade Aang, and soon Aang got frustrated enough to break it. They continued their battle along the lip of the well until Aang was able to grab Katara’s necklace with his foot and then dived into the well. In retaliation, Zuko sent a stream of flames down it. Almost immediately, a powerful gust of wind and water flung him into the air.

He spun violently as he descended.

The ground rapidly approached.

Darkness.

Zuko sprang into an upright position gasping and ready to continue the fight. However, he looked around deeply confused as the all too familiar chill of death gripped his bones.

What happened?

How did I die?!

This better not turn into some sort of mystery subplot.

I hate it when that happens.

By the time I solve it, I’ve usually died multiple times.

In an attempt to solve the mystery without further death, he carefully inspected his body for any new scars. His torso, while a patchwork of several scars, didn’t appear to have any new marks. Even though he couldn’t see his back, he inspected it as well and couldn’t feel anything new there either. Though he was limited by his own flexibility. He even inspected his face and head, and Zuko still couldn’t find any obvious cause of death.

Ok, let’s try to remember.

Well, I remember playing keep away with Katara’s necklace around a well.

Aang broke the structure covering said well.

He took the necklace from me and then dived inside.

Then…I was…flying?

Frustrated, Zuko rubbed the back of his neck and then froze as he felt something odd. Perplexed, he ran his hand over the area again. His neck felt like it was slightly bumpier. Zuko used both hands to try to inspect the area and came to the conclusion that this must have been his cause of death.

Aang broke my neck!

Is this going to be a recurring thing?

Katara stabs me and Aang lethally breaks bones?

Though I guess I did deserve it.

It’s kind of like that time I flung sparks at Azula, and she retaliated by setting my shirt on fire.

You don’t tease people who are clearly more powerful than you.

Still stiff from death, Zuko shambled back to where his uncle and June where camped. Everything seemed to follow the original path all the way back to when they returned to the monastery with Sokka and Katara as prisoners. He fought Aang, managed to survive the explosion, and then chased Aang to the well.

This time, Zuko didn’t tease Aang as much. Zuko still kept the necklace out of reach but disguised his actions with fighting. Now Aang was using the structure over the well to infuriate Zuko. In retaliation, Zuko broke the structure, and they fought on the rim of the well. They continued their fight until Aang knocked Zuko off the rim and used his foot to grab Katara’s necklace. Aang dived inside the well, and Zuko sent a blast of flames after him. Zuko peered inside and almost immediately found himself going airborne. With a grunt, he landed on the ground and water rained down on top of him.

I’m alive!

Let’s see how long that lasts.

Zuko tried to pursue Aang across the courtyard, but Appa started to charge at him.

I’m ninety percent certain that you’re a vegetarian, but that doesn’t mean I want to risk being eaten or gored by you.

Zuko quickly retreated from the growling bison, but before it could charge him the shirshu attacked. The shirshu struck the bison with its tongue over and over again. June cracked her whip to keep up the on-slot. With a groan, Appa finally succumbed to the venom and collapsed with a massive thud on his side. With Aang’s bison out of the fight, Zuko and June had Aang cornered against a wall.  

If you can’t figure a way out of this, then you don’t stand a chance against the main antagonist.

Suddenly, the air became thick with the smell of various perfumes mixed together. Zuko turned in time to see Katara starting to bend the liquid.

Nope.

Nope.

Nope.

Absolutely not!

This will only end horribly for me.

Before Katara could attack, Zuko started shooting fire at her. From the corner of his eye, Zuko could see that Aang was getting away. However, it looked like June was still chasing him. Katara started sending waves of the fragrant liquid at Zuko who shot them with fire. Each time his flames hit the perfume, it immediately turned to vapor. The smell made the air around him uncomfortably thick. His nose was burning, and his eyes started to water. The air became so saturated that he could taste the various perfumes.

Zuko was doing his best to keep Katara as far as possible from him. However, it became more and more difficult to keep his eyes open as the burning got worse. It also seemed like Katara was getting more frustrated with Zuko as their fighting continued. With a shout of frustration, Katara pulled back as much liquid as she could and sent it directly at Zuko. He felt himself being flung backwards until he slammed against the wall. For a brief second, everything seemed fine. Then…

Burning.

His entire torso felt like it was on fire.

Zuko looked down.

He let out an exasperated shout of, “Why?!”

Icicles were protruding randomly from his abdomen.

The burning sensation spread as the frozen perfume melted inside him.

Blood was mixing with the perfume as it soaked through his clothes.

Katara looked mortified.

Zuko shouted, “What is wrong with you?! Why do you keep stabbing me?!”

Now she looked confused and guilty.

His uncle rushed to his side; horror etched onto his face.

The burning morphed into agony.

He could feel his muscles quivering in an attempt to escape the pain.

Katara looked torn between helping him and fleeing with her friends.

He finally slid to the ground as the frozen perfume melted enough to no longer pin him.

Diluted blood started to pool around him.

His uncle frantically tried to stop the bleeding.

His hand pressed firmly against the worst of the wounds.

Blood oozed through his fingers.

The pressure sent additional waves of agony coursing through Zuko’s body.

He whined and grabbed his uncle’s hands.

Zuko’s blood was staining them.

Zuko couldn’t feel his hands.

He looked his uncle in the eye and whispered, “Sorry.”

Iroh sobbed and begged the spirits to spare Zuko.

A nun knelt next to him.

She took one look at his wounds and gave him a grim expression.

Zuko smiled.

Everything felt cold.

Breathing was getting harder.

Zuko, with great effort, turned his head to look at Aang.

They stared at each other as Zuko’s vision faded.

His uncle held him close.

Nothing hurt anymore.

He stopped breathing.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up howling in muffled rage. The echoes of perfumes burning his insides had him clawing at his abdomen. His uncle’s sobs were bouncing around in his head. He couldn’t breathe.

Focus.

The taste of sweaty armor in his mouth made him pause just long enough to take in his surroundings. The sounds of birds calling to each other. The smell of the dirt beneath him. The rays of sunlight through the gaps between tree branches. The feeling of grass, still damp with morning dew, that he was laying on. He stayed sprawled on his back and listened for a few moments to see if anyone had heard him.

I guess armor is a good alternative to a leather strap to muffle sounds.

He stayed on the ground for a little longer until he suddenly remembered what his cause of death was. Filled with indignant rage, he sprang up but promptly fell over. His limbs were still numb and not ready to support his weight. Grumbling, he settled with scowling in the general direction of the monastery.

She stabbed me!

Again!

What’s the total now?

Four?

Five?

Is this a waterbender thing?

Wait.

I understand now.

She’s a little sister.

This might be more of a little sister quality to be a bit homicidal rather than something that’s bending related.

It all makes sense now.

I wonder how many times she’s stabbed Sokka?

Stiffly, Zuko tried to stand up again and was significantly more successful. On wobbly legs, he made his way to his uncle and June. His uncle gave him a look and June sarcastically asked, “Did you sleep well?” Zuko chose to ignore both of them and ordered that they resume following the trail. June shrugged then motioned for Zuko and his uncle to get on the shirshu while she presented it with Katara’s necklace.

Zuko could tell that his uncle had concerns that he wanted to bring up, but he seemed to be restraining himself for now. Soon enough, they were back on Katara’s trail. Just like the previous times, they made all the same stops and saw all the same people who said the same things. It honestly gave Zuko a chance to recenter himself and clear his mind.

Once again, they confronted Sokka and Katara which ended in Zuko capturing them. Then they made their way back to the monastery where Zuko almost immediately started to fight Aang. The fight was predictable to Zuko by now, and he barely had to pay attention. The real challenge came when he noticed Katara was starting to bend the perfume.

Okay, don’t attack Katara.

I guess I should’ve known that by now, but I think it’s understandable that I don’t like it when she starts bending at me.

Instead of engaging with Katara, Zuko kept fighting Aang. Now, instead of being stabbed by frozen perfume, a wave of it simply doused him. The strong mixture of smells still made his eyes and nose burn, but it seemed that the shirshu was struggling more.

The creature started to frantically shake its head and paw at its nose. It started to make a variety of panicked noises and started to lash out. Before Zuko could react, the shirshu struck him with its tongue and he fell limp to the ground.

This better not result in me dying.

I will burn this monastery down if I have to come back here.

June was standing next to the shirshu trying to comfort it, but the creature was in full panic mode. Its tongue was flailing everywhere; and, in its panic, struck June. His uncle shouted after her and caught her. The poor beast ran blindly around the courtyard, knocking over more barrels of perfume that undoubtedly increased its panic. It finally ran into the wall surrounding the complex and climbed over it. Zuko could hear it clumsily charge into the forest, and a part of him hoped it wouldn’t get too badly hurt.

Now that the fight was over, Zuko watched Sokka and Katara approach Aang. They seemed to have some sort of silent conversation that had all three of them smiling. Zuko looked away and saw that his uncle was still laying on the ground with June in his arms.

I am eighty percent positive that he wasn’t struck by the shirshu.

If he’s being weird, I’m going to turn a blind eye to whatever revenge June has instore for him.

Within reason of course.

Weakly, Zuko said, “Uncle, I didn’t see you get hit with the tongue.” His uncle opened his eyes then shushed him before smiling. June opened her eyes and gave his uncle a vicious glare.

Yup, uncle can deal with whatever consequences are coming his way.

I’m not getting in the middle of that.

I have enough scars, thank you very much.

Zuko watched as Aang and his friends get on Appa. Aang didn’t even look at him before giving the command for Appa to take off into the sky. A part of Zuko felt his heart twinge at the lack of acknowledgement, but he quickly reassured himself.

The characters are on the right path, and act one is almost over.

Everything is playing out the way it should.

I’m not an important character, so I can’t join them officially.

This is the closest I can get.

The nuns quickly restrained Zuko, Iroh, and June while they were still immobilized by the shirshu’s venom. It seemed like the nuns didn’t realize that his uncle was never actually paralyzed, and they grumbled as they struggled to drag him to a makeshift cell. After the nuns had dragged the three of them into the same cell, they locked the door and Zuko heard them making plans to contact a nearby Earth Kingdom army base. Looking around, it appeared they were locked in some sort of windowless closet. It won’t take very much effort to break out as soon as the venom wears off. They just had to hope that it does before Earth Kingdom soldiers come to collect them.

That won’t end well for anyone.

Especially me.

Luckily, the nuns didn’t seem inclined to watch their cell and left the three of them unattended. Within a few minutes both Zuko and June started to regain mobility, though not enough to mount any sort of escape attempt. June continued to glare at his uncle who just smiled in return. With a captive audience, his uncle started to talk about various benign topics. From the weather, to tea, and general life advice that Zuko chose to ignore.

I don’t need life advice; I need death advice.

June, however, seemed to be listening, albeit grudgingly. At one point she asked, “What are you planning Old Man? Is this some sort of plot to convince me to not charge you for my time and suffering?”

His uncle laughed and said, “Not at all! I simply enjoy talking to interesting people and hearing their stories. Everyone has an interesting story to tell and sharing these stories can help us grow as people.” He was giving a pointed look to his nephew who willfully ignored it.

June huffed a laugh then said, “I do have some interesting stories, but I don’t think they’re the kind you would enjoy.” Her voice was carefully even in a way that indicated there was some sort of tragedy that she didn’t want to talk about.

I guess you don’t choose to be a bounty hunter with a drinking problem if you had a happy childhood.

His uncle’s expression softened as he replied, “I do enjoy happy tales, but I also see the value in stories that have yet to see closure. Everyone has a tragic story to tell. It is important to remember that no matter how big or small, those tragedies shape who we are and can reveal our strengths.”

June huffed a laugh and said, “You’re something else, Old man.” His uncle laughed in response and a comfortable silence fell over them. Zuko, on the other hand, was mulling over his uncle’s words.

Tragedy reveals strengths.

As Tragedy, I’ve had my fair share of tragic moments.

What strength has been revealed to me?

It’s not firebending, I know that.

Maybe my strength is dying.

I’m really good at it.

I’d even consider myself a master of dying.

Soon enough, both Zuko and June had regained full mobility. It didn’t take much effort to break out of their cell. Zuko easily burned through the door and all three of them slipped out of the compound. They walked through the woods for a while before they heard some familiar growls coming from behind a pile of large boulders.

June immediately vaulted over the rocks with Zuko and his uncle peering over. Curled up in a pitiful ball was June’s shirshu. The creature was still rubbing at its nose and making small pathetic growls. June whispered to it and rubbed its snout. Zuko couldn’t make out what she said, but it was clear that they were some sort of comforting words based on her expression. Sure enough, the animal quickly responded to June’s voice and seemed happy to see her.

Well, I guess that’s one happy ending for this portion of the play.

Once June realized that she was being watched, she glared at them and sauntered up to the duo. June crossed her arms as she inspected them then looked at her steed. Finally, she said, “This is the first contract I’ve failed to complete. I still expect to be compensated for my time and Nyla’s suffering. Don’t think I forgot about you pretending to be paralyzed, Old Man.”

Fair enough, I guess.

His uncle smiled brightly and handed over a decent sized bag of gold coins. June opened it and inspected it for a moment before nodding to herself. Without another word, she climbed on the back of her shirshu and took off into the distance.

After that, it was a long walk back to Zuko’s ship. Luckily for him, Zuko’s uncle seemed content to walk in silence. By the time they returned to the docks, it was well into the night. Exhausted, Zuko bid his uncle goodnight and headed to his room. He just finished putting on his night clothes when someone knocked on his door.

Gee, I wonder who it could be?

As soon as he gave permission for the person to enter, the door opened to reveal Jee standing stiffly at the door. Zuko rolled his eyes and waved the man in. With a nod, Jee entered then closed the door behind him. He inspected Zuko’s appearance then said, “You look terrible.”

Zuko glared and then flopped dramatically backwards onto his bed. He draped his arm over his eyes then said, “Thanks Jee. I don’t know what I would do without your words of encouragement.” He shifted his arm just enough to peek at the man who was now standing in the center of his room.

Jee gave him an unimpressed look and asked, “What happened?”

Zuko tried to be casual as he said, “I learned something new about my curse today. Honestly, I thought I was long past the learning phase.”

Now looking torn between intrigued and cautious, Jee asked, “What did you learn?”

A smile started to spread across Zuko’s face as he said, “Apparently, my bones can scar if that’s the injury that kills me.”

Slightly mortified, Jee asked, “How did you die today?”

Chuckling, Zuko said, “Well first Aang broke most of my ribs with a powerful blast of wind. Then Aang accidently killed me by breaking my neck. Finally, Katara killed me by stabbing me. Again.”

Jee studied Zuko silently for a few moments before saying, “Sir, I know I can’t relate to your…situation, but I do know you can’t keep blindly throwing yourself into death’s arms. Your uncle is already suspicious of your behavior which only seems to be getting more unstable by the day. If dying repeatedly is the cause, then you need to come up with a better strategy than your process of elimination.”

Zuko lifted his arm further and regarded his lieutenant. The man looked like he was about ready to use force to get Zuko to listen. With a dramatic sigh, Zuko said, “Fine, I guess we can try it your way. Act one is almost over anyways, but I’m certain there’s at least two more acts that I need to get through before Aang kills me.”

Jee, back to looking bemused, said, “I’m glad to hear that you’re willing to listen to reason, sir. We can start planning in the morning. Get some rest.” Zuko waved Jee off and heard the door close. He looked up at his ceiling and pondered what the future could have in store.

We are close to the North Pole, and I’m not certain that I will have another run in with Aang before he gets there.

Katara and Aang will master waterbending.

Sokka will probably meet some skilled warriors and learn more about strategy and fighting.

That just leaves the question of what Ozai and Zhao will do.

I guess only time will tell.

It still might be too early to come up with hypotheses about Act Two.

Sleep started to pull Zuko under. The various aches and pains of his long day started to fade into the distance. His uncle’s words from earlier echoed distantly, almost like a warning.

Tragedy reveals strengths.

Maybe my true strength is managing the play.

Maybe I can alter the script to not only give everyone a good ending, but also the ending that they want.

It’ll just require me to die a few times.

Oh well.

I can handle a little bit of death.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age fifteen)

It had been a few weeks since Zuko’s run in with the cannibals, and he ordered his ship to sail as far away as possible without ever docking. His crew were loudly complaining about all the time they were being forced to stay at sea, but his uncle seemed to be doing a good job of keeping the peace. Zuko didn’t care how loudly they complained, they weren’t going to dock until they were as far away as possible from that canyon. However, the cannibals weren’t the only thing on his mind.

I’m sure part of my mind was in them though.

He shook his head to try to get rid of that thought and attempted to focus on a potentially bigger issue. Namely, his revivals. His most recent revival had made his uncle hover and check in on him more regularly.

With a few exceptions, my revivals were silent or at least mostly silent.

I didn’t have to worry about metal walls that echoed or close quarters while living at the palace.

There’s also the problem of the long recovery time.

Sure, that’s always been a thing, but it’s more of a problem now than it was back then.

Zuko paced the length of his room as he tried to come up with something. The floor beneath his feet shifted as the ship was rocked with the waves. In the distance, he could hear his crew calling out to each other. Through the window slit, sunlight was trying to illuminate his dim room. Suddenly, an idea hit him.

What if I use Uncle’s grounding technique?

More specifically, what if I manipulate my surroundings in a way that breaks my mind out of whatever death I’m reviving from?

A smile stretched across his face as he started to rummage around his room trying to find things that might work. His clock was an easy choice; the ticking sound was both soothing and the visual of the time helped ground him. However, he didn’t really know what else to use to counter whatever had killed him. He tried to recall what he felt while dead or dying.

I’m usually cold.

Darkness also seems to be a reoccurring theme.

The smell of blood and burning flesh also make a semi-regular appearance.

Zuko took another look around his room but couldn’t see anything that would be of any use. If he wanted to do this, he would need to collect some supplies. For him to do that, they would have to dock. Sighing, he left his room and reluctantly went up to the helm. Once there, he asked the helm’s man, “How far away from a port?”

The man gave him a surprised look before bowing and answering, “If we head east, we can be at a port in about three hours sir.”

Zuko pursed his lips, but reluctantly ordered, “Direct our ship there.” He then turned to a crew member that was poorly disguising his eavesdropping and said, “Tell the rest of the crew that we will be docking, but only for a few hours!” The man quickly nodded before practically racing out of the room.

I guess the crew really want to spend some time on shore.

Before long, the entire ship was filled with the sounds of his crew excitedly whispering of their plans when they thought he wasn’t listening. Some of these plans he could have gone his entire life without hearing.

I swear if they catch some sort of disease, I’m not paying to treat it.

Wanting to avoid listening to his crew, Zuko stood on the far edge of the deck. The midday sun glared down on him, and the breeze was filled with the smell of salt water. Behind him, he could hear the familiar steps of his uncle approaching him. The man stood silently for a moment before saying, “I am surprised to hear that you suddenly decided to dock.”

It was clear that his uncle was trying to ask why without actually asking. Zuko replied, “I need some things that aren’t on the ship. We won’t be there very long.”

His uncle hummed then joined him looking out at the ocean. Eventually, Iroh said, “Nephew, we do not know how long we will be on this ship. Perhaps you can find something to make your room more comfortable.” Zuko huffed and glared, but didn’t reply. He seemed to expect Zuko wouldn’t respond, so he continued, “Remember Prince Zuko, no matter how long the quest, time should always be made to find joy.” With those final words, his uncle turned and went back inside the ship.

Find joy?

How do I find joy on my quest for death?

Zuko continued to ponder his uncle’s words as the ship entered the harbor and docked. As soon as the gangplank was lowered, his crew rushed off in different directions. Zuko barely got to shout out the deadline for when to be back as they stormed the town. Grumbling, Zuko followed at a more leisurely pace.

The town was clearly a rich, thriving marketplace. Colorful stalls lined the roads, peddling various wares. Store fronts had colorful signs and window displays that showed off their most valuable items. Food vendors were calling out the various treats they had ready for purchase, and drinking booths had signs that proudly announced what they had to offer. The sounds of children laughing as they raced through the streets and people bartering echoed all around him. It was all a bit overwhelming for someone who’s spent the last year mostly on a ship. In the distance, Zuko thought he saw his uncle inspecting goods at a stall. It appeared he already had a large pile of things he had bought.

Unbelievable.

We’ve only been here for maybe thirty minutes, and he’s already purchased a shop’s worth of items.

Where is he even going to put all of that junk?

Rolling his eyes, Zuko walked in the opposite direction and scanned the stalls to see if anything caught his eye. As he passed by another stall, something did catch his attention. However, it was what he smelled rather than what he saw that made him stop. He got a closer look and realized that it was an incense shop.

This might be enough to catch my attention as I revive.

The real question now is, what scents should I get?

Curiously, Zuko started to pick up various sticks and sniffed them. Some instantly made him sneeze and his eyes water. Others were too mild for what he needed them for. A few smelled too close to burning flesh or blood for his comfort.

Who in their right mind would want this scent in their house or temple?

Nothing good can come from burning these at an altar.

Then he picked up another stick and took a deep inhale.

The smell of sweet fruits filled his nose.

Memories of heartfelt letters, murmured words of comfort, and a promise that was broken.

Zuko quickly shoved the stick back into its canister and moved on.

Eventually, he found a few scents that seemed benign enough to not bring up memories, but also strong enough to catch his attention without causing discomfort. As he was about to purchase his items, he saw some candles for sale as well.

I could use these to add some light to my room.

If I have enough of these burning, it could potentially solve the whole ‘being cold’ problem too.

Though I think that might be a recipe for disaster.

He grabbed a handful of the candles and presented his items to the booth owner. The elderly woman looked over his purchase before inspecting him closely. She squinted her eyes as she asked, “You heading to a temple?”

I guess that would be a fair assumption to make with the amount of incense and candles I’m buying.

Zuko replied shortly, “No.”, and hoped the woman wouldn’t ask any further questions. She seemed to get the memo that he wasn’t interested in small talk and took his money without another word. He exited the booth and resumed wandering the streets.

I think I have enough for three of my five senses.

I just need something for touch and taste.

He continued to explore the various stores and stalls of the town. Occasionally, he would see some of his crew through doorways leading to taverns or walking with questionably dressed people into inns or down alleyways. Zuko would immediately turn and head in the opposite direction when he saw them.

There are things I can go my whole life without witnessing.

A few times, he saw his uncle strolling around with his arms loaded with bags full of items. He seemed to have made it his mission to chat with every shop owner that was selling something he found interesting. Zuko tried to avoid him as well.

I don’t want to deal with him questioning my purchases.

Mainly, I don’t want to come up with an excuse for why it was important to dock immediately to get them.

As he continued his journey, he heard the muffled sound of a hammer striking metal inside a moderately sized shop. Curious, Zuko stuck his head inside and was greeted with the heady scent of leather. The shop was filled to the brim with various expertly crafted leather items. Everything from boots, armor, book covers, and knife sheaths lined the walls and filled the shelves. Zuko couldn’t help himself as he ran his fingers over the smooth material. The owner, an older heavyset man, turned from his worktable and asked, “Can I help you find anything young man?”

Zuko, still distracted by everything, responded, “I’m not sure what I’m looking for.”

The man looked him over then casually asked, “Do you know what you want the item to do?”

I can’t very well say that I need something to muffle my screams as I revive.

That’d be a one-way ticket to an institution.

Zuko chose his words carefully as he said, “I need something thick enough to not bite through that’s comfortable.”

The man raised an eyebrow at him before he huffed and replied drily, “I’m guessing this isn’t for medical purposes.”

A little confused, Zuko replied, “No, if it’s not too much trouble, it also needs to muffle sound as much as possible.”

Now the older man stared at Zuko for a moment before barking a short laugh and saying, “I suppose I can’t judge you too harshly. We were all young and curious at one point in our lives. When do you need it by?”

What does being young have to do with anything?

A little perplexed, Zuko said, “As soon as possible would be nice.”

The man hummed and continued to chuckle to himself as he bustled around his shop. After a few moments of digging, he pulled out a cord and asked, “Are you going to be wearing it or will someone else?”

Why would someone else wear it?

Zuko blinked rapidly in confusion and replied, “I will?” Even though he meant it to be a statement, it ended up coming out like a question.

The man chuckled and came out from behind the shop counter to Zuko. He held up the cord of leather and said, “Then let me get a good measurement. I’m guessing you want to make sure it stays securely in place. Perhaps even adjustable too?”

Zuko pondered the suggestion for a moment before saying, “I think that’ll be a good idea.”

I don’t want it to fall out of my mouth as I sleep.

It would also be a pain if I have to regularly replace it because of growth spurts.

The portly man had a twinkle in his eyes as he went about measuring Zuko’s head. With a messy scrawl, he wrote down a series of numbers and nodded to himself. He went back behind the counter to his workstation and asked, “About how long do you plan on wearing it?”

“About eight hours, give or take.”

The man’s eyebrows rose to his hairline and said, “That’s pretty ambitious.” He wrote down a few more notes and then said, “This will probably take me at least a couple of hours.” He glanced at his clock and scrunched his face in thought. Eventually he said, “I’d recommend coming back a little after three o’clock. Before I begin, I do require some money upfront. Too many people make special requests like this then never come to collect.” Zuko gave the man a few gold coins then left the shop.

What a weird guy.

At least he was friendly and didn’t ask too many questions.

The taste of leather will definitely be different from whatever I tasted when I died.

With the fourth item he needed in the process of being made, Zuko now had to find something for touch. He inspected different types of sleep clothes, bedding, and even mattresses. However, nothing really stood out to him as something that could help recover from reviving. That is until he saw a shop selling thick cloth clearly meant for a colder climate displayed in a window. It was odd seeing it here, mostly because the weather was already warm and he didn’t think it got cold enough here to warrant something that thick.

Zuko decided to get a closer look and realized that this was not any ordinary cloth. It was the type usually reserved for making saddle pads or something a soldier would wear to keep their armor from chafing. Zuko entered the little store and made his way over to where the cloth was being displayed. He ran his fingers over the material, and it was incredibly plush. Now he felt torn.

On the one hand, I do like the material.

Also, it would be warm enough to help with the lingering cold of death.

On the other hand, I will wake up a sweaty mess.

There’s also no way Uncle won’t ask questions about my out-of-season nightwear.

As he stood there debating with himself, a small older woman approached and asked, “Can I help you with anything?” She hobbled over to him with her back hunched.

Zuko was so caught up in his head that he startled slightly at her voice. In an attempt to appear casual, he asked, “Can this material be used to make sleepwear?”

It appeared that of all the things the woman was expecting to hear, that wasn’t one of them. She studied him closely as if she was trying to figure out if he was attempting to trick her or if she heard him wrong. After a couple of beats, she seemed to realize that he was being serious. A little perplexed, she said, “That isn’t really good material for sleeping in. You’ll sooner die from overheating than get a good night’s rest. However, if you want something similar, follow me.”

A little disappointed that his first pick wasn’t practical, Zuko followed the woman to a different rack of cloths. She slowly shuffled to it, clearly feeling every year of her age. When they finally reached it, she pulled out a couple different spools of cloth. She said, “These cloths have a similar thickness, but they are more breathable. Are you going somewhere cold?”

Physically?

 No.

Spiritually?

Kind of.

Zuko replied, “I plan to spend some time in the poles. The nights are harsh, so I want something exceptionally warm to sleep in.”

Technically not a lie.

I will go there eventually.

The woman rubbed her chin in thought as she studied the cloth she had pulled out. After watching her internally debate for a bit, the woman put some of the spools back onto the shelf and presented the remaining three to Zuko. With an air of confidence, she said, “These three are the best options for what you want. They’re thick enough to keep the cold out, but breathable enough that you won’t be cooked alive.”

Would that be better or worse than eaten alive?

Zuko carefully inspected the material. He touched the first fabric and scrunched his nose in distaste. It was too rough, and he could feel the callouses on his hand catching on the material as he ran his hand across it. Then he felt the second spool of cloth. It was much nicer to touch, but it felt a little too stiff. Zuko didn’t want to test how a limited range of motion would impact his revivals. He finally touched the third type of cloth, and felt himself smile a little bit. It was the right level of soft and plush, and it felt flexible enough to sleep comfortably in. Also, it didn’t hurt that it was a nice dark shade of red.

The elderly woman, without waiting for Zuko’s confirmation, snatched the fabric away from him and grabbed her measuring tape. In fact, he didn’t even get a chance to protest as the woman started to take quick measurements of him. She barked out orders for how to stand with such authority that Zuko just complied automatically. He was spun in circles and his limbs were manipulated into various positions as she raced around him. Once she had everything she needed, she nodded and said, “Come back in a few hours. I’ll have something ready for you by then.” With that, she shooed him out of her store.

Zuko stood outside the doorway utterly confused.

What just happened?

For someone who struggled to move across the store, she sure can move quickly when she wants to.

He shook himself out of his stupor and took note of the time. It was too early to return to the leather smith, and it wasn’t worth it to return to his ship just to turn around and come back. Instead, Zuko decided to wander the shops and listen for any interesting information.

Unfortunately, the only important news that was circulating was of the cannibals. Even though that had happened weeks ago, the news must have just arrived here relatively recently. Just like all other pieces of gossip, the events around the discovery and defeat of the cannibals had dramatically changed.

I’ll admit, between the blood loss and poor lighting, I didn’t really get a good look at them.

However, I am fairly certain that none of them had animal or dark spirit features.

Also, I don’t think they actually had any supernatural powers.

I guess this is the most interesting news this area has seen in a while.

Though, to be fair, this would be the type of story that stuck around for years.

Zuko continued to casually window-shop and glance at the goods for sale at the stalls and stores. At one point, he found himself in what could be described as some sort of art district. The walls of buildings were painted with vibrant murals. Some were nature scenes with brightly colored flowers, enchanted looking forests, or peaceful water views. Others depicted people that were probably local celebrities or heroes. There were a number of interpretations of spirits and the spirit world. A few were abstract and tried to capture some sort of emotion or symbolize some important event.

Artists were everywhere either creating or selling their crafts. Musicians were just about on every corner playing a variety of instruments that made the area feel like a musical of some kind. There were even a few people singing songs of love, joy, and life in general. In the distance, Zuko could see a colorful looking theatre and was sorely tempted to enter.

Focus.

I don’t have time to see a play.

Zuko forced his feet to keep moving even though his eyes kept finding themselves wondering in the direction of the theater. Grumbling, he stomped moodily over to the nearest stall and tried to ignore the sounds of a play as it started. It turns out, the stall he approached was selling theater memorabilia.

Naturally.

Life is a stage, so it makes sense that theatrical elements would find their way to me.

One of the walls of the stall immediately drew his attention and he approached it like in a trance. Masks. Dozens of them. Their faces were in the forms of several different mythological creatures and spirits, and they were painted in several different unique ways. One mask that caught his attention was of the Blue Spirit, and he carefully picked it up.

Mother did love this play.

Personally, I found Love Amongst Dragons a little cliché, but an all-round okay script.

It still amazes me how the Ember Island Players managed to always botch such a simple story.

Zuko continued to hold the mask and considered buying it until he saw something else. He almost overlooked it as it was lying on the ground and partially under a table holding other goods. Carefully, he picked it up and dusted the dirt off its face. Staring back at him was the face of tragedy. Judging by its appearance, it had been on the ground for a while. There were areas on the mask that had been chipped off and the cloth that would cover the eyeholes was missing.

He now held one mask in each hand as he considered them. Both sets of empty eyes seemed to be judging him as they waited for him to do something. Almost like this decision would define who he is. He shook his head and went to put both masks back on the wall when he remembered what his uncle had said earlier.

Find joy.

Zuko re-examined the masks and tried to decide which one he wanted.

Why not both?

He was seriously tempted, but he then saw his uncle pass by with his arms burdened with overstuffed bags. Clearly, his uncle knew nothing about impulse control and purchased whatever caught his eye. Not wanting to have that in common with his uncle, Zuko decided that he only needed one mask.

The Blue Spirit reminds me of Mother.

Our relationship was…complicated near the end, but I still have happy memories of her.

On the other hand, Tragedy reminds me of well, me.

There’s also the memories of…someone else.

Zuko tried his best not to think about that person. Nothing good could come from it, he would tell himself. Still, he held both masks. He had to make a choice.

To be a spirit out for vengeance or to become tragedy.

I guess the real question is, which one will give me the most control over my life?

Smirking, Zuko put the Blue Spirit back on the wall and then approached the seller to purchase the mask of tragedy. A young man looked at him in surprise as he glanced between the mask and Zuko. After a brief pause the man asked, “That mask isn’t painted yet and it’s clearly damaged, are you sure that’s what you want?”

Zuko’s smirk grew as he said, “It’s perfect. I prefer tragedies anyways.” The man shrugged and accepted Zuko’s money.

I think Uncle would have something poetic to say about finding joy in tragedy.

He continued his loop around the town until he found himself back at the leather smith’s shop. Zuko entered and was immediately greeted by the portly man who smiled widely at him. The smith called out, “Ah, just in time young man! I just finished it.” He picked up the leather strap off his workbench and handed it to Zuko with a small smirk.

The leather was incredibly soft and flexible. The thickest part that was clearly meant to go into his mouth was equally as flexible, but it felt more reinforced to withstand someone biting down hard. The smith proudly said, “That leather is some of the softest you will ever find. You don’t want something too rough, especially if you plan to wear it for as long as you are. The mouthpiece will hold up under the strongest of bites and it should smother most noises. Though it won’t completely mute them.” The man continued to beam as Zuko inspected the item.

Finally, Zuko said, “This will work perfectly. Thank you.” Satisfied, Zuko paid the remaining balance and left the shop.

On his way out, he heard the smith say to himself, “I sure hope he knows what he’s doing. The last thing that kid needs is to be traumatized.”

I think trauma and tragedy go hand in hand.

Now Zuko made his way back to the elderly seamstress. He barely set foot in the doorway when the old woman called him over. Just like before, the woman was a whirlwind of activity as she practically forced Zuko inside the garment. All he could do was stand there dumbly as the woman zipped from one side to the other. Finally, she seemed satisfied with her work and asked, “Is this all to your liking young man?”

Zuko, still reeling, looked down at himself to see the nightwear he was now modeling. He flexed his arms and legs to test his range of motion. Then he twisted his back side to side and bent forwards and backwards. He even stood still to see how warm he felt. Satisfied that the clothing fit and would fulfill its purpose, Zuko said, “It’s perfect.” Now back to shuffling across the room, the woman took the money he offered her. Instead of being rushed out, he could leave at a much more leisurely pace.

Now that he had all of the things he believed he needed, Zuko made his way back to his ship. Fortunately for him, most of his crew were still absent so he was able to go to his room without being questioned. He carefully inspected his room as he tried to decide where to place things. The sleepwear was a no brainer, but he wasn’t too sure where to put the candles or incense. After some internal deliberation, he spread the incense sticks around his room with the candles next to them.

This should create just enough light to get my attention without making it difficult to sleep.

Now here’s to hoping that this isn’t too big of a fire hazard.

The leather strap went into his nightstand that his clock was on. He buried it under some scrolls and random items, just in case.

Uncle isn’t prone to snooping in my room, but I still don’t want to chance him accidentally seeing it.

I don’t want to deal with the questions.

He held the mask for a long moment before stuffing it into the same drawer that he placed the strap. Once he felt that everything was in its proper place, he went back to the deck in hopes his crew were making their way back to the ship. Sure enough, he could see crew members in different stages of sobriety stumbling their way up the gangplank. Zuko scowled at them but decided not to say anything. Once all the crew had boarded, he now had to wait for his uncle to return.

How is it possible that a highly decorated general is incapable of being on time?

I guess this does give the crew some time to sober up.

After a few minutes, he eventually saw his uncle moseying his way down the docks. Even from this distance, Zuko could see how overburdened his uncle’s arms were. Not wanting to wait any longer than necessary, Zuko went to help his uncle carry his stuff. When he approached, his uncle exclaimed, “Nephew! You should see all the amazing treasures I have found. I believe these things will help liven up the place.”

Zuko rolled his eyes and said, “Uncle, the last thing the ship needs is more junk.”

Not dissuaded, his uncle asked, “Did you find what you were looking for?”

“Yes Uncle.”

His uncle’s smile somehow became bigger and brighter as he said, “That is good to hear, Nephew. Hopefully you also found some treasures that you were not expecting to find that still brought you joy.”

Well, I did buy a mask.

It just so happens to be tragedy.

Zuko stayed silent as he took some of the bags his uncle was carrying and walked alongside him back to his ship. His uncle smiled in gratitude and hummed thoughtfully for a moment before saying, “Speaking of unexpected treasures, I think I found something you will enjoy.” His uncle stopped walking long enough to hand Zuko a scabbard.

Surprised, Zuko rearranged the bags he was holding and took it from his uncle’s hands. He studied the handle and came to a realization, “These are dao blades.”

His uncle smiled softly and said, “I remember that you took sword lessons as a boy and how much you enjoyed them. When I saw these blades, I could not help but think of you.”

Zuko stood in shocked silence for a few moments before saying, “Thank you, Uncle.” However, he couldn’t help but to ask, “But why?”

His uncle continued to smile as he said, “Sometimes Nephew, the greatest joy that can be found is by helping others find it.”

Helping others find joy?

After helping his uncle unload all of his goods into a room to be sorted through later, Zuko spent the rest of the day mulling over his uncle’s words. Once the crew somewhat sobered up enough to man their stations, they set out to sea once again. Later that night, Zuko stared up at his ceiling.

Finding joy and helping others find joy.

I’m trying to find the Avatar so he can kill me, so I guess that’s my version of finding joy.

But helping others find joy?

Zuko scowled as he continued to ponder how to do that. Then an idea hit him, and a smile split his face in two.

Maybe I can help others find joy by giving them a good ending.

I think keeping them alive will do.

You can’t exactly be joyful if you’re dead.

(Present Day)

It was a rare morning for Zuko. His room was the perfect temperature. The bed sheets were draped across him loosely, almost like they were floating. His pillow was the most comfortable it has ever been, not too flat nor too lumpy. Most importantly, he hasn’t died and revived. In short, it was truly the best morning he’s had in a long time, and he didn’t want to get up. He sighed contently as he basked in the all-around pleasantness of his morning. No Avatar to chase. No crazy waterbenders stabbing him. No Fire Nation Admiral being a thorn in his side. Nothing but the opportunity to just exist peacefully.

His level of comfort started to lull him back to sleep when a knock on his door startled him.

No…

Go away…

Zuko stayed quiet in the hopes that whoever was at his door would leave. However, luck didn’t appear to be on his side as the person knocked louder. Still, Zuko resolutely ignored the person and tried maintaining his peaceful morning.

Uncle is more than capable of handling minor crises.

It’s clearly not a major one.

I don’t hear screaming or explosions.

Whoever was knocking on his door finally gave up. However, instead of leaving, they opened Zuko’s door. Zuko blearily glared through one eye at whoever dared to enter his room without permission. He internally groaned and closed his eye again when he realized who it was.

Of course it’s Jee.

Uncle would’ve gotten the message and left.

An assassin wouldn’t have bothered to knock at all.

Zuko listened as Jee closed the door behind him then walked to the edge of Zuko’s bed. A thick silence hung in the air as Jee seemed to wait for him to open his eyes. After a few minutes, Jee seemed to realize that Zuko wasn’t going to say anything. Jee cautiously asked, “Did you die?”

Literally or figuratively?

Zuko simply grumbled tiredly in response and burrowed his face into his pillow. Based on the shift in Jee’s tone, the man figured out what was going on. Now sounding disapproving, Jee asked, “Do you plan to laze about in bed all morning?”

I was until some officer who doesn’t understand rank barged into my room.

Still, Zuko held on to a glimmer of hope that Jee would get frustrated enough to leave. Those hopes were dashed when Jee spoke, “You agreed to start formulating a better plan for the future today.” Even though his eyes were closed, Zuko could feel the glare Jee was aiming at him. The silence stretched on for what felt like an eternity before Jee broke it with faux concern, “Maybe you’re coming down with something, I bet your uncle has some sort of tea to help you feel better. We can’t have you getting sick now.”

This is mutiny!

Growling, Zuko finally opened his eyes and responded, “That’s cruel and unusual, and you know it.”

Jee, looking completely unphased, ordered, “Get up. You need to spend what little time you have preparing for the Avatar to begin his search for an earthbending teacher. It’s not going to be as easy to keep track of him as it was when we knew he was going to the North Pole.”

With his perfect morning now officially ruined, Zuko scowled and grumbled as he sat up on his bed. Jee had his arms crossed and continued to stare blandly at him. Zuko grumbled, “What happened to the lieutenant that was on the verge of committing mutiny?”

Jee snorted and said, “A suicidal teenager confided in me and begged for help, is what happened.”

Indignant, Zuko got to his feet and pointed at Jee as he protested, “First of all, I did not beg you for help. I simply requested your assistance.” Jee snorted again, which Zuko pointedly ignored as he continued, “Secondly, I am not suicidal. I only manually reset the stage when something goes horribly wrong.” He then got a contemplative look on his face then said, “I guess I could qualify as wanting assisted suicide, but that’s only because I don’t think I can die in a ‘natural’ way.”

Jee gave him an unimpressed look. Huffing, Zuko shrugged on some clothes and then followed Jee out of his room. The man led him to his own personal chambers then opened the door and motioned for Zuko to enter. Once inside, Zuko glanced around the room. It looked similar to his own; the walls were the same gray metal, and the same red glow from the lights gave it an eerie look. However, Jee’s room was clearly smaller than his. There was a bed shoved against the far wall and in the center of the room was a small low table with one cushion on either side. The tabletop was covered with what appeared to be maps of the Earth Kingdom along with a couple of blank scrolls and writing materials. Aside from that, the room seemed pretty barren. There weren’t any obvious personal items or decorations that Zuko could see. The only thing hanging on the wall was a Fire Nation banner.

After closing the door behind him, Jee sat at the table and gestured for Zuko to sit down. After glaring for a moment, Zuko sat on the cushion and got a closer look at all the scrolls. Now he could definitely tell that these were, in fact, maps of the Earth Kingdom. There were detailed maps of specific areas with markers showing important landmarks, a macro-map of the whole nation, maps of all the rivers, and even some maps of Omashu and Ba Sing Se. What really got Zuko’s attention was the annotations in the margins that were just vague enough to not draw suspicion if someone were to briefly glance at them.

I guess he is serious about the whole planning thing.

Zuko inspected Jee closely and noted the ink stains on the man’s hands along with the bags under his eyes.

Well now I’ll feel bad if I don’t at least hear him out.

Not knowing where to start, Zuko asked, “What exactly do you have in mind?”

Jee pulled out a scroll from the pile of maps and a writing utensil then said, “Actually sir, I figured that this was a good opportunity to teach you. I’m not going to spoon feed you information, you’re going to figure it out.” At that, Zuko threw his head back and groaned.

Of course he isn’t going to make this easy.

Evil, mutinous subordinate…

Zuko continued to glare at the man before saying, “I know that Aang will have to go to the Earth Kingdom to find an earthbending teacher, that’s obvious. The problem is, it’s practically impossible to narrow down where he will go.”

Jee scoffed and said, “It’s not impossible. You just have to use that brain of yours.” At Zuko’s blank expression, Jee patiently asked, “Do you think the Avatar would try to find an earthbending master in an area occupied by the Fire Nation?”

Zuko frowned for a moment then said, “Probably not, no. Most earthbenders in those areas are either imprisoned or so deep in hiding that it would be difficult for even him to find them.”

At Zuko’s answer, Jee handed him the blank scroll and writing material then said, “Write that down then. We are going to mark out areas that are the least likely he will go.” Zuko begrudgingly took the materials and began to list areas that are heavily occupied by Fire Nation troops. By the time he was done, almost a quarter of the macro-map was marked out. Most of the areas he marked out were Fire Nation colonies and military bases along with the coastal areas closest to the Fire Nation.

Once he was done, Jee nodded in approval then asked, “Do you think the Avatar will want to learn near active conflict areas?”

Zuko considered it for a long moment before saying, “If he went there, he’d be too distracted trying to stop the fighting to actually learn anything. He’d probably try to be as far from the major conflict areas as he can. Though I don’t want to rule out heavily fortified areas like Omashu or Ba Sing Se.” He took his brush and marked out areas that he knew, at least at some point, were areas with active battles or were heavily contested. Now the possible area had shrunk by an additional twenty percent. Even with forty-five percent of the map crossed out, there was still a massive amount of land to search.

Jee studied the remaining area of the Earth Kingdom then asked, “Do you think the Avatar will return to areas we know he’s already visited?”

Now Zuko was stumped. On the one hand, it is entirely possible that Aang will go back to visit allies he’s made along the way. Perhaps one of these allies either is or knows an earthbender who can teach him. It’s just a matter of ruling out areas that he knows doesn’t have benders. Silently, Zuko crossed out Kyoshi Island and a few areas with small villages that he knew didn’t have benders. At Jee’s questioning look, Zuko said, “He visited these areas, but I know they don’t have any benders. Even if he were to backtrack to them, he won’t stay there very long.” Jee nodded in acceptance, and now they both gazed at the now narrowed down area. After all of that, the plausible area was around fifty percent of the Earth Kingdom.

Still not ideal, but better than trying to blindly search everywhere.

Things were so much easier when I knew exactly where he was going.

Once the ink was dry, Jee rolled up the map. Zuko went to get up, but Jee asked, “Where are you going sir?”

Confused, Zuko asked, “What do you mean?”

The lieutenant pointed to the scroll Zuko was taking notes on and said, “We aren’t done yet. That was just the first phase.”

The first phase?!

Does he seriously want to plan out everything in a single day?!

Before Jee could start whatever the next phase was, Zuko objected, “I can’t stay in your room all day! I have a ship to run. Plus, you dragged me here before I could eat anything.”

Jee scowled and said, “Fine. Go eat something and do whatever it is you need to do. We will meet back here later.”

Not wanting to risk his chance at freedom, Zuko immediately exited the room. He made his way to the kitchen in the hopes of grabbing something passable to eat. As he was about to enter, he heard his uncle say, “Ah Prince Zuko, I was beginning to think that you were going to stay in your room all day.”

Zuko turned to face him as he said, “I was with Lieutenant Jee. The Avatar will leave the Northern Water Tribe and will start looking for an earthbending master. We need to start planning our next moves in order to intercept him.”

I’ll just conveniently leave out the part where Jee is forcing me to actually strategize.

His uncle gave him a thoughtful look then said, “I am glad to see that you are getting along with your lieutenant.”

The tone of his uncle’s voice and the look on his face made Zuko narrow his eyes. Cautiously, he asked, “What do you mean by that Uncle?”

Iroh hummed and with a mild voice responded, “Nothing at all, Nephew. I am just happy you are willing to trust someone.” Zuko narrowed his eyes further at his uncle who casually continued down the corridor. Zuko shook his head and continued on his mission for food.

Sustenance before dealing with meddling old men.

The next few hours were spent doing basic tasks around the ship. Mostly, he double checked that his ship was well stocked and nothing critical was broken. He even spent about two hours doing some firebending training and sword work before calling it a day. As he was about to reenter the ship, he saw Jee standing in the doorway.

I guess I better get whatever he has in store over with.

Too bad my ship isn’t bigger.

It would make it easier to avoid people.

Silently, Zuko followed Jee to the officer’s room. The small table still had scrolls piled on it, but it looked like some of the micro-maps were gone. They sat down and Zuko reclaimed the scroll he had been writing on earlier. As soon as he was situated, Jee said, “Now we need to get an idea of where the Avatar will start his journey, and the best way to keep up with him.” Zuko blinked blankly at the man who sighed. Jee pinched the bridge of his nose and said, “Look at the map, sir. Where do you think the Avatar is the most likely to enter the Earth Kingdom?”

Zuko frowned and pointed out, “It would be easier to do this part if we actually knew the Northern Water Tribe’s specific location, it’s not marked on any current maps. They’ve gone out of their way to conceal their location after the failed Fire Nation invasion eighty years ago.” At Jee’s deadpan look, Zuko rolled his eyes and studied the map closer. He could see that there were symbols drawn on it that seemed to represent various Fire Nation ports. After a couple minutes, he noticed a small port on the northernmost end of the Earth Kingdom. Zuko circled it and said, “This might be our best starting point. I don’t think Appa can fly extreme long distances, so Aang will want to get to the nearest bit of land.” Jee smiled and nodded with approval.

At least I think that’s a smile.

The corner of his lip twitched upwards, so I think that counts.

A warm feeling started to take root in Zuko’s chest, and he mirrored that same lopsided smile. Zuko took an even closer look at the map then said, “Our best bet would be to get another river boat. I doubt Aang will spend much time near the ocean. There appears to be plenty of rivers in that general area.” As he leaned over the map, he saw a section of it that had a lot of water but was already crossed out as a traversable area. Curious, he asked, “Why is this area already crossed out?”

Jee made a questioning noise as he also leaned in closer to see what Zuko was pointing at. Once he saw what it was, he said, “That a massive swamp. It would be nearly impossible to get a decent sized river boat through there. Not unless, of course, you plan to use a rowboat.”

From there, the two of them poured over maps of rivers and made a rudimentary plan about how to proceed. Jee stretched, his joints cracking loudly, and then said, “Now we have a real plan to at least start with after the Avatar leaves the North Pole. Was that so hard?” Zuko had his head resting face-down on the table and grumbled unintelligibly.

I think Jee is trying to test some sort of assassination attempt.

This would easily be on my top five worst murders.

Jee snorted.

Did I say that out loud?

Jee snorted louder then said, “Sir, even if I wanted you dead, I know it wouldn’t stick. I think it’s time for you to go to bed.” Zuko glared balefully at the still snickering man before getting up. As he was about to walk out the door, Jee said with barely concealed glee, “I hope you’ll be more prepared to do additional planning tomorrow."

Zuko spun wildly to face the man and exclaimed, “More planning?! What else could we possibly plan for!?”

Jee smirked at Zuko’s distressed expression and said with a faux comforting voice, “Sir, that was only planning our next moves after the Avatar leaves the North Pole. We still need to work out the details of traveling by river boat.” Zuko groaned loudly but didn’t argue.

He sent a tired glare at Jee who only grinned in response. Before turning in for the night, Zuko made his way to the helm. Once there, he told the helm’s man to direct them to that northern most port. After that, Zuko trudged to his room and collapsed onto his bed with the hopes of maybe getting to enjoy a peaceful morning tomorrow. Unfortunately, luck wasn’t on his side. He woke up feeling too hot, his sheets were uncomfortably tangled around his legs, and his pillow felt too flat. Frustrated, he rolled out of bed and got ready for the day.

Apparently, he had good timing because he opened his door to see Jee raising his fist to knock. They stared at each other in mild surprise for a moment before Jee cleared his throat. He studied Zuko for a beat then said, “If you’re ready, sir, we can begin the next portion.” Before Zuko could say anything, his stomach growled loudly. His cheeks heated up as Jee chuckled. The man said with his voice colored with mirth, “Maybe we can start after you get something to eat. We can’t have you keeling over.” Zuko quickly retreated to the kitchen and willed his face to cool off.

My body is a traitor and is out to get me.

When Zuko entered the kitchen, he saw the cook bustling about cleaning up after the crew’s breakfast. Dirty dishes were piled in towering heaps that swayed ominously as the ship rocked. The spindly middle-aged man hummed some unknown tune as he worked diligently. In some of the pots, Zuko could see enough remnants of food to probably fill a plate. Not wanting to disturb the cook, Zuko quietly grabbed what looked like a clean plate and started to serve himself.

Unfortunately, he was so successful at being quiet that the cook startled violently when he turned and saw Zuko standing there. The poor man went to step backwards and tripped over one of the listing towers of dishes. Zuko could only watch with morbid fascination as the tower the cook tripped over knocked over another tower that knocked over another one. The kitchen echoed with the sounds of crashing metal utensils and cookware. Pools of leftover food and dirty water coated the floor. By the time the cacophony was over, the kitchen looked like a disaster.

I would expect this sort of thing from a comedy or some sort of feel-good play.

Maybe this is what tragedy looks like for the cook.

Zuko and the cook stood amongst the carnage, not knowing what to do or say. Awkwardly, Zuko said, “I was getting breakfast. I uh…didn’t mean to startle you?” The poor cook still looked shocked and hadn’t said anything.

Did he hurt himself or something?

What was his name again?

I’m pretty sure it’s Kaito.

My people avoidance has come back to bite me.

Moderately concerned, Zuko asked, “Kaito, right? Are you injured?”

That seemed to snap the man out of his shock, and he quickly bowed as he said, “Yes Prince Zuko, my name is Kaito. I’m fine, and I deeply apologize for the mess!” The man frantically started to try to pick up dishes, but the piles were collapsing almost as quickly as he was building them. Zuko took a closer look at the man and noticed his hands were shaking.

I’m not that scary, am I?

I know I sometimes play the part of a minor villain, but that’s mostly directed at Aang and his friends.

Maybe he’s just a naturally anxious person?

Kaito, at some point, started to frantically babble out apologies and refused to make eye contact with Zuko.

I better help him or at this rate nothing will get clean.

Uncle will be upset if lunch is late because of me.

Zuko put down his plate of food and started to gather the scattered dirty dishes. Not knowing where to put them, he decided to throw them into what appeared to be a large dirty pot.

It’s not pretty, but at least they won’t topple over.

Kaito stood watching him for a second completely dumbfounded before scrambling and saying, “You don’t need to do that Prince Zuko! It’s my fault that this place is a mess, I should’ve been more aware of my surroundings.”

Zuko shrugged and said, “If I had announced myself, then you wouldn’t have been startled. I’ll just help get everything off the floor.” Kaito still looked mortified, but now a little confused as well. They worked silently picking up the multitude of soiled dishes. When they finished, Zuko inspected their work. His collected dishes were stuffed into large pots haphazardly, but they didn’t look like they were in danger of spilling. Kaito’s piles looked eerily similar to the ones that had initially toppled over.

Well, at least I know I can’t blame other crew members for cluttering the kitchen.

He turned to grab his plate of food and noticed that it was cold. Kaito noticed as well and quickly said, “I can make you something fresh! It won’t take but a moment!”

Zuko looked around the still dirty and cluttered kitchen then shrugged and said, “It’s not a problem. I can reheat it myself. I am a firebender after all.”

I have experience reheating dishes.

Mostly because I forgot about them while reading.

His hands slowly heated up and he could feel the plate start to heat up as well. Kaito looked a little dubious, so Zuko explained, “I used to do this all the time back at the palace. More than once, a plate of food would go cold when I was engrossed in something…”

Kaito interrupted, “Prince Zuko.”

Zuko could see the man’s distress, so he hurriedly continued, “It didn’t happen all the time! The trick is to heat your hands up slowly without getting distracted and…”

Now Kaito yelled in alarm, “Prince Zuko!” Zuko was confused for a second then looked down at the now smoking, dried up remains of what used to be a decent meal. Zuko’s shoulders slumped, and his face heated up.

I said I did it frequently, I never said I was any good at it.

In fact, I think I remember more dishes turning out like this than not.

In a desperate big to save face, Zuko said, “It’s…it’s fine. I’m sure it still tastes good, and I’ve had worse.”

At least it isn’t completely burned to a crisp.

This is nothing compared to that time I set my table on fire because I got distracted.

The food was so burnt it looked and tasted like charcoal.

As Zuko reluctantly went to take a bite out of the reheated food, Kaito squawked and snatched the plate from Zuko’s hands. Shocked, Zuko stood there as the once timid cook started to rant, “No person will eat burn food in my kitchen! I will not allow such a dishonor!” The man rummaged through cupboards and the pantry while muttering to himself. Not knowing what to do, Zuko stood dumbly out of the way. Kaito relit the stove and placed the random assortment of ingredients inside a pot, still muttering curses towards Zuko’s burnt plate.

He acts like his family was killed by burnt food or something.

It’s not that serious.

At least, I don’t think burnt food can kill people.

Kaito suddenly turned to Zuko while wielding a spoon like a weapon and demanded, “Did you ever do this on the ship?”

Still not knowing how to process the sudden change in Kaito’s demeanor, Zuko tried to defend himself, “Only if everyone was asleep! There really isn’t a need to get so worked up. Despite what you just saw, it actually rarely goes wrong!”

I think a fifty percent failure rate counts as rare.

Though that might be a little generous to me.

Maybe a lot generous.

Instead of responding, Kaito threw up his hands in silent frustration. Zuko decided that it was in his best interest to keep quiet. Soon enough, whatever the cook had prepared was done. He spooned a large helping of what looked like stew into a bowl and thrust it into Zuko’s hands. Zuko grabbed the bowl reflexively and looked down. He instantly recognized it as Five Spice Chicken-Pork Stew. The sweet smell of the dark brown broth filled his nose. The boiled eggs had turned brown from the broth, and large chunks of meat bobbed in the liquid.

There’s no way he made this so quickly.

I’m pretty sure it takes hours to make this, and I haven’t been here that long.

Zuko couldn’t help himself and asked, “How did you make this so quickly?”

Kaito, now busy cleaning, replied, “I made that dish for breakfast, so all I had to do was combine some leftovers. Luckily, the broth was one of the few things that didn’t get knocked over.”

The man had his back turned to Zuko, but he could tell that the man was waiting for something. Awkwardly, Zuko took a bite of the soup. The sweet and savory flavors coated the inside of his mouth. The meat was so tender he barely had to chew it, and the eggs had the faintest hint of soy and spice. In short, it was perfect. He cleared his throat and said, “Thank you, it’s good. I still don’t understand why you went through all the trouble. I should’ve eaten the burnt food, it would’ve been the natural consequence of not paying attention.”

Kaito seemed to have reverted somewhat back to his nervous self when he turned and bowed lowly while saying, “Please Prince Zuko, there is no need to thank me. It’s my job to ensure that everyone on this ship is well fed with good food.” Still, the cook was smiling as he returned to cleaning. Not knowing what else to do, Zuko took his food with him as he made his way to Jee’s room.

Uncertain if Jee was even still waiting on him, Zuko hesitantly knocked on the door. He was almost surprised when a voice immediately called out, “Come in!” Zuko opened the door to reveal Jee already sitting at the table. However, Zuko stared in confusion at what he saw on it. Instead of maps, scrolls, and writing materials, there were strands of rope and string.

Puzzled, Zuko asked, “What is all that for? I thought we were doing more strategizing or something.”

Jee had a serious look on his face as he said, “If we plan to stick to the rivers from now on, we will need to downsize, but not just our ship. We will need to downsize our crew, supplies, and armory to be able to continue your quest.”

Still confused, Zuko gestured to the rope and line as he asked, “I understand that, but what does that have to do with all of this?”

Jee paused for a moment as he seemed to school his features then said, “Since we won’t be able to carry as many supplies, everyone will need to carry their share of the weight.” Zuko stared in blank confusion, then something clicked.

Wait.

Outraged, Zuko exclaimed, “I can pull my own weight!”

Jee’s carefully schooled expression cracked slightly, and he replied evenly, “I didn’t say you couldn’t, sir.”

How dare he!

Spluttering, Zuko gestured wildly with his arms as he tried to make his case, “I discovered the Avatar after a hundred years! I’m sure I can handle some menial tasks!”

One of Jee’s eyebrows raised slightly as he asked, “Technically, didn’t those Water Tribe siblings discover the Avatar?”

“They don’t count!”

Jee snorted as he rolled his eyes and said, “Of course sir.”

Still trying to defend his honor, Zuko declared, “I’m not completely useless, I helped clean the kitchen before coming here! See, the cook even fed me as a reward!” Zuko held out his now room temperature soup.

Should I try to reheat this?

If I get it wrong, Jee will be insufferable.

However, if I get it right, I’ll have hot food.

Jee’s eyebrow climbed higher at Zuko’s words. Before Zuko could protest, the man grabbed the bowl from him. Zuko watched as Jee closed his eyes in concentration then saw steam start to rise from his formerly cold food. Without a word, Jee handed the bowl back to Zuko who automatically took it. Stumped, Zuko asked, “Why did you do that?”

The lieutenant replied with an even tone, “Because I wanted to.” Nothing in his expression indicated some ulterior motive.

I don’t understand.

That doesn’t make any sense.

Zuko decided not to question it and quickly finished his food. Once done, he inspected the rope and the string on the table closer. It actually looked like there were at least two different types of rope, and the string might actually be fishing line. Jee interrupted his inspection by saying, “I’m going to teach you how to tie knots.”

Frowning, Zuko replied, “I know how to tie a knot.”

Jee snorted then said, “The knot you use for clothing is not what I’m talking about. There are about thirty different knots that can be used on a ship, and that’s not even factoring in how to tie a fishing line.” As Jee started his lecture about all the knots and their various uses, Zuko could feel his eyes glazing over. Jee’s words ran together and formed an almost soothing droning sound. He nodded along absently and let his mind wander. Zuko could feel his eyelids start to drift closed the longer Jee lectured.

This is nostalgic.

I wonder what my old tutor is up to.

Zuko was snapped out of his trance when a piece of rope smacked him in the face. He squawked indignantly, “What was that for?!” Jee had his arms crossed and was giving Zuko a glare.

If looks could kill, I think I’d be in a death loop right now.

Jee gave an exasperated sigh and pinched the bridge of his nose. After taking a couple deep breaths, he said dryly, “I think we should stick with fishing line knots for now. That should be simple enough to hold your attention.” He glared at Zuko who at least had the decency to look a little sheepish. With one last glare, Jee picked up a strand of fishing line and said, “I think the best knot you need to learn is the Double Davy Knot. It’s simple but effective.” With an ease that spoke of years of practice Jee demonstrated the knot.

 Zuko watched as Jee threaded the fishing line through the hole in the hook. Then he brought the end around the line then went through the loop. Next, he took the end and looped back around itself so that it went through the loop again. He weaved it over itself and through the loop one more time before pulling it taunt. Jee gave it a firm tug to test it then gave it to Zuko to inspect.

Looks easy enough.

If Jee can do it, then it can’t be that hard.

Taking another bit of fishing line and a hook, Zuko tried to mimic what Jee did. Unfortunately, his first attempt quickly became a tangled mess. His second attempt was slightly better, but the knot came apart when he tugged on it. Luckily, his third attempt was at least passable. Jee inspected it and nodded in approval then said, “I guess there’s still hope for you to become a real sailor.”

Zuko huffed in response then curiosity got the better of him and he asked, “Why did you become a sailor?”

Jee raised his eyebrow at the sudden question, but still answered, “Adventure, I suppose. Initially I wanted to be a fisherman; but the navy paid more, and I would get to see the world.”

Zuko looked at Jee thoughtfully and asked, “When the war is over, are you going to be a fisherman?”

Jee contemplated the question for a while, clearly not really knowing how to answer. Eventually he said, “I think I would like to have a small fishing boat. Nothing fancy, just something sturdy enough to enjoy being out on the water.” He gave Zuko a thoughtful look then asked, “What do you plan on doing?”

“You know what my plan is.”

Jee pursed his lips then said, “I know, but you said it yourself that it will probably be a few years before it will happen. What do you plan to do until then?”

Zuko was stumped and frowned slightly in thought. After a few seconds, Zuko said, “I honestly don’t know. I’ve never thought about what I would do after the war. Aside from the obvious.”

At that, Jee hummed then his expression tried to appear casual as he said, “Maybe you could join me. I’ll turn you into a real sailor in no time.”

Surprised, Zuko let out an incredulous laugh and asked, “You spent the last couple of years with me on a ship, do you really want to spend anymore time than you strictly need to with me?”

Jee gave him a half-smile then said, “Well this time I’ll be in charge, and we won’t be chasing the Avatar.”

“Will that make me your second-in-command?”

Jee snorted and said, “I think, with your lack of actual experience, you’ll be lucky to be a deckhand.” Zuko spluttered and tried to object as Jee continued to snicker.

They settled back into a comfortable silence for a couple of minutes as Zuko continued to practice his knot. A feeling of uncertainty started to take root as he said, “I don’t think Uncle would approve of me abandoning everything to be a simple fisherman. I think he’s still hoping for me to take the throne.”

Jee studied Zuko closely then said, “I think he would want you to be happy. Even if he doesn’t approve, all that matters is what you want. It’s your life, live it the way you want.”

Easy for you to say, you aren’t managing a global play.

After a few more minutes of practicing his knots, Zuko excused himself. It was time for his firebending practice, and he needed to check in with the helm’s man about their ETA to the port. As he ran through his firebending drills, Jee’s offer bounced around in his head.

A fisherman?

They do have plenty of interesting stories and superstitions.

I bet there are some interesting plays too.

A familiar warm feeling started to spread in his chest. Zuko did his best to ignore it, but he still found himself wearing a small smile. It made him feel giddy, and he was almost excited to spend more time with Jee. Once he finished practicing, he made his way up to the helm. Luckily, they were making good time, and they should be docked within the next few hours. As he made his way back to Jee’s room, he saw his uncle heading in the same direction.

Odd, what’s he doing here?

I thought he would be playing Pai Sho with the crew or drinking tea around this time.

Curiosity peaked, Zuko silently followed his uncle all the way to Jee’s room. His uncle knocked on the door, and Zuko heard Jee calling out for his visitor to come in. As soon as his uncle entered, Zuko got as close to the door as possible and listened. He heard Jee scramble to his feet and say, “General Iroh! I apologize, I was expecting someone else. Is everything all right?”

His uncle chuckled and said, “Everything is fine Lieutenant. I am assuming that you were expecting my nephew?” Jee’s silence was telling enough and his uncle hummed then continued with a more somber tone, “I am glad to see that you both have put aside your differences and that he is willing to confide in you. I admit that recently I may have been pushing my nephew too much about his mental health. That has caused him to withdraw from me a bit.”

What is he getting at?

Jee sounded equally confused as he said, “I’m sure Prince Zuko still holds you in high regard.”

Iroh hummed again then said, “Forgive my bluntness Lieutenant Jee, but do not give my nephew false hope.”

Jee still sounded confused as he said, “I’m not entirely sure what you are getting at, sir.”

Iroh let out a weary sigh then said, “My nephew tends to quickly get attached to adults who take any sort of interest in him. Most of these attachments have caused him significant heartache when that person leaves him. My nephew is getting attached to you, so do you plan to stay in my nephew’s life? If not, then I ask that you not allow this attachment to grow for my nephew’s sake.” Jee didn’t answer, or if he did Zuko didn’t hear him. It was clear the conversation was over, so he quickly retreated away from the door before his uncle exited.

I don’t get attached to every adult!

If I did, then I’d have a lot more homicidal people around me.

Can you imagine me trying to keep Zhao on my ship?

That’s pure nightmare fuel.

Still, Zuko couldn’t shake his uncle’s words out of his head nor the feeling in his chest from Jee’s words from earlier. An image of a similar man who invoked the same feelings flashed in his head, but he quickly shoved them away. Once he was certain that his uncle was gone, Zuko reapproached Jee’s door. He didn’t bother knocking and decided to barge right in. Jee seemed to be deep in serious thought and startled when Zuko made his entrance. With a bit of a haughty voice, Zuko said, “I hope Uncle didn’t give you any ideas.”

Jee gave him an unreadable look for a long moment. Long enough that Zuko started to feel uncomfortable and contemplated leaving. Before Zuko could question the man, Jee said, “It’s fine. He just had a question that I didn’t know the answer to. Sit, we can practice a different knot until it’s time to dock.”

Zuko took a seat and studied Jee’s room again as the man got the pieces of rope all straightened out. The lack of personal items really stood out to Zuko now and he blurted out, “Do you have a family?”

Jee paused briefly then said, “No.”

Mildly curious, Zuko asked, “Why?”

Jee pursed his lips and seemed to carefully pick his next words. Finally, he said, “I had a…rocky relationship with my parents. As soon as I was old enough, I joined the navy and didn’t look back. After that, I got so caught up in my career that I never got the chance to settle down and start a family.”

Zuko studied Jee closely and said, “You aren’t that old. If you really want to start a family, you could easily retire and do that.”

Jee huffed humorlessly then said, “I don’t think there are many women out there who would be interested in a disgraced, washed-up navy officer.” He gave Zuko a wiry smile and continued, “Besides, I made an oath of loyalty to serve a certain prince.” Something clicked inside Zuko’s head, and that warm feeling in his chest started to cool rapidly.

That’s right.

He made an oath of loyalty to me when he was assigned to my ship.

He’s only fulfilling his duties and nothing more.

The once warm, comforting feeling had now frozen over into a hard lump of ice. It clogged his throat and made it hard to swallow. He tried to ignore it as Jee started teaching him another knot. No matter how hard he tried to focus, his thoughts were running in circles. One moment he believed that Jee actually did care about him on some level, and the next he would scold himself for reading too deeply into a professional relationship.

Jee seemed to notice Zuko’s lack of attention and asked, “Is everything okay, sir?”

Zuko didn’t really know how to respond. It was one thing to tell the man about his deaths and plans for his future, it was another thing entirely to put into words what he was feeling. He wanted a solid answer to where he stood with Jee, but he wasn’t certain if he was ready for the answer. After debating himself for a minute, Zuko finally asked, “If it wasn’t for your oath, would you still be here?” His voice sounded smaller than he meant it to. He studied the now tangled rope he was holding and refused to look at Jee.

He heard the man give a tired sigh before saying, “If you asked me this before I knew about your curse, I’d probably say I would leave.” Zuko’s hands started to shake as he tried to undo all of the messy knots in the fishing line, that ball of ice in his throat grew. Jee continued with a slightly softer voice, “However, I’ve spent the last couple of weeks truly getting to know you. The man I am today would stay, vow or no vow.”

The warmth that had left came back with a vengeance. Zuko could feel it spreading all the way to his fingertips as that ball of ice melted away. This feeling hasn’t been this intense since before he left the Fire Nation, and he didn’t know how to process it. Still, he felt a smile tug at his lips. Jee cleared his throat and said, “Now that we’ve cleared that up, let’s see if I can teach you another knot.”

Why?!

We were having such a nice moment, and you ruined it!

Zuko groaned loudly and thumped his forehead against the tabletop. Jee snickered and said, “Stop being so dramatic. This is crucial information that you’ll need on a smaller ship.” Before Zuko could retort, a call went out announcing land. Quickly, Zuko sprang to his feet and rushed to the deck. Sure enough, they were at their destination. The crew were all excitedly whispering their plans for the first night at port that Zuko pointedly tried to ignore.

This is one of those situations where the less I know the better.

My poor mind can only take so much trauma.

As they were about to dock, his uncle announced his plans to have a music night. Most of the crew still seemed more interested in going out, but a few individuals expressed interest in attending. Even Jee seemed more interested in participating than going on shore. Not wanting to be sucked in by his uncle, Zuko made a hasty retreat back to his own room.

Within a few minutes there was a knock on his door. The person didn’t even wait for a response before opening it to reveal Jee. The man stood in his doorway and gave Zuko a look that dared him to object to the sudden entrance.

I guess turnabout is fair play.

Still don’t like it being used against me.

Jee asked, “Are you planning on hiding in your room all night?”

Zuko gave the man a deadpan look and said dryly, “I’ve successfully avoided Music Night so far. I’m not going to ruin my record of perfect avoidance now. I also have no interest in witnessing whatever debauchery the crew is getting up to.”

Ignorance is bliss.

Jee snorted then tossed something at Zuko who easily caught it with one hand. Curious, Zuko opened his hand to reveal a strand of fishing line. Jee said, “If you’re not planning on doing anything, then you can practice your knots.” Zuko groaned loudly and Jee snickered in response as he left.

He’s worse than my old tutor.

At least my tutor didn’t throw things at me.

Grumbling, Zuko reclined on his bed and fiddled with the fishing line. He must have been playing with it for at least an hour when someone opened his door. From the corner of his eye, he could see his uncle entering his room.

He does this every Music Night.

Groaning, Zuko said, “For the last time, I’m not playing the Tsugi horn.”

His uncle seemed hesitant as he said, “No, it’s about our plans. There is a bit of a problem.”  Stepping into his room from behind his uncle was Admiral Zhao.

This is the last place I ever wanted to see you.

I mean, I never want to see you; but my room is definitely at the top of the list.

Zhao approached and said, “I’m taking your crew.”

Shocked and outraged, Zuko jumped to his feet as he shouted, “What?!”

Zhao continued completely unperturbed by his outburst and a little smug, “I’ve recruited them for a little…expedition to the North Pole.”

Not wanting to believe what he was hearing, Zuko turned to his uncle and asked, “Uncle, is that true?”

His uncle looked solemn as he replied, “I’m afraid so. He’s taking everyone.” He got more distraught as he continued, “Even the cook!” His uncle sounded like he was on the verge of tears and raised his sleeve to wipe them away.

That’s a little too dramatic, and that’s saying something coming from me.

Zhao scowled as he said, “Sorry you won’t be there to watch me capture the Avatar, but I can’t have you getting in my way again.”

This smug, arrogant, piece of...

In a fit of rage, Zuko lunged at Zhao, but his uncle immediately grabbed him while shouting, “No!”. Zhao ignored his outburst and walked to the other side of his room. Something had caught his attention, and he was walking directly towards it without moving his eyes away. Zuko followed his gaze and froze.

That’s not good.

I have a sinking suspicion that he’s putting pieces together in a way that isn’t good for me.

Zhao lifted one of Zuko’s dao blades from its wall mount and tested it. Casually, Zhao said, “I didn’t know that you were skilled with broad swords Prince Zuko.” He gave the blade a few test swings then inspected its balance.

Quickly, Zuko replied, “I’m not. They’re antiques.” He looked away as he tried to come up with more words to convince Zhao to drop the subject, “Just decorative.” Judging by Zhao’s expression, he wasn’t convinced.

Zhao turned away from him and ran his hand across the broad part of the blade as he asked, “Have you heard of The Weeping Spirit General Iroh?”

I think it’s a little on the nose, but not the worst thing I could be called.

His uncle replied, “Just rumors. I do not think he is real.”

With the blade still in his hand, he approached Zuko and Iroh as he said, “He’s real all right. He’s a criminal, and an enemy of the Fire Nation.” With a flourish, Zhao spun the blade and held out the hilt to Iroh. He exited Zuko’s room as he continued, “But I have a feeling justice will catch up with him soon.” Zuko watched the man leave with a pit forming in his stomach.

This isn’t going to end well for me, is it?

Zhao stopped just outside the doorway and said, “General Iroh, the offer to join my mission still stands, if you change your mind.” Apparently finished, Zhao closed Zuko’s door behind him as he left.

So many thoughts were racing through his head that Zuko didn’t know where to start. He turned to his uncle and asked, “Is the crew still here? They still need to pack their things.” His uncle gave him a knowing look and nodded. Before his uncle could say anything, Zuko raced out of his room and made his way to Jee’s quarters. The door was already open when he got there.

Panicked, Zuko flung the door open and was momentarily relieved to see Jee standing in the center of the room with a grim expression. Zuko opened and closed his mouth, not really sure what to say. A tense silence hung in the air. Jee set his shoulders in grim determination and said, “I’m not going. I’ve made you a promise, and I plan on keeping it.”

For a brief moment, Zuko felt relieved; but the reality of the situation snuffed that out. Zuko looked away as he said, “You can’t do that. You’ll be charged with desertion, and my ship will be the first place they look. There’s no way around this; you have to leave.” The tense silence grew heavier. Then an idea suddenly set off a spark in Zuko’s mind. A smile tugged at his lips as he said, “Zhao’s planning to attack the Northern Water Tribe and capture Aang. Without a crew I can’t interfere or otherwise get in the way.”

Jee raised an eyebrow and asked, “Are you asking me to sabotage Admiral Zhao?”

Zuko gave a toothy grin as he said, “I’m saying that it looks like act one isn’t over for us yet. I don’t know how yet, but I’m going to find my way to the North Pole.”

Jee had a tightlipped frown on his face as he listened to Zuko. With a weary sigh, he said, “Fine, but please try to strategize. For your sake.”

Zuko rolled his eyes and said, “I promise to strategize as much as I can.” Jee gave him one last nod, then made his way out of the room. Before he passed him, he hesitantly placed a hand on Zuko’s shoulder and gave a tentative squeeze. The moment quickly passed and Jee left without another word.

This is fine.

It’s only temporary.

When Zhao fails, my crew will be back on my ship; and we’ll resume our game of Extreme Tag with Aang.

Zuko went back to his room and flopped onto his bed. Something dug into his back, and he cursed as he tried to fish whatever the item was out from underneath him. After some flailing, he managed to free the item from under him. It was his knotted fishing line. He cursed under his breath and began trying to untangle it. For the umpteenth time that night, someone opened his door without knocking first.

Did everyone just forget how to knock?

I understand why Jee didn’t, but Uncle?

Before Zuko could start snarking, his uncle said, “I know that this is an unfortunate situation, but there is still hope. Once Zhao’s invasion is over, many of the crew members will return.”

Many, but not all.

I think even ‘many’ might be a bit generous.

Zuko didn’t say anything, so his uncle continued, “It’s a lovely night for a walk, why don’t you join me? It will clear your head.” Zuko scowled at his ceiling instead of responding. His uncle deflated then said, “Or stay in your room and sit in the dark. Whatever makes you happy.” With that, his uncle left his room and closed the door behind him.

A few minutes later, Zuko heard a suspicious creak in the distance. He considered investigating it but decided that it must be his uncle. After listening closely for anymore strange sounds and not hearing anything, he resumed untangling the mess that used to be fishing line. Suddenly, the ship rocked violently, and a deafening sound thundered from all around him.

He was thrown out of bed.

Smoke immediately filled his room.

Fire quickly followed.

The ship listed dangerously to one side.

Fumbling, Zuko grabbed his poison.

He downed it almost as soon as another explosion rocked the ship.

The lights had gone out.

Fire illuminated his room through the haze of smoke.

Thick black smoke choked the air.

The metal all around him was heating up.

He couldn’t breathe.

Cold numbness spread across his limbs.

He collapsed coughing.

His vision faded.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up laughing. He couldn’t help it, everything that had just happened and will happen just seemed so ridiculous. Someone barged into his room; and, through his blurred vision, he could make out Jee standing over him. Zuko continued to laugh, and a giant smile split his face. A little disturbed, Jee said, “I’m guessing you died.”

After a few deep breaths, Zuko sat up and turned to Jee and said with a smile still splitting his face, “Correct! I guess it was too soon to say that we were at the intermission. In fact, it looks like we are going to play an active role in the climax of Act One.” He started to giggle slightly as he said, “Get ready Jee, I think this is going to be a rough ride for the both of us.”

Zhao’s planning to invade the Northern Water Tribe, so I need to break in and save Aang again.

Can’t be too hard.

I just need to survive my ship blowing up.

Let’s see if Zhao has what it takes to give Act One a satisfying ending as the villain.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age eleven)

It was winter in the Caldera, if you could call it that. It never snowed nor did the temperature ever drop below freezing. That didn’t stop people from complaining about the cold. Mostly, people complained about how much it rained and how hard it was to get around. Once fall was over, winds from the south would carry massive storms that would dump loads of freezing cold rain. The ground would become perpetually muddy and there was almost always thick fog that stuck around for most of the day. The sky was almost constantly grayed out with clouds, and people would nearly throw a party at the briefest glimpse of a blue sky or a sliver of sunlight.

Today, the storms seemed to be giving them some respite. It hadn’t rained all morning, and it didn’t look like the storms would pick up again until later. Though the sky was still greyed out and fog still clung to the late morning air. Zuko sat on a window ledge looking out into the garden or at least attempted to through the fog. He had his forehead pressed against the cool glass as he watched the shadowy figures of Azula playing with her friends. He could easily point out which shape was her based on the hazy blue flames.

While Zuko was happy Azula had friends, a part of him could feel jealousy wriggling inside him. He knew that his father wouldn’t allow him to meet potential friends until Zuko proved himself worthy enough.

I think I have a better chance of becoming Fire Lord tomorrow than proving myself worthy enough to Father.

He continued to listlessly rest his forehead against the glass even as that area began to go numb from the cold. The muffled sounds of laughter and shrieks of delight taunted him from his perch. Zuko wanted so badly to join them, but he knew that he couldn’t. These were supposed to be Azula’s friends, not his.

Who needs friends anyway?

All I need is my scripts and a quiet place.

No matter how hard he tried to convince himself of this, he could feel loneliness building a shelter for his jealousy to live. He was so caught up in his thoughts that he didn’t notice someone walk up to him until they said, “Zuko, what are you looking at?”

Zuko didn’t turn his head from the window and didn’t even glance at them as he said, “Hello Mother, I’m watching Azula.” Ursa stared out the window in silence next to him. Zuko finally glanced at her from the corner of his eye and saw her frowning. From the outside, it might look like she was trying to figure out which hazy figure was Azula, but Zuko knew better. The silence that stretched between them started to feel almost like its own brewing storm, one that could rage for days and cause irreparable damage.

I don’t like how it’s pointed at Azula.

In an attempt to redirect his mother’s growing silent anger, Zuko asked, “When will Father allow me to have my own friends?” His distraction appeared to have worked because now her frown turned in the general direction of Ozai’s study.

I’d rather she be angry at Father than be mad at Azula.

Ursa pursed her lips for a brief moment before saying, “I don’t know. Your father has some…ideas about how children should be raised.” Her gaze returned to the girls playing outside and her face shifted into a conflicted look. After a few moments, she plastered on a strained smile then said, “At least we have each other.”

I know my knowledge of friendship is limited, but I think having your mother as your only friend is more than a little sad.

Zuko scowled at his mother and said, “That’s not the same as having a real friend.” Ursa’s face morphed into a look of barely concealed hurt. He quickly elaborated, “You’re my mother and a princess, so you’re constantly busy doing something. I want a friend that I can spend time with that isn’t a member of the royal family.”

Ursa mulled over his words quietly for a moment before sighing. She placed her hand on his shoulder then said, “I’m sorry we can’t spend more time together, but maybe we can go see a play sometime soon. I hear there’s plenty of interesting shows going on this month.” At Zuko’s incredulous look, she continued, “Zuko, I know it will be hard to convince your father to agree, but I’m sure with enough persuasion I could get him to give us permission.” Her smile softened as she said, “I’d love to spend more time with you.”

Did she even listen to a word I said?

Zuko’s scowl deepened as he retorted, “That still won’t get me my own friend. I want a friend that doesn’t live in the palace.”

Her smile faltered slightly but quickly returned with a strained edge as she said, “I know, but we have to make do with what we have. I remember when I first came to the palace and how much I wanted a friend.” She suddenly paused then shook her head as she said, “I guess it doesn’t matter now. Zuko, we have each other and that’s all we will ever need. I’ll go see about getting your father to agree to letting us go on an outing.”

Zuko gritted his teeth and clenched his fists but chose not to say anything else. His mother gave his shoulder one last pat as she turned to leave. She was so preoccupied with coming up with plans for a possible outing that she didn’t even realize that Zuko wasn’t even excited about the possibility of seeing a play. Now even more frustrated, Zuko resumed watching Azula with her friends. That little serpent of jealousy grew and hissed at each sound and expression of joy. It didn’t take long before he couldn’t stand to watch them anymore and stormed off. He glared at the ground as he stomped down the hallways, his footsteps echoed around him.

It's not fair!

No matter how hard I try, I will never be good enough.

I’m going to be friendless for the rest of my life.

Zuko was so busy stewing in his own thoughts that he smacked into the armored back of a guard. Before Zuko could topple over, a hand reached out and steadied him. An all too familiar voice said, “Easy there, Your Highness.” Sato had a fond smile on his face that quickly morphed into concern as he studied Zuko. He cautiously asked, “Is everything alright, Your Highness?” Instead of responding, tears of frustration started to gather in Zuko’s eyes. Immediately, Sato rushed Zuko into the nearest unoccupied room and closed the door behind them.

Sato guided Zuko to the center of the room then grabbed a chair and pulled it up to Zuko. Zuko continued to stand silently and glared at the ground with his fists clenched tightly. Sato sat down then leaned forward and tried to look Zuko in the eye as he gently asked, “What happened? Talk to me, Your Highness.”

Just like that, the crumbling dam holding back Zuko’s words broke, and he shouted, “It’s not fair!” Sato leaned back and silently listened as Zuko continued to shout, “Why can’t I have friends my age?! I don’t want my only friend to be my mom! I want other kids to play with! I want to go to school like Azula! I want my own friends!” The tears of frustration that he had been holding back started to spill over and leave trails down his face. He hiccupped as he continued, “I hate that I’m stuck in this palace! I hate that Azula gets friends!” Zuko started to roughly scrub at his face as he continued with a cracking voice, “I hate how Mom hates Azula. I hate Father for hating me. I hate...” A harsh sob interrupted him, and he pressed his palms roughly into his eyes.

Calloused hands gently grabbed his arms and tried to pull them away from his face. When Zuko refused to lower them, Sato softly asked, “Your Highness, can you please look at me?” Zuko let out a hiccupped sob and shook his head. Soothingly, Sato said, “Okay, that’s fine. Would you like a hug?” Zuko gave a small nod, and Sato gently pulled him onto his lap.

Even though Sato’s armor dug uncomfortably into his side, Zuko smashed his face against it as he continued to cry. Sato rested his chin on top of Zuko’s head and rubbed soothing circles onto his back. Zuko could feel the vibrations from the man’s voice as he said, “You’re right, it’s not fair.” Zuko sniffed loudly as Sato continued, “You are an amazing young man that anyone your age would love to have as a friend. You’re funny, creative, and have a unique talent for getting into trouble.” At that, Zuko let out a wet laugh. Sato chuckled softly then continued, “I bet there is some kids out there that would be overjoyed to have you as their friend, and I bet that you will find away to meet them. If there’s one thing I know about you, it’s that nothing will stop you once you’ve made up your mind.”

Zuko let out another wet laugh then asked, “Like how I’ve stopped killers?”

Even though Zuko couldn’t see the man’s face, he could easily picture the long suffering look the man had to be sending to the ceiling as he replied dryly, “As I said, Your Highness, you have a unique talent for getting into trouble.” Zuko couldn’t help but giggle as he continued to sniffle.

They stayed sitting together for a while longer in a comfortable silence. Eventually, Sato’s armor started to get too uncomfortable for Zuko to rest against and he pulled away though he didn’t get up. Sato inspected Zuko’s face for a bit before pulling out a handkerchief and started to scrub away the residual tears. As he cleaned Zuko’s face he asked, “What would your ideal friend be like?” At Zuko’s confused look, Sato elaborated, “Do you want a friend that likes to get into as much trouble as you or would you prefer a friend that will try to keep you out of trouble? Or would you want a friend that has a similar…situation with their family?”

I never thought about what kind of friend I wanted.

I just want someone.

Zuko thought for a moment before saying, “I guess I would want someone I can relate to. It would be nice to share stories and help each other try to make things better.”

Sato smiled sadly and nodded as he said, “That sounds like one of the best friends you could ever have. I’m sure you’ll meet them someday.”

After a few more minutes of sitting together, Zuko finally got up. Sato gave Zuko one last inspection before nodding and led them out of the room. Before he went his separate way, Sato hesitated then said, “I know things are rough now, but things will get better. It may not be today or tomorrow, but things will get better. I promise.” Zuko watched Sato make his way down the hallway and pondered his parting words.

‘Things will get better.’

When?

I don’t want to wait forever.

When Zuko returned to the window where he had been watching Azula play with her friends, he noticed that it had started to rain again and that the girls were gone. Instead of going to look for them, Zuko reclaimed his spot in the window and watched the storm rage outside. It was relaxing listening to the rain pelt the glass and watching the garden gradually fill with water. The deep rumbling of thunder felt more soothing than terrifying. The bright flashes of lightning were obscured by the now thicker fog. Zuko gradually relaxed more and more as he watched the storm until his eyelids started to droop. Before he knew it, his eyes had closed, and sleep started to pull him under.

Maybe I could find a friend who has a strange gift like me.

(Present day)

Jee pinched the bridge of his nose as he listened to Zuko recount the events that led to his most recent death. Once Zuko finished telling his story, Jee gave a weary sigh then said, “Let me see if I’m understanding this correctly, Zhao is going to commandeer the crew and then your ship gets blown up which will kill you.”

Zuko smiled and nodded as he said, “Pretty much.”

With another long-suffering sigh, Jee scowled at the smiling ex-prince then asked, “What is your plan to prevent your upcoming death?”

Zuko pondered Jee’s question then said, “Well, I need to figure out who exactly is going to/did kill me. I mean, there’s no way that Zhao isn’t involved. I just need to figure out who he hired to do his dirty work.” His smile grew nostalgic and thoughtful as he continued, “This reminds me of the time I stopped an assassination attempt against the entire royal family.”

Jee looked like he had so many questions, but settled for just asking, “And how many times did you die before you were able to stop the assassination?”

“I think the assassin only killed me directly twice, but I still had to reset the stage a couple of times in order to get everything right. In total, I think I only died four times, which isn’t too bad.” Jee heaved another sigh and muttered something about young princes with a death wish.

With all this sighing he’s doing, he should be a master at breathing exercises.

After Jee seemed to collect his thoughts, he said, “How about we go to a different harbor. Whoever is or was sent to kill you may not have time to travel to your new location.”

Zuko shook his head as he said, “That’s not a good idea. I mean, yeah it might keep me from being killed. However, if Zhao hired them then I could still end up dead, only by a different person. Also, Zhao is planning to attack the Northern Water Tribe, and I need to figure out how to get there to keep Aang safe. Not to mention that he might send someone to collect you all anyways.”

“Then don’t be on your ship.” At Zuko’s confused look, Jee elaborated, “You don’t know for certain if killing you was their intention. It could very well be that Zhao just wanted to destroy the ship to keep you from following him. You also don’t have any proof that Zhao was even involved. It could be some resistance group that saw the ship as an easy target. Try not being on your ship at the time the explosion occurs. If the explosion still happens, then you will know that killing you wasn’t the goal. If it doesn’t happen, then you can investigate further.”

I guess that makes sense.

That means I have to go on a walk with Uncle.

He’s going to give me ‘words of wisdom’ all night.

Gross.

With a dramatic sigh, Zuko said, “Fine. I guess I’ll try doing things your way. I still think I can handle a few sacrificial deaths to figure out who’s responsible.” Jee leveled him with a highly unimpressed look that promised a long-winded lecture to which Zuko raise his hands in surrender and said, “Relax, Lieutenant. I said I’m going to try to do things your way.” Jee sent him one last warning look before leaving the room.

Rolling his eyes, Zuko got ready for the day. He still went to the kitchen to get food, but this time he made sure not to startle Kaito. Unfortunately, the man truly did seem accident prone. Despite Zuko’s best efforts, the towers of dishes still ended up crashing all over the place. Zuko still helped clean up and tried to reheat his food again with the same disastrous outcome.

Just like last time, Kaito whipped together a fresh dish for him then shooed him out. On Zuko’s way out, a crew member was snickering in the doorway and said, “That happens almost every day. There’s a running bet on when and how many times he’ll make a mess in the kitchen. If it wasn’t for the fact that he’s an excellent cook, Lieutenant Jee probably would’ve recommended that the cook be fired.”

 A little curious, Zuko asked, “Who has the most wins?”

The crew member immediately responded, “General Iroh.”

Figures.

I’m willing to bet that he’s somehow manipulating the situation in order to get the most wins.

He has a talent for almost constantly winning and convincing you to keep playing against him.

I bet he’s banned from most gambling establishments.

Like last time, Zuko went to Jee’s room and Jee forced him to learn how to tie a fishing knot. Since he had already been through this, most of this lesson was more of a refresher and allowed Zuko to practice more. The rest of the day went as it did before. Zuko overheard his uncle talking to Jee, but this time Zuko didn’t feel the need to seek answers.

I already know what he’s going to say.

There’s really no reason to put myself through that emotional moment again.

It would make the play too repetitive.

Soon enough, they had docked, and the crew either stormed the local bars or stayed on the ship for music night. It was only a matter of time before Zhao strolled into his room declaring his plan to invade the Northern Water Tribe. Zuko considered hiding his blades but ultimately decided against it.

Jee is technically right.

I don’t know for certain if Zhao is involved.

Even if he is, him suspecting me of being the Weeping Spirit is only an excuse.

If he really wants me out of the picture, he will just find some other reason to kill me.

Zuko only half listened as Zhao saw the blades and started to question him and his uncle. Before long, Zhao left and Zuko quickly went to speak with Jee. While Zuko still felt some panic clutching his heart, it felt less intense this time. Still, Jee was standing in the middle of his room waiting for Zuko. Before Jee could speak, Zuko said, “I know you’re going to say that you’re not going to go. I do appreciate the sentiment, but you and I both know that isn’t an option. I’m still going to follow your plan, but I’m going to find my way to the Northern Water Tribe. It would be immensely helpful if you’re there.”

Jee had shut his mouth as Zuko was talking and listened intently. He frowned for a moment before saying, “This may be asking too much, but please don’t do anything stupid.” Zuko spluttered indignantly for a moment.

I thought we were about to have a moment!

I even said that I wanted him there!

How rude.

Jee gave him a small smirk and squeezed his shoulder then said, “You need to be in top mental condition if you plan on breaking into one of the world’s last strongholds against the Fire Nation. I can’t help much if you descend too far into madness.” With that, Jee left the room and the ship.

Zuko grumbled and scowled as he went back to his own room. Soon enough, his uncle entered his room and invited Zuko to join him for a walk. He was about to reject the offer when he remembered that he needed to get off his ship. Begrudgingly, Zuko said, “Fine.” His uncle’s face lit up and the man began to jovially talk about what they could do while they wait on the crew to return from the invasion. Before Zuko left his room, he gathered the items that meant the most to him: the fishing line, a knife, and his vial of poison.

The night air was relatively cool, and the streets seemed to be mostly empty. They only spotted the occasional drunk or sailor stumbling down alleyways. Much to Zuko’s surprise, his uncle stayed relatively silent. Instead of thinly veiled suggestions to seek help, his uncle seemed content to enjoy their peaceful walk. They continued to casually stroll through the town looking at the various closed shops. His uncle would occasionally make sounds of interest at whatever was displayed in the window, and Zuko did his best to mentally keep track of the time.

Any second now my ship will burst into flames.

As the minutes ticked by without anything happening, Zuko started to get antsy. His uncle occasionally sent him questioning looks, but they mostly went ignored. He kept glancing in the direction of his ship, but nothing unusual was happening.

Something should have happened by now.

I guess killing me was the objective.

Now I have a different problem.

Either I can try to keep Uncle away from the ship until morning or I can go ahead and die.

I doubt I can come up with a good enough excuse to convince Uncle to stay out all night, let alone a reason why I know the ship is dangerous.

Before Zuko could even try to come up with an excuse to not go back to the ship, a group of men stepped out in front of them. It took Zuko a moment to make out their faces in the darkness and nearly groaned out loud when he recognized them.

Pirates.

More specifically, the pirates I had worked with not that long ago.

Now I guess the real question is whether or not Zhao hired them or are they doing this independently.

I’m willing to bet Uncle’s prized white lotus tile that Zhao is involved.

His uncle kept his relaxed demeanor, but Zuko could see that he was sizing up the pirates and preparing for a confrontation. From the corner of his eye, Zuko could see additional pirates block off any potential escape routes. He and his uncle were surrounded. The captain smugly walked up to them and said, “I was expecting you to stay on your ship sulking after you lost your crew.”

I wonder if he’s cocky enough to tell me his whole plan.

He does seem like the villain that might like to monologue if he feels like he’s already won.

Zuko glared at the captain and asked, “What do you want?”

The pirate smirked and said, “You have a talent for making enemies. Enemies with deep pockets.”

I guess that answers that question.

Still, that doesn’t necessarily confirm that Zhao hired them.

Zuko narrowed his eyes at the captain and said, “I think my father hired you to keep me away from the North Pole, not kill me.”

The captain threw his head back and barked out a laugh then said, “I wish the Fire Lord had hired us! We would be set for months! No, the man who hired us only wants you dead.”

Definitely Zhao then.

That’s the only man that has access to a lot of money that I annoyed recently.

It also didn’t escape his notice that the pirate captain emphasized that only Zuko was the target. That fact also caught his uncle’s attention. His uncle hummed then said, “I would suggest taking whatever money Admiral Zhao has given you and leave.”

The pirates laughed and the captain said while chuckling, “We may be pirates, but we have enough sense to fulfill our end of a bargain. It’s bad business to run off after being paid by a powerful person.”

Iroh nodded solemnly then said, “I understand. However, if you kill my nephew, you will create so many problems for yourselves. Fire Lord Ozai will put a bounty on your heads that will be more than whatever Zhao is paying you, and there are people who care deeply about my nephew that will hunt you until your final breath.”

I think you are overestimating how much Father cares about me.

I mean, I guess he might feel compelled to respond to maintain his image, but I doubt he’s going to put in that much effort to bring my killers to justice.

Some of the pirates appeared to be taking his uncle’s words to heart, but most of them still didn’t look too fazed. The captain responded, “There can’t be a bounty on us if there aren’t any witnesses.” Any hesitation from the pirates vanished and they all sprang into action. While the pirates weren’t particularly skilled fighters, they did have numbers on their side. His uncle seemed more focused on disarming and carefully neutralizing the pirates that were fighting him than actually harming them. Zuko, on the other hand, decided to be a pest and casually evade all attacks without retaliating.

If Aang can be a pest and win, then I should too.

It’s only fair.

Zuko had his arms crossed behind his back and easily danced around every attack. He ducked a swipe of a blade aimed at his head. Spun out of the way of a projectile. Jumped over a strike aimed for his legs. His opponents were quickly growing irritated with him, and Zuko wore a vicious toothy grin in response. Zuko knew he should be taking this fight more seriously, but he didn’t really see the point.

The way I see it, even if I win this fight, Zhao will just hire someone else to kill me.

This is more of an ‘information gathering’ round than an actual attempt to stay alive.

Most plays do have some sort of cliffhanger-esque battle leading up to the act’s finale.

Zuko was so caught up in his own thoughts that he didn’t notice one of the pirates circling behind him. Just as he casually stepped out of the way of a blade trying to slice his throat, ripping agony coursed through his back.

He looked down.

A tip of a blade was protruding from his abdomen.

That’s not normal.

He watched as the blade was pulled out.

Zuko could feel the serrated edge drag against his skin as it was slowly removed.

He could hear the squelch as the blade exited his body.

In the distance, he heard his uncle shouting.

Zuko fell to his knees.

Then he collapsed onto his side.

He could feel warm blood pooling underneath him.

Screams echoed all around him.

The smell of burning flesh clogged his nose.

Fire danced across his vision.

Breathing was getting harder.

Each blink became longer.

Numbness crawled up his limbs.

Darkness.

Gasping, Zuko opened his eyes and stared at his ceiling.

Now that I think about it, Aang uses airbending to dodge.

I guess I shouldn’t be too surprised that I got killed, teasing people I’m fighting has never worked out in my favor.

Stiffly, Zuko forced himself out of bed and got dressed. He briefly considered inspecting his new scar but ultimately decided against it.

You see a scar from a stab wound once; you’ve seen it a million times.

The only time they look different is if the weapon is unique.

Just as Zuko was opening his door, someone started to knock. On the other side stood Jee who looked moderately surprised when the door opened. Zuko grinned and said, “Your plan partially worked.”

Jee blinked in confusion and said, “Good?” He took in Zuko’s expression and entered the room then said, “I’m guessing you died.”

Zuko closed his door then said, “Twice. The first time because my ship blew up. The second time I was stabbed.”

“And how exactly did my plan partially work?”

Zuko’s smile grew as he said, “You said that I should leave my ship around the time it explodes to see if killing me was the goal. I did, and it was the goal. Apparently, Zhao hired the pirates we worked with to kill me.”

Jee took a deep breath and appeared to be mustering all of his patience as he asked, “And how exactly did this result in you dying?”

Still beaming, Zuko said, “I gathered information so I could come up with a plan.”

Now glaring, Jee said, “That didn’t answer my question.”

Zuko suddenly found the wall on the far side of his room very interesting to look at as he said, “The pirates may or may not have attacked us, and I may or may not have taken the fight seriously. This may or may not have resulted in said pirates getting frustrated, and I may or may not have been paying attention which resulted in me getting stabbed in the back.”

Jee stood there staring at him as he put the pieces of what Zuko said together. His glare intensified and let out what suspiciously sounded like a growl.

What are the chances of me being able to talk my way out of this?

Jee’s glare intensified and gritted out, “Let me see if I understand this correctly. Instead of taking the fight seriously and living, you decided to intentionally goof off and get yourself killed.”

I’m in danger.

Jee’s hands were twitching suspiciously at his side and Zuko blurted out, “It looks like you’re about to strangle me, which I think is counterproductive to the whole ‘stop dying’ agenda you’re pushing.” Jee’s eye started to twitch and Zuko quickly said, “I did what you said! I gathered information and now I can make a better plan that doesn’t involve me doing the world’s worst process of elimination!”

Still looking borderline murderous, Jee gritted out, “I am positive that at no point did I ever tell you to get yourself killed for information. Especially after you apparently already gathered the information that you needed.”

“Listen. I know what I said sounded bad,” Jee grumbled out something that sounded derogatory that Zuko ignored, “but there was a logical reason behind my decision!” Jee still didn’t look convinced, but he was at least listening instead of wringing Zuko’s neck. Zuko continued, “Since I knew for certain that Zhao hired someone to kill me, there was no real point to continue that version of the script. Zhao would’ve just hired someone else if I survived, and I doubt Ozai would look too deep into an attempted murder of me or Uncle. We would’ve ended up on the run from who knows how many assassins and it would’ve been significantly more difficult for me to get to the Northern Water Tribe. A reset was necessary; it just so happens that a pirate did it for me.”

Jee still didn’t look happy, but he at least seemed to somewhat accept Zuko’s words. Frowning, he asked, “Then what’s your plan? How are you planning to stop Zhao from assassinating you?”

Zuko smirked and said, “I’m not going to stop him.” Before Jee could start objecting, Zuko held up a hand to stop him and said, “Like I said, even if I stop the pirates, Zhao will find someone else to do the job. I’m going to let the pirates carry out their initial plan to blow up my ship with me in it. Zhao will think he won, and I will have a free ride to the North Pole.”

“You’re planning to stow away on Zhao’s ship?”

“Yup. Now I just need to figure out how to not be killed or seriously maimed by a massive explosion.”

Jee stared at him for a long moment. He still looked like he wanted to throttle Zuko, but now he also looked like he was questioning all of his life choices. With a deep, long-suffering sigh he said, “I’ve always wondered why General Iroh looks ages older than he actually is. Now I understand. I’ve been helping you for a couple weeks now, and I feel like I’ve aged twenty years.”

“Hey! I’m not that bad.”

Jee sent him a heavily unimpressed look then said dryly, “I’m guessing we already had a conversation about avoiding that harbor.” At Zuko’s nod, Jee continued, “Fine. If you want any chance of surviving the explosion, then you’ll want to be as far away as possible from the center of the blast. My guess is that the bulk of the explosives will either be near the engine or storage. Both places have highly flammable materials; and if I wanted to blow up a ship, I’d target one of those places.”

I guess that makes sense.

The engine room has a bunch of coal, and our storage has at least three crates full of spark rocks and some barrels of oil.

The rest of the day went by without any further deviation. The cook still made a mess in the kitchen that Zuko helped clean up, Zuko still burnt his reheated meal, his uncle still had a talk with Jee, and Zhao still invaded his room to announce his plan to invade the Northern Water Tribe. When Zuko went to say goodbye to Jee, the man said, “Try to find me once you sneak aboard Zhao’s ship. As an officer, I should have just enough privacy to hide you or at least enough authority to set up a hiding spot.” Zuko nodded and Jee placed a hand on Zuko’s shoulder then gave one last squeeze before walking out. Before completely disappearing around the corner, the man leveled him with a stern look and said, “Don’t do anything stupid.” Zuko was left spluttering as the man walked away.

Me?

Do something stupid?

Does he know who he’s talking to?!

Doing stupid things has always been the answer to all of my problems!

Zuko sulked off to his room and waited. His uncle entered his room and asked Zuko to join him on a walk around town. When Zuko refused, his uncle was disappointed but left Zuko alone. This time, when Zuko heard that same suspicious noise, he got up to investigate it. As he left his room, he grabbed his important items and stuffed them into his pocket.

I have a sinking suspicion that whatever made that sound isn’t Uncle.

As Zuko made his way down the hall of the ship, he came to a crossroad. One direction would lead him to the helm and the other was to the deck. The helm was closest to the engine and storage was directly under the deck. He looked in both directions as he tried to make up his mind.

I hate choices like these.

No matter which one I choose, I always end up being wrong.

Do I die an explosive death in the helm or a fiery death on deck?

After a few more seconds of deliberation, Zuko decided to head to the deck.

At least I will have the option to jump overboard if it’s the wrong choice.

Maybe.

Cautiously, Zuko made his way up the steps and walked out on to the deck. The cool night air greeted him, and nothing seemed out of the ordinary. At least, not at first. A familiar screeching creature flew overhead, and from the corner of his eye he saw sparks rapidly travel to a stack of barrels. Barrels that Zuko was standing way too close to.

Uh-oh.

Zuko barely got the chance to take a step before the world ignited around him.

Burning agony engulfed his body.

He could feel his flesh burning away.

Smoke filled his lungs.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up with a strangled scream. The feeling of fire eating away at his limbs was all he could think about. The smell of smoke and burnt exploding jelly clogged his nose. His ears still rang from the deafening boom.

Hands were trying to grab him as Zuko tried to put out fire that wasn’t there. He suddenly found himself pressed against something hard. The smell of leather, coal, and salt water filled his nose. Zuko blinked rapidly then took in his surroundings. He was in his room. It wasn’t on fire, not yet at least. He turned to the person restraining him and saw a familiar face.

I guess I should be grateful it’s Jee and not Uncle.

Zuko took a few deep breaths then said, “I’m guessing I can’t convince you that I just had a nightmare and that I didn’t just die.”

Even though Zuko couldn’t see the man’s face, he could hear the bemused tone as Jee said, “I might have believed you if it wasn’t 6 o’clock. What happened?”

“I should never gamble.” Jee made a questioning noise, so Zuko continued, “I had a 50/50 chance of not dying and I chose wrong. I guess I at least know where to go now.” A little hot, Zuko squirmed away from Jee and confirmed that the man was indeed sending him a bemused look. Though now it started to look more irritated.

Jee gave him a strong disapproving glare as he said, “I thought we agreed not to do your process of elimination anymore.”

I miss the old Jee who was on the verge of committing mutiny.

He would never try to scold me like this.

“I did plan, I swear! It’s just that there were two equally possible ways I could die, and I didn’t have any clear indication which one was the most likely. By the time I realized I made the wrong choice, I was already dead.” Zuko went into great detail about what had happened the last couple of cycles, though he did gloss over their bonding moments.

I can only handle so many mushy emotions.

I’m Tragedy, not Feel-Good-Happy Story.

I shouldn’t have to deal with all of this.

Once Zuko had finished, Jee still looked bemused, but he didn’t look quite as irritated. He stared at Zuko for a few long moments before a look of resignation took over his face and said, “I suppose that this is one of the few situations where your process of elimination was the only option. How many times have you died today?”

Zuko started ticking off his fingers as he said, “Well, there was the original run that took me completely off guard. Then there was the time I got off my ship to see if killing me was the sole objective, which it is. Then there’s this most recent one where I tried to fake my death but actually died. So, I’ve died three times.”

“You are not dying again today.” Zuko made a noise of uncertainty and was about to argue when Jee said firmly, “You. Are not. Dying. Again. Do you understand?”

I am really tempted to argue, but I don’t think that would be good for my long-term health.

Mulishly, Zuko muttered, “Fine.” Then stated louder, “But I can’t make any promises about what may or may not happen to me once I sneak aboard Zhao’s ship. I don’t think I can talk my way out of an execution for stowing away.”

Jee stood up and glared down at Zuko for a moment then stated, “Then I guess you better work on being an obedient soldier to not rouse suspicion. You can start by doing your morning routine then meeting me in my quarters.”

Sullenly, Zuko got dressed and repeated the day. Once again, despite his best efforts, Kaito’s almost gravity defying tower of dishes collapsed and Zuko did his best to help clean everything up. Also, despite his better judgement, he tried reheating a plate of food with about the level of success he had come to expect.

I think if my circumstances were different, I’d make a killing selling charcoal.

Just like all the previous times, Zuko spent most of the day with Jee practicing tying knots and making plans for a hypothetical future. Before long, the ship docked and Zuko sequestered himself to his room in order to avoid Music Night. Just like last time, Zhao sauntered into his room and smugly declared that he was taking Zuko’s crew.

A part of me still wants to antagonize him.

If it wasn’t for the fact that Jee would absolutely know that I died again, I’d do it.

That, and I don’t want Zhao to give me another scar.

It’s bad enough his handprints are on my neck.

As soon as Zhao had left, Zuko quickly made his way to Jee’s room. Just like the last couple times, Jee was standing in his room waiting for Zuko. The man turned to him and said, “I know you know what I want to say, or at least what I originally said. Instead of all that, I’ll just say good luck. As soon as it’s safe, try to find me. I’ll try to have a safe space for you to hide out set up.” Zuko nodded and watched as Jee left his former quarters. He gave Zuko’s shoulder a final squeeze before disappearing.

Zuko wondered back to his room and waited for the inevitable. Once again, his uncle stopped by to invite him on a walk that Zuko declined, and then Zuko was left alone to wait. Within a few minutes, Zuko heard that same suspicious sound. He stuffed his important items into his poecket, and then quickly made his way down the hall and turned towards the helm. Apparently, he moved too quickly because he came face to face with a couple of the pirates that he instantly recognized. One of them had long hair that was held back with a headband and the other had the sides of his head shaved with the remaining hair on top dyed blue. They stared at each other in disbelief before Zuko asked, “Did Zhao send you to collect my former crew’s belongings?”

Please say you’re stupid enough to agree and believe that I don’t recognize you.

The two pirates looked at each other then the one with long hair quickly said, “Yes! We are collecting their stuff, then we’ll be out of your hair. It shouldn’t take but a few more minutes.”

Zuko gave a small nod then said, “Fine, I’m going back to my room. Don’t disturb me.”

He turned to go back down the way he came and overheard one of the pirates muttering to the other, “Why don’t we kill him now? His back is to us.”

Are you serious?

I haven’t even turned the corner yet.

I guess I should act like I didn’t hear him.

The other pirate shushed his companion, and they silently watched Zuko walk around the corner. He listened to them bicker about whether or not they should follow him before they eventually decided to continue with their original plan. Once Zuko was sure the pirates weren’t going to follow him, he took the long way up to the helm. From the balcony, he watched the pirates place several crates of exploding jelly and leave a trail of what was probably black powder.

Show time.

Let’s see if I can play a convincing corpse without actually becoming one.

One of the pirates ignited the powder and Zuko watched the flame rapidly approach the stacks of exploding jelly. For a second, everything seemed to freeze. Like the world was holding its breath. Then a deafening boom rocked the ship. Almost immediately, a series of explosions traveled up the helm’s tower. Zuko scrambled to keep his balance as a pillar of yellow and orange flames entered the helm. Frantically, Zuko tried to bend the flames around him when another explosion went off.

The smell of burning flesh.

Falling.

The shock of icy water.

The burn of salt in his wounds.

He couldn’t move.

His limbs were numb.

He was sinking.

Another explosion went off.

The orange flames lit up the surface.

A piece of sinking debris bumped into him.

The sudden need to breathe became overwhelming.

Frantically, he swam to the surface.

His eyes burned.

He couldn’t see.

His head breached the surface.

He heaved wet coughs and gasped for breath.

Someone was calling out to him.

Each movement towards shore sent pinpricks of agony up his limbs.

Waves constantly kept pulling him under.

Water filled his mouth.

It was getting harder to keep his head up.

His feet touched sand.

Then his hands.

He made it.

Zuko rolled onto his side and coughed up mouthfuls of salt water. His nose and throat throbbed with each attempt to breathe. He continued to cough and gasp as he heard someone scrambling toward him. The frigid water still clung to his clothes. He was too cold and exhausted to move. The person grabbed him and was frantically asking him questions that he couldn’t keep up with. Everything felt so distant and muffled.

Too cold to think.

The person seemed to catch on and started to rub their too warm hands over Zuko’s arms. Zuko could barely struggle as the hands left what felt like trails of fire across his skin. They went to remove what remained of his nightclothes, but some part of his brain remembered that there were some things he didn’t want most people to see and made as many protesting sounds as possible.

The scars.

No one can see the scars.

Zuko’s brain finally caught up to what the person was saying, “Prince Zuko, we need to get you out of your wet clothes. You are in danger of developing hypothermia.”

Uncle.

Zuko felt a mixture of relief and panic when he finally recognized who the person was. His mind was sluggishly realizing that he was neither dead nor dying.

At least he’s not one of the pirates or Zhao.

Still, I cannot allow him to see the scars.

Now shivering, Zuko growled out, “J-j-just f-f-f-fireb-b-b-end.”

“I do not think that is wise, Nephew. We do not know the extent of your injuries and moving you right now could cause significant damage. I also do not want to risk raising your body temperature too quickly.”

What’s the worst that could happen?

I die?

Death is practically an important character by this point.

Rather than saying any of that, Zuko growled, “I-I’ll be f-f-f-fine.” His uncle had a deeply concerned frown but relented. Carefully, he helped Zuko sit up against his chest. Zuko let out a few pained grunts with each jostle of his body as his uncle got him somewhat comfortably situated. Gingerly, Iroh placed a hand on Zuko’s chest and stomach. He took a deep breath then exhaled a small flame. His hands immediately heated up, and the cold numbness started to shift into burning agony. Zuko knew that his uncle’s hands weren’t actually hot enough to leave a burn, it just felt like it because he was so cold. Still, he couldn’t help the pained whines that escaped his throat.

Freezing to death is so much easier than recovering from almost freezing to death.

Less painful too.

Zuko continued to let out some muffled hisses of discomfort but didn’t otherwise protest. The burning ache in his hands and feet gradually faded as the rest of him warmed up. Before long, he was relatively comfortable temperature wise. However, the various injuries he sustained from the explosion started to make themselves known.

Ow my everything.

If this is what it’s like to survive an explosion, then surviving sucks.

Zuko tried to take stock of what injuries he immediately noticed without moving too much. His good eye couldn’t open all the way and ached with every blink. The taste of blood lingered in his mouth, and he believed the primary culprits were the two splits in his lip that he prodded at with his tongue. His neck also had an area that burned in a familiarly suspicious fashion. Each inhale had his ribs aching, but he didn’t think any of them were broken. His nose also throbbed, but he could breathe through it so he didn’t think it was broken.

I guess all things considered, these aren’t the worst injuries you could get from a massive ship explosion.

In the distance, Zuko could see his ship burning away. He was surprised by the sudden wave of sorrow as he watched what remained of his ship sink to the bottom of the harbor. It had been his home for nearly three years, and he had his fair share of good and bad memories attached to it. From the corner of his eye, he could see that his uncle had a similarly sad expression while he watched the burning ship sink.

Soon, all that was visible was some burning floating debris. His uncle asked, “What do you want to do now, Prince Zuko?”

Zuko couldn’t tear his eyes away from where his ship used to be as he said, “Zhao offered you a position in his invasion. Take it.” Zuko grunted as he turned to face his uncle then said, “Zhao will think I’m dead, and I can use that to sneak aboard his ship. This will be my best chance to capture the Avatar.”

Probably the last time I will even see him until I can get another boat.

Jee said we would have to downsize anyways.

His uncle looked troubled as he asked, “You believe Zhao is responsible?”

“It’s too much of a coincidence that he offers you a position in his invasion and my ship blows up with me inside.” After some internal debate, Zuko added, “The pirates we allied with were the ones that did it. As much as they probably hate me, they wouldn’t do that unless they were getting paid.”

Not to mention that in a different version of the play, they all but said that Zhao hired them.

His uncle sat quietly in thought for a moment before cautiously saying, “Are you sure this is a good idea, Nephew? You are injured and may not be in any condition to fight the Avatar or his allies.”

Probably not but winning was never the goal.

Zuko scowled then said, “If I don’t, then Zhao might capture the Avatar instead. I can’t let that happen.”

Mostly true.

I really don’t want to do another prison break.

Groaning, Zuko forced himself to stand up. He swayed dangerously for a moment but ultimately stayed vertical. His uncle gave him a concerned look as he stood up next to him. Together, they made their way off the beach. The longer they walked, the more Zuko’s injuries made themselves known but he also felt more stable.

Balance wise at least.

As they got closer to Zhao’s camp, Zuko whispered, “I’m going to make my way onto Zhao’s flagship. I’ll find you later.” His uncle nodded gravely but stayed silent. They were close enough that his uncle probably didn’t want to risk drawing unwanted attention. Zuko watched as his uncle entered Zhao’s tent then made his way to the flagship. Carefully, he snuck past a few guards but nearly smacked into a patrol. Quickly, he ducked behind some crates and waited for them to pass.

This would be so much easier if I blended in.

Once the patrol had passed, Zuko decided to investigate the crates.

Knowing my luck, I bet these crates are either empty or filled with damaged uniforms.

Fortunately, that was not the case. In fact, they contained relatively new uniforms and armor. Zuko looked down at his own clothes and was slightly mortified. While most Fire Nation clothing is fire resistant, they can only handle so much heat before they burn. Apparently, an exploding ship was just enough heat that it had burned large holes through them, and Zuko just barely qualified as dressed.

I am so glad it’s night or Uncle might have actually seen my scars.

Even if he did manage to see something, I doubt it was enough to make him suspicious.

A little comforted, Zuko quickly threw on a uniform and helmet then tried to march as confidently as possible onto the ship. He must have projected just enough confidence because no one stopped or questioned him. In fact, he was basically ignored. He marched through the halls of the ship in the hopes of seeing a specific familiar face but wasn’t having much luck.

There’s no guarantee that Jee’s even on this ship.

Every ship will have officers, and he could be assigned to any one of them.

What are the chances that, out of the hundreds of ships in Zhao’s fleet, Jee is on this one?

Just as Zuko was about to accept that he might not see Jee before the invasion, he heard a familiar voice barking orders, “This room is off-limits to unranked sailors and soldiers! If you need something from here, find me. I’m not telling you again!” Trying to appear casual, Zuko strolled up to the perpetually grumpy officer as the man shooed away some nosy sailors. Jee turned to face him and didn’t recognize who he was talking to as he barked, “What are you doing down here, soldier? Head to the deck and wait for the captain’s command to set sail!”

Behind the faceplate, Zuko allowed himself to wear a giant smirk as he said, “I was explicitly ordered to find you, Lieutenant.”

Jee froze and stared at him for a brief second before quickly recovering then saying, “Right, I remember the captain saying that he was going to send someone to assist me. My apologies, I was expecting an officer and not an unranked soldier.”

I feel like that’s a dig at my disguise and acting skills.

Before Zuko could say anything, Jee motioned him into the room he was guarding as he said, “I need you to help me properly organize these supplies. Whoever loaded them just put them in here haphazardly.” As soon as Zuko stepped into the room, Jee closed and locked the door behind them. He stood quietly next to the door and listened to see if anyone was eavesdropping. As he was doing this, Zuko looked around the room they were in. There were metal shelves lining two of the walls that were filled with all sorts of random items, and there were wooden crates stacked all the way to the ceiling against the other wall. There didn’t appear to be any rhyme or reason to how things were organized.

I guess Jee wasn’t lying about this room being a mess.

A sudden feeling of dread filled Zuko as he finally processed what Jee had said as they entered the room.

He’s not really expecting me to clean and organize in here, right?

Jee seemed to think that they were in the clear and said, “Follow me. I just finished setting up an area for you.” A little confused, Zuko followed him. Jee approached a specific area of the stacked crates and carefully pulled one out of the middle. He crawled inside then motioned for Zuko to follow him.

There’s no way that there’s enough room for both of us in there.

I’m not claustrophobic, but I still don’t want to be forced to stay in a confined area for hours.

That, and I’m not entirely convinced of the structural integrity of stacked crates.

Jee stuck his head out and hissed, “Get in here.” Grumbling, Zuko relented and crawled through the opening. Once inside, it turned out to be more spacious than he initially thought. It was still a bit narrow, but it was long enough for both of them to sit next to each other without being forced to practically sit on top of one another. Looking around, he took in his new room. There was a small sleeping mat against the wall that took up most of the area. Instead of candles for light, there were a couple of glowing crystals that just barely illuminated the space. Near the entrance was a bucket filled with water and an overstuffed bag was propped against it. In the furthest corner was another bucket that was bigger than the one with water.

Jee was watching Zuko take in the makeshift room and said, “I know it’s not much, but it should keep you hidden. The bucket next to the bag is filled with fresh water, the bag has rations and first-aid supplies, and the other bucket is for you to do your business.” At Zuko’s horrified look, Jee rolled his eyes and said, “You need to stay hidden as much as possible. It should only take us a couple days to get to the North Pole, so you’ll live.”

Zuko took off his helmet and snickered as he said, “Unfortunately.”

Jee found it less amusing and gave him a stern glare. He forced himself to take a deep breath then said, “Stay here. We should be setting sail within the next hour or two.”

“I need to find Uncle. I said I would find him as soon as I could.”

Jee frowned then said, “When I find him, I’ll let him know that you’re safe. Even if Zhao believes you’re dead, I wouldn’t be surprised if he isn’t having your uncle closely monitored. It will make the journey so much easier for you, if you just stay here until it’s safe.”

Safety is over-rated.

Actors get hurt on stage all the time, but the show still goes on.

Jee seemed to correctly interpret Zuko’s silence because he sent him a highly bemused look. He folded his arms and said, “If I have to come here randomly every few minutes just to make sure you don’t sneak off, Prince or not, I will have you scrubbing the deck of our future river boat every. Single. Day.”

Zuko glared at Jee and started to sulk. Finally, he surrendered and grumbled, “Fine. I’ll stay hidden away where I’ll be completely useless if something goes wrong.”

Jee snorted and replied dryly, “I’m sure if something goes wrong, you’ll find out pretty quick.” He pursed his lips and turned in the direction of the door as he said, “I need to get back to my duties. As soon as I get a chance, I’ll be back with news of your uncle” he then looked over Zuko’s face then added, “and some more medical supplies.” As soon as Jee left, Zuko grabbed the bag and started to rummage through it. He pulled out some burn salve and gauze then started trying to care for his injuries.

This would be so much easier if I had a mirror.

After some struggling and muttered curses, Zuko believed he had most of his worst injuries tended to. The silence had started to become oppressive by now. He couldn’t hear anything beyond his little room. Even the normal sounds of a ship seemed oddly absent. The longer he sat still, the more restless he became. He wanted to pace, but the ceiling of his makeshift room was too low. It was just high enough for him to sit up straight with a little extra clearance so he wouldn’t bang his head. Then he remembered the fishing line he had in his pocket. That kept him occupied for a little while, but he quickly became bored with doing the same knot over and over. Just to see if he could, he started to try to make shapes with mixed results.

For what felt like hours, Zuko perfected untangling complicated knots. He almost jumped out of his skin when the crate blocking the entrance to his room was moved. Jee crawled in and raised an eyebrow at the tangle heap that used to be fishing line in Zuko’s hand. He shook his head then said, “I’m afraid to ask.” Zuko was about to start explaining himself when Jee interjected, “I ran into General Iroh and told him where you were. He said that Admiral Zhao fully believes that you are dead, and we should be at the North Pole in two days. However, Zhao hasn’t stated when exactly the invasion will occur.”

Zuko nodded and fiddled with his knotted mess before saying, “Zhao is many things, but patient isn’t one of them. He’s probably planning something bigger than just the invasion if he’s keeping the timing secret.”

“General Iroh and I agree.”

Stupid Zhao.

Always making my life harder than it needs to be.

Zuko sighed then said, “I’m going to need some supplies if I’m going to break into the Northern Water Tribe and not die. Since I’m not allowed to leave, you and Uncle will have to get the items for me.”

Jee nodded and said, “General Iroh is already ahead of you. We’re trying to gather whatever items you’ll need without drawing attention to ourselves.”

“Make sure to grab a scarf.” Jee sent him a confused look and Zuko elaborated, “I don’t have my scar cream. It blew up with my ship, and what I am wearing is starting to come off. I need something to cover my neck besides Fire Nation armor.”

Jee nodded and said, “I’ll see about sneaking a scarf into your supplies.”

After that, Jee left to continue assisting with running the ship, and Zuko fell into a restless sleep. The next day wasn’t any more exciting for him. He mostly spent it trying out different knots and doing what little stretches he could manage in his enclosed space. Jee would interrupt his boredom with updates from his uncle and general news about where the rest of his crew was stationed.

If it’s possible to die from boredom, then I think this will be one of the slowest deaths I’ve ever endured.

Before he could figure out if that was possible, Jee entered his room and said, “We got eyes on the North Pole. We should see the wall of the Northern Water Tribe within the next few hours.”

Finally.

Jee handed Zuko a bag and said, “Here’s the winter clothing you should wear. It’s waterproof and it should help you blend into the surroundings. Luckily, it has a high neckline and a hood, so I don’t think you’ll need a scarf. However, you can try it on just to make sure. There’s also some extra rations, medical supplies, and some rope. We should be close enough for you to attempt to break in by tomorrow night.”

Zuko gave a short nod as he said, “Thank you.” A little uncertainly, he asked, “Would it be possible for you to be here at 6 in the morning?” Zuko now had his eyes firmly on his fishing line as he continued, “I don’t know how many times I’ll revive, and I may make a lot of noise. It would be a good idea to be here to at least smother any loud sounds I make. It would really be inconvenient if I get killed immediately after I revive, and it would go against your whole crusade against me dying.”

Before Zuko could devolve into rambling, Jee said, “I’ll be here.” Zuko looked at him in genuine surprise and Jee huffed then said, “I swore that I would assist you, and I am a man of my word. I’ll get here a little before 6 and do my best not to wake you up.” He gave Zuko a humorless smirk that was almost a grimace as he said, “This isn’t my first time experiencing one of your revivals. As long as you don’t start any fires, I think I can manage to handle whatever your revivals throw at me.”

Zuko gave him a small smile then went back to fiddling with his knot. Soon, Jee left him alone again. More than a little stir-crazy, Zuko put on his soldier uniform and snuck onto the deck of the ship. The frigid night air nearly took his breath away. He made his way to the railing and gazed up at the night sky. The moon was nearly full and cast a faint glow over the rippling water. There wasn’t a single cloud obstructing the view of the stars.

This is one thing I love about being on a boat.

You always get a great view of the night sky.

In the distance, he could just barely make out the wall of the Northern Water Tribe. By now, the people will know about the Fire Nation fleet. Zuko could imagine all the warriors sharpening their weapons, and Aang preparing himself for his first major conflict. The world seemed to be holding its breath as it waited to see what would unfold.

This is Aang’s chance to truly give the world hope.

The hero will soundly beat the villain’s army and gain a multitude of allies.

Tragedy will stick to the shadows and try to keep the heroes alive and help them succeed.

Tomorrow will be the beginning of the end of Act One.

Tomorrow.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age twelve)

The rainy season was finally over. For the first time in months, the people of the Fire Nation could now see blue sky and sunlight every day. The palace gardeners were relieved that they no longer had to battle the constantly flooding pond, and the maids were delighted that they didn’t have to scrub layers of mud off of every surface. The garden was filled with all the life that the rains had brought. Flowers were in full bloom, the songs of insects filled the air, and migratory birds lingered in the trees. Humidity still clung to the air, but the overall temperature was considered pleasant by Fire Nation standards.

It was this nice weather that forced Zuko to venture outside. More specifically, someone forced him outside. Sato had found him hiding away in the library and all but threatened to ban Zuko from there if he didn’t spend at least some time outside. The man had said, “It’s a rare, nice day outside, and you need to go out there and enjoy it. Who knows how long it will be before we have weather this decent again.” Zuko had tried to argue, but Sato was not swayed.

Now, Zuko found himself in the garden, laying on his stomach, under the tree next to the turtleduck pond. He had his head propped in one hand as he glared down at an unraveled scroll. It was covered in his messy handwriting. Entire lines of writing were scratched out, rewritten, and almost immediately scratched out again. There were hastily scribbled notes written in shorthand along the margins with arrows pointing to specific sections. Zuko picked up his writing utensil and wrote a few words, growled, scratched them out, and then returned to glaring at the scroll.

On the other side of the garden, Zuko could hear Azula hanging out with her friends. They, like everyone else in the Fire Nation, were ecstatic about the nice weather. Even Mai seemed a little less sour than usual. However, Zuko didn’t really pay attention to what they were doing. He was so engrossed with his scroll that he startled when a voice asked, “What are you writing?” He looked up to see Ty Lee leaning over his shoulder.

He glared at her suspiciously, and asked, “Why?”

Ty Lee tilted her head in curiosity and said, “You just seem so…angry. It’s like the air around you is all red.”

What does that even mean?

Zuko huffed and returned to glaring at his scroll. He tried to ignore Ty Lee, but she continued to stand there watching him. Eventually, he let out a frustrated groan and said, “I’m trying to write my own script, but I don’t know how to get past this part.”

Ty Lee folded herself down to sit next to him and asked, “What’s the play about?”

Zuko hesitated for a moment then said, “It’s about two siblings that run away from their dangerous parents and go on an adventure through the spirit world. They are regularly attacked by monsters and are just trying to find a place to be safe and happy. They’re both trying so hard to protect the other from all the danger that they sometimes forget how strong the other sibling is.”

Ty Lee’s face lit up and she gushed, “That sounds so cool! I’d love to see a play about that.” She looked down at his disaster of a scroll then said, “Hmm…Maybe talking through the part you’re having trouble with will help.”

I guess it couldn’t hurt.

At worst, she’ll tell Azula everything, and I’ll have to deal with being teased more than usual until Azula gets bored.

Reluctantly, he grumbled out, “I’m trying to introduce an adoptive father to the siblings, but the dialogue just feels…wrong. It’s either too mushy for one of the siblings to like, or it’s too stoic for the other one to catch. Even worse, sometimes it feels too rushed. I want both siblings to look at this man and see him as their father. It would just be easier to kill him and have one of the siblings mourn him. It would give them a chance to build an even stronger bond.”

Ty Lee pursed her lips and looked sad as she said, “But that would be so sad! Audiences like a happy ending after a character or characters go through a bunch of hardship. It gives them hope and a reason to cheer for the characters. If they know that everyone or almost everyone’s going to die, then they aren’t going to get attached to them.”

Zuko pouted and his glare at his scroll intensified. He muttered, “It just feels so much more natural to write tragedies. Every time I try to write a happy ending, it always somehow ends up sad.”

Ty Lee tapped her finger against her cheek as she pondered his words. Suddenly her face lit up and she declared, “Maybe you need someone to rewrite your endings!”

A little confused, Zuko asked, “I should let someone else write the ending?”

“No, you write what you originally want, and then someone else rewrites it to make it happy.” She smiled brightly and continued, “Comedy, in theatre, isn’t just making people laugh. It’s giving the good guys a happy ending.”

He gave her a surprised look and said, “I didn’t know that you were interested in theatre.”

Ty Lee’s smile became a little nervous as she said, “Well, I was thinking about becoming an actress, but my parents said no.” She shook her head then said, “It’s no big deal, I’m sure I’ll find something even better to do! Anyways, what matters right now is your script. Maybe you can find someone who naturally writes comedies, and you can make perfect plays together.”

Zuko continued to lay there and pondered Ty Lee’s words as she cartwheeled her way back to her friends. He stared at his scroll until all the words blended together. In his head, he tried to imagine what this person might be like.

I know I can rewrite other people’s stories, but I wonder if there is someone out there that can rewrite mine.

Is there someone out there that can change my tragedy into a comedy?

(Present day)

Zuko had returned to his little hidden room and waited. Nervous energy coursed through his body and made it difficult to sleep, but he managed to force himself to doze off. That night he dreamed of an icy terrain littered with corpses. Men. Women. Children. Civilians and soldiers. Fire Nation and Water Tribe. All piled and strewn haphazardly. The snow was stained red and pink. The moon, which should’ve been full, was gone. The piles of corpses slowly came to life then started to crawl and grab at his ankles. They all started begging, screaming, “Save us!” He couldn’t escape no matter how hard he struggled. They crawled on top of each other to grab him, their bloodstained fingers left smears of red all over his clothes and skin. Their cries and pleas grew louder. He was being buried under the writhing pile of corpses.

Suddenly, everything went silent.

An unfamiliar girl’s voice whispered, “You can’t save everyone.” 

Zuko sat up violently, gasping for breath. He was drenched in cold sweat, and he could feel his body shaking. A hand was on his back helping to steady him, and a familiar gruff voice asked, “Did you die?”

Still reeling from his nightmare, Zuko shook his head. His heart was still hammering away in his chest. He could still hear the sound of millions of voices begging him to save them.

It was just a dream.

Nothing actually happened.

Not yet at least.

After a few calming breaths, Zuko said hoarsely, “It was just a nightmare. I promise.”

Jee frowned and nodded. After a brief pause, he asked, “Was it about a previous death?”

Zuko shook his head. After a second of hesitation he said, “It was about the Northern Water Tribe. Everyone was dead.”

Jee quietly studied Zuko for a moment before sighing. His features softened slightly then said, “As much as I hate you dying, I won’t object to you stopping an outright slaughter. You may not be able to save everyone, but I know you are both talented and stubborn enough to save as many people as possible.”

“You’re wrong.” Jee raised his eyebrows at him in surprise. Zuko continued, “I can save everyone. I can reset the stage as many times as I need. Outside of getting a little crazier and some scars, there aren’t any major side effects. There’s no reason why I can’t stop everyone from dying.”

Jee’s frown became more and more severe as he listened to Zuko talk. Once he was done, Jee stated calmly, “This is an invasion, Zuko. People will die. It’s one thing to keep the Avatar, his friends, the crew, and your uncle alive; but it’s a completely different beast to try to keep a whole nation plus an invading army from killing each other. There are simply too many people to keep track of.”

A small part of Zuko silently agreed with Jee, but he shoved it down and declared, “If I act out my role correctly, then no one important to the script will die.”

I think that’s a bit of a compromise.

Unimportant people like Zhao can die.

Jee rolled his eyes to the ceiling and muttered something about stubborn, suicidal princes along with a few choice words. Eventually, he took a deep breath then said, “As much as I want to, I can’t stop you from doing something stupid. Just promise me that you will still try to make a plan instead of just throwing yourself mindlessly into death.” Zuko nodded but didn’t say anything. Jee let out another grumbled curse then said, “Since we don’t know exactly when Zhao will give the order to attack, I’d suggest you go ahead and put your disguise back on. Go to the lifeboat deploy area on the starboard side. Look for the door with a white chalk mark on the handle and stay there until nightfall. Good luck.”

Jee crawled out of the makeshift room, and Zuko was now left with his thoughts. He put on his stolen armor, grabbed his personal items, and the bag of supplies then carefully made his way to the location Jee had directed him to. Soldiers had marched passed him without a second glance and sailors were rushing around as they prepared for the upcoming attack. Just as he entered the marked holding area for lifeboats, he heard the familiar loud clinking of metal and felt the ship rock in an equally similar fashion.

They’re launching catapults.

He rushed to the opening and watched as several dozen, if not hundreds, of Fire Nation ships launched flaming rocks at the walls and city of the Northern Water Tribe. Zuko could only watch as the strikes made large cracks in the outer wall. A sense of hopelessness overcame him when he saw a few of the projectiles clear the walls and undoubtedly hitting buildings.

Please.

Please be okay.

Smoke was rising from the city, but he couldn’t see any flames. Though he was too far away to be sure. He was almost tempted to reset the stage, but he knew that it wouldn’t accomplish anything.

There are too many ships.

Even if I kill Zhao, someone else will take his place.

Aang has to defeat them.

He and his friends will have to hold on until I get in there.

Still, he watched helplessly as the city was bombarded and wondered idly about the number of casualties. The image of piles of bodies from his nightmare came to the forefront of his mind.

He wanted to scream.

He wanted to throw up.

He wanted to burn everything to the ground.

Instead, he sat on the ledge and waited. Watched. And held his breath with the world as he waited for nightfall. Then, in the distance, he saw an all too familiar flying beast hurtling toward one of the ships. It was one that had broken rank and was significantly further ahead than the rest of the fleet.

The sacrificial ship.

It either draws enemy fire or starts to breach their defenses to make it easier for the rest of the fleet.

Aang will probably win this fight, but there’s no way he can take on the entire fleet.

Zuko watched from his perch as the catapults were destroyed. He didn’t notice the canoes of waterbenders until the ship was encased in ice. As soon as that ship was defeated, another ship broke rank and became the newest sacrificial ship. Sure enough, Aang and the waterbenders went after that one next. This played out dozens of times. Aang would take out a ship, another one would break rank, Aang would neutralize that one, and repeat.

He can’t seriously be planning on destroying the Fire Nation ships one at a time.

There isn’t enough time.

The sun had started to set, and Aang seemed to finally realize that he couldn’t win like this. Both he and his bison appeared to be exhausted. The waterbenders that had followed him retreated back to the safety of the wall and Aang followed behind them. The fleet came to a stop and Zuko could feel the lurch of the anchor being dropped. A little confused, Zuko looked around and noticed the moon.

That’s right.

Waterbenders are at their strongest during a full moon.

I bet it was Uncle’s idea to drop anchor and wait.

As soon as the day officially became night, Zuko prepared to lower his kayak. While he was untying it, the door behind him opened. He briefly tensed but immediately relaxed when he saw who it was.

I guess I shouldn’t be surprised that Uncle would want to see me before I left.

He hasn’t seen or spoken to me since my ship blew up.

His uncle calmly stated, “You are fishing for an octopus, my nephew. You need a tightly woven net, or he will squeeze through the tiniest hole and escape.”

Zuko sighed as he continued messing with the ropes and said, “I know what I’m doing Uncle.”

His uncle approached him as he said, “I’m sorry. I just nag you because…” his voice quickly became thick with emotions as he continued, “well…ever since I lost my son…” The grief in his voice was thick enough to stop him from mid-sentence.

Zuko turned his head enough to see the sorrow etched into his uncle’s face. Softly, Zuko interjected, “Uncle, you don’t have to say it.”

That brief pause seemed to be all his uncle needed to collect himself. With a clearer voice, his uncle continued, “I think of you as my own.”

Zuko finally turned to face his uncle and said, “I know, Uncle.”

That’s why I can’t tell you about my curse.

That’s why you can never know about my plans.

I don’t think your heart could handle the idea of me actively trying to die and not stop me.

Zuko bowed as he said, “We’ll meet again,”

I won’t let you die, and I can’t die yet.

There are still probably two more acts to get through first.

His uncle had rushed forward and pulled him into a hug. For a brief moment, Zuko let himself sink into the embrace before pulling away. Calmly, Zuko finished, “after I have the Avatar.”

I’m going to fail.

Multiple times.

Zuko climbed into the kayak and started to get ready to lower it when his uncle urgently said, “Remember your breath of fire! It could save your life out there!”

Zuko began to lower himself as he said, “I will.”

His uncle had walked to the edge and called out, “And keep your hood up! Keep your ears warm!”

Zuko rolled his eyes, more than a little exasperated, and replied, “I’ll be fine!”

What about me makes people think that I’m prone to danger?

I never take unnecessary risks; it’s the people around me that do.

I just get caught in the crossfire.

As soon as his kayak was in the water, he cautiously paddled through the fleet. Even the slightest loud splash had him glancing up to make sure no one heard him. He stayed close to hulls of ships to avoid being spotted. Once he made it to open water, he paddled more freely but still tried to stay close to ice floats. Zuko paddled what felt like hours until he reached the outskirts of the Northern Water Tribe. He pulled up to the ice and climbed out of his kayak. Carefully, he scaled an icy outcrop. From his vantage point, he could clearly see Water Tribe warriors patrolling on top of the damaged wall.

I don’t think they’ll just open the door for me.

Also, I don’t think this will be as easy to get into as that Fire Nation fortress.

There has to be a way for water to get in and out of the city.

Zuko turned around and saw some seal-turtles sliding into a hole in the ice. Curious, he approached the hole as he muttered, “Where are they going…?” He peered inside it and could just barely make out a tunnel through the dark water.

They have to come up for air somewhere.

This might be the safest and easiest way inside.

What can possibly go wrong?

Zuko huffed a humorless laugh then took a series of deep breaths. With one final inhale, he dived into the icy water. The sting of saltwater forced him to squint his eyes for the short period of time he could see. Without the moon or stars, the tunnel quickly became pitch black, and he had to rely on touch to navigate. It was impossible to know which way was truly up or down as he swam through the dark, narrow tunnel. His hands were rapidly becoming numb from the frigid water and constantly touching the ice walls. He could hear the distant muffled sounds of the seal-turtles and tried to follow them. The tunnel had started to noticeably get narrower and narrower the further he swam.

I don’t have time to turn around.

I’m either going to find the exit or I’m going to drown.

Jee is going to be so mad.

Zuko’s hand hit a wall. He felt around blindly until he came across a gap. It felt extremely narrow, but it did feel big enough for a seal-turtle to squeeze through. The desperate need for air was starting to take hold; and, with no other options, Zuko tried to squeeze himself through the gap. His head and shoulders were able to get through with relative ease. Then, halfway through, his bag got stuck.

His bag that was firmly strapped across his back had gotten wedged in the gap.

It pinned him in place.

He clawed at the smooth surface of the ice to try to pull himself forward.

Zuko frantically kicked his legs to try to force his way through.

He tried to push himself backwards.

Zuko couldn’t move.

He was stuck.

His fingers slid uselessly against the ice.

The darkness felt like it was crushing him.

The instinctive need to inhale took over.

Saltwater burned down his nose and throat.

He tried to cough.

More water filled his lungs.

He couldn’t feel his legs.

His arms stopped moving.

He floated limply.

For a brief moment he felt uncomfortably hot.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up coughing violently. The burn of saltwater lingered in his nose and lungs. He could still feel the crushing pressure around his midsection from the gap he was stuck in. A hand was gently thumping against his back as he tried to cough up water that wasn’t there. Blearily, Zuko looked up and saw the grim face of Jee. He kept his hand on Zuko’s back as he asked, “What killed you?”

Zuko continued to gasp for breath for a few more seconds before responding, “You know…now that I think about it…seal-turtles can hold their breath a lot longer than people can.”

Jee’s face shifted from grim acceptance to mild irritation, “What.”

Zuko, not really paying attention to Jee, now looked thoughtful as he said, “I bet they have some special way to navigate the dark tunnels too.” He finally noticed Jee’s growing disapproval and immediately tried to defend himself, “I wasn’t expecting it to be so dark! This is only the second time I have ever swam in a cave!” Zuko paused then added reluctantly, “Well, I didn’t exactly swim in the first one. The current pulled me in. I guess it was also extremely dark too. In my defense, I was actively dying that time, so studying the lighting situation wasn’t a top priority…”

Jee interrupted with a calm, level voice, “Zuko.”  Zuko’s mouth snapped shut and tried to look as innocent as possible. It didn’t work and Jee’s glare became more severe. He took a deep breath and pinched the bridge of his nose as he gritted out, “Did you, at any point, try to find another way inside or did you just take the first path you saw?”

 That’s a bit rude.

I took the second path, thank you very much!

Zuko objected, “It’s not like I can just walk in through the front door! Also, I don’t exactly have time to walk the entire perimeter of the wall and hope to find some sort of gap to crawl through. I figured that the turtle-seals have to come up for air at some point, so that seemed like the smartest and easiest entry point. It’s technically not a bad idea!” Jee looked like he was about to argue, but Zuko continued, “It’s really not! I think I just got turned around or missed a turn because I couldn’t see. If I keep my hand on the top of the tunnel, it’ll help keep me oriented.”

Jee had crossed his arms as Zuko was talking and still maintained his glare. Begrudgingly, he partially conceded, “I agree that you probably don’t have time to investigate the entire wall.” At Zuko’s triumphant smile, Jee continued, “However, you still failed to think things through. The weightlessness of swimming mixed with dark water is a recipe for disaster. On top of that, there could be dozens of tunnels that could lead anywhere or nowhere. I suggest that you try to swim as far up as you can and then melt through the rest of the ice.”

I guess that is smarter than hoping to find an opening and not drowning.

Zuko sighed dramatically and said, “Fine…I guess that would be the smartest plan.”

Jee gave him an unimpressed look and grumbled about stubborn, dramatic teenagers as he left. From there, all he had to do was repeat his previous actions. This time, however, he decided not to watch the siege.

I know watching won’t change anything, but there’s really no point in forcing myself to witness something I can’t change.

I don’t hate myself that much.

As Zuko was getting ready to leave, his uncle entered the room again. This time Zuko said, “I know you worry about me. The last couple of years have been…rough for us, but things are about to change.”

Things will change.

We will be in Act Two and that has to be different from Act One.

We can’t have too much repetition.

His uncle looked solemn as he said, “My nephew, change can be a dangerous thing. Too often the change we find is worse than what we originally had. You must make sure that your choices support the change you desire.”

Zuko rolled his eyes then said, “I know what I’m doing. You’ll see.”

As he lowered himself and his kayak into the ocean, his uncle called out the same concerned warnings that Zuko exasperatedly brushed off. With the same careful navigation, he found himself back at the same icy patch. He stood in front of the same tunnel opening.

Change can be dangerous.

I guess there is some truth in that.

If I try to do something completely different, then I could be repeating this day forever.

However, if I continue down the dangerous path I already know, then I’ll eventually get it right.

I do need to plan before each attempt though, or Jee will be beyond furious with me.

Zuko muttered to himself, “I guess I can try this again and see if anything improves.”

Once again, he took several deep breaths then dived into the icy water. This time, he kept a hand on the ceiling. It slowed him down, but it did help keep him oriented. As he made his way down the tunnel, his hand on the ceiling suddenly met open water. He felt along the wall and realized that the new tunnel was going up. Carefully he navigated his way through the new tunnel and kept his hand on the wall facing the surface. The all-consuming darkness made the space feel bigger than it actually was but somehow more claustrophobic at the same time. The freezing water was starting to make his limbs numb.

I need to find a way out soon or I’m going to drown again.

As he swam, he realized that he was starting to make out shapes. Soon enough, he was actually able to see the icy walls. With a few more desperate kicks, Zuko breached the water’s surface. He held onto an outcrop of ice as he tried to regain his breath. He looked around and realized that he was still in the cave system. The walls were smooth, and he could see a multitude of archways that led to other chambers. In the center of the chamber he was in, there was a small island of ice that some seal-turtles were resting on. Judging by the amount of noise the creatures were making; he was willing to bet that there were other ice islands in the neighboring chambers. As he inspected the ceiling, he discovered the source of light. There were a few openings that he could see the moon shining through.

The sound of his chattering teeth echoed around him. He took in a deep breath, then exhaled a small plume of fire. Warmth quickly spread throughout his limbs, and he started to shiver violently. He did another exhale of fire, and his shivering died down a little more. However, he was still in the freezing water and the icy numbness was quickly returning. Zuko eyed the island and decided to swim to it.

I need to warm up and dry off a little bit.

Jee will be insufferable if I die from hypothermia when I had a perfectly good chance to not do that.

As he swam, the seal-turtles that were in the water started to swim erratically. He figured it was because of his presence and ignored them. It’s when he saw them frantically climbing on to the ice island while still making various panicked noises that he started getting suspicious.

These animals should be at least a little accustomed to people even if the locals hunt them.

This seems like way too much of a reaction to me being in the water, so what…

Before he could finish his thought, something grabbed his leg and pulled him under.

Multiple sharp things were lodged into his calf.

Teeth!

Something is trying to eat me!

Zuko kicked wildly with his other leg and managed to get free.

He swam frantically to the surface.

His hand met air, but the creature bit down on his thigh.

 It rapidly pulled him under again.

Agony rippled across his body.

The creature shook its head violently back and forth.

Zuko could feel the teeth shred through skin and muscle.

His head smacked into the icy wall of the cave.

The water became murky with his blood.

Bubbles escaped his mouth as he tried to scream.

The creature drug him even further down.

It now spun its body rapidly.

He heard his flesh ripping violently.

The water became murkier.

Zuko distantly realized that the creature no longer had a grip on him.

Weakly, he tried to swim back to the surface.

He couldn’t feel his leg.

The creature came back.

It bit the same area of his thigh.

The taste of blood mixed with salt filled his mouth.

Darkness tunneled his vision.

The creature shook its head violently side to side.

Darkness.

Agony radiated from his leg. He clawed at it wildly trying to dislodge a creature that wasn’t there anymore. The taste of blood and salt stained his tongue. Someone was prying his hands off his leg. He was so cold and shivering violently. Zuko found himself suddenly pressed firmly against something hard. The smell of salt, coal, and leather broke him out of his panic. Warmth seeped through the armor and spread through his body. A gruff voice asked, “Are you back?”

Zuko swallowed and tried to ignore the lingering taste of bloody saltwater as he replied hoarsely, “Yeah.”

Jee hummed then asked, “What happened?”

Still trying to shake off the feeling of teeth ripping through his flesh, Zuko didn’t immediately respond. Instead, he pressed closer to the source of warmth. His mind eventually felt put together enough for him to say, “I was eaten.” As soon as the words left his mouth, he suddenly became outraged. He tried to sit up on his own but ended up collapsing back against Jee. Growling, he started to rant, “This is the fourth time I’ve been eaten! Two of those times were by a water monster. Do I smell good or something? Is there some sort of invisible sign that says, ‘eat me’ to every creature out there?!”

Jee blinked down at him in mild horror and asked, “You’ve been eaten four times?”

Zuko crossed his arms and sulked against Jee as he grumbled, “Yes, and only three of those times were by animals. I will never forget the cannibals for as long as I live.”

Jee looked like he wanted to ask more questions about those deaths but seemed to decide against it. Instead, he asked, “Do you know what killed you?”

Still disgruntled, Zuko grumbled out, “I don’t know for certain. I never actually saw it, but I think it might have been a shark of some kind. That’s the only other predator of seal-turtles I can think of that would thrive in those tunnels.”

“Tunnels?”

Zuko then caught Jee up with his previous plan and what adjustments he made. Jee still didn’t look impressed with Zuko’s choice to go into the water, but he didn’t argue with Zuko’s logic of why it was the better option. Instead, Jee pursed his lips and asked, “How do you plan on surviving the shark?”

“Easy. I’m going to get out of the water as fast as possible.” Jee gave him a deeply unimpressed look, so Zuko explained, “I think I drew its attention when I used firebending to raise my body temperature. I was in the water for a while before that and nothing happened. It was only after I raised the temperature that it started to hunt.”

Jee frowned in thought as he said, “I suppose that makes sense. A predator in this climate would probably find a way to seek out its prey using heat.” He then raised an eyebrow at Zuko and asked, “Did you get any new scars?”

Zuko, now able to sit up on his own, rolled down the edge of his pants and inspected his thigh. Sure enough, there was a crescent shape of small incisions that circled most of the area. Each tooth mark was about two inches long with about a half inch between each tooth. The scars were jagged along the edges like they had captured some of the violent shaking he endured. The skin was pale pink and were slightly raised. Jee also inspected the bite mark and said, “It looks like it severed your femoral artery. I’m assuming you died relatively quickly.”

“It actually took three bites out of me before I died. The first bite was on my calf, and the other two were here. I think it might have partially severed it the first time it bit my thigh, and then completely severed it when it bit down the second time.”

Jee looked slightly mortified but didn’t comment. As soon as Zuko was ready, Jee left and Zuko waited to leave as well. Without any issues, Zuko returned to the life raft room and tried not to watch the Northern Water Tribe get pummeled. Just like before, his uncle came to see him off. His uncle said the same words he did the first time around, and Zuko gave the same responses.

I don’t really see the point of saying new mushy stuff every time.

He won’t remember any of it, and there’s a good chance that I’ll end up resetting anyways.

With little effort, Zuko made his way back to the same patch of ice and stood in front of the same tunnel.

Okay, time to face a shark.

I wonder if I can get a trophy.

He dived into the dark icy water. Zuko felt along the top of the tunnel until he felt the same opening to the next area. With the need for air growing rapidly, Zuko swam to the surface. He barely gave himself time to catch his breath before immediately swimming to the ice island. As he flopped on his back onto the ice, he saw an ominous fin circle around the island.

Okay, new theory.

It’s attracted to movement, not heat.

That’s good to know.

Zuko lay there panting, trying to catch his breath. He could feel ice starting to form on his clothes. His fingers and toes were numb. Shakily, he took a deep breath then exhaled a small plume of fire. Heat spread through his body. His hands and feet felt like they were burning. Groaning, Zuko forced himself to make another small flame. The burning subsided, but the cold still lingered. He could hear the panicked cries of the seal-turtles but chose to ignore them.

I’m not in the water, so I am no longer on the menu.

Just then, he heard claws scraping against ice. Zuko, thinking it was just an exhausted seal-turtle, decided not to investigate it. As he was about to stand up and try to find a way out, something large smashed into him.

Teeth embedded themselves into his shoulder.

Zuko howled in agony and tried to retaliate with fire.

The creature let out a guttural growl that vibrated Zuko’s bones.

It suddenly shook Zuko violently in retaliation.

He smashed into the ice repeatedly.

The air was knocked out of his lungs.

His shirt became drenched with blood.

The ice was smeared with it.

Zuko couldn’t breathe.

The creature stopped shaking him and pinned him face down with one massive paw.

Its teeth dug deeper into his shoulder.

Warm blood was gushing from the wounds.

A large pool of it was forming underneath him.

He could feel it smearing onto his face.

Claws dug into his back.

He could hear his shirt tearing.

Zuko could feel the skin on his back tearing and stinging from the cold air.

With another guttural growl, the creature yanked his arm.

What air Zuko had managed to inhale was immediately let out in an agonized wail.

He could hear his skin and muscles tearing.

The bones in his shoulder popped and crunched.

Teeth dug deeper into his flesh.

He couldn’t move.

His vision was fading.

Another loud pop.

Cold air was hitting somewhere it shouldn’t.

Zuko weakly turned his head and stared numbly.

His arm was gone.

The creature was tearing strips of flesh off it and devouring it.

It’s large teeth easily bite off portions of bone.

The once white ice island was now red and pink.

His blinks got slower.

Everything stopped hurting.

The shark started to prowl back to him.

It bit his shoulder again.

Zuko let out a weak whine.

Another loud crunch of bone.

Darkness.

Zuko woke up screaming. A hand almost immediately covered his mouth. Agony radiated from his shoulder. The arm that was both missing but still there sent shockwaves of indescribable pain through his body. A panicked voice was calling out to him. It blended with the roars of a creature that wasn’t there. The cold numbness of death made his hands weak as they tried to grasp his shoulder. The hand over his mouth didn’t leave, but he was moved to rest against something hard. The smell of leather, salt, and coal filled his nose. The warmth of what he was pressed against chased away some of the cold and numbness.

Breathe.

Focus.

He tried to take some calming breaths through his nose. Zuko started to shiver violently from the lingering cold, and the person holding him cursed under their breath.

Jee.

The man bundled Zuko closer to his chest and raised his body temperature to counter Zuko’s shivering. The heat radiating from him made Zuko start to relax. Jee had removed his hand from Zuko’s mouth cautiously. When Zuko didn’t resume screaming, Jee placed his hand on Zuko’s back and sat silently.

Zuko blinked numbly at his surroundings. He, on some level, knew he was back on Zhao’s ship. However, his eyes could still see the blood-stained ice. He whined and pressed his face into Jee’s armor as he squeezed his eyes closed. Jee hummed and tucked Zuko’s head under his chin.

They continued to sit like this until Zuko finally grumbled hoarsely, “I hate the ocean.”

Jee continued to hold Zuko as he asked, “What happened?”

Zuko stayed silent as he tried to parse together what happened. The more he thought about it, the more enraged he became. He tried to spring up but ended up smacking the top of his head on Jee’s chin and falling backwards. Jee cursed as he rubbed his chin and Zuko groaned pathetically as he clutched his head. He whined, “Why is the world out to hurt me? What did I ever do?!”

Dryly, Jee responded, “I don’t think the world made you suddenly move without warning me.”

Zuko scowled then suddenly remembered what got him worked up in the first place. Shakily, he forced himself to lean against the wall as he ranted, “I am going to kill that stupid shark! It’s killed me twice now, and I cannot let that stand!” In lieu of pacing, Zuko angrily fiddled with his fishing line.

Jee looked torn between being surprised by the fact that Zuko still had the fishing line and mortified to hear that Zuko was mauled by a shark multiple times. He settled with being cautious as he asked, “How do you plan on dealing with the shark?”

Still angrily untangling his knotted mess, Zuko growled out, “Well first I’m going to get out of the water as fast as possible. Then I’ll try to set it on fire before it crawls on land.”

Now back to being slightly mortified, Jee asked, “The shark is amphibious?”

“Yup. I hope the Water Tribe hasn’t figured out how to domesticate those monsters because I don’t think you all can handle an army of trained land sharks. Not without a lot of casualties at least.”

Jee shook off his mortification then asked, “Are you sure that there isn’t an easier way inside?”

Zuko shrugged then said, “It’s kind of hard to see in the pitch-black tunnels, so there might be a different way in. However, it might be too far away for me to swim to, it could still have a shark, or it could lead somewhere out in the open that’ll get me killed/captured.” Zuko, somewhat calmed down, grinned as he said, “The only obvious danger, besides the cold, is the shark. Once I take care of it, I should be considerably safer.”

Still not looking particularly comforted, Jee sighed. He looked Zuko over then asked, “Where’s your new scar?”

Flailing into an upright position, Zuko squirmed out of his shirt then twisted his head to try to get a good look at where he knew the shark had bit him. He felt himself going cross-eyed the more he tried to contort to look at his left shoulder. Jee huffed a laugh then asked, “Do you need help?”

Zuko snarked, “I’m beyond help.” At Jee’s unimpressed look, Zuko rolled his eyes and sighed, “Would you please describe it to me.”

With his own eye roll, Jee got closer to inspect the scar and hissed at the sight. Absently, he said, “It looks like it ripped your arm off.”

“You aren’t wrong but give me details!”

Jee was a bit taken aback by Zuko’s flippant attitude to losing an arm but quickly recovered. He cleared his throat then said, “There’s a clear ring of teeth marks that go across your shoulder blade and your clavicle. The teeth marks are about two inches long and are jagged in a way that hint at some sort of violent motion. There’s also a slight deformity to the shoulder blade.”

Curious and slightly alarmed, Zuko asked, “What do you mean ‘slight deformity’?”

Hurriedly, Jee replied, “It doesn’t look too bad. If I didn’t know any better, it looks like you broke your shoulder years ago, and it didn’t heal quite right. I doubt it’ll impact your range of motion much. Even if it does, you’re right-handed so I doubt you’ll notice in your day-to-day life.”

Zuko still rotated his arm and shoulder to test its flexibility. True to Jee’s word, it didn’t seem too different from his other arm. There was, however, some ominous popping if he stretched in certain ways and some resistance in others.

I guess this proves that my bones do, in fact scar.

That’s just great.

Zuko put his shirt back on and resumed stewing. Jee picked up Zuko’s tangled ball of fishing line and said, “I’m surprised you still have this after all the complaining you did during lessons.”

Attempting to appear nonchalant, Zuko said, “It’s good quality line. It would’ve been a shame to let it burn with the ship.”

Jee raised an eyebrow at him and a smirk tugged at his lips. With an equally nonchalant voice, he replied, “Of course. I’m sure you have no other reasons or motives to keep it.”

Zuko sniffed haughtily and said, “I only keep it because it’s useful.”

At that, Jee snorted and held up said tangled mess then stated, “Well, if you only keep it for its usefulness, then I guess I should get rid of it. It’s clearly no longer useful.”

Scrambling, Zuko let out an uncharacteristically childish, “No! Give it back!”

Jee gave him a lopsided grin and handed the lump of line back to Zuko who immediately snatched it. At Zuko's petulant glare, Jee chuckled and left the little hidden room. As soon as Jee left, Zuko sulked and glared at the wall.

Stupid Jee.

How dare he try to take back what he gave to me.

That’s just mean.

With a now practiced ease, Zuko retraced his steps all the way back to the opening to the tunnel. His uncle’s parting words still wormed their way into his head, but he quickly shook them off. He needed to focus. Without another thought, he dived into the tunnel.

Zuko still kept his hand on the ceiling, but by now he had a good idea of where the opening should be. Once he found it, he swam up it as fast as he could. As he went up, he saw something swimming rapidly toward him.

NO!

NOT AGAIN!

He breached the surface and clawed his way up the island, “Go! Go! Go!” Zuko panted as he watched an all too familiar dorsal fin disappear beneath the water. Shakily, he stood up and shouted, “That is it! I hate the ocean! I hate caves! AND I ESPECIALLY HATE YOU! HOLD STILL!” He sent a ball of flames in the direction he last saw the shark and muttered, “Stupid shark…where did you go?!”

Zuko spun wildly and scanned the water. Even though the moon did provide some light, the water was still pretty dark. Behind him, he heard the familiar sound of claws scraping on ice. Without hesitating, Zuko whipped flames in that direction and shouted, “NO! You are not allowed to eat me again! Do I look like a mochi ball to you!? I know my insides are red, but I’m pretty sure I taste completely different.” The shark howled in pain as the flames burned its skin, but it managed to dive back down into the water.

With a manic twinkle in his eyes, Zuko scanned the water’s surface for signs of movement. The water seemed unusually calm and Zuko started to get impatient. He snarled, “Where are you!? The play can’t progress until I kill you. Something tells me you aren’t going to let me pass peacefully.” From the corner of his eye, he saw an all too familiar fin rise out of the water. Before the shark could react, Zuko sent a large ball of flames at it. It howled and writhed in agony. Zuko sent a few more balls of flames. The smell of burnt flesh filled the cave and the shark’s cries faded to silence. Its now lifeless corpse floated on the surface.

Now that he was no longer in danger of being eaten, Zuko could now get a better look at the shark. It was easily longer than his kayak, and its head was filled with rows of large teeth. The creature was covered in a layer of white fur with random black spots. There were small, rounded ears on the top of its head and long whiskers around its mouth. Zuko stared at the shark for a few minutes, watching for any signs of life. Eventually he reluctantly said, “Either you’re a good actor or you’re actually dead. I’m not at that point in my revival cycle that I feel the need to do confirm kills, but don’t test me.” He looked around the cave and muttered, “Now where’s the exit? There has to be a relatively easy way out of here…” However, all he saw was water and icy archways that led to other water filled chambers. He looked up at the openings, but they were way too high to even be considered a viable option.

He ranted, “How am I supposed to get out of here?! The openings in the ceiling are too high, I don’t think Aang could even reach them! Well, maybe he could, but he’s an airbender. Well, I’m not an airbender!” He continued to grumble unhappily to himself as he looked around for a possible exit. Not too far away he spotted an entrance to another underwater tunnel. Zuko stared at it and weighed his options, “I guess I could either slowly die here from hypothermia, or I could take my chances in the water again.” He glanced at the still floating corpse and said, “What are the odds that there’s another one of those things down here? Maybe they’re extremely territorial and that was the only one. Maybe it was the last of its kind, and I will have nothing to worry about.”

Zuko snorted then took a few deep breaths then jumped back into the icy water. Without a second thought, he swam into the new tunnel. Just like he did with the initial tunnel, he kept his hand on the ceiling as it rapidly darkened. It felt like the passage stretched on for ages as the darkness consumed him. His lungs started to spasm out of a desperate need for air. He almost resigned himself to drowning when his hand was suddenly no longer in water. Frantically, he shoved his head above water and started to greedily gulp down air while coughing up some water that had invaded his nose and mouth. It was pitch black, so he used his hands to feel around. It didn’t take long for him to realize that, instead of entering a new chamber, he had found a small pocket of air. Feeling a little panicked, he thought out loud, “Okay, air is good. We can’t continue the play without it. However, I am worried about the quality and the quantity, though my options are extremely limited. I could go back, but I don’t want to chance whatever might be attracted by the shark’s corpse. Going forward might give me better results, or I could drown.” He paused for a moment, then shrugged and dived back down. He continued forward.

The tunnel felt like it was getting wider, and Zuko could feel a weak current pulling him forward the further he went. Feeling slightly encouraged, he followed the current’s pull until he realized that he was in open water. With his hand on the wall, he swam what he hoped was upwards. He saw light and honed in on it. Gasping, he breached the surface and scrambled onto an icy outcrop. He left his legs dangling in the water as he lay there panting. With a few small plumes of fire, any traces of icy numbness vanished.

He looked around the new chamber he was in and noticed that it wasn’t too different from the previous one. There were still random openings to the outside world in the ceiling, and there were archways leading to other chambers. However, the archways were more concentrated and made the place look like even more of a maze. Also, instead of an island of ice, there were multiple small ice ledges that were just big enough for him or a seal-turtle to sit on. As he was trying to figure out his next move, he saw movement from the corner of his eye.

Zuko scrambled to his feet and immediately shot fire in that direction while shouting, “NO! I’m not going through this again!” He could just barely make out the telltale shape of a shark underneath the water’s surface. It immediately swam away when Zuko started shooting fire at it. His eyes scanned the water wildly. He reacted to each little splash of water with a violent stream of fire. The sound of dripping water and Zuko’s panicked panting echoed off the ice. A loud ominous crack broke Zuko’s concentration.

The ice beneath his feet shattered.

He fell into the glacial water.

Zuko went to swim back to the surface.

Large chunks of ice smashed into the water.

The resulting current spun him around.

The deafening echoes of ice collapsing into the water made his ears ring.

His vision was obscured by the violently turning water.

Something large and cold slammed into him.

It sent him plummeting to the bottom of the water.

His screams were muffled and warped by the water.

Air bubbles danced from his mouth to the surface.

He hit the icy floor with a resounding boom.

The ice was too thick to melt through.

He couldn’t move.

A familiar shadowy figure was swimming towards him.

I’d rather drown.

An overwhelming feeling of rage consumed him.

He inhaled.

The icy water burned down his nose and throat.

The last few air bubbles escaped his lungs as he tried to cough.

Numbness crawled up his limbs.

Darkness.

Once again, Zuko woke up screaming but it was different this time. It wasn’t out of agony. Not out of fear. Not even because of the icy numbness of death that clutched his heart and lungs. Rage. All consuming rage. A hand had covered his mouth, but Zuko still screamed. A voice tried to reassure him, but all he could focus on was the rush of blood in his ears and the distant sound of shattering ice.

He screamed.

And screamed.

And screamed.

His voice finally gave out, and he started coughing with each attempt to resume.

Finally, he went limp and stared straight ahead. His surroundings started to come into focus. The walls made out of boxes, the soft glow of the crystals, and then the man sitting beside him. Jee was giving him a concerned frown. Silently, he brought a cup of water to Zuko’s lips which he drank greedily. Somewhat relieved that Zuko was back in the present, Jee asked, “How many times have you died today?”

Zuko blinked slowly as he tried to process Jee’s question. His mind was a storm of rage and numbness. Nothing felt real. With effort, he forced out, “Four times.”

Jee pursed his lips then heaved a sigh. He steeled himself and said, “Walk me through everything. Let me help you stop dying today.”

The numbness was gradually fading, but the rage was only growing. Zuko weakly snarled, “It’s that stupid shark. I can navigate the tunnels and caverns with relative ease, but it’s the sharks that are the biggest problem. Apparently, throwing fire recklessly in an ice cave ruins the structural integrity of the ice you’re standing on. However, that’s the best way for me to kill the sharks.” His voice grew stronger as he spoke; and, by the time he was done speaking, he sounded somewhat recovered.

Jee seemed to choose to ignore his comment about fire in an ice cave and instead focused on Zuko’s shark problem. He asked, “Is it possible to kill them while still being in the water?”

“No, it’s too dark and they blend in way too well. Also, I really don’t want to be in the water any longer than is absolutely necessary.”

“Is there any way out of wherever you’re at without getting back into the water?”

Zuko sulked while shaking his head and said, “Not for the first shark. The only way out of there is by going back into the water. I didn’t get a chance to look around the second area, but I don’t have high hopes that it’ll be any different.” A contemplative manic smile stretched across his face as he added, “I could just send as much fire as possible into the tunnels and melt them. If I get the tunnels to collapse, it could possibly kill the sharks. Depending on how much of it rests above the tunnels, it could also destabilize parts of the Northern Water Tribe. There’s also a good chance that it would kill me in the process too. It would be worth it if it meant those stupid sharks were dead.” He started to snicker manically.

Jee stared at him in growing agitation and then blurted out, “You’re grounded.”

They both fell silent and stared at each other in equal amounts of shock. Zuko recovered first and started spluttering in outrage, “You can’t-that’s not-I out rank you!” He attempted to scramble into an upright position but ended up only flailing wildly.

Jee went from shocked by his own words to glaring down at Zuko with an air of authority and replied cooly, “You’re still grounded.”

Zuko puffed up in indignant rage and argued, “I’m your commanding officer! You can’t ground me!”

With a snort and a smirk, Jee replied, “Technically, at the moment, you aren’t my commanding officer. Zhao is until the invasion is over.”

Still floundering, Zuko’s tone changed to something that resembled exasperation as he through up his hands and argued, “But I didn’t do anything wrong!”

Any humor that was on Jee’s face faded into something stormy as he said, “You are seriously thinking about falling back onto your process of elimination.” Zuko opened his mouth, but Jee snapped, “Don’t argue with me. I’ve been around you long enough to know how stubborn you are. You promised to plan your next moves with the intent of reducing your deaths. Purposefully throwing yourself into dangerous situations because you’re frustrated is you breaking your promise.”

Now sulking, Zuko grumbled, “You remind me of Sato.”

“Who?”

Zuko shrugged and tried to appear nonchalant as he said, “He was, or maybe still is, the Captain of the Royal Guard. Before I was banished, I used to cause a bunch of trouble that he would try to clean up. He was just doing his job.”

Probably sensing that this was a sensitive topic, Jee cautiously asked, “What happened?”

After giving another shrug, Zuko replied, “It was my fault. I got too attached and ended up breaking an easy promise. I doubt he was as attached to me as I was to him.” While he spoke, he fiddled with his vial of poison. After a beat of silence, Zuko asked softly, “When the invasion is over, if you can’t find me, will you find Sato and tell him I’m sorry about breaking my promise?”

Jee pursed his lips then reluctantly nodded as he said, “I will find you; but if I can’t get to you for some reason, then I’ll look for him.” As Jee was leaving the room, he called back over his shoulder, “You’re still grounded, by the way.” Zuko’s protests went ignored as Jee snickered and closed off the entrance to the hidden room.

Zuko allowed himself to continue to stew until it was time for him to make his way to his kayak. Just like before, he sat and waited for nightfall while trying to ignore the sounds of a nation under siege. Also, just like before, his uncle came to see him off. His uncle’s worried words barely registered, but Zuko still appreciated the sentiment.

Before long, he was standing in front of the entrance to the tunnel. With the same deep breaths, he steeled his nerves and jumped into the icy water. He barely needed to feel the ceiling since he had the path almost memorized. As quickly as possible, he swam to the surface and scrambled onto the ice island. Just as he frantically stood up, he saw an ominous shadowy figure swim away. Manic energy coursed through Zuko’s body as he shouted, “What is wrong with you?! Humans shouldn’t even be on your menu!”

Zuko stood silently, barely breathing, as he listened for any sign of the shark. His eyes carefully scanned the water’s surface and the edges of the ice. Sure enough, he heard the sound of claws against the ice behind him. With a shout, Zuko sent a large ball of flames at the shark which retreated with a wail. Panting, Zuko ranted, “Look, I don’t like this either. If I had a choice, I wouldn’t even be down here. However, you started this feud so now I’m ending it.” The shark’s snarled response echoed off the cave walls.

As he scanned the water, he saw an all too familiar silhouette and sent a volley of flames at it while shouting, “Just hurry up and die already! I have places to be, another shark to kill, and different ways to die that don’t involve you!” The shark thrashed wildly under the water. Its struggling slowed to a stop, and its motionless corpse floated to the surface. With a triumphant shout, Zuko declared, “Finally! I killed the shark! Again!”

With a growing manic smile, Zuko dived back into the water and made his way through the next tunnel. He scampered onto the ice outcrop and tried to catch his breath while trying to find the other shark. Zuko pondered, “Why are you abominations down here anyways? Sure, there’s seal-turtles, but that doesn’t explain how you even got in here. Maybe there are some deeper entry ways that you swam through, but I doubt it.” Zuko’s eyes immediately locked on to an ominous shape barreling towards him. With a roar, Zuko sent a ball of flames at it. The shark surfaced long enough to thrash and wail before diving back down.

Zuko growled, “Maybe the waterbenders sealed your species down here. The holes are big enough for seal-turtles to get in and out of, but you can’t. No one is supposed to actually come in this way, so maybe you are some sort of guard animals.” A few minutes went by without any sign of the shark, and Zuko was losing what little patience he had left. He continued to scan the water as he ranted, “Where did you go? I can’t let you live now that I’ve injured you. If I do, you’ll start some sort of quest for vengeance to restore your honor. You’ll end up killing some other idiot that wonders down here, and that will start a war of attrition. There will be a war between the surface dwellers and the sharks. Killing you will restore balance and prevent a future war. I’m basically doing your species a favor by killing you!”

The faint sound of cracking ice got Zuko’s attention, and he looked at the outcrop he was standing on to see that it was melting. Realization dawned on him as he said, “Fire melts ice, and I’m a firebender in an ice cave. Great. I guess my only options are to either chance getting crushed to death by ice again or potentially get eaten by a shark.” He looked around wildly and spotted another outcrop that wasn’t too terribly far away. The ominous cracking was getting louder, and there still wasn’t any sign of the shark.

With a petulant whine, Zuko jumped into the water and swam as fast as he could. He yelped in terror as he pulled himself up and turned just in time to see the shark about to close in on him. With a panicked kick, Zuko sent a gust of flames at it. They hit their mark, and the shark let out another pained howl before diving back down. Zuko panted rapidly in panic and rage as he shouted, “Where’s Katara when you need her?! She’s great at stabbing things! Sure, it’s usually me she’s stabbing, but I bet I could bait her into trying to stab me then dodging so this thing ends up dying instead.” The ledge he had been previously standing on collapsed, and the archway it was attached to crumbled into the water. Waves of water broke over the surface of the outcrop he was standing on. The cacophony of breaking ice and turning water echoed deafeningly all around him. As quickly as the chaos started, it ended. Now there was more ice floating on the surface, and the chamber was larger.

Zuko, once again, scanned the water for the shark. This time, instead of waiting, the shark decided to charge full speed at the small ledge Zuko was standing on. He quickly concentrated as much fire as he could and blasted it at the shark as soon as it lunged out of the water. Instead of sinking its teeth into Zuko’s flesh, it got a mouth full of fire. The smell of burnt flesh clogged Zuko’s nose, and the agonized wails of the shark echoed around him. It thrashed wildly in the water as it tried to escape the source of its misery. Gradually, its movements began to slow, and its cries grew weaker. Finally, it went silent.

Zuko stood there panting as he watched the shark’s corpse bob in the water. He slumped over as much as he could in relief without falling back into the water. As soon as he realized the shark was dead, he crowed, “I did it! I am a legend now! If people knew about this, they would tell legends about how I slayed the man-eating sharks. They would call me Zuko the Shark Conqueror. Zuko the Shark Slayer! ZUKO THE INVENSIBLE! Now how am I going to get out of here?”

He looked around the cavern, and his eyes landed on another tunnel opening. Groaning, Zuko whined, “Is there really no other way out of here? Why doesn’t this flooded ice cave have any easily accessible exits?! I’m filing a complaint as soon as I get out of here.”

After grumbling a bit more, Zuko took some deep breaths then dived into the icy water. Once again, he was enveloped by darkness. He felt along the ceiling for any openings that led upward as he made his way through the tunnel. Air started to become a more pressing concern the longer he swam. Zuko was about to resign himself to drowning when he heard the muffled sound of something diving into the water. He could just barely make out a seal-turtle entering the water through a hole in the ice. Desperately, he swam to the exit in the hopes of making it before his lungs gave out.

Exhausted, Zuko pulled himself out of the water and onto the ice. The cavern was full of seal-turtles that all started barking as soon as they saw him. Weak and half frozen, Zuko could just barely turn himself on his side and exhale a couple small balls of fire to warm up. He mustered what little energy he could to stand up and make his way through the noisy creatures. Their calls echoed deafeningly around him, and he finally snapped, “Quiet! You’re either going to draw the attention of another shark or some Water Tribe warrior.” The seal-turtles stared blankly at him as he shuffled past them. The silence only lasted a few seconds before they resumed their barking. Exasperated, Zuko snapped, “If you draw the attention of another shark, and I die, I’m going to kill all of you. It’s only fair. Spies always get executed first.”

He walked around the cavern and tried to find a way out. There were several other tunnels, but many were either too small for him to fit or clearly went down. As he continued to search, his eyes found a suspiciously round hole with water gushing out of it. Zuko grumbled, “Okay my options are incredibly limited. I could go down, but I really don’t want to. For starters, there could be more sharks and going down is what got me in this death maze to begin with. The water tube looks manmade, so it probably leads somewhere. However, I don’t think I have the strength to battle rushing water, let alone grasp the ice walls. There’s no way that the walls aren’t completely smooth.” He looked back and forth between his options then groaned as he said, “Well, if I learned anything, the stupidest choice is usually the right one.”

Zuko walked up to the waterfall and started to climb up the ice wall. He heated his hands just enough to melt the ice to create hand and foot holds. The force of the saltwater smashing into his face almost made it impossible to keep his eyes open. It took every drop of willpower to keep the frigid water from going into his nose and mouth. Each painstaking step felt like an eternity. All he could focus on was moving forward and not drowning. Even the smallest slip could lead to another death.

The current suddenly shifted, and he saw a faint light above him. Desperately, he swam to it. His head breached the water’s surface. Weakly, he coughed and gasped out roughly, “Air. Air is good. Light is a close second.” The pocket he found himself in just had enough room for his head to poke up. Exhaustion was making it harder and harder to swim. Zuko stuck his head underwater and tried to see if there was an obvious path. When he believed he saw something he came up for another gulp of air then said, “Okay, tunnel that leads to somewhere is a good start. I’ll check it out. If it’s bad I’ll…die I guess.” He took a deep breath then swam to the new tunnel.

It turned out, the tunnel was more of an archway into another massive underwater chamber. However, there was a bright light at the very top that could be an exit. Zuko pushed his drained body to the surface and ran headfirst into a sheet of ice.

No!

This is unacceptable!

I’m going to make my own exit.

Jee did say to do that.

Zuko pounded weakly on the ice, and some air bubbles escaped his mouth. In a last-ditch effort to save himself, he turned away from the ice then placed his palms against it on either side of his head. He rapidly heated his hands, and the ice began to weaken and melt. As soon as his hands touched air, he used his last dredges of strength to pull himself out.

Weakly, Zuko looked around and noticed that he was in some sort of water runoff tunnel. The sky was still dark, but he had no clue what time it was. With numb fingers, he opened his bag and clumsily fished out a blanket. Zuko didn’t have the strength to stand up, but he spread out the blanket as much as he could and rolled on to it. He stuffed his bag under his head and managed to create enough heat to mostly dry himself off. Clumsily, he reached for one side of the blanket and wrapped himself in it. Before he knew it, his eyes had slipped closed. All he could do was hope that no one stumbled across him and that he didn’t freeze to death.

“You can’t save everyone.”

Yes I can.

Chapter Text

(Zuko, age ten)

It had been a month since the Royal Family had returned from their vacation to Ember Island. Iroh and Lu Ten had set sail a few days after returning to lead the siege against Ba Sing Se. Azula still complained about her missed opportunity to explore the volcanic valley, but most of her aggression was focused on Lu Ten rather than Zuko.

I guess that makes sense.

She doesn’t know that I gave Uncle the map.

Azula still sent him odd looks, but she seemed content to not bother him for the moment. Their mother, on the other hand, was acting strange. While they normally tried to spend at least an hour or two everyday together, it now seemed like she was trying to spend every waking moment with him. She was at his door every morning, ate almost every meal with him, walked him to and from his tutor and trainer, and she would find some reason for them to stay together until it was time to go to bed. When that time came, she would escort him back to his room. Zuko was fairly certain that she stayed outside his door long after he got into bed.

Her odd behavior didn’t go unnoticed. Azula kept giving them odd looks that he would shrug helplessly at. Sometimes, she would try to help by attempting to pull Zuko away to play, but Ursa would dismiss her. Ozai would send subtle, and not so subtle, jabs about her hovering. Even Fire Lord Azulon noticed the strangeness. Zuko wouldn’t necessarily say the man did it out of concern, but he did say to Ursa in passing, “A smothered flame will always die.”

I guess I know where Uncle gets his love for cryptic messages.

Ursa either didn’t catch the odd looks she was getting or was choosing to ignore them.

For the first few days, Zuko wasn’t too surprised by her hovering. She did seem to stay close to him after he had a “nightmare”, but things would go back to normal relatively quickly. For that period of time, Zuko enjoyed the extra attention. However, it had been weeks, and her constant presence was grating at his nerves. He couldn’t even visit Sato without her at his heels.

Zuko had recently started trying to avoid her with little success. There wasn’t anywhere in the castle that he could go that she couldn’t get to as well. Today, he got up earlier than usual and snuck into the library. A part of him was relieved to see that she wasn’t camped outside his door. Zuko made absolutely certain that no one saw him. He quietly made his way into the furthest corner and tucked himself under a desk after grabbing a scroll. This desk was one of his favorite hiding spots. It had dark wooden panels on all four sides with a gap in front just big enough for someone to sit. One side of the desk had drawers, but the other was hollow. It was big enough for Zuko to curl up in and be out of sight.

It's not the most comfortable spot, but it is the least likely place anyone will look.

Zuko tried not to think about how he’s hiding from his mother. Instead, he strained his eyes as he tried to read the scroll. In the distance, he heard footsteps approaching. At first, he believed they belonged to one of the librarians or maybe a servant until a voice called out, “Zuko? Are you in here?” He tensed at his mother’s voice and didn’t respond. Zuko could hear her walking around the desk. She came to a stop at the front of the desk, and Zuko held his breath. She said, “Zuko, I know how much you love to read scripts. Why don’t we take a few back to my room? We can spend the whole day together.” He could feel his heart racing.

Why am I scared?

Zuko could see that his mother was about to bend down to look under the desk when a different voice interrupted her, “Mother, what are you doing?”

Azula!

Please say you’re here to save me and not to watch me suffer.

Both are equally likely.

His mother turned to face where Azula must be standing as she said, “I’m looking for Zuko. He wasn’t in his room this morning.”

Even though Zuko couldn’t see Azula, he could picture her crossing her arms over her chest as she tried to appear haughty while she said, “Maybe he’s hiding in one of the unused rooms. He goes there when he wants to be left alone.”

Ursa had apparently stopped listening as soon as she got an idea of where to look because she responded, “I checked most of those rooms, but I think there are a few I may have missed. Please keep an eye out for him and let him know I’m looking for him.” Zuko listened to her retreating steps as his heart rate began to slow.

After a few seconds, Azula snarked while mimicking their mother’s voice, “‘Good morning Azula, how are you?’ I’m great, thanks for asking.” She huffed then Zuko heard her rounding the desk before crouching down to glare at him. Zuko stared at her with wide eyes. Azula huffed then said, “She’s gone. Are you going to hide every day? If you do, Father will lose what little patience he has and I won’t be able to do anything.”

Cautiously, Zuko exited his hiding spot while he muttered, “I don’t know what to do. Mother keeps following me everywhere or forces me to be by her side almost all day. The only time I can get away is when I’m asleep, with my tutor, or training.”

Azula pursed her lips then said, “Father is getting impatient with her behavior. If she keeps this up, he might send her away.” Zuko could tell that Azula wasn’t too upset by the idea. A part of him didn’t blame her. An even smaller part was almost relieved at the thought, and he felt immediately guilty for it.

With a groan, Zuko complained, “What am I supposed to do? She’s our mother, it’s not like I can force her to do anything!” They sat in a contemplative silence as they tried to come up with a solution.

Azula gave him a side-eye as she said, “Mother only started acting strange after your nightmare. What was it even about?”

What do I do?

Azula always knows when I lie!

Panicked, Zuko blurted out, “I dreamed of falling into a volcano.” Azula raised a bemused eyebrow at him and was clearly waiting for him to continue. He sighed then said, “I fell onto the hot rocks, and I could feel my body being cooked alive.”

Azula frowned as she said, “That doesn’t explain why you insisted that we all stay together.”

Zuko tried to come up with an explanation that had just enough truth to be believable as he said, “I fell in to save you. You almost fell to your death, but I saved you and died instead. I was scared that if you went to the volcanic valley, you would die. You aren’t allowed to die.”

That’s mostly true.

It just wouldn’t have been an ‘if’ scenario.

Azula stared at him for a long moment before scowling and declaring, “You’re such a dum-dum.” Zuko started to splutter, but she continued, “If you ever try to die to protect me, I’ll burn all of your stupid scrolls and get mochi banned from the palace.”

I guess it’s a good thing she doesn’t know how many times I’ve died to bring her back.

Her glare intensified as she said, “If I’m not allowed to die, then neither are you. I refuse to deal with Mother by myself.” Zuko stared at her for a moment then a smile stretched across his face.

I think this is as close as she will ever get to saying that she cares about me.

Zuko’s smile became a little cheeky as he said, “Love you too, Lala.”

Azula immediately bristled and snapped, “I never said that! Don’t put words in my mouth Zuzu.” They quickly devolved into bickering, but there wasn’t much heat to their words. Zuko’s smile didn’t waver, and Azula was doing her best to hide her smile as a smirk. They would’ve stayed there all day but the sound of heavy footfalls approaching them broke the moment.

Quickly, Zuko hissed as he retreated back under the desk, “You never saw me! I don’t even exist!” He just barely caught a glimpse of her smirk before he was completely hidden.

The footsteps came to a stop not too far from his location and a familiar voice said, “Your Highness, have you seen your brother recently? Princess Ursa is looking for him. She seems to think that he might be missing.”

Sato!

I don’t know if it’s a good or a bad thing that Mother turned to him for help.

Zuko could practically see the wide-eyed look on Azula’s face as she said with a faux innocent voice, “Brother? You must be mistaken Captain Sato; I am an only child.” Zuko wanted to bang his head against the desk.

Why is she like this?

Can’t she do something nice for me without causing chaos?

There was a beat of silence before Sato gave a dry reply, “Is that so.”

Azula mustered all the authority of her rank as she asked, “Are you calling a member of the Royal Family a liar, Captain Sato?”

To his credit, Sato humored her as he said, “Not at all, Your Highness. However, I heard that there was a reward for any information that will lead to his capture.”

Am I a criminal or something?!

What sort of treachery is going on here?

There was a long pause of silence. Unable to see anything, Zuko could only hope that Azula wouldn’t sell him out.

I don’t like this silence.

Zuko could hear rustling cloth then Azula hummed and said, “I can’t believe you’re trying to bribe me! Have you no honor?”

It was clear that Sato found this whole thing amusing as he said, “Of course not, Your Highness. This isn’t a bride so much as a…reward in advance. I’m sure we can negotiate a final price that will please you.”

This is treason!

How dare they conspire against me!

The fact that Azula wasn’t immediately rejecting the offer didn’t give Zuko any confidence that she wasn’t about to sell him out. Now filled with indignant rage, Zuko clamored out of his hiding place while accusing, “What sort of betrayal is this?! Why are you two conspiring against me?!” He looked between the two of them and noticed something in Azula’s hands. He went to snatch it, but she quickly held it out of reach while sending small flames at him. Even though he couldn’t grab it, he did get a good look at what she was holding.

Tub Tim Grob!

She was about to betray me for a dessert!

Before he could hurl accusations, Sato stepped in and asked, “Why are you hiding from your mother?”

Zuko, still trying to snatch the dessert from Azula, stopped mid-attempted theft and stared sulkily at the floor. Azula, for her part, seemed content to eat her dessert as she sat on a table and watched them. Sato sat in a nearby chair and waited patiently. It didn’t take long for Zuko to grumble, “Mother is acting weird.”

Sato raised an eyebrow and asked, “What kind of weird?” At Zuko’s confused look, Sato clarified, “Is it a confusing weird? Or is it a scary weird?” Zuko pursed his lips as he thought.

I don’t know if it’s exactly a ‘scary weird’.

Maybe it’s a bit confusing.

Maybe a bit of both.

Not entirely sure how to answer, Zuko finally replied, “A little of both, I guess. I don’t really understand why she’s being so weird, and it is a little scary.”

Azula interjected, “I think she’s being overprotective. Zuzu likes to get himself into trouble all the time.”

Zuko rounded on her while he exclaimed, “I do not get in trouble all the time!”

Only sometimes.

Usually, it’s trouble that finds me.

 I just want to read quietly, but the universe has other plans.

Before they could resume their squabbling, Sato spoke up firmly, “Children.” Two sets of eyes turned to him in equal amounts of indignation. He gave them a bemused look in return. Azula huffed and returned to eating her bribe. Zuko scowled at the both of them. With a long-suffering sigh, Sato turned his attention back to Zuko then asked, “What about your mother’s behavior scares you?”

Zuko didn’t really know how to answer that, but he tried to put what he felt into words, “I don’t know. She keeps hovering like something bad will happen any second. I mean, she always hovers a little bit after I have a nightmare, but never this long.”

Sato gave him a grave look as he asked, “Do you think something bad is about to happen to you?” Zuko shook his head.

Azula piped in again, “Father hasn’t said anything about hurting you. Just his usual rants about wanting to send you away.”

To any other person, I think hearing that one of their parents wants to get rid of them would be heartbreaking.

I find it a little comforting that he hasn’t escalated his dislike of me to actively trying to kill me.

Sato, however, didn’t seem to find her words as comforting as Zuko did. He looked like he wanted to address that bit of information but ultimately decided against it. Instead, he said to Zuko, “I know your mother’s behavior is unsettling you. However, you can’t avoid her forever. You need to talk to her about how you feel. If you think she might hurt you, I can supervise from a distance.”

Zuko shook his head as he said, “I don’t think Mother is actually going to hurt me. I can talk to her by myself.” He paused for a moment then added, “I want to understand why she’s acting this way.” Sato studied him for a long moment before agreeing to Zuko’s plan. Azula made some noncommittal statements before finally agreeing to let Zuko handle this on his own. Now all he had to do was find his mother.

Unsurprisingly, it didn’t take long. He barely rounded the corner outside the library when he nearly ran into her. She immediately smiled as soon as she saw him, but Zuko could see it straining at the edges. Almost like she was forcing herself. He could just barely make out dark circles under her eyes beneath her makeup. Ursa exclaimed, “Zuko! There you are, I’ve been looking all over for you. I was thinking that we could spend the rest of the day in my study. We could read and act out some of your favorite scripts. I bet we could even have lunch and dinner brought to us. Doesn’t that sound like fun? Just the two of us spending time together?”

Zuko stared at her. That feeling of unease had clawed its way up his spine as she spoke. He blurted out, “What about Azula?”

Ursa’s smile faltered, but she recovered as she said, “I’m sure she’s busy with Ozai, and has other things she would rather be doing.”

That sounds like a roundabout way of saying you don’t want her around.

All of the frustration he had been bottling up started to bubble violently, but he tried to keep it in check. Seething, he asked, “Why do you hate her?”

His mother looked a bit taken aback by his anger; but, once again, plastered that same strained smile as she said, “Zuko, I don’t hate her. It’s just that you both have different needs, and Ozai is better suited to meet hers.”

It was almost like looking at a stranger wearing his mother’s face. She spoke with her usual comforting tone, but her words were anything but that. Her smile was too sharp. It was almost the same feeling he had when he overheard Ozai saying he didn’t care about him. He wanted to run. He wanted Sato. Instead, he held his ground and asked, “Why are you acting so weird?”

Ursa tilted her head in confusion and chuckled as she asked, “What are you talking about? Are you feeling okay?” Despite her words, it was obvious she knew what he was talking about. Her whole body tensed, and her comforting demeanor was quickly fading into desperation. She took a step towards him, and Zuko immediately took a step back.

What is she hiding from me?

That frustration bubbled closer to the surface, and it was getting harder to contain it. He snapped, “I’m talking about how you constantly follow me everywhere! I can’t even spend time alone in my own room!”

Her smile finally fell as she asked, “You don’t want to spend time with me?”

Zuko growled as he said, “That’s not what I said! I do like spending time with you, but I also like spending time alone. Ever since we came back from Ember Island, you’ve been acting strange.”

Ursa was clearly struggling to maintain her comforting façade as he spoke, and it was morphing into a look of hurt as she said, “Zuko, I love you. All I ever want is what’s best for you. I don’t really understand what it is you want me to do or what you think is going on. Why don’t we go to my study and we can talk it out.” She tried to give him a warm smile, but it came across strained and flat. For Zuko, it was like watching a mask being lifted for the first time.

She’s not listening to me.

Has she ever listened to me?

His frustration finally bubbled over as he shouted, “Why aren’t you listening to me?!” He panted and stared at her shocked expression. Zuko swallowed then continued, “You’re scaring me! You’re acting like someone, or something, is going to hurt me. If you don’t stop, Father is going to send you away!”

The smile she had conjured fell once more, only now it revealed remorse. Almost desperately, she said, “Zuko, I need you to understand that everything I do is to protect you. You just need to trust me.”

Something clicked in Zuko’s mind, and he asked, “Why do you only act like this after I have a nightmare?”

 Ursa stayed silent.

 He demanded, “Why do you always act all guilty when I tell you about a nightmare?”

She still said nothing.

His heart started pounding wildly in his chest as he asked, “Why aren’t you saying anything? What did you do to me?!” He stood there on the verge of hyperventilating staring at her.

Ursa looked like she was on the verge of tears with guilt written across her face. Instead of answering any of Zuko’s questions, she turned around and said shakily, “I’m sorry for hovering. Why don’t we spend the day doing our own thing. I’m sure we could both use some alone time.” She walked away without looking back.

Zuko stared at her retreating form and wanted to shout at her. He wanted to continue to demand answers, but his feet stayed firmly planted. His world felt like it was shattering around him. Pieces were falling into place, and they painted a horrible picture.

She knows.

She knows about my deaths.

She did this to me.

I don’t understand.

(Present Day)

Zuko slowly came to feeling comfortably warm. It took him a moment to realize that that was odd, and he opened his eyes then looked around. The first thing he saw was the icy walls of the water runoff tunnel he camped out in. Just outside, he could see the faintest hint of sunlight peaking over the city walls. The next thing he noticed was a girl around his age sitting across from him.

He froze as he stared at her in shock. Most of his shock was from not expecting anyone to be there, but a good portion of it came from her appearance. Her hair was unnaturally white, and there was something off about her. He couldn’t quite place what it was, but he felt some sort of connection to her. Almost like kinship. Zuko quickly recovered then dejectedly asked, “Is there any chance that I could convince you to go back to your house and pretend you never saw me?”

The girl just stared at him for a moment longer before saying, “There’s something…strange about you. Were you also blessed by the spirits?”

“Huh?”

A little lost for words herself, she explained, “I suddenly woke up and felt an unusual need to come here. As soon as I saw you, I felt that there was something…different about you. I can’t explain it, but I just knew that the spirits had blessed you too.” As Zuko went to sit up, he noticed that he was covered with a long, ornate purple parka. He looked between the article of clothing and the girl in confusion. She smiled shyly and said, “You were shivering, and I didn’t want you to freeze to death. Something told me that I had to be careful not to wake you up. Is this how the Fire Nation treats those blessed by the spirits?”

Zuko, feeling a little overwhelmed, started to laugh. His laughter became bitter as he said, “Blessed? You call this blessed? I call it a curse!” She stared at him in wide-eyed shock as he continued to rant, “I don’t know about you, but I can’t die. It doesn’t matter how it’s done; I always come back!” A bit softer he repeated, “I always come back…”

The girl’s shock faded to concern as she studied him. She gently said, “My name is Yue, I’m the princess of the Northern Water Tribe. Who are you?”

Zuko huffed a humorless laugh then said, “My name is Zuko, I’m the banished prince of the Fire Nation. Is being cursed by the spirits a royalty thing? Does the Earth Kingdom have their own blessed/cursed royal family member? As for your previous question, I don’t know. I’ve never told anyone in the Fire Nation about my curse. The only person I told is on a warship outside your city’s walls. You are officially the second person I have ever told about my curse.”

They sat there in silence for a while until Yue reluctantly said, “When I was born, I didn’t make a sound. My parents had every healer in our nation look at me, but they all said that I was going to die. With no other options, they took me to the Spirit Oasis and placed me in the water. The moon spirit touched me, my hair turned white, and I finally began to cry. The moon saved my life.” She paused for a moment then asked, “What about you?”

He scowled at the ground then gritted out, “I don’t know.” At Yue’s surprised look, he sighed and elaborated, “I’ve been like this for at least ten years, but I don’t have any memory of encountering a spirit. The only thing I do know is that my mother had something to do with it.”

“What did she tell you?”

Zuko snorted then said, “Absolutely nothing. As soon as I realized that she knew something about my curse, I asked her about it. Instead of being honest, she said nothing.” He paused briefly then continued, “I tried to work up the courage to ask her about it again, but she disappeared a couple months later. The only thing I do know is that Aang can help me.”

“How? Are you going to get him to find the spirit your mother met?”

He gave her a confused smile then said, “No, that sounds way too time consuming and not likely to work. Instead, I’m going to get him to kill me.” Yue looked horrified and was about to protest when Zuko spoke over her, “Listen, I don’t know how your…blessing affects you, but my curse is a constant nightmare. Do you have any idea what it’s like to be ripped apart by cannibals? Or to be burned alive in a lava field? Or to watch people you care about die? Or to choke on your own blood? Imagine dying multiple times a day and absolutely nobody remembers.” He huffed a humorless laugh as he continued, “Just yesterday, I died four times. I don’t doubt that I’ll die a similar amount today.” Zuko looked her directly in the eyes as he finished, “My greatest fear is to find myself in a never-ending death loop due to natural or unnatural causes. I want to die on my own terms.”

Yue just watched him with sadness in her eyes. She gradually inched closer to him and placed a hand on his knee as she said, “That sounds horrible. I can’t even begin to imagine what you’ve been through.” She hesitated then added, “I know it’s not the same, but a part of me wishes that no one outside of my family knew that I was blessed by the moon. People expect that I have some sort of connection to the Spirit World and can give them advice. I hate to let people down, but I don’t know what the purpose of my blessing is.” A small smile tugged at Zuko’s lips, and a feeling of peace washed over him.

Is this what it’s like to relate to someone?

I did want a best friend that I could relate to.

Zuko made a thoughtful noise then said, “I know what my purpose is, but it took me a long time to figure it out. I am Tragedy, and my job is to help give the heroes a good ending. Even if that means I have to play the part of a minor villain.” In the distance, Zuko could see the sun rising above the city and hear what sounded like Fire Nation troops breaking through the walls. The sounds of battle and the cries of anguish filled the air.

I guess our time is up.

With a sad smile he pulled out his vial. Yue gave it a confused look, and Zuko said, “It’s poison. We spent too long talking, and now I need to reset the stage. You won’t remember our conversation, no one ever remembers anything. Just relax and know that whoever is dying out there, won’t stay dead.” Yue watched as he swallowed the entire vial and sat next to him as he relaxed against the ice wall.

Numbness quickly traveled up his limbs.

It was getting harder to breathe.

Yue held his hand.

Spots danced across his vision.

He could hear the distant sounds of Fire Nation soldiers approaching their tunnel.

Yue whispered, “Good luck.”

Darkness.

Zuko was standing on a patch of dried-up grass on a small island. His feet carried him to the center where the remains of a large dead tree still stood. Beneath it, there was a small pool filled with black water. Yue’s body floated to the surface, and the water started to turn red. Her cloudy, unblinking eyes stared lifelessly at him. She was wearing all white, and the body of a white koi fish floated limply next to her. Still looking lifeless, Yue whispered something he couldn’t hear. Corpses clawed their way up from underground. They frantically grabbed at his ankles and desperately grasped at whatever part of him they could reach. Cries for mercy and help echoed deafeningly. They dragged him under. Everything went dark and silent.

Yue’s voice rang out more clearly, but it was just a whisper, “You can’t save everyone.”

Zuko woke up with a start. The bizarre mixture of his nightmare and his revival left him feeling off-balance. However, what really caught his attention was a hand stroking his head. Blearily, he turned his attention to the person sitting next to him. Yue smiled softly down at him and simply said, “I remember.”

“Oh.” Zuko didn’t really know what to do with that information. He just stared dumbfoundedly at her for a long moment before forcing himself to get up. Awkwardly, he handed her parka back to her.

Yue smiled as she accepted it back then frowned as she asked, “What do you plan on doing?”

He made a thoughtful noise as he inspected the sky then said, “Well first, I have to find Aang. Depending on where he is and what he’s doing, I may have to play the part of the relentless minor villain.” A smirk tugged at the corner of his mouth as he said, “Who knows, depending on how things play out, I may even get to play the part of a hero.”

Yue studied him then said, “Aang will be at the Spirit Oasis. He’s trying to enter the Spirit World. You can get there by going down this tunnel then turn left. On the side of the building directly in front of the tunnel exit is a small wooden door leading to the Oasis. There’s another runoff tunnel entrance about thirty feet to the left, around the corner. It should lead you directly above the Oasis.”

He blinked at her in surprise then said, “Thank you Yue.” As he started to leave, he hesitated then added, “I hope no one you care about gets hurt.”

She smiled sadly and said, “I hope the same for you too.”

Following Yue’s directions, Zuko walked down the tunnel. Much to his relief, it was mostly dry and there weren’t any signs of wildlife.

If I have to do anymore swimming, I might scream.

Or boil all the water until it evaporates.

It’ll depend on what level of insanity I’m at.

Luckily for him, he made it to the exit without any issues. Zuko glanced around at the surroundings and noticed that the early morning sun had yet to illuminate the city. The walls and tall buildings kept the city in a slightly prolonged period of darkness. Not wanting to waste the perfect cover, Zuko snuck out of the tunnel and made his way to the other runoff entrance. He listened carefully for any signs of patrols or civilians. The city seemed bizarrely empty.

I guess that makes sense.

Civilians are probably taking shelter somewhere in the center of the city.

The guards are probably more concerned with patrolling the perimeter.

Still, Zuko nearly sighed in relief when he entered the next tunnel without being spotted. As he made his way through it, he could hear voices in the distance. Suddenly, he heard Aang shout, “How about some quiet?! Come on guys, I can hear every word your saying!”

Someone’s a little cranky.

Zuko peered out of the tunnel and looked down at the scene in front of him. Aang was sitting cross-legged in front of a small pond; and Katara and Yue were standing almost directly behind him. A few beats of silence passed then Aang’s tattoos started to glow. Yue made a few concerned comments, but Katara said, “He’s my friend, I’m perfectly capable of protecting him.”

This feels like a trap.

There’s water everywhere, and Katara is standing right there.

If there’s one thing I have learned, it’s don’t fight Katara.

It’s bad for my health.

Zuko stayed in his hiding spot and watched. Yue kept not-so-subtly looking in the direction of the tunnel he was hiding in, clearly getting impatient. Before he could force himself to confront Katara, the sound of splintering wood startled all of them. He almost started banging his head against the nearest hard surface when Zhao strolled in with a group of soldiers.

If Zhao was surprised to see them, he didn’t show it. Instead, he smirked and said, “Well what do we have here? This day keeps getting better and better.” Katara snarled something at him, but Zhao ignored her. In a split second, fighting broke out. For all of Katara’s skill, it couldn’t do anything against the sheer numbers Zhao had.

I should really reset the stage, but I need to know what Zhao’s after.

There’s no way he accidentally stumbled across this place and decided to break down a random, small door.

Just as quickly as the fighting started, it was over. Katara and Yue were restrained, and they could only watch as Zhao circled Aang.

Creep.

Zhao was clearly having some sort of internal debate on what his next move should be. He kept glancing at the pond then at Aang. Katara alternated between trying to question Zhao on what he was doing and begging him to leave Aang alone. Yue stayed mostly silent as she looked sadly in Zuko’s general direction. She almost looked disappointed.

Okay, fine!

I’ll reveal myself and get my answers the painful way!

I bet he was about to start monologuing any second now.

After grumbling a few choice words, Zuko snuck out of his hiding spot and made his way across the Oasis. Yue spotted him and gave him a confused look as he smirked then climbed the tree directly behind Zhao.

If I’m going to antagonize Zhao for answers, I might as well have fun.

At least up here he can’t strangle me again.

Zuko casually dangled his legs from the tree branches and called out, “Admiral Zhao, I would say it’s a surprise to see you here, but you do have the unfortunate talent of being an absolute pain.”

Zhao spun wildly to face him. Shocked, he shouted, “Your alive?!”

Zuko’s smirk grew as he said, “I think ‘alive’ is rather subjective. What do you plan on doing now Zhao? You clearly failed to destroy me.” Instead of answering, Zhao sent a wave of flames where Zuko was sitting. Nimbly, Zuko jumped onto another branch while shouting, “That’s not very nice! You can’t even catch a pre-teen, what makes you think you can get me?” Zuko cackled as Zhao continued to send volleys of flames at him.

Jee will never and can never know about this.

Zhao snarled, “You’re a traitor and a disgrace! I know you’re The Weeping Spirit! You freed the Avatar when I had him in custody!”

Zuko paused just long enough to give Zhao a perplexed look and said, “Of course I’m a traitor. Is that really shocking news to you? I mean, I’ve been chasing the Avatar for months without ever landing a single injury on him or his friends.”

I’ve only indirectly killed Katara once.

But that was not my fault!

She antagonized my Komodo-rhino, and it gored her.

Everything seemed to stop as everyone present processed what he just said. Zuko happily returned to sitting on a branch and lazily swung his legs. He watched amusedly as Katara’s face shifted through a variety of expressions before landing on annoyance. Yue just looked deeply unimpressed and sad. Zhao looked downright murderous. He stood up straight and declared, “By order of Fire Lord Ozai…”

Zuko interrupted with a mocking voice, “all traitors of the Fire Nation must be put to death.” He nearly snorted at Zhao’s outraged expression and said, “You really think I don’t know what I’m getting myself into?”

With a massive blast of fire, Zhao set what remained of the tree on fire. With a yelp, Zuko tucked and rolled onto the grass below. Before he could fully recover, Zhao descended onto him with hands full of flames.

Time to channel my inner Aang and be a pest.

I know it hasn’t turned out well for me in the past, but I’m hoping it will at least prompt him to give up some info.

With an obnoxious grin, Zuko folded his arms behind his back and casually evaded Zhao’s attacks and, with a faux disinterested voice, Zuko asked, “Is killing me really that important to you? Don’t you have anything more pressing to take care of?” Zhao sent a fugitive glance at the pond then looked back at Zuko.

Yue said that’s where the moon spirit blessed her.

I wonder what’s in it.

I guess there’s only one way to find out.

Zuko fainted an attack to the right then immediately dove to the left. Zhao, caught off guard, cursed and tried to grab him. Before the man could, Zuko dived headfirst into the pond. In the distance, he heard Yue shouting after him.

The inky black water seemed to stretch on infinitely in every direction.

The surface of the pond seemed to get smaller and smaller.

It took a moment for Zuko to realize that he didn’t feel the need to breathe.

He saw something large pass him.

Then another large thing.

They were circling him.

Zuko wasn’t afraid.

They started to glow.

One was white with black markings, and the other was black with white markings.

The white one stopped swimming and stared at him.

Zuko watched in a trance as the massive fish started to approach him.

A massive wall of flames rained down on them.

The white fish flailed wildly for a moment before going still.

The black fish started to swim erratically.

It rapidly swam at Zuko.

Before he could react, the fish opened its mouth and swallowed him whole.

Briefly, he felt mist surround him.

Darkness.

Zuko was standing in the Oasis. The ground was scorched black, and the tree was just a burnt-out husk. His feet took him to the edge of the pond; each step made a cloud of ash fly up into the air. As he approached, he realized that all the water was gone. At the bottom, scattered haphazardly, were fish bones. The once silent air suddenly became filled with the sounds of screaming. Zuko barely had a chance to turn around when hands broke through the ground and the bodies they were attached to started to climb up him. Cries for help and wails of agony echoed around him. No matter how hard he struggled, he couldn’t get free. Then everything went black and silent.

Yue’s voice whispered, “You can’t save everyone.”

Zuko woke up gasping and soaked in sweat. A cool hand was resting against his forehead. The strange mix of his nightmare and the confusion surrounding his death left him feeling adrift. Yue’s soft voice broke through the fog in his mind, “Why did you do that?”

He was briefly taken aback by how sad she looked, but he eventually responded, “I needed to know what Zhao was planning. There’s no way he got to the Oasis on accident.”

“What killed you?”

Zuko opened and closed his mouth as he tried to find the words to describe what happened to him. Eventually, he settled with saying, “A giant black koi fish ate me.” Now feeling somewhat indignant, he groused, “Why not a giant spirit monster? I’ve already been eaten by every other water monster, let’s just add some variety.”

Yue looked more than a little confused as she told her side of the story, “You dove into the pool of the Spirit Oasis and disappeared. The water is barely a foot deep, but you vanished. Zhao started to attack the pond and killed the moon spirit.” Her face became pinched in concentration as she continued, “After that…everything gets a little hazy. Almost like a dream. I remember the sky going dark then an elderly Firebender attacking Zhao. Then…nothing.” She looked him in the eye then asked, “What are you going to do now?”

Shakily, Zuko forced himself to sit up against the ice wall and said, “The same thing I’ve been doing for the last couple of months. I’ll enter the stage as a villain and try to take Aang out of the Oasis before Zhao gets there. The only major flaw to that plan is Katara.”

“You plan on leaving me and Katara alone with Zhao?”

Zuko shook his head as he said, “No, you are going to run off as soon as I appear to get help. If I successfully take Aang early enough, Katara will leave the Oasis to chase me down.” He briefly shuddered at the thought.

More than a little worried, Yue asked, “But what about the moon spirit?”

Zuko shrugged and said, “That’s more of an Aang problem to solve. I’m sure once Katara saves him from me, he’ll stop Zhao at the last second. It’ll be a happy ending for Act One.” Feeling recovered enough, he stood up and made his way down the tunnel.

Just like before, he followed Yue’s instructions on how to get to the Oasis. Now he found himself, once again, looking down at Katara and Yue standing guard behind Aang. Just like last time, Katara said, “He’s my friend, I’m perfectly capable of protecting him.”

I guess it’s time for my dramatic entrance.

I’m hoping that if I get as close as possible to Aang, she won’t stab me.

Zuko called out, “Well, aren’t you a big girl now?”

Shocked, Katara whispered, “No…”

Smirking, Zuko circled around the Oasis until Aang was directly in between him and Katara. Yue called out, “I’m going to get help!” then quickly retreated. Katara, on the other hand, took up a fighting stance. Her posture clearly showed more confidence, and Zuko knew right away that she was much stronger now than the last time he faced her.

This is going to hurt, isn’t it?

Zuko dashed towards Aang and nearly grabbed his collar when Katara lifted a tentacle of water from behind him that she quickly used to wrap around his ankle. Immediately, he kicked flames at it and broke free. Once again, he rushed to Aang and continued to dodge Katara’s attacks.

Maybe if I don’t attack her directly, she won’t bring out the icicles.

This back-and-forth dance continued with him trying to grab Aang and Katara pushing him back. They were both getting frustrated with their lack of progress, and Zuko was getting nervous as the minutes ticked by.

I need to hurry up.

Zhao will be here any minute now.

With a growl, Zuko dived at Aang. In the distance, he heard the door leading to the Oasis open and the familiar voice of Yue speaking nervously to someone. Then something stopped him midair.

It felt like the wind was knocked out of his lungs.

Katara was looking at him in grim acceptance.

Zuko blinked sluggishly then looked down.

Oh.

I’m not even mad, just disappointed.

A large chunk of ice was jutting from the ground right next to Aang.

It was embedded in his chest.

He couldn’t breathe.

He saw Yue come into view.

She looked horrified.

Buzzing filled his ears.

She was saying something, but he couldn’t hear her.

Almost detachedly, he looked down again and watched his blood stain his white clothes red.

Beads of it were rolling down the ice to the ground below.

A cool hand touched his face.

His blinks were getting longer.

Shadows were dancing in the corners of his vision.

The hand tilted his head up.

Yue.

She was crying.

Zuko gave her a weak, lopsided smile.

He was so cold.

Yue closed his eyelids.

Darkness.

Zuko was in the Oasis. He looked up and saw a giant hole where the moon was supposed to be. The longer he stared at it, the bigger the hole seemed to get. It swallowed the surrounding stars, and a deep feeling of dread clenched his heart. He forced himself to look away. Zuko started to walk through the ash covered ground to approach the pond. However, the ash was deeper than he realized, and he started to sink with every step he took. Hands erupted from the ash and clawed at him. He could hear their muffled cries for help as they tried to pull themselves up. They dragged him deeper and deeper under the ash. No amount of struggling seemed to work. He went under. Everything went dark and silent.

Yue’s voice called out, “You can’t save everyone.”

Zuko woke up gasping and whining. His limbs shook, and his entire body was soaked in sweat. The center of his chest felt frozen and pulsed in agony. Each breath felt like a struggle. A cool hand was resting against his forehead, and a soft voice spoke gently to him. Gradually, the shaking faded to a mild tremor, and the agony faded to a dull ache.

Zuko cleared his throat then rasped out, “This is part of the reason why I didn’t do anything last time.” He cleared his throat again then said more clearly, “Katara has a nasty habit of stabbing me whenever we fight. Usually, it’s on accident, but I have a feeling it was more on purpose this time.”

Yue looked down at him guiltily and said softly, “I’m sorry I didn’t get back in time to stop her. After you died, I remember telling them that you were there to save Aang. They didn’t believe me, but then Zhao came. Everything is a little hazy after that.”

Zuko huffed a humorless laugh and said, “I’d be shocked if they did believe you.”

He tried to sit up, but his arms weren’t cooperating. Grumbling, he continued to try to somewhat sit up. Yue watched him struggle for a bit before hesitantly asking, “You said that you were trying to create a good ending, what does that mean?”

Zuko stopped moving momentarily to give her a confused look. After a little more awkward flailing, he managed to prop himself up against the wall then said, “It means nobody dies, of course. At least, none of the important characters. Zhao can die; that’s the natural conclusion of his character arc.”

Yue looked deeply concerned as she asked, “But what if you can’t save everybody?”

Zuko was now attempting to stand up but fell over when he heard Yue’s question. Her voice in his nightmare echoed in his mind. A bit more harshly than he intended, he snapped, “Yes I can. I can save them all.” Yue blinked at him in surprise but didn’t say anything as she watched Zuko claw his way up the wall to stand up. He swayed dangerously, but he managed to stay standing. Without another word, he made his way down the tunnel.

Before long, he found himself looking down at Aang, Katara, and Yue. Yue seemed to be standing more off to the side than she had been in the previous iterations. She also was pointedly not looking in his direction. A sliver of guilt wormed its way into his chest, and he tried to shake it off.

I guess it would suck to see someone like you dying repeatedly.

At least when I see someone die, I’m the one bringing them back.

Maybe I should apologize for snapping at her.

Like before, Katara declared that she could protect Aang, and Zuko made his dramatic entrance. This time, instead of going for Aang, he attacked Katara.

This has to work now.

I can’t think of any other options.

Yue had run off the moment he started punching flames at Katara. He growled out, “Hand him over and I won’t have to hurt you.” Instead of responding, Katara got into a fighting stance and sent a stream of water at him. It hit him in the chest and sent him flying. For a brief moment, he took stock of himself and nearly celebrated when he realized that he wasn’t impaled.

I guess this is the right choice.

Villains on stage always seem to have the most fun.

This is my chance to truly play the part.

Not wanting to give up the chance to be an over-the-top villain, he said, “I see you’ve learned a new trick, but I didn’t come this far to lose to you.” Quickly, he punched flames at her which she dissipated with an orb of water. With a roar, she sent a massive wave of water at him that sent him stumbling into the stream surrounding the Oasis. Ice raced towards him leaving a trail of spikes that protruded dangerously from the water’s surface. Zuko couldn’t help the concerned noises that escaped him as the ice encased his feet.

Please don’t stab me.